Home

Up and Running DB2 on Linux

1. ee et 01 17 40 1898200 100 0000 Rank Percentage Application_Handle Stat l 1 35 4578 44930 l 2 64 5422 44947 l 3 0 0000 65595 l 4 0 0000 44934 5 0 0000 83 Performance report breakdown by 0 5 hour 388 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm fromTime sum Cpu Total Percentage Top Five in 0 5 hour interval nen eee ee MMMM t 01 17 40 1898200 100 0000 Rank Percentage Application_Handle Stat 1 35 4578 44930 2 64 5422 44947 3 0 0000 65595 4 0 0000 44934 5 0 0000 83 Exiting 7 4 Log files for troubleshooting This section discusses DB2 and operating system log files which may provide more detailed information to help you find a problem or further determine the root cause of a problem Afterwards you can take corrective actions based on the collected information 7 4 1 DB2 administration notification log The DB2 administration notification log contains user friendly and national language enabled messages that can help database administrators to obtain more information associated to specific issues for example information which is supplemental to an SQLCODE information from health monitor for health indicators information from task executions and specific information from the appl
2. disconnect from the database if cliRC SQLDisconnect hdbc SQL SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLConnect n cliRC exit cliRC 3 Free database handle if cliRC SQLFreeHandle SQL_HANDLE DBC hdbc SQL SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLFreeHandle n cliRC exit cliRC Free environment handle if cliRC SQLFreeHandle SQL_HANDLE_ENV henv SQL SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLFreeHandle n cliRC exit cliRC 434 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Example 8 10 shows the commands to build and run the program Example 8 10 Running the CLI program db2inst1l puget db2inst1l puget db2inst1l puget db2inst1l puget 000290 000310 200310 200330 200340 export LD_LIBRARY_PATH home db2inst1 sqllib lib cc c I home db2inst1 sqllib include cli_test c cc o cli_test L home db2inst1 sqllib lib 1db2 cli_test o cli_test VVV V Note You can find a detailed introduction of the CLI functions in the Information Center in Database application development gt Database Applications gt CLI The detailed reference can be found in Reference gt APIs CLI The available manuals are Call Level Interface Guide and Reference Volume 1 SC23 5844 00 and Call Level Interface Guide and Reference Volume 2 SC23 5845 00 Embedded SQL Embedded SQL allows you
3. db2c_db2instl represents the connection service name 50001 represents the connection port number tcp represents the TCP IP communication protocol The service name is arbitrary but must be unique in the services file Ina partitioned environment make sure that the port number does not conflict with the port numbers used by the Fast Communications Manager FCM or any other applications on the system Update the database manager configuration file on the server To do so a Log in as instance owner b Update the SVCENAME parameter in the DBM configuration file You may specify either the service name or port number For example we enter db2 update dbm cfg using SVCENAME db2c_db2inst1 You can check your SVCENAME by entering db2 get dbm cfg grep SVC Set the DB2COMM registry variable to tcp ip This will start the DB2 communications manager when the database manager is started Enter the following command as instance owner 76 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm db2set DB2COMM tcpip 4 Stop and re start the instance for these changes to take effect db2stop db2start 5 Use netstat utility to verify if TCP IP communication port is listening for example in our sample we enter netstat an grep 50001 2 3 3 Installing a partitioned database environment There are several ways in which you can install DB2 on a multi partition environment
4. gt x86 Intel Pentium Intel Xeon and AMD 32 bit Intel and AMD processors gt x64 64 bit AMD64 and Intel EM64T processors gt POWER IBM eServer OpenPower System i or pSeries systems that support Linux gt eServer System z or System z9 The supported operating systems for Linux include Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 4 Update 4 Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 5 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 9 Service Pack 3 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 10 Service Pack 1 Ubuntu 7 10 YYYY Y For the latest information on supported Linux distributions check in http www 306 ibm com software data db2 1inux validate To create and run Java applications and java based tools IBM JDK is required For convenience the IBM SDK 5 SR5 is shipped on DB2 9 5 CDs and in most cases is automatically installed with DB2 installation Refer to the validation Web site for the most up to date list of supported products as it is updated frequently Note Non IBM versions of the SDK for Java are supported only for building and running stand alone Java applications For building and running Java stored procedures and user defined functions only the IBM SDK for Java that is included with the DB2 Database for Linux UNIX and Windows product is supported 1 2 3 DB2 products and packages DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows offers industry leading performance scale and reliability through DB2 packages f
5. 2 2 6 User and group setup In this section we discuss the user IDs and groups that DB2 requires and the process of creating them Required users and groups Three users and groups are required for DB2 the instance owning user the DB2 fenced user and the Database Administration Server DAS user You may use the default names provided by DB2 Setup or specify your own user and group names In our setup we used the DB2 Setup wizard default user ID and group names which are shown in Table 2 10 4 For non root installation since DAS is not available DAS user is not required Chapter 2 Installation 49 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Table 2 10 Example of required users for DB2 Pegue user Username Group name Bescipion db2inst1 db2iadm1 Administers the instance Fenced user db2fenc1 db2fadm1 Responsible for executing fenced user defined functions such as UDFs and stored procedures DAS user dasusr1 dasadm1 Administers the DB2 Administration Server Creating users Root authority is required to create users and groups For root installation there are three ways in which you can create DB2 users and groups gt Using the DB2 Setup wizard gt Using a response file installation gt Creating users and groups in OS command line or in OS administration tool For non root installation uses and groups should exist before installation DB2 Setup Wizard The DB2 Setup Wizard
6. CREATE TABLE PART P_PARTKEY INTEGER NOT NULL P_NAME VARCHAR 55 NOT NULL P_MFGR CHAR 25 NOT NULL P_ BRAND CHAR 10 NOT NULL P_TYPE VARCHAR 25 NOT NULL P SIZE INTEGER NOT NULL P CONTAINER CHAR 10 NOT NULL 114 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm P_RETAILPRICE FLOAT NOT NULL P_COMMENT VARCHAR 23 NOT NULL IN SAMPLE_MPL If you prefer to use graphical tools start the Control Center and expand the tree under the database until the tables folder appears Right click and select Create See Figure 3 11 3 control Center 5 All Systems 5 All Databases ik I sone S HMON_ATM_INFO SYSTOOLS SYSTOOLSPACE S HMON_COLLECTI SYSTOOLS SYSTOOLSPACE S Pouicy SYSTOOLS SYSTOOLSPACE S SYSATTRIBUTES SYSIBM SYSCATSPACE fFRSYSAUDITPOLICIES SYSIBM SYSCATSPACE E SYSAUDITUSE SYSIBM SYSCATSPACE Triggers S SYSBUFFERPOOLN SYSIBM SYSCATSPACE Schemas fFRSYSBUFFERPOOLS SYSIBM SYSCATSPACE Figure 3 11 Start the Create Table wizard That starts the Create Table Wizard Figure 3 12 It guides you through many panels where you can create a new table using the predefined column definitions or by defining your own column definitions 2 BG its TUENA Figure 3 12 Create Table wizard in the Control Center Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 115 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm
7. Installing The client console can be launched from any machine by pointing your Web browser to the address below You should add it as a bookmark for future use and forward it to other console users Log in to the console using an operating system user ID that is valid on the server http cetus itsos sanjose ibm comsibm console y Launch client console Install Complete Open Readme v Verification Start Up Click Done to exit the installer Figure 5 12 Start UP 5 2 3 Migration from the Developer Workbench As IBM Data Studio is a full replacement of the Developer Workbench there is no direct migration path from the Developer Workbench to the Data Studio You can install the Data Studio as a separate package and import the existing projects from the Developer Workbench to Data Studio 5 3 Features and functions 206 In this section we introduce some frequently used terminologies in Data Studio and give a briefly discussion of some features and functions that support you in designing and developing your database and your database applications In 8 5 3 Application development with the Data Studio on page 460 we demonstrate the creation of a query using the Query Editor We also create a Java stored procedure and demonstrate how to debug it on the database server Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm 5 3 1
8. You can schedule the task to run at a designated time only once or repetitively depending on your real situation Figure 6 50 provides a sample to specify running a weekly task and with an end date set v February 29 2008 DUE caved Jaaa E Figure 6 50 Scheduling tasks for repetitive running Figure 6 51 is another example which is used to run a task once Chapter 6 Administering databases 339 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm February 7 2008 al 12 1000 a Run every Thursday at 11 34 29 AM starting Run once on 2 7 08 at 12 10 00 PM fae soa Spiztcigjes TEETER amga dbzinst1 Figure 6 51 Scheduling tasks for running once Furthermore if you want to apply the scheduling pattern for other tasks you can save the schedule list by clicking Save List of Schedules in the right pane of the panel Once saved the next time you schedule a task you can choose Use saved schedule with the desired name to schedule a task Notification setting for different task running result You can specify under which condition a notification will be sent and it can be sent to a contact or contact group by e mail or pager or sent to DB2 s Journal as a message entry For conditions it can be success failure or both You also can specify multiple notifications for different conditions for only one task In Figure 6 52 on page 341 the notification will be sent to DB2 s Journal a
9. 0 0 2 ee 330 6 4 Task Center Scheduler and DB2 Tools Catalog 334 6 4 1 DB2 Administration Server and Tools Catalog Database 334 6 4 2 Task Center and Scheduler 0000 eee eee eaeee 335 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 347 7 1 Health monitor and Health Center 000 0c ee eee eee 348 7 1 1 Health indicator and health monitor 00 0005 348 7 1 2 Monitoring with the Health Center 0000004 349 7 2 Memory Visualizer and Memory Tracker 0000 eee eee 374 To GDOP spein SSE eae aie ebb ele ea eae ee 379 7 3 1 db2top installation 0 0 ee 379 7 3 2 Monitoring with db2top in interactive mode 380 7 3 3 Running db2top in the background mode 383 7 4 Log files for troubleshooting 00 cee eee ee 389 7 4 1 DB2 administration notification log 0 0c eee eee 389 7 4 2 DB2 diagnostic log db2diag log 202 eee eee 391 7 4 3 Operating system log 0 000 cee eee eee 393 7 5 DB2 Tools for troubleshooting 000 e ee eee eee 393 9A dpd aG ieee rede Het ae hav eee heh ec sateen Sie eet 393 D2 ODPO e sirenek riuen Skee aS wie ea eg he es 397 7 5 3 DB2 snapshot command 000 0c eee ee 401 GOA Ob2I8 s 3 28 oe is ale eee AGE eet eee eee eet end 404 7 5 5 Gb2SUpPOM os ci da eiii nee ee wee dente ewe a dee whe bea es 405 7 6 Linux syst
10. 432 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm The CLI interface The Call Level Interface CLI is a C C API to access DB2 It uses function calls to pass dynamic SQL statements It is an alternative to Embedded SOL ESQL CLI does not require host variables or a precompiler Example 8 9 shows a CLI program which selects from the EMPLOYEE table in the SAMPLE database Before running the example you have to replace the lt passwora gt Example 8 9 CLI program cli_test c include lt stdio h gt include lt sqlclil h gt main SQLRETURN cliRC SQL SUCCESS SQLHANDLE henv hdbc hstmt Variable which return the row data struct SQLINTEGER ind SQLCHAR val 7 empno Allocate environment handle if cliRC SQLAllocHandle SQL_HANDLE ENV SQL_NULL_HANDLE amp henv SQL_SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLAllocHandle n cliRC exit cliRC Allocate database handle if cliRC SQLAllocHandle SQL_HANDLE DBC henv amp hdbc SQL SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLAllocHandle n cliRC exit cliRC connect to the database if cliRC SQLConnect hdbc SQLCHAR SAMPLE SQL_NTS SQLCHAR db2inst1 SQL_NTS SQLCHAR lt password gt SQL_NTS SQL_SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLConnect n cliRC exit cliRC i allocate a statement handle if cliRC SQLAllocHand
11. Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm syslog 485 syslog conf 393 syslogd 393 sysstat package 410 system activity report sar 412 system configuration 35 system managed space SMS 15 system managed storage SMS 40 system managed table spaces 95 T table 15 table function 421 table space 15 35 355 tasks view 210 TCP IP 76 team function 212 temporary table space 45 95 TEMPSPACE1 166 threshold 349 timestamp 447 tools catalog 39 180 Top 406 traceback 485 TRACKMOD 225 transactional enterprise system 2 transactional integrity 430 transfer rate 412 trigger 420 triggering action 420 tutorial session 221 Type 4 driver 442 Typical 60 typical 27 28 65 78 U UDFs 4 UDTs 173 Unified ODBC 431 UNIX 485 user defined functions UDFs 420 user table space 95 user defined types 173 UTF 8 94 V version recovery 250 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm view variable 479 virtual memory 409 410 Visual Explain 195 VM VSE 11 WwW Web 2 0 194 Web application 430 Web browser 205 Web services 194 Web browser 11 workload management 5 workspace 207 workspace location 207 Xx X server 91 XML 213 XML attributes 446 XML document 446 XML Editor 195 XML Schema Editor 195 XML structure 446 XSD 213 XSD document 213 68991X fm Index 505 68991X fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 506 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux To determine the s
12. Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax01 fm db2_ps Normal Tablespace ID 3 Name IBMDB2SAMPLEREL Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Large table space State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table spaces on the current node are listed gemini db2 CONNECT TO itsodb completed ok Note With DB2 Version 9 5 you do not need use db2_all to execute database back up or update database configurations anymore You can now back up and restore multiple database partitions at once using the new single system view SSV backup You can get further informations about back up at Chapter 6 Administering databases on page 223 To update dabase configuration just use the db2 update dababase command this command updates all database partitions by default except when DBPARTITIONNUM is specified to update only one database partition You can use db2_ps command to list all the db2 engine processes on all logical partitions db2_ call stack This command on UNIX based platforms causes all processes running on all database partition servers to write call trace back to the syslog In general you don t need to run this command unless it is required by DB2 support staff Appendix A Issuing commands to multiple database partitions 485 6899ax01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 486 Up and Running with DB
13. Example 7 31 shows these command and their output Example 7 31 Using sar to monitor system activities mensa tmp sar A o sartest bin 5 60 gt dev null amp 1 11457 mensa tmp sar u s 14 34 00 f sartest bin more Linux 2 6 16 46 0 12 smp mensa 02 15 08 14 34 01 CPU user nice system iowait idle 14 34 06 all 1 00 0 00 1 10 19 58 78 32 14 34 11 all 2 30 0 00 1 40 17 78 78 52 14 34 16 all 0 20 0 00 0 80 18 92 80 08 14 34 21 all 2 30 0 00 0 90 23 42 73 37 14 34 26 all 0 50 0 00 0 70 17 68 81 12 14 34 31 all 1 80 0 00 0 90 23 90 73 40 14 34 36 all 1 20 0 00 0 80 14 70 83 30 14 34 41 all 1 00 0 00 0 90 19 48 78 62 14 34 46 all 2 10 0 00 0 90 15 30 81 70 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 413 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Average all 1 38 0 00 0 93 18 97 78 72 mensa tmp sar w c s 14 34 45 e 14 35 30 f sartest bin more Linux 2 6 16 46 0 12 smp mensa 02 15 08 14 34 46 proc s 14 34 51 0 60 14 34 56 1 20 14 35 01 0 40 14 35 06 1 00 14 35 11 0 40 14 35 16 1 40 14 35 21 0 40 14 35 26 1 00 Average 0 80 14 34 46 cswch s 14 34 51 787 03 14 34 56 1479 36 14 35 01 617 80 14 35 06 1562 20 14 35 11 600 60 14 35 16 1559 92 14 35 21 627 29 14 35 26 1510 82 Average 1092 50 mensa tmp sar n DEV s 14 36 00 f sartest bin egrep eth0 IFACE 14 36 01 IFACE rxpck s txpck s rxbyt s txbyt s rxcmp s txcmp s rxmcst s 14 36 06 eth0 883 40
14. On Linux servers the license file is located in cd db2 1icense If you are setting up a multi partitioned database system perform this task on each machine To remove a license file use db2licm r For example db2licm r db2ese Setting up a license policy For DB2 Connect Enterprise Server Edition the license policy controls and monitors the number of users that can connect simultaneously to a DB2 Connect server For WebSphere Replication Server or WebSphere Federation Server the license policy controls and monitors the number of connectors to a non DB2 data source Perform the following task 1 Log in as the instance owner 2 If you purchased a DB2 Connect Server Concurrent User policy enter the following command db2licm p db2consv concurrent 160 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm If you purchased a WebSphere Replication Server or WebSphere Federation Server Concurrent Connector policy enter the following command db2licm c wsfs concurrent or db2licm c wsrs concurrent If you are not sure about the product identifier wsfs or wsrs use the following command to find it out db2licm 1 Changing the enforcement policy The default enforcement policy is Soft Stop This means that all connections to DB2 databases go through even when the license policy is violated When a violation occurs a license violation message is written to db2diag log The H
15. db2instl mensa db2 select substr tabschema 1 10 tabschema substr tabname 1 30 tabname from syscat tables where tabname like SNAP TABSCHEMA TABNAME SYSIBMADM SNAPAGENT SYSIBMADM SNAPAGENT_MEMORY_POOL SYSIBMADM SNAPAPPL SYSIBMADM SNAPAPPL_INFO SYSIBMADM SNAPBP SYSIBMADM SNAPBP_PART SYSIBMADM SNAPCONTAINER SYSIBMADM SNAPDB SYSIBMADM SNAPDBM SYSIBMADM SNAPDBM_MEMORY_POOL SYSIBMADM SNAPDB_MEMORY_POOL SYSIBMADM SNAPDETAILLOG SYSIBMADM SNAPDYN_SQL SYSIBMADM SNAPFCM SYSIBMADM SNAPFCM_PART SYSIBMADM SNAPHADR SYSIBMADM SNAPLOCK SYSIBMADM SNAPLOCKWAIT SYSIBMADM SNAPSTMT SYSIBMADM SNAPSTORAGE_PATHS SYSIBMADM SNAPSUBSECTION SYSIBMADM SNAPSWITCHES SYSIBMADM SNAPTAB SYSIBMADM SNAPTAB_REORG SYSIBMADM SNAPTBSP SYSIBMADM SNAPTBSP_PART SYSIBMADM SNAPTBSP_QUIESCER SYSIBMADM SNAPTBSP_RANGE SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL_PROGRESS 30 record s selected Each snapshot view returns a table with one row per monitored object per database partition with each column representing a monitor element In Example 7 23 we capture a snapshot of database information for the ITSODB database using the SNAPDB administrative view Example 7 23 Database snapshot using SNAPDB administrative view db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select snapshot_timestamp db status substr db_name 1 10 dbname dbpartitionnum from sysibmadm SNAPDB Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm dbpartitionnu
16. 3000000 Summary of LOAD Agents Number of rows read 3000000 Number of rows skipped 0 Number of rows loaded 3000000 Number of rows rejected 0 Number of rows deleted 0 Number of rows committed 3000000 When the load command is issued and load is running we can access the same table with read only operation from another terminal session Before the very end of the load operation the SELECT statement returns the answer set very quickly But at the last stage of the load operation till the job is finished the SELECT statement cannot succeed due to resource contention with load operation At this time the load utility has to acquire an exclusive lock Z lock on the table before data is committed After the load operation is finished the newly loaded data is visible to other applications Example 6 56 on page 314 shows the SELECT output during LOAD is running and after the data is committed Chapter 6 Administering databases 313 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 6 56 Concurrent access to the table where load is taking place LOAD is running we can access the data db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select from itemload head 10 ITEMID AMOUNT 4000001 1 10 4000002 2 20 4000003 3 30 3 record s selected after the LOAD finished and commited the data db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select from itemload head 10 ITEMID AMOUNT 5 954 25 7 534 75
17. 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 4 2 2 Install DB2 Version 9 5 DB2 should be installed in all machines of the partitioned environment We provide the installation details in Chapter 2 Installation on page 25 4 2 3 Migrating instances and databases 174 All the steps we have done up to now are to prepare for the instances and databases migration The db2imigr command is used to migrate the instances to Version 9 5 format The db2 migrate database command is used to migrate the databases The db2imigr command performs the following gt Check cataloged databases to make sure they are ready for migration through db2ckmig gt Migrate your instance to a Version 9 5 instance gt Update system and local database directories to the Version 9 5 format gt Merge the prior 9 5 version DBM configuration settings presented in your environment with new Version 9 5 DBM configuration settings In the remaining of this section we guide you through a procedure to complete the migration The steps are 1 Log in as the instance owner to the database partition server that owns the instance The first entry of the db2node cfg file shows the database partition server that owns the instance Example 4 7 shows a db2nodes cfg In this example mensa is the database partition server that owns the instance Example 4 7 Shows mensa as database partition server that owns the instance dpfusr1 mensa gt more d
18. At the time of writing the latest available driver was DBD DB2 1 1 a Ensure that the C compiler is installed It is needed for compiling the Perl module In order to compile the module you need the DB2 client installed on your system b Before installing DBD DB2 driver enable the DB2 environment if it hasn t already been done for your user in profile Chapter 8 Application development 427 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2inst1 sqllib db2profile c Untar DBD DB2 1 1 by entering the following command tar xvzf DBD DB2 1 1 tar gz d In the DBD DB2 1 1 directory run the following commands to build and install the DBD DB2 driver perl Makefile PL make make test e The make command builds the software e The make test command executes self tests e Now login as the root user and run the following command from the same directory make install e The make install command installs the DBI 5 Enable the DBI module To enable Perl to load the DBI module you must include the following line in your perl program use DBI The DBI module automatically loads the DBD DB2 driver when you create a database handle using the DBI gt connect statement using the following syntax my dbhandle DBI gt connect dbi DB2 dbalias userID password Where dbhandle represents the database handle returned by the connect statement dbalias represents a DB2 alias c
19. BACK_GROUND t TBS BACK_GROUND b BP BACK_GROUND T TABLES BACK_GROUND m MEMORY wait perl pi e s g DIR db2top csv amp echo Done 2 Rename db2top txt to db2top sh and upload db2top sh to a working directory on Linux Execute db2top sh as db2set DB2DBDFT ITSODB sh db2top sh Where ITSODB represents the database which we monitor in our sample 3 Use FTP to transmit all CSV format files generated in tmp background and to the working directory where db2top xls exists in 4 Click Build graphics to produce the graphical reports for analysis Figure 7 34 shows some sample reports DB2INST1 ITSODB Bufferpools from 12 06 53 to 12 11 52 DB2INST1 ITSODB Tables from 12 07 17 to 12 11 52 E pkeads OTenporary E lReads ECatalog OUser DB2INST1 ITSODB Sessions from 12 06 53 to 12 11 53 DB2INST1 ITSODB Memory from 12 06 53 to 12 11 53 OCpu Usage 7 i hi OLockList OUtilities 2 E SortHeap E ctiveSessions GaAppl_menory E Sessions Figure 7 34 ALL_Reports in db2top xlsb 386 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Running db2top in snapshot collector mode Another useful function of db2top is to run db2top in snapshot collector mode and have the system performance analyzed automatically You can use db2top with 4 option to enables automatic performance analysis db2top produces a report sho
20. Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 1 Introduction Select the languages to install 2 Software License Documentation will be installed in all the languages that you choose here Installing multiple languages will Agreement increase the disk space requirements 3 Installation action 4 Languages Available languages Selected languages 5 Configure port Z Juar Chinese Simplified p Chinese Traditional i gt gt Croatian Czech French Standard German Confirm installation directory Directory opt ipm db2ic 9 5 oe Space required 131 MB Space available 10122 MB 4 Back Next gt Bier Cancel Help Figure 2 18 Select the languages to install 12 As shown in Figure 2 19 configure the DB2 Information Center for incoming communication on the Specify the DB2 Information Center port panel Click Next to continue the installation Specify the DB2 Information Center port The DB2 Information Center contains documentation for DB2 products To use and enable other compu to access the DB2 Information Center you must configure it for incoming communication Service name Port number jdb2icw95 51001 Restore Default Yalues Figure 2 19 Specify the DB2 Information Center port 13 Start copying files Check settings then click Finish Installing DB2 Information Center using doce_install comma
21. Using the rol1forward command you can specify a timestamp or end of logs It tells the database how far the roll forward should be done There are two types of rollforward recovery to consider gt Database roll forward recovery This process applies transactions recorded in the database logs to the database The rollforward utility reads the needed log files archived or active logs Already archived logs will be retrieved using the log archive method The simplest way to roll forward the database as far as possible is using the command db2 rollforward db itsodb to end of logs and stop 252 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm If you need to roll forward the database to a specific point in time use the following commands db2 rollforward db itsodb to 2008 02 06 20 15 30 using local time db2 rollforward db itsodb query status db2 rollforward db itsodb stop gt Table space roll forward recovery If the database is enabled for forward recovery you have the option of backing up restoring and rolling forward table spaces instead of the entire database Table space rollforward can be done to the end of logs or to a point in time The time must be greater or equal to the minimum recovery time for that table space Example 6 22 shows you how to determine that time Example 6 22 Restore to minimum point in time db2instl mensa gt db2 restore db itsodb tablespace u
22. disk I O 16 406 disk requirements 27 distribution key 355 DMS 355 DMS table space 355 document ID 447 domain name server 29 DRDA 3 driver 425 driver type 442 DSA 53 DSS 12 dynamic size 27 dynamic SQL 381 E Eclipse 194 e commerce 430 editor tool bar 211 embedded SQL 433 engine processes 485 enterprise applications 2 ER diagram 195 216 errorlog 211 ESQL 433 evaluation option 364 EXECUTE privilege 171 explain 177 68991X fm ext2 41 ext3 41 42 extension 430 external procedure 423 F failover 4 Fast Communication Manager 103 fast communication manager 6 FCM 103 FCP 41 fdisk command 97 fenced use 425 file system 47 file system caching 95 flexibility 2 Fortran 426 framework 220 front end 431 fstab file 46 full backup 225 full offline database backup 235 G gateway 2 11 29 global snapshot 381 gnome system monitor 415 H health indicator 348 354 health issues 348 health monitor 348 health monitor alarm 390 health_mon 348 349 heterogeneous environment 11 high availability 4 13 high performance computing applications 2 high SMP systems 23 host IP address 29 host trust relationship 57 host based authentication 53 HTML 85 HTML document 430 l I O operations 178 ibm_db2 431 Index 501 68991X fm IBMDEFAULTBP 377 inconsistent state 173 incremental backup 226 index 15 index reorganization 6 Information Integration application 2 inplace table reorgan
23. gt Use the DB2 Setup wizard to install DB2 and create a new instance on the primary machine then use a response file to install DB2 on the remaining machines participating in the partitioned database gt Edit a sample response file and use this file to install DB2 on each machine in the cluster gt Use db2_install or a combination of DB2 Setup wizard and db2_install to set up your environment The easiest method is to use the DB2 Setup wizard on the primary machine and then a response file on the remaining machines participating in the partitioned database system We discuss this method in this book Preparing the environment The first step of installing a partitioned database environment is preparing the environment including setting up NFS creating user and group and enabling ssh Refer to 2 2 Installation considerations and planning on page 35 Using DB2 Setup wizard to install DB2 on primary machine When the environment is ready use DB2 Setup wizard to install DB2 on the primary machine In our sample mensa is the primary machine of the partitioned database environment 1 On the primary machine log in as root 2 Go to the directory where the DB2 install image is located and run db2setup select Install a Product on the first window 3 Select Install New on Welcome to the DB2 Setup Wizard window click Next 4 On Software License Agreement window read the license agreement and then select Accept and click
24. s 0 The output file explain out contains the access path for the statement as well as other detailed information about the query processing Example 8 42 shows an excerpt from the file with the access plan Example 8 42 Access path for an SQL statement Access Plan Total Cost 322 112 Query Degree 1 Rows RETURN 1 Cost 1 0 1 GRPBY 2 322 112 320 1000 TBSCAN 3 322 029 i 10000 TABLE DB2INST2 EMPMDC You can see that DB2 performs a table scan which takes longer time Adding an index on the column EXPLTEST will allow DB2 to scan on index that can improve the query performance Chapter 8 Application development 455 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Visual explain Visual explain can be started from the DB2 Control Center It offers a graphical view for the access path To start visual explain from the Control Center in the explorer view select the database with the right mouse button and select Explain Query as shown in Figure 8 5 on page 456 j E Control Cent Figure 8 5 Select Visual explain in the Control Center In the explain panel you can enter the query as shown in Figure 8 6 N Explain Query Statement SAMPLE select count from empmdc where expltest TEST Figure 8 6 Explain panel 456 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Figure 8 7 on page 457 shows the access path
25. u OE DB2INST 1 EMPSALARY INTEGER DataProject Common Project name DataProject Browse Location URL jdbe db2 crater 50001 SAMPLE retrieveMessagesFromServerOnGetMessage true oeansti EMPSALARY Browse Argument list sro00 Edit Procedure Figure 8 39 Run configuration Here you can change the parameter 37000 and press Debug The Data Studio will switch to the Debug Perspective Dependent on your settings the Data Studio asks you to confirm the switch In the Debug Perspective Figure 8 40 on page 479 you can step through the code view variables change values and do everything you need to debug your code D EmpSalary sql ga EMPSALARY 2 EMPSALARY java 33 ib ClassLoader class srec stored Procedure MIPSALARY Package db2instl import java sql grec classes opa class FMPSALARY public static void eMPSALARY int SALARY Resultset rsl throws SQLException Exception Get connection to the database Connection con DriverManager getconnection jdbc default connection PreparedStatement stmt null un boolean brlag i EEE sa sql SELECT FMPLOYEE MPNO FMPLOYEE LASTNAME DEPARTMENT DEPTNO DEPARTMENT DEP TNAME FROM EMPLOYEE JOIN DEPARTMENT ON PMPLOYEE WORKDEPT DEPARTMENT DEP TNO i WHERE PMPLOYEE SALARY lt SALARY stmt con preparestatement sql bFlag stmt execute xsl 0 stmt getRes
26. 02 14 2008 16 30 20 0 0 SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful 02 14 2008 16 30 21 1 0 SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful If you encounter any errors at startup you can check the db2diag 1og files in the different instances of the cluster for more detailed information Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 103 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 3 3 Creating a database In this chapter we show the creation of a database We are going to demonstrate 2 cases gt A single partitioned database That chapter guides you through the steps to create a simple database by using the Create Database Wizard We also provide you the scripts how to create a database from the command line gt A multiple partitioned database This chapter provides you the scripts and commands to setup a partitioned database with 2 physical partitions 3 3 1 Creating a single partitioned database When you create a database the following tasks will be done for you gt Setting up of all the system catalog tables that are required by the database During creation of a new database DB2 allocates three table spaces SYSCATSPACE USERSPACE1 and TEMPSPACE1 The table space SYSCATSPACE holds all system catalog tables These catalog tables are actually a repository that keeps information and statistics about all objects within the database USERSPACE1 contains the user created tables
27. 5 Table Spaces E Event Monitors G Database partition groups Creator Buffer Pools Columns G Application Objects Actions User and Group Objects Open Federated Database Objects E Query XML Schema Repository SR 2 Show Related Obje cg O ITSOREPL o SAMPLE cy Create New Table A TooiscatT Figure 6 29 Table context menu You can choose EXPORT to open the export table notebook See Figure 6 30 on page 300 You can choose the output file format of export under the File Format Chapter 6 Administering databases 299 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm options input SQL statement manually or by SQL Assist Wizard under the SELECT statement area In the Messages file field you can specify the messages file to be created for the error warning and informational messages associated with the EXPORT operation In addition if you want to know the command DB2 generated for this task click Show Command A pop up panel appears with the command generated shown Furthermore you may use the Schedule function provided by DB2 to schedule a time to run this export task by choosing the Schedule tab on the panel ay Export Table ITEM x CONNECT TO ITSODB EXPORT TO db2backup datamove itemcc del OF DEL MESSAGES db2backup datamove expcc msg SELECT FROM DB2INST1 ITEM WHERE ITEMID lt 100 SELECT FROM DB2INST1 ITEM WHERE ITEMID lt 100 db2backup datamove expcc msg cae Ok Reset
28. Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm export COLLECTFILE 2 in case there is a collection file export DIR tmp background Run db2top and exit after WAITTIME minutes BACK_GROUND db2top m WAITTIME b 1 o DIR db2top 2 csv amp db2top f COLLECTFILE m WAITTIME b 1 o DIR db2top 2 csv amp Start here rm fR DIR mkdir p DIR echo Running db2top for WAITTIME minute s BACK_GROUND d DBM BACK_GROUND 1 APPL BACK_GROUND t TBS BACK_GROUND b BP BACK_GROUND T TABLES BACK_GROUND m MEMORY wait echo Done Make the following modifications on db2top txt Combine BACK_GROUND definition to one line Use perl pi e s g DIR db2top csv amp to translate delimiter of CSV files from semicolon to comma Note This step is only required if your Excel setting uses semicolon as the delimiter Usually this Excel setting is determined by the Windows regional settings Example 7 11 shows an modified script Example 7 11 db2top sh bin sh export WAITTIME 1 5 export DIR tmp background BACK_GROUND software db2top 1inux_amd_64 db2top m WAITTIME b 1 o DIR db2top 2 csv amp rm fR DIR mkdir p DIR echo Running db2top for WAITTIME minute s BACK_GROUND d DBM BACK_GROUND 1 APPL Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 385 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm
29. Inserted 2 Rejected 0 Committed 2 IMPORT table DB2INST1 BRAND Rows read 2 Inserted 2 Rejected 0 Committed 2 IMPORT table DB2INST1 CUSTOMER Rows read 2 Inserted 2 Rejected 0 Committed 2 Disconnecting from database successful Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 189 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm End time Wed Feb 6 17 07 20 2008 db2inst1 gemini temp gt db2 get db cfg for itso grep Database Database Configuration for Database itso Database configuration release level 0x0c00 Database release level 0x0c00 Database territory BR Database code page 1208 Database code set UTF 8 Database country region code 55 Database collating sequence SYSTEM_819 Database page size 4096 Database is consistent YES 4 6 Fix pack installation A DB2 fix pack is a collection of updates and fixes for Authorized Program Analysis Reports APARs We recommend that you keep your environment running up to date at the latest fix pack level Note Fix packs are cumulative This means that the latest fix pack for any given version of DB2 contains all of the updates from previous fix packs for the same version of DB2 You can have multiple DB2 copies on the same system those copies can be at different version and fix pack levels If you want to apply a fix pack to one or more DB2 copies you must install the fix pack on those DB2 copies one by one DB2 9 5 enhanc
30. Only IBM JDKs are supported to create and run Java UDFs and stored procedures Non IBM versions of the SDK for Java are supported only for building and running standalone Java applications In the database manager configuration the JOK_PATH parameter must point to the directory where your SDK is installed You can view it by running db2 get dbm config grep JDK_PATH It should show Java Development Kit installation path JDK_PATH home db2inst2 sqllib java jdk32 The path may differ on your local system depending on your instance name and whether you run on a 32 bit or a 64 bit system Now we can start writing a small UDF in Java Example 8 21 shows a simple Java UDF that receives one string as input and sends back a concatenated string to the output Example 8 21 Java UDF sample hello java public class hello public static String hello String paraml return Hello to paraml Example 8 22 shows hot to compile and install the program hello java lt path gt has to be replaced by the path name of the jar file 444 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Example 8 22 Compile and install hello java as UDF db2inst1 puget gt JRE home db2inst1 sqllib java jdk32 db2inst1 puget gt JRE bin javac hello java db2inst1 puget gt JRE bin jar cvf hello jar hello class added manifest adding hello class in 443 out 274 deflated 38 db2inst1 pu
31. Redbooks Web site 498 Contact us vi redirected restore 260 redistribute command 124 registry 128 registry variable 176 registry variables db2rshcmd 84 ReiserFS 41 relational database 15 relations 15 response file 39 50 restore pending state 173 revoke statements 171 REXX 426 Rivest Shamir Adleman algorithm 53 rollforward pending state 173 root_squash 48 row function 421 rows 15 RSA 53 runtimes 220 Index 503 68991X fm S sartest bin 413 scalability 2 17 scalar function 421 scaling out 16 scaling up 16 Schema Management 195 scp 91 SCSI 41 secondary logs 44 security access control 195 security control 95 Self Managing and Resource Tuning SMART 3 self tuning memory 6 semaphore array 30 semicolon 424 several ways to install DB2 77 shared 18 shared memory segment 30 shared resources directory 198 shared disk 18 shared nothing 18 single processor 16 single system view 237 single tier 10 Small Computer System Interface 41 SMP architectures 16 SMTP_SERVER 353 sortmemory 129 SQL 3 SQL Builder 195 SQL procedure 423 SQL Routine Debugger 195 SQL statement 425 ssh_known_hosts 54 sshd_config 53 SSV 237 SSV backup 237 standby cluster 12 starschemas 13 stored procedure 4 420 423 478 Structured Query Language SQL 15 subnet mask 29 SVCENAME 133 swap space 412 symmetric multi processor 16 syntax 482 syscatspace 166 sysctl 31 504 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux
32. Show Command Cancel Help Figure 6 30 Using EXPORT in DB2 Control Center The export operation will fail if the data you want to export exceeds the space available on the file system on which the exported file will be created To avoid this you can limit the amount of data selected by specifying conditions on the WHERE clause and invoke the export utility multiple times to export all of the data For information about using the ADMIN_CMD stored procedure or the EXPORT API and more details regarding the EXPORT utility refer to Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference SC23 5847 00 300 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 6 3 2 Import data from files into database tables or views The import utility inserts data from an input file into a table or updatable view If the table or view has already have data you can either replace or append to the existing data You can also use import to create a new table if the format of input file is Integrated eXchange Format IXF using the IMPORT command options CREATE and REPLACE_CREATE Not all of the properties of the table are re created when use CREATE and REPLACE_CREATE Note that these options are deprecated and might be removed in a future release Note Instead of using the IMPORT options to create table use the db2look command to capture the original table definitions and re create the
33. The message files in our case are gt loadcc msg prep 000 for pre partitioning gt loadcc msg part 001 for partitioning gt loadcc msg load 000 and loadcc msg load 001 for loading All these files are located under the directory db2backup datamove which was specified in the Specifying input and output files panel For detailed information about using load refer to Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference SC23 5847 00 and Command Reference SC23 5846 00 6 3 4 Using db2move utility This tool facilitates the movement of large numbers of tables between DB2 databases located on workstations It calls the DB2 export and import or load APIs depending on the action requested by the user and operates the files in PC IXF format 330 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm With the co COPY option it can also be used to copy one or more schemas from a source database to a target database In Example 6 60 we copy all tables from our ITSODB database into a new database called ITSOREPL During the copy the schema name is changed from db2inst1 to db2vs and all tables are placed into the default table space Not that you also can specify table space name mappings to use different table spaces Example 6 60 Change schema using d2move db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 create db itsorep DB20000I1 The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2back
34. Unrsv Kb Used Kb Cmt Kb Uncmt Kb DBMS 0x0000000200000000 412352519 29568 OxF197AE61 0 0 1280 7360 8000 21568 FMP 0x0000000210000000 412385288 22592 0x0 0 2 0 320 22592 0 Trace 0x0000000000000000 412319750 39227 OxF197AE74 0 1 0 39227 39227 0 FCM 0x0000000220000000 412418057 238592 OxF197AE62 0 11 204032 34560 34560 204032 db2pd gt q Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 397 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2instl mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2pd osinfo Operating System Information OSName Linux NodeName mensa Version 2 Release 6 Machine x86 _64 CPU Information Total CPU OnlineCPU ConfigCPU Speed MHz HMTDegree 2 2 2 600 1 2 Physical Memory and Swap Megabytes TotalMem FreeMem Avai 1Mem TotalSwap FreeSwap 3753 209 n a 8198 8192 Virtual Memory Megabytes Total Reserved Available Free 11951 n a n a 8401 Message Queue Information MsgSeg MsgMax MsgMap MsgMni MsgTql MsgMnb MsgSsz n a 65536 65536 1024 65536 65536 16 Shared Memory Information ShmMax ShmMin ShmIds ShmSeg 9223372036854775807 1 4096 4096 Semaphore Information SemMap SemMni SemMns SemMnu SemMs 1 Sem0pm SemUme SemUsz SemVmx SemAem 256000 1024 256000 256000 250 32 n a 20 32767 32767 CPU Load Information Short Medium Long 0 160000 0 140000 0 080000 CPU Usage Information Total Usr Sys Wait Idle 0 080000 n a n a 0 920000 n a You can set a default option for db2pd using the
35. a Determine the node type using the following command db2 get dbm cfg grep Node type Example 4 1 shows the node type of an ESE DB2 system Example 4 1 Node type dpfusrl gemini gt db2 get dbm cfg grep Node type Node type Enterprise Server Edition with local and remote clients Review Table 4 2 to determine the instance type and whether the instance migration is supported Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 169 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Table 4 2 Node types Node type Migration support client default type for DB2 clients standalone default type for DB2 Personal Edition PE wse default type for DB2 Workgroup Server Edition WSE ese default type for DB2 Enterprise Server Edition ESE Client Database server with local clients Database server with local and remote clients Partitioned database server with local and remote clients or Enterprise Server Edition with local and remote clients gt Migration to a client a standalone a wse or an ese instance is supported Migration to a standalone a wse or an ese instance is supported Migration to a client instance is unsupported Migration to a wse or an ese instance is supported Migration to a standalone instance creates a standalone instance Migration to a client instance is unsupported Migration to an ese instance is supported Migration to a s
36. bg option and that setuid programs can be run properly Refer to the following example mensa export db2home db2home nfs rw timeo 7 hard intr bg suid lock 48 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Where mensa is the NFS server machine name in our example 7 After adding an entry to the etc fstab file on each machine NFS mount the exported file system on each of the remaining machines in the cluster by entering the following command mount db2home If the mount command fails make sure the NFS server is started To re start the NFS server run the following command as root on the NFS Server workstation etc init d nfs restart You may also use the showmount command to check the status of the NFS server For example showmount e mensa Tips gt Itis considered good convention to place all the directories you want to export in the export hierarchy If you need the directory to also exist elsewhere in the directory tree use symbolic links or mount it as a NFS client For example if your server is exporting its db2home hierarchy you should place the directory in export thereby creating export db2home Because the server itself will need access to the export db2home directory you should mount it on db2home gt If you have an error in your etc exports file it is reported in when NFS starts up in syslog You might find this debugging tool very useful
37. chmod 600 identity cat id_rsa pub gt gt authorized_keys chmod 644 authorized_keys rm id_rsa pub Example 2 20 shows the commands to enable the DSA key pair Example 2 20 Enable the DSA key pair cd ssh mv id_dsa identity chmod 600 identity cat id_dsa pub gt gt authorized_keys chmod 644 authorized_keys rm id_dsa pub 4 Set up the host trust relationships Because we have not set up any host trust relationships the first time that ssh is issued to a new host you will be prompted with a message saying that the authenticity of the target host cannot be established To overcome this situation you can form a trust relationship with the other hosts in the partitioned database environment To achieve this trust relationship use the ssh keyscan utility to gather the public host key for each host in the partitioned database environment and save the keys in the known_hosts file Example 2 21 shows how to use the ssh keyscan utility to gather RSA keys to set up the host trust relationships Example 2 21 Gather the RSA public keys ssh keyscan t rsa mensa mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 90 gt gt ssh known_hosts ssh keyscan t rsa gemini gemini itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 94 gt gt ssh known_hosts Chapter 2 Installation 57 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 2 22 shows how to use the ssh keyscan to gather DSA keys to set up the host trust relationsh
38. db2backup datamove 1oad partitioning dbpartnums 0 1 Agent Type Node SQL Code Result Chapter 6 Administering databases 311 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm LOAD 000 00000000 Success LOAD 001 00000000 Success RESULTS 2 of 2 LOADs completed successfully Summary of LOAD Agents Number of rows read 3000000 Number of rows skipped 0 Number of rows loaded 3000000 Number of rows rejected 0 Number of rows deleted 0 Number of rows committed 3000000 db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select count from itemload 3000000 1 record s selected Examples for ALLOW READ ACCESS when loading The ALLOW READ ACCESS option is very useful when loading large amount of data because it allows users to access table data when the load operation is in progress or after a load operation has failed The behavior of a load operation in ALLOW READ ACCESS mode is independent of the isolation level of the application That is readers with any isolation level can always read the pre existing data but they will not be able to read the newly loaded data until the load operation has finished Read access is provided throughout the load operation except at the very end Before data is committed the load utility acquires an exclusive lock Z lock on the table The load utility will wait until all the locks held by all the applications have been released This may cause a delay before the data can
39. db2backup datamove gt db2 list utilities show detail ID 136 Type LOAD Database Name ITSODB Partition Number 0 316 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Description COPY NO DB2INST1 ITEMLOAD Start Time State Invocation Type Progress Monitoring Phase Number Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time Phase Number Current Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time Phase Number Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time ID Type Database Name Partition Number Description COPY NO DB2INST1 ITEMLOAD Start Time State Invocation Type Progress Monitoring Phase Number Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time Phase Number Current Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time Phase Number Description OFFLINE LOAD DEL 02 11 2008 15 57 Executing User 1 SETUP 0 bytes 0 bytes 02 11 2008 15 57 2 LOAD 1552469 rows 643221 rows 02 11 2008 15 57 3 BUILD 1 indexes 0 indexes Not Started 88 LOAD ITSODB 1 OFFLINE LOAD DEL 02 11 2008 16 00 Executing User 1 SETUP 0 bytes 0 bytes 02 11 2008 16 00 2 LOAD 1552469 rows 174190 rows 02 11 2008 16 00 3 BUILD 6899ch06 fm AUTOMATIC INDEXING REPLACE 02 886822 02 886827 04 189448 AUTOMATIC INDEXING REPLACE 40 095780 40 095786 41 415394 Chapter 6 Administering databases 3
40. dev sdb 214 MB 214748160 bytes 64 heads 32 sectors track 204 cylinders Units cylinders of 2048 512 1048576 bytes Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System dev sdb1 1 204 208880 5 Extended Command m for help n Command action l1 logical 5 or over p primary partition 1 4 First cylinder 1 204 default 1 Using default value 1 Last cylinder or size or sizeM or sizeK 1 204 default 204 Using default value 204 Command m for help p Disk dev sdb 214 MB 214748160 bytes 64 heads 32 sectors track 204 cylinders Units cylinders of 2048 512 1048576 bytes Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System dev sdbl 1 204 208880 5 Extended dev sdb5 1 204 208864 83 Linux Command m for help w The partition table has been altered Calling ioctl to re read partition table Syncing disks The instance owner has to have the write access to the device file for the disk partition This can be done by executing the following command from the root user 98 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm chown lt instance user gt lt instance group gt dev sdb5 Now we can use this disk partition for the table space First we need to calculate the size which we have to specify at the CREATE TABLESPACE command by using this formula num_pages floor blocks 1024 4096 On our example that will be num_pages floor 208864 1024 4096 52216 Th
41. r db2home db2inst1 db2wse rsp db2_install utility The db2_install utility installs the DB2 filesets and creates a non root instance during a non root installation Some people prefer to use db2_install when installing DB2 on a large complex database system that has special requirements Installing DB2 The steps to install DB2 using db2_install are as follows 1 Ask Linux system administrator who has root authority to mount DB2 product CD or DVD 2 Log in with the user ID that owns the non root installation 3 Change to the directory where the DB2 product DVD is mounted by entering the following command cd mnt dvd where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the DVD 4 Enter the db2_instal1l command to start the db2_install script 5 Enter product keyword when db2_install prompts you for it For example to install DB2 Workgroup Server Edition enter in WSE The installation directory for DB2 on Linux is NSTHOME sallib Configuring TCP IP communications After installing DB2 using db2_install You must configure your instance with the TCP IP protocol in order for it to accept requests from remote DB2 clients Follow these steps 1 Update the database manager configuration file on the server To do so a Log into system as instance owner b Update the SVCENAME parameter in the DBM configuration file You may specify port number For example we enter db2 update dbm cfg using SVCENAME 50001 You can check your
42. shown in Example 6 6 The location of the dsm opt file is specified with the DSMI CONFIG variable Example 6 6 dsm opt file SErvername TSM_SERVER1 tapeprompt no Each NodeName has to be registered at the TSM server The TSM server administrator can do this using the register node command Tivoli requires certain storage pools to store the archived log files and the database backup copy By default an archive storage pool ARCHIVEPOOL is used for storing DB2 archive logs sent by the DB2 log manager and a backup storage pool BACKUPPOOL is used to store all DB2 backup files 234 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm The TSM admin user will also set up a password for the node We need to save this TSM password at our database server which is the TSM client Change to the directory INSTHOME sq11ib adsm and do the steps shown in Example 6 7 Example 6 7 set the password at the TSM client db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 sqllib adsm gt su root root s Password db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 sqllib adsm gt dsmapipw kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Tivoli Storage Manager A API Version 5 4 0 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Enter your current password Enter your new password Enter your new password again Your new password has been accepted and updated DB2 provides the db2adutl tool to manage the
43. synchronized between each other automatically This means that if you change anything in one view you can see the result immediately in all other views that represent the same resource The sample perspective shows in Figure 5 13 has the following views gt gt gt Data Project Explorer This view lists the projects you are working on in an hierarchical structure Database Explorer This view shows the defined database connections It shows the database objects of the related connection in a hierarchical structure Editor Located in the center the Editor is the main working pane In our example you see an XML editor which currently has an XML file opened It shows the XML file as a tree structure and allows you to modify it At the top of the editor view you can see several tabs where you can switch between different editors Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 209 6899ch05 fm 210 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Outline The outline view shows the current object in the editor pane in an outline mode and allows you to quickly navigate within it At the right bottom pane you can see other views organized by tabs and the Tasks view is open The Tasks view is a Notepad where you can keep track of your open tasks It also shows tasks which you have annotated in your source files Use the tab to switch to other views The editor pane shows this pane shows a tree representation of the file content The on
44. this view you can manage the servers for running and deploying the applications gt Problems This view is usually already open in one of the tabs It shows you the compilation or syntax problems of the currently open projects gt Error Log This view is usually already open in one of the tabs It shows you general error messages in your environment gt Console Here you can see console output from Java programs or from application servers while running or debugging applications In the console view you can switch between the outputs of the concurrently running programs gt Bookmarks Here you can bookmark sections in your code and quickly navigate through them gt Search Contains a list of your search results and provides meanings to navigate through them Editors Editors are associated with the type of the file you edit For instance in Figure 5 13 on page 208 the XML editor is used to edit the XML file For other file types there are other editors available If there is no editor for a particular file type the text editor is used The editor tool bar Figure 5 16 allows you to move around between the annotations in your file g v Y to Gir a gt Figure 5 16 Editor tool bar Projects Projects are used to organize your resources For instance a Java project contains the source files all built files and meta information files for your Java application A Data Project is related to a database
45. we note where a code page conversion of the transferred data is necessary Dependent on your architecture you can have many places where a code page conversion may be necessary You have to decide before the database creation what code page you want to use for your database because it can not be changed easily afterwards A later change would require recreating database and a data migration using db21look and db2move UTF 8 offers support for all languages and would be the best choice if you have to provide worldwide access to your application If you support only your local country and your country uses a single byte code page you probably want to choose a single byte code page for your database A database created fora single byte code page requires less storage If you have to support several countries with single byte code pages which can converted between each other you may want to choose a single code page for your database It depends on the number of conversions you have to perform in your architecture If you use pureXML or if you have UTF 8 clients you should setup your database as UTF 8 The simplest approach however would be if your whole architecture was setup for UTF 8 3 2 2 Table space considerations In this section we describe the different types of table space containers and when it is appropriate to use them 94 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Gener
46. 0 1803 db2inst1 16 0 555m 36m 20m S 0 1 0 0 03 33 db2acd 0 0 0 0 1 0 29932 db2instl 16 0 739m 35m 13m S 0 0 9 0 01 33 db2home db2inst1 s 1786 root 16 0 724m 26m 8276 S 0 0 7 0 00 00 db2ckpwd 0 1787 root 16 0 724m 26m 8204 S 0 0 7 0 00 00 db2ckpwd 0 1788 root 16 0 724m 26m 8204 S 0 0 7 0 00 00 db2ckpwd 0 5420 gdm 15 0 94424 18m 10m S 0 0 5 0 00 42 opt gnome 1ib64 gd 31914 db2instl1 16 0 123m 14m 9012 S 0 0 4 0 00 04 db2home db2inst1 s 4462 db2inst1 16 0 121m 13m 8036 S 0 0 3 0 00 02 db2home db2inst1 s 14531 root 16 0 110m 11m 7516 S 0 0 3 0 00 01 db2licd 4262 root 15 0 305m 8884 4336 S 0 0 2 0 00 66 usr X11R6 bin X 0 26450 dasusrl 20 0 136m 7644 5300 S 0 0 2 0 00 22 home dasusr1 das a Regarding the field descriptions for the output screen of the top command refer to the man help pages for top or other Linux documentation Here is another example for using top to monitor specific processes top d 1 p pgrep db2sampl p 1785 p 2928 You can specify up to 20 processes for top to monitor by using the p command option You also can utilize the Linux shell function to obtain the process ID directly in the top command In our example we use Linux command pgrep db2samp1 with top to obtain the process ID for db2sampl process and add it into the top monitor process list In addition to p command option the d command option is also specified in the command It means the output screen of top will be refreshed every second The output sho
47. 1 to DB2 9 5 in a Windows environment Table 4 4 Migration options in Windows Migrating to Migration methods summary Version 8 DB2 DB2 9 5 Data Install the DB2 9 5 Data Server Client Administration Server Client and choose the migrate action in the Client Work with Existing panel The client Version 8 DB2 instance is then automatically Application migrated for you Migrating from Development Client Version 9 1 DB2 Client Version 8 DB2 DB2 9 5 Data Run Time Client Server Runtime Version 8 DB2 Client Run Time Client Lite Version 9 1 DB2 Runtime Client Install a new copy of DB2 9 5 Data Server Client then manually migrate Version 9 1 or Version 8 client instances Install the Version 9 5 Data Server Runtime Client as a new copy Manually migrate your Version 9 1 or Version 8 client instance Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 181 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm For Linux environments the client migration process is the same for both DB2 Version 9 5 clients The process is as follows 1 Checked the client supported described in Considerations on page 180 2 Back up the client configuration The following two commands create two files in your current directory that contain database manager configuration the information of cataloged databases db2 get dbm cfg gt dbm_client cfg db2cfexp cfg_profile backup 3 Install DB2 9 5 client 4 Migrate your client insta
48. 10 417 87 11 313 62 14 419 25 15 679 75 16 347 25 The LOCK WITH FORCE option may be used to force off conflicting applications with load operation to allow the load operation to proceed without waiting The forced application will receive an error SQL1224N The ALLOW READ ACCESS option is not supported if the REPLACE option is specified otherwise error code SQL3340N with reason code 1 will be returned Since a load replace operation deletes the existing table data before loading the new data there is no pre existing data to query until after the load operation is complete For partitioned database the message files will not be displayed to the console or retained for the load operations initiated from the CLP To save or view the contents of these files after a partitioned database load has completed the MESSAGES option of the LOAD command must be specified A fully qualified file name to the MESSAGES file is recommended for example db2backup datamove myload msg If the MESSAGES option is used once the load operation has completed the message files on each database partition will be transferred to the client machine and stored in files with the base name indicated by the MESSAGES option For 314 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm partitioned database load operations the name of the file corresponding to the load process that produced it is listed in Table 6 1 Table
49. 310 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm LOAD_TO_FILE 001 00000000 Success PARTITION 000 00000000 Success PARTITION 001 00000000 Success PRE_PARTITION 000 00000000 Success Summary of Partitioning Agents Rows Read 3000000 Rows Rejected 0 Rows Partitioned 3000000 db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select count from db2instl itemload 1 record s selected db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove load gt 1s la total 27348 drwxr xr x 2 db2inst1 db2iadml 4096 2008 02 11 11 32 drwxr xr x 4 db2inst1 db2iadml 4096 2008 02 11 11 30 Yw r 1 db2inst1 db2iadml 27959550 2008 02 11 11 32 item del 000 db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2_all ls la db2backup datamove load total 27348 drwxr xr x 2 db2instl db2iadml 4096 2008 02 11 11 32 drwxr xr x 4 db2instl db2iadml 4096 2008 02 11 11 30 rw r 1 db2inst1 db2iadm1 27959550 2008 02 11 11 32 item del 000 mensa 1s la db2backup datamove load completed ok total 27332 drwxr xr x 2 db2instl db2iadml 4096 2008 02 11 11 36 drwxr xr x 4 db2instl db2iadml 4096 2008 02 11 11 35 rw r 1 db2inst1 db2iadm1 27946236 2008 02 11 11 36 item del 001 gemini 1s la db2backup datamove load completed ok db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamoved gt db2 load from item del of del replace into itemload copy yes to db2backup datamove copydata partitioned db config mode load_only part_file_location
50. 6 13 SSV backup of all database partitions db2inst1 mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb on all dbpartitionnums online to db2backup compress Part Result 0000 DB200001 0001 DB200001 Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully 20080201170437 Monitoring the backup database utility The backup database utility writes an entry into the database recovery history file for each backup You can query it using the LIST HISTORY command When the database backup is running you can use the LIST UTILITY command to monitor the progress of the backup utility as shown in Example 6 14 The option WITH DETAILS is used in this example Example 6 14 LIST UTILITIES to monitor the backup db2instl mensa gt db2 list utilities show detail ID Type Database Name Partition Number Description Start Time State Invocation Type Throttling Priority Progress Monitoring Estimated Percentage Complete Total Work Completed Work Start Time ID Type Database Name Up and Running with DB2 on Linux 327 BACKUP ITSODB 0 online db 02 21 2008 14 28 40 181501 Executing User Unthrottled 29 304720105 bytes 87135441 bytes 02 21 2008 14 28 40 181510 135 BACKUP ITSODB Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Partition Number 1 Description online db Start Time 02 21 2008 14 28 41 8
51. 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm INSTALL_TSAMP YES Installing DB2 using the response file To install DB2 using the response file use db2setup command with r option For example db2setup r db2home db2inst1 db2ese rsp db2_install utility For root installation the db2_install utility installs the DB2 filesets but does not create an instance users or perform any other configuration tasks performed by the DB2 Setup wizard Some people prefer to use db2_ install when installing DB2 on a large complex database system that has special requirements Installing DB2 1 Log in as root 2 Change to the directory where the DB2 product DVD is mounted by entering the following command cd mnt dvd where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the DVD 3 Enter the db2_install command to start the db2_install script 4 When db2_install prompts you for installation path enter no if you do not want change the default directory The default installation directory for DB2 copy on Linux is opt ibm db2 V9 5 5 When db2_install prompts you for the product keyword enter in ESE Post installation tasks After installing DB2 using db2_install do the following Create group and user IDs if not already done Create a DB2 Administration Server DAS Create a DB2 instance Create links for DB2 file optional Configure TCP IP communications for the DB2 instance vvvvy Create group and user ID
52. April 17 2008 2 10 pm table itemload is now in backup pending state To remove the table space state we have to run a database or table space backup as shown in Example 6 52 Example 6 52 Table space backup pending state db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 list tablespaces show detail tail 22 Tablespace ID 7 Name TSDATA2 Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Large table space State 0x0020 Detailed explanation Backup pending Total pages 51200 Useable pages 51168 Used pages 10720 Free pages 40448 High water mark pages 10720 Page size bytes 8192 Extent size pages 32 Prefetch size pages 32 Number of containers Minimum recovery time 2008 02 08 23 20 58 000000 DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table spaces on the current node are listed db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 backup db itsodb on all dbpartitionnums tablespace TSDATA2 online to db2backup Part Result 0000 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully 0001 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080208155111 When loading data in a partitioned database environment only non delimited ASCII ASC and delimited ASCII DEL files can be partitioned PC IXF files cannot be partitioned To load a PC IXF file into a multiple database partitioned table yo
53. April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 6 Administering databases This chapter contains information regarding some important database maintenance tasks for DB2 on Linux platforms such as database backup and recovery table and index reorganization and data movement via utilities such as export import and load and so on These topics are discussed gt Database backup and recovery Considerations for choosing database and table space recovery methods How to enable the automatic backup feature Basic usage of the utilities BACKUP RESTORE ROLLFORWARD gt Table and index reorganization and statistics collection Automatic table maintenance feature Table reorganization Statistic collection Package rebinding gt Data movement using EXPORT IMPORT and LOAD gt Job scheduling using the Task Center Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 223 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6 1 DB2 database backup and recovery A database can become unusable or corrupted in certain situations such as hardware failure power interruption or application mistakes To protect your database from losing any of your data it is important to have a good recovery strategy This includes regular schedule for taking backups of the entire database as well as saving the recovery log files Your overall strategy should also include procedures for recovering command scripts applications user defined func
54. Chapter 8 Application development 447 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm J We insert a few records into the PRODUCT table as shown in Example 8 27 Example 8 27 insert dml insert XML data into the product table INSERT INTO product entityid lastchange xdata VALUES 0 CURRENT TIMESTAMP lt description gt lt name gt Fleece jacket lt name gt lt price gt 19 99 lt price gt lt description gt 1 CURRENT TIMESTAMP lt description gt lt name gt Nylon pants lt name gt lt price gt 9 99 lt price gt lt description gt 2 CURRENT TIMESTAMP lt description gt lt name gt Si1k pants lt name gt lt price gt 9 99 lt price gt lt description gt 3 CURRENT TIMESTAMP lt description gt lt name gt Jean lt name gt lt price gt 7 99 lt price gt lt description gt 4 CURRENT TIMESTAMP lt description gt lt name gt Shirt lt name gt lt price gt 3 99 lt price gt lt description gt Now we can start querying the data Example 8 28 retrieves the product names for all products where the price is less than 9 in XML format The query is specified in XQuery syntax Example 8 28 Retrieve columns in XML format by using XQuery xquery_example sql xquery for i in db2 fn xmlcolumn PRODUCT XDATA description name price lt 9 return i Example 8 29 shows the query execution and the result in XML format Note that for better readability we have stripped the blanks in
55. Client software is deployed on desktop systems and provides API drivers that connect client server applications running on these desktop systems to a DB2 Connect server Designed to provide connectivity for client server applications in large scale demanding environments DB2 Connect server provides connection pooling and connection concentrator functions to maximize application availability while minimizing System z and System i resources DB2 Connect Application Server Edition DB2 Connect Application Server Edition is identical to the DB2 Connect Enterprise Server in its technology Just like the DB2 Connect Enterprise Edition it is designed for large scale demanding environments However its licensing terms and conditions are meant to address specific needs of multitier client server applications as well as applications that utilize Web technologies DB2 Connect Application Server Edition license charges are based on the size or the number of processors available to the application servers where the application is running DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition for zSeries DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition is ideal for organizations with extensive usage of DB2 Connect especially where multiple applications are involved This product provides program code of the DB2 Connect Personal Edition as well as program code identical to the DB2 Connect Application Server Edition for unlimited deployment throughout an organization Chapter 1 Introduction 9 68
56. DATABASE command completed successfully mensa db2 restore db itsodb completed ok DB20000I The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully gemini db2 restore db itsodb completed ok 2 Create a directory in a shared file system available for all database partitions or create the same directory on every physical database partition We need the directory for DB2 to export the data of the dropped table There needs to be sufficient space available in that file system for the exported table data db2_all mkdir db2backup rest_table Chapter 6 Administering databases 265 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 3 Determine the backup ID by looking in the history file Example 6 30 In a multi partitioned environment this has to be done on the catalog partition Example 6 30 List history for dropped table db2instl mensa gt db2 list history dropped table all for itsodb List History File for itsodb Number of matching file entries 1 Op Obj Timestampt Sequence Type Dev Earliest Log Current Log Backup ID D T 20080207095643 000000000000350800040004 DB2INST1 TAB1 resides in 1 tablespace s 00001 TSDATA1 Comment DROP TABLE Start Time 20080207095643 End Time 20080207095643 Status A DDL CREATE TABLE DB2INST1 TAB1 ID INTEGER NOT NULL NAME CHAR 10 DISTRIBUTE BY HASH ID IN TSDATA1 4 Roll forward the database with the correct table ID The table ID is list
57. DATABASE regardless on what database partition you issue this command from Compare the database configuration settings after migration with the configuration settings before the database is migrated a Database manager configuration settings b Database configuration parameter settings c Table spaces information d Application packages information You do not need to check package information for system generated packages 4 2 4 Post migration tasks After migrating your DB2 servers you should perform several post migration tasks to ensure that your DB2 servers perform as expected and at their optimum level 1 If you set the DIAGLEVEL database manager configuration parameter to 3 or higher as recommended in pre migration steps reset this parameter to the value set before the migration If you changed your log space setting as recommended in Migration requirements on page 165 reset the LOGFILSIZ LOGPRIMARY and LOGSECOND database configuration parameters to the values they had before migration Ensure that the amount of log space that you allocate is adequate for your DB2 server Start up your database with ACTIVATE DATABASE and review the administration notification log or the db2diag log file to verify that all database services are running properly and all buffer pools are activated There are new registry variables new configuration parameters and new default values for registry variables and configuration par
58. DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm l Workspace Launcher Select a workspace IBM Data Studio Developer stores your projects in a folder called a workspace Choose a workspace folder to use for this session home db2inst1 IBM rationalsd p7 O workspace oO Use this as the default and do not ask again Figure 8 11 Workspace selection in Data Studio To develop an application start from setting up a project Switch to the Data Perspective by selecting Window Open Perspective Data if you are not already there We create a Data Development Project by selecting File gt New Data Development Project We name it DataProject and take all the default values as shown in Figure 8 12 Press Next 2 New Data Development Project S Data Development Project Specify a basic definition for the new project Use the project to store a set of objects that can be deployed Project name l DataProject Use authorization ID as current schema Specify current schema in SQL format Current schema Omit current schema in generated SOL statements pner f cm Figure 8 12 Create Project Next we get to the connection panel You can either select an existing connection or create a new one Figure 8 13 on page 464 Chapter 8 Application development 463 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm u New Data Development Project O Select Conne
59. Data Server Runtime Client gt Command line tools The command line tools consist of the Command Line Processor CLP the configuration export command db2cfexp and the configuration import command db2cfimp Configuring Client using the Configuration Assistant First we show how to configure the client using the graphical tool 1 Start the Configuration Assistant Figure 3 29 on page 151 by running db2ca amp as a valid DB2 user or open it from the DB2 folder 150 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Configuration Assistant aN Fatigo Figure 3 29 Add Database Using Wizard from CA 2 In the next panel Figure 3 27 on page 126 select how you want to set up the connection to the database server Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 151 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Figure 3 30 Add Database wizard Select Search the network and click Next Expand the tree under Known systems until you see all databases on this system Select your desired database You can also choose to manually configure the connection if you know all the information necessary to connect to the database After filling out all required fields you can test a connection to this database Figure 3 31 on page 153 152 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Add Database Confirmation ITSODB cl
60. For example to add a contact db2inst1 itsosj sanjose ibm com to the contact list execute the following command db2 add contact db2inst1 type email address db2inst1 itsosj sanjose ibm com If you want to add the contact using the Contacts management GUI tool select Tools Contacts within the Health Center Figure 7 4 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 351 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Figure 7 4 Starting Contacts management Within the Contacts panel you can add or change contacts or contact groups or remove unwanted contacts or contact groups In addition you can also verify if the e mail address specified for the contact is reachable by pressing the Test button as shown in Figure 7 5 on page 352 nites Sis s db2inst1 db2inst1 itsosj sanjose ibm corr Change Contact db2inst1 itsosj sanjose ibm com f gt Figure 7 5 Contacts management 352 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm After pressing the Test button if the DB2 message returned shows that the test message sent successfully then an e mail will be sent to the specified e mail account Figure 7 6 m Subject Test message from the DB2 Admin Server on MENSA From db2insti mensa To db2inst1 itsosj sanjose ibm com This message is being sent to you as atest of the DB2 Tools notification system It indicates that
61. ITSODB 1 TID 3506432320 Appid NO db2inst1 080207233036 data management sqldEscalateLocks Probe 3 Database ITSODB ADM5502W The escalation of 813 locks on table DB2INST1 ITEM to lock intent X was successful 390 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm 7 4 2 DB2 diagnostic log db2diag log The Administration Notification log is the primary log file intended for use by database and system administrators Administration notification log messages plus other details based on the setting are also logged to the db2diag log using a standardized message format The db2diag log file is intended for use by DB2 Support for troubleshooting purposes and is the most often used file for DB2 problem investigation The file db2diag log is located under the directory which is specified by the database manager configuration parameter DIAGPATH also Another instance level parameter DIAGLEVEL is used to specify which type of diagnostic errors will be recorded in the db2diag log The following are valid values No diagnostic data captured Severe errors only All errors All errors and warnings All errors warnings and informational messages PONTE You may want to increase the value of this parameter to gather additional problem determination data to help resolve a problem The default value of DIAGLEVEL is 3 If you changed it to 4 for some reason remember to change it back to 3 or a lowe
62. Linux platforms a response file created for a root installation might not be usable for a non root installation Some response file keywords are valid for root installation only We do not recommend that you edit the sample response file for non root IDB2 installation Creating a response file using the DB2 Setup wizard Near the beginning of the DB2 Setup wizard on the Select the Installation response file creation or both window Figure 2 2 on page 61 select either Save my installation setting in a response file or Install product on this computer and save my settings in a response file option In the Response file name field enter the path where you want the DB2 Setup wizard to place the generated response file In our sample we save all installation settings to a file called db2wse rsp Example 2 24 shows the db2wse rsp file content Example 2 24 Sample response file db2wse rsp Product Installation LIC_AGREEMENT ACCEPT PROD WORKGROUP_SERVER_EDITION FILE db2home db2inst1 sq1l1ib INSTALL_TYPE TYPICAL Instance properties INSTANCE instl inst1 TYPE wse Instance owning user inst1 NAME db2inst1l inst1 AUTOSTART YES inst1 PORT_NUMBER 48786 Installed Languages Installing DB2 using the response file To install DB2 using the response file use db2setup command with r option For example Chapter 2 Installation 63 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2setup
63. Locklist Sort area DATABASE_MEMORY INSTANCE_MEMORY INSTANCE_MEMORY N Database 2 DS F Database 1 Database 4 Database 6 Figure 3 19 STMM For newly created databases the self tuning feature is turned on by default You can see that from the database configuration parameters as shown in Example 3 34 Example 3 34 Parameters turned on for STMM db2inst2 puget gt db2 get db config for itsodb grep i automatic Size of database shared memory 4KB DATABASE MEMORY AUTOMATIC Max storage for lock list 4KB LOCKLIST AUTOMATIC Percent of lock lists per application MAXLOCKS AUTOMATIC Package cache size 4KB PCKCACHESZ AUTOMATIC Sort heap thres for shared sorts 4KB SHEAPTHRES SHR AUTOMATIC Sort list heap 4KB SORTHEAP AUTOMATIC Database heap 4KB DBHEAP AUTOMATIC SQL statement heap 4KB STMTHEAP AUTOMATIC Default application heap 4KB APPLHEAPSZ AUTOMATIC Application Memory Size 4KB APPL_MEMORY AUTOMATIC Statistics heap size 4KB STAT_HEAP_SZ AUTOMATIC Number of asynchronous page cleaners NUM _IOCLEANERS AUTOMATIC Number of I 0 servers NUM_IOSERVERS AUTOMATIC Default prefetch size pages DFT_PREFETCH SZ AUTOMATIC 130 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Max number of active ap
64. Next Chapter 2 Installation 77 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Select the installation type You may choose a Typical Compact or Custom installation Typical installs most DB2 components except for the Base application development tools Click the View Features button to see what components will get installed Compact installs only basic DB2 features and functionality Custom allows you install whatever components you want An advantage of the Custom option is that it allows you to install the Base application development tools with DB2 With the Typical option the Base application development requires a separate installation On the Select the Installation response file creation or both window Figure 2 15 select Install DB2 and save your settings in a response file We rename the response file to db2ese_mpp rsp Then click Next O root db2ese_mpp rsp e Figure 2 15 MPP Installation Select installation response file creation or both 7 On the next windows you can choose to install IBM TSA or not then click Next 8 Set user information for the DB2 Administration Server as shown in Figure 2 16 on page 79 This user administers the Database Administration Server Choose existing user dasusr1 click Next 78 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm User rera IB Sigs clari Wie Trog gigas MEERA ETEN T GI
65. POWER Linux distributions SLES 9 and RHEL 4 x86 x86_64 IA64 POWER Linux distributions SLES 9 and RHEL 4 on this architecture File system type and minimum level required ext2 ext3 ReiserFS VERITAS Storage Foundation 4 1 VxFS ext2 ext3 or ReiserFS on a small computer system interface SCSI disks DIO or CIO requests submitted by the database manager when NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING is specified Default behavior when neither NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING nor FILE SYSTEM CACHING is specified No file system caching No file system caching file system caching using fibre channel protocol FCP zSeries Raw devices Raw devices can only be used for DMS storage DMS table spaces require more administration but provide superior performance Raw device containers generally provide the best performance because the database accesses the disk directly bypassing all of the operating system cache and locking However as mentioned in File systems on page 40 Direct I O file systems DIO reduce the gap between DMS files and raw devices For a detailed procedure of how to set up raw I O on your Linux machine refer to Linux documentation Note Since DB2 Version 9 1 the previous raw I O method that required binding the block device to a character device using the raw utility is deprecated This raw I O method is also deprecated in the Linux operating system and will be removed in a future release
66. R Statementt sql p Outline 23 S I am 2 xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 22 xml i E products Y E products V e product Y E product xmins http posample org xmins http posample org Y E description pid 10 E name C3 Web Services Y E description E price v XML E name Fleece jacket Y E product xmins http posample org wsl E price G description b C XML Documents YV E product b CI XML Schema xmins http posample org 11 E xsLT pid O description E name Nylon pants E price 999 Y g DataProject SAMPLE jdbe db2 localhost 50001 SAMPLE gt SOL Scripts C Stored Procedures C User Defined Functions GU eZine 34 Database Explorer 53 m 11 Design Source BS Dad fa a 7 le Ca Connections a Properties 5 Tasks X Problems Error Log Model Report Data Output Bookmarks 1 items g TSODB DB2 Alias a P Description Resource Path a MENSA DB2 Alias V SAMPLE DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows V9 v SAMPLE Buffer Pools gt IBMDEFAULTBP b Groups LJ b C Remote Servers a gt Roles g QE m Need to create the DTD for the XML document Figure 5 13 Sample perspective for a workspace Perspectives A perspective is a collection of views and editors grouped into a particular layout Perspectives reflect different roles or tasks within your workspace for instance debug perspective
67. Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm gt DB2COMM Default null This determines which protocol will be used to communicate with DB2 Usually TCP IP between server and client accept communication to S390 systems On Linux TCP IP is the only supported protocol for client server communications gt DB2INSTANCE set by the DB2 profile After you have enabled your user for DB2 by executing the db2profile script this environment variable is set to the name of the current instance Note Details of all the registry variables are described in the Information Center at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21 uw v9r5 index jsp topic com ib m db2 1luw admin regvars doc doc c0007340 html db2set on command line db2set is the command to set registry variables The command can be executed using the command prompt Example 3 37 Example 3 37 Setting and deleting a registry variable db2instl puget gt db2set db2instl puget gt db2set DB2COMM tcpip db2instl puget gt db2set DB2COMM tcpip db2instl puget gt db2set DB2COMM db2inst1l puget Vv db2ca graphical tool To start the graphical tool issue the command db2ca amp In the main window select Configure DB2 Registry as shown in Figure 3 27 on page 144 Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 143 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm ES Configuration Assistant Indirect Fi
68. Spaces E SYSCATSPACE amp TEMPSPACE1 Ba USERSPACE1 amp BMDB2SAMPLEREL amp TSDATAL H SYST OOLSPACE E SYSTOOLSTMPSPAC Ba TSDATA2 A BSPDMS_O H 2 ITSOREPL Figure 7 11 Select a database object Once the object is chosen you can modify the health indicators settings for the database objects Figure 7 12 shows the default global setting from the table space level In our example a threshold value of 80 is set for a warning Likewise another threshold value 90 is set for alarm Both default values are expressed in percentage 358 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Object Health Indicator Configuration db2inst 1TSODB TBSPDMS 0 db2instl ITSODB TBSPDMS_0 V Table Space Storage Automatic Resize Table Sp Yes Table Space Automatic Resi Yes Table Space Operational St Yes Table Space Utilization Figure 7 12 Health indicator settings in our sample To configure a health indicator double click the health indicator you want to change For example you can double click the health indicator for table space utilization to configure the settings for this health indicator See Figure 7 13 on page 360 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 359 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Configure Health Indicator able Space Utilization ts ts_util Figure 7 13 Configuring a health indicator for t
69. Table partitioning and row compression DB2 offers numerous features and functions to support your enterprise databases We call out here two table related features for you to consider when designing your tables Table partitioning feature provides you the capability to divide table data across multiple storage objects called data partitions or ranges according to values in one or more table partitioning key columns of the table With table partitioning you are able to roll in and roll out of table data efficiently detach or reattach a data partition for back up restore or reorganization and potentially boost query performance through data partition elimination When you design your database you may want to consider table partitioning feature for large tables For more details refer to Database Partitioning Table Partitioning and MDC for DB2 9 SG24 7467 tHe main idea of row compression is save disk storage space Additional advantages of row compression including possible disk I O saving increasing buffer pool hit ratio and backup image size decrease For more details refer to Information Center at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21uw v9r5 topic com ibm db2 1uw admi n dbobj doc doc c0023489 htm 3 4 Further configuration DB2 uses log files to record its transactions To improve the performance and to ease the maintenance work consider changing the location for online logs archive logs and db2diag log 3 4 1
70. Tools Catalog creation on page 487 334 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm The tools catalog database contains task information created by the Task Center and Control Center These tasks are run by the scheduler on the DB2 Administration Server Figure 6 45 shows the relationship between DB2 tools DB2 instances DAS Scheduler and the Tools Catalog database TCP IP Systems Linux Unix and Windows DB2 Instances Tool Set DB2 Control Center DB2 Task Center DB2 Warehouse Center Configuration Assistant DB2 administration server See eet Scheduler Tools Catalog Database Figure 6 45 How DAS and Tools Catalog Database relate to other parts of DB2 6 4 2 Task Center and Scheduler After the DAS has started and the Tools Catalog is ready you can start the Task Center within the DB2 Control Center or other tools where the Tools menu is available You can use the Task Center to run tasks either immediately or according to a schedule and to notify people about the status of the completed tasks The Task Center includes functionality from the Script Center in previous versions of DB2 plus additional functionality A task is a script together with the associated success conditions schedules and notifications You can create a task within the Task Center create a script within another tool and save it t
71. Visualizer Memory Visualizer DHBAPOORBE S O 5 seconds Backup Restore _ UE 2 5 782 5 MB 38 Package Cache _ 29 94 MB Unknow Catalog Cache H _ 12 5 MB Unknown Other Memory _ 7 5 MB Unknown ECE w a 417 5 MB Unknow H Undefined Heap l 5 MB Unknown H Undefined Heap _ 12 44 MB Unknow Be ADO barmu Ana f FEN AA KAD SE han kean mas Memory Usage Plot 12 00 PM 2 12 08 Time Unit Minute Figure 7 28 Using Memory Visualizer to monitor DB2 memory usage Within this panel you can gt View memory usage for a specific memory heap or buffer or view memory usage at the overall level gt Specify which memory information to display and which information to hide for a DB2 instance and its databases in the Customize Columns panel which can be displayed by choosing View Customize Columns gt Update the configuration parameters for an individual memory component to prevent it from using too much or too little memory what you need to do is select the value in Parameter Value field and then input a new one gt Toggle which memory component will be displayed in the Memory Usage Plot graph which is located at the bottom of Memory Visualizer main window Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 375 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Save or load me
72. VxFS and ReiserFS In our example for database related file systems we use the ext3 format with jounal mode to create a journal file system To show all defined file systems issue the df command as shown in Example 2 1 This shows the output for a partitioned database environment For a single partition environment you do not need NFS exported file system for DB2 Example 2 1 df command Filesystem 1K blocks Used Available Use Mounted on dev sda2 50572564 21169652 29402912 42 udev 1921324 184 1921140 1 dev dev sdb5 20641788 924912 19716876 5 export db2home dev sdb6 4822142 82420 4739722 2 database dev sdb7 1010865 41150 969715 5 db2temp dev sdb8 amp 544166 41280 502886 8 db2logl dev sdb9 544166 41280 502886 8 db2log2 dev sdb10 1010863 41271 969592 5 db2logarc dev sdb11 5099266 2034030 3065236 40 software mensa export db2home 20641792 924896 19716896 5 db2home To show all NFS mounted file systems issue following command on the host where the file system physically exists Example 2 2 showmount a 3 ordered is the ext3 file system default mode 42 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Example 2 2 showmount command mensa showmount a All mount points on mensa 9 43 86 90 mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com export db2home File system configuration recommendations There are many different ways to
73. You also can use it as a framework for your further development If you have installed the runtimes of the application server WebSphere Tomcat and son on you can debug and run them from within your workspace 5 3 7 Tips 220 Here are a few useful tips for using the Data Studio gt If you double click on the title bar of a view or tab the related panel expands to full screen Another double click resizes it back to the previous size You can rearrange your layout freely You can move any view into another part of the pane by just using drag and drop Keyboard shortcut saves key strokes and can increase your productivity use Help Key Assist or Shift Ctr1 L to shows the available keyboard shortcuts In the editor view a very helpful function Content Assist keyboard shortcut Ctr1 Space can help you complete the name of the object you are currently typing in Tips and tricks provides useful information for working efficiently with the Data Developer Use Help Tips and Tricks to show the available tips and tricks Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm gt If you select Help Tutorial Gallery you get to tutorial sessions They introduce you the various features of Data Studio in a guided tour Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 221 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 222 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review
74. a multiple partitioned database The Create Database Wizard can also be used to create a multi partitioned database However for a multi partitioned environment we recommend that you use the DB2 command line instead of the Create Database wizard In this section we provide an example of setting up a partitioned database over two physical hosts with one logical partitions on each host Before you create a multi partitioned database you should consider which partition will be the catalog partition In a partitioned database environment the create database command affects all database partitions that are listed in the db2nodes cfg file The database partition from which this command is issued becomes the catalog database partition for the new database Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 109 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Tip On a host with more than one partition every command or SQL statement runs against the first database partition on this host by default To run the commands or SQL statements on the other database partitions you need to specify the database partition by setting the DB2NODE variable or by using the DB2 command SET CLIENT Log on as the instance owner or any user with sysadm or sysctrl authority to the host where the database catalog should be created Verify that you have initialized your DB2 environment as shown in Example 3 13 Example 3 13 Verify DB2 environment db2instl mens
75. a non Unicode database in DB2 UDB Version 8 2 to a Version 9 5 conversion 186 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm Example 4 18 Converting DB2 Version 8 database non unicode to Version 9 5 unicode The steps bellow create a DB in DB2 UDB V8 db2instl gemini gt export LANG en_US is088591 db2instl gemini gt db2 CREATE DATABASE itso ON database db2inst1 USING CODESET 1252 TERRITORY BR COLLATE USING SYSTEM DB20000I1 The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully db2instl gemini gt db2 get db cfg for itso grep Database Database Configuration for Database itso Database configuration release level 0x0a00 Database release level 0x0a00 Database territory BR Database code page 1252 Database code set 1252 Database country region code 55 Database collating sequence UNIQUE Database page size 4096 Database is consistent YES db2instl gemini gt db2 tvf create_tables sql This script creates tables and inserts some lines db2instl gemini gt db2level DB21085I Instance db2instl uses 32 bits and DB2 code release SQL08028 with level identifier 03090106 Informational tokens are DB2 v8 1 3 136 s070720 MI00194 and FixPak 15 Product is installed at opt IBM db2 V8 1 Here starts the steps to the non Unicode to Unicode conversion db2instl gemini gt cd temp db2inst1 gemini temp gt db2move ITSO
76. all connections to DB2 databases go through even when the license policy is violated When a violation occurs a license violation message is written to db2diag 1og The Hard Stop enforcement policy does not permit any connections that violate the license policy To specify the enforcement policy type do the following 1 Select Change from the License menu 2 Select the appropriate radio button under Enforcement policy Generating a compliance report To verify license compliance of DB2 features you can generate a compliance report It lists DB2 features out of compliance with your current product entitlement Each DB2 feature status is listed as one of the following gt In compliance The feature has been used and is properly licensed gt Violation The feature is not licensed and has been used You can generate a compliance report using the License Center by selecting Generate Compliance Report from the License menu Figure 3 34 shows the report License Compliance Report License Compliance Report Last license compliance reset date 01 31 2008 DB2 Enterprise Server Edition In compliance DB2 Database Partitioning Violation DB2 Performance Optimization ESE Not used DB2 Storage Optimization Violation DB2 Advanced Access Carat Not used DB2 Geodetic Data Management Not used DB2 pureXML ESE Not used IBM Homogeneous Federation ESE Not used IBM Homogeneous Replication ESE Not used Figur
77. allocated from the monitor heap Its size is controlled by the MON_HEAP_ SZ configuration parameter The amount of memory required for monitoring activity varies widely depending on the number of monitoring applications and event monitors the switches set and the level of database activity SHEAPTHRES For private sorts this parameter is an instance wide soft limit on the total amount of memory that can be consumed by private sorts at any given time For shared sorts this parameter is a database wide hard limit on the total amount of memory consumed by shared sorts at any given time By reaching this limit no more shared sorts are allowed NUM_POOLAGENTS Can be set to AUTOMATIC For a Decision Support System DSS environment with which few applications connect concurrently set this value small For Online Transaction Processing OLTP with many concurrent connected applications set it larger to prevent extra creation of db2agents which are time costs Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm gt INTRA_PARALLEL For an OLTP environment set this value to NO due to the fact that transaction throughput is more important than parallel work OLTP queries read update or insert only one or a few rows and therefore it doesn t make sense to split this work over more processes In a DSS environment typically most of all queries join many tables at once We recommend that yo
78. and Business Intelligence Veiko is a member of the Central Region Frontoffice support team and the EMEA BI VFE virtuell frontend and an IBM Certified Advanced Database Administrator He is an SAP Support Backoffice Specialist for DB2 for LUW His primary focus is on DB2 backup restore and recover iv Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899pref fm Figure 0 1 Left to right LiFang Helmut Veiko and Christian Acknowledgements Thanks to the following people for their contributions to this project Boris Bialek lan Hakes Jeff Shantz Martin Schlegel Rav Ahuja Grant Hutchison Yvonne Chan Amy Tang Budi Surjanto Paul Zikopoulos IBM Toronto Laboratory Canada George Lapis Gary Lazzotti Tom Cheung IBM Silicon Laboratory USA Preface Vv 6899pref fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Emma Jacobs Sangam Racherla Deanna Polm International Technical Support Organization Thanks to the authors of the previous editions of this book gt Authors of the first edition Up and Running with DB2 on Linux published in March 2003 were Rav Ahuja Louisa Ford Paul Jud Kang Yong Ying Become a published author Join us for a two to six week residency program Help write a book dealing with specific products or solutions while getting hands on experience with leading edge technologies You will have the opportunity to team with IBM technical professionals
79. application code to upgrade simply install the license certificate DB2 Express 9 5 can be deployed on systems with up to two processors The DB2 data server cannot use more than 4 GB of memory DB2 Workgroup Server Edition DB2 Workgroup 9 5 is the data server of choice for deployment in a departmental workgroup or medium sized business environment DB2 Workgroup 9 5 can be deployed on systems with up to four processors and 16 GB of memory DB2 Enterprise Server Edition DB2 Enterprise 9 5 is designed to meet the data server needs of mid size to large size businesses It can be deployed on servers of any size from one processor to hundreds of processors DB2 Enterprise 9 5 is an ideal foundation for building on demand enterprise wide solutions such as high performing 24 x 7 available high volume transaction processing business solutions or Web based solutions It is the data server backend of choice for industry leading ISVs building enterprise solutions such as business intelligence content management e commerce enterprise resource planning customer relationship management or supply chain management Additionally DB2 Enterprise 9 5 offers connectivity compatibility and integration with other enterprise DB2 and Informix data sources DB2 Enterprise 9 5 includes table partitioning HADR online reorganization materialized query tables MQTs multidimensional clustering MDC query parallelism connection concentrator the governo
80. are then used by the restore command to recover the database up to the current point in time Chapter 6 Administering databases on page 223 describes the setup of the archive logs path in detail 3 4 3 Change the path for db2diag log DB2 logs information such as administrative event or errors in the diagnostic file db2diag 1log This is an instance level log file and is located in lt instance home gt sqllib db2dump by default It is a good practice to examine this file from time to time Very often this file contains additional information about some DB2 commands Especially commands which interact with the operating system such as creating table spaces You will find information about wrong path names permission problems errno codes and so on The level of detailness logged in db2diag log is specified in the DIAGLEVEL DBM configuration parameter ranging from 0 to 4 The default is 3 The higher Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 119 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm the number is the more information is logged Setting it to 4 can have a performance impact on the database You need to maintain db2dump directory as the db2diag log file keeps growing and other dump files can be added to the directory by DB2 This means you have to purge old files and roll over files or compress them You should consider relocating this directory to a separate file system so that it will not impact the instance if
81. b Shut down your database and consider putting the database in quiesce mode c Use the raw a Linux command to see which raw bindings you defined d Create a configuration file for the db2relocatedb command for each database partition that requires changes Use the clauses CONT_PATH and LOG_DIR to specify the old value with the new value Do not forget to include NODENUM value in the configuration file e Execute do2relocatedb command using your definition created in previous step in each database partition that requires changes f Activate the database 12 As instance owner stop the instance by issuing db2stop Login as root and issue ps ef grep db2 to check for any outstanding processes on the instance you are migrating If any processes are still running such as db2bp kill the process using the following command kill 9 lt pid gt Where pid represents the process ID number This process have to be done in all database partition servers Pay attention if there are others instances before kill the processes 172 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm 13 Run db2ckmig in each database partition to verify that a database can be migrated The db2ckmig command verifies that all of the following conditions are true A catalogued database actually exists A database is not in an inconsistent state A database is not in a backup pending state A da
82. backup files in TSM You can view and delete DB2 backup files as well as bring backup files from TSM storage to the database server All options are shown if you type db2adut1 Note A complete description for using db2adutl is in Command Reference SC23 5846 00 6 1 4 Backup utility We have completed all the steps as described in 6 1 1 Enable roll forward recovery and log archiving on page 226 Now we describe how to take different types of database backup Backing up databases DB2 provides several database backup options gt Full offline A full offline database backup allows you to restore the database image without applying any log records Example 6 8 shows the offline backup command Example 6 8 Full offline backup to disk db2instl mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb to db2backup Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080204081423 Chapter 6 Administering databases 235 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Full online During online backup the database is still accessible for applications Rollforward recovery has to be enabled To be able to recover the database from an online backup at least you need the range of active log files from the online backup time frame To make sure that these log files available you can use the INCLUDE LOGS clause within the backup command the default behavior in V9 5 This function includes the required log files for recovery wi
83. be committed The LOCK WITH FORCE option may be used to force off conflicting applications and allow the load operation to proceed without having to wait In Example 6 55 on page 313 we create a table named ITEMLOAD and insert three rows as the pre existing data We then use ALLOW READ ACCESS to load additional rows from a source file in DEL format While the load is taking place we try to access the table from another session 312 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Example 6 55 Load data with ALLOW READ ACCESS db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 drop table itemload DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 create table itemload itemid integer not null primary key amount decimal 8 2 in TSDATA2 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 insert into itemload values 4000001 1 1 4000002 2 2 4000003 3 3 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load from item del of del insert into itemload allow read access Agent Type Node SQL Code Result LOAD 000 00000000 Success LOAD 001 00000000 Success PARTITION 001 00000000 Success PRE_PARTITION 000 00000000 Success RESULTS 2 of 2 LOADs completed successfully Summary of Partitioning Agents Rows Read 3000000 Rows Rejected 0 Rows Partitioned
84. buffer pool is changed to 80 0 M highlighted in bold now Example 7 9 Using db2mirk to monitor database memory usage db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2mtrk d Tracking Memory on 2008 02 12 at 14 28 38 Memory for database ITSODB utilh pckcacheh other catcacheh bph 1 bph S32K 64 0K 384 0K 192 0K 192 0K 8 2M 832 0K bph S16K bph S8K bph S4K shsorth lockh dbh 576 0K 448 0K 384 0K 0 640 0K 18 8M apph 68339 apph 5231 apph 5230 apph 5229 apph 5227 appshrh 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 128 0K db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 alter bufferpool ibmdefaultbp immediate size 10000 db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2mtrk d Tracking Memory on 2008 02 12 at 14 29 20 Memory for database ITSODB utilh pckcacheh other catcacheh bph 1 bph S32K 64 0K 384 0K 192 0K 192 0K 80 0M 832 0K bph S16K bph S8K bph S4K shsorth lockh dbh 576 0K 448 0K 384 0K 0 640 0K 18 8M apph 68339 apph 5231 apph 5230 apph 5229 apph 5227 appshrh 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 128 0K Note 1 Ina partitioned database environment this command can be invoked from any database partition defined in the db2nodes cfg file It returns information only for current partition 2 You might have noticed that more than one bph is shown in the example for only one database this is because except the buffer pools created by users there are four small hidden buffer pools created by DB2 to ensure that an appropr
85. classic and inplace table reorganization In Example 6 39 on page 291 we use classic table reorganization method with ALLOW READ ACCESS option 290 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Example 6 39 REORG TABLE with ALLOW READ ACCESS option db2inst1 mensa gt db2 reorg table item index PK_ITEM_ITEMID allow read access on all dbpartitionnums DB200001 The REORG command completed successfully For the inplace table reorganization we use ALLOW WRITE ACCESS option If you want to see more informations about a running REORG you can monitor the REORG process using different methods GET SNAPSHOT command db2pd tool SNAPTAB_REORG administrative view and SNAP_GET_TAB_REORG table function The monitoring can be done manually or with a shell script To monitor the progress of the REORG job we run the monitor commands to collect the information in another terminal session while the REORG job is running The time needed to collect the REORG information will depend on the data volume you are operating against and your system s capability Example 6 40 shows the simple shell script we use Example 6 40 Start a script to monitor table reorganization procedure db2instl mensa gt while true gt do gt db2 get snapshot for tables on itsodb gt gt snap out db2pd reorgs d itsodb gt gt snap out sleep 1 gt done Following the startup of the monitor program
86. data perspective and version control perspective You can switch to a different perspective by selecting Window gt Open Perspective gt and then one of perspectives in the sub menus You can also create your own perspectives or modify existing ones Figure 5 13 on page 208 is the Data perspective At the right top you can see the recently used perspectives Figure 5 14 Clicking on them switches to the related perspective 208 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm FY Data fy CVS Repositor Figure 5 14 Buttons to switch between recently used perspectives Here are some of the available perspectives gt Data This is the default perspective you get if you enter the Data Studio It allows you to manipulate your database database objects and data gt Debug You are asked to switch to this perspective if you start debugging a Java program It supports you in debugging code gt J2EE Provides a layout that is more useful if you develop J2EE applications You might use it if you create web services which access your data gt Java This perspective is for developing Java applications gt Team Synchronizing Offers you the tools for synchronizing your code with the code repository Views A view is a representation of a resource in a project A resource can be a certain type of file or an object in the database All views of a certain resource are
87. databases 257 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm UTILITY_TYPE 2 UTILITY_STATE DBPARTITIONNUM ROLLFOWARD_RECOVERY Online Tablespa EXECUTE 0 1 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP UTILITY_STATE substr PROGRESS DESCRIPTION 1 10 desc PROGRESS START TIME PROGRESS _TOTAL_UNITS PROGRESS COMPLETED_UNITS DBPARTITIONNUM from SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL_PROGRESS SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP UTILITY_STATE DESC PROGRESS_START_TIME PROGRESS_TOTAL_UNITS PROGRESS COMPLETED_UNITS DBPARTITIONNUM 2008 02 21 15 25 21 767401 EXECUTE Forward 2008 02 21 15 25 20 435226 38614 38614 0 2008 02 21 15 25 21 767401 EXECUTE Backward 2008 02 21 15 25 20 988645 5627893427 0 0 2 record s selected For the rollforward recovery there are two phases Forward and Backward During the forward phase log files are read and the log records are applied to the database During the backward phase any uncommitted changes applied during the forward phase are rolled back Database recovery using the Control Center Restore and roll forward are fully integrated in the DB2 Control Center You can access the wizard from the context menu of the database as shown in Figure 6 13 on page 259 258 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm o All Syste ntrol Center Figure 6 13 Database context menu The Restore Data Wizard Figure 5 16 on page 177 guides
88. db2 list tablespaces Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID 1 Name TEMPSPACE1 Type System managed space Contents System Temporary data State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal Tablespace ID 2 Name USERSPACE1 Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Large table space State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table spaces on the current node are listed Create table spaces and tables The next step is to create tables for your application When a database is created DB2 creates three default table spaces The USERSPACE1 is used for place the data tables Based on the database design more table spaces can be created The tables usually will be placed to a particular table space based on the application and database design It is common to create your own table spaces spread across all partitions or only a part of them Every table space has to be created in a database partition group Here we demonstrate the creation of a table space over all partitions defined in db2nodes cfg using the default database partition group IBMDEFAULTGROUP First we create the directory for the table space container on both systems using the following command db2_all typeset Z4 DB2NODE mkdir p db db2inst1 NODE DB2NODE ITSODB SAMPLE_MPL Example 3 18 on page 114 shows the creation of table space SAMPLE_MPL We use the variable N in th
89. db2diag A command This is to give a fresh start of db2diag log for easy error identification later 6 Move any existing dump files trap files and alert log files in the directory indicated by the DIAGPATH parameter to another directory 7 Migrate all databases to Version 9 5 format Log in as the instance owner and start instance using db2start as shown in Example 4 10 Example 4 10 Starting the instance dpfusr1 mensa sqllib db2dump gt db2start 01 30 2008 17 15 27 0 0 SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful 01 30 2008 17 15 28 1 0 SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful Run the db2 migrate database command to migrate the database The command syntax is as follows db2 migrate database lt database_alias gt user lt user_name gt using lt password gt Where database_alias represents the database you are migrating user_name represents the name under which the database is migrated and password is that user s password The user and password options are not required if you want to use the current user for the command See Example 4 11 Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 175 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 4 11 Migrating the database dpfusr1l gemini gt db2 migrate database dpfsamp DB200001 The MIGRATE DATABASE command completed successfully Note The catalog partition must be available when you issue the MIGRATE
90. detailed information on installing configuring managing and monitoring DB2 in a Linux environment We describe the DB2 product family and features for Linux and provide step by step instructions for a single as well as for multiple partitions DB2 system installation and configuration We cover how to migrate single and multiple partition DB2 to DB2 Version 9 5 and discuss in detail DB2 database administration in a Linux environment procedures and tools for database backup and recovery online maintenance and system monitoring We cover DB2 integrated tools and their features and use We discuss aspects of DB2 application development in the Linux environment and provide general tips about building and running DB2 applications on Linux and the use of DB2 application development tools SG24 6899 01 ISBN I I Iln ul TLL Redbooks INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL SUPPORT ORGANIZATION BUILDING TECHNICAL INFORMATION BASED ON PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE IBM Redbooks are developed by the IBM International Technical Support Organization Experts from IBM Customers and Partners from around the world create timely technical information based on realistic scenarios Specific recommendations are provided to help you implement IT solutions more effectively in your environment For more information ibm com redbooks
91. different architectures for deploying the product in the enterprise 1 2 DB2 for Linux features and offerings This section provides a description of DB2 Version 9 5 features supported platforms and product offerings 1 2 1 Features DB2 is an open standards multi platform relational database system that is strong enough to meet the demands of large corporations and flexible enough to serve medium sized and small businesses Its features include Exploitation of SMP and cluster based parallelism Federated support for a variety of data sources Advanced built in OLAP and business intelligence functions Ability to manage multiple data types including Binary Large Objects Built on open industry standards SQL DRDA CLI ODBC JDBC and more YYYY Y Chapter 1 Introduction 3 6899ch01 fm vvvvvvvyvvvvvvvvvvviy gt Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Leader in query optimization technology and performance Stored procedures UDFs data encryption and globalization Fully Web enabled and certified for leading enterprise applications High Availability features and Failover support HADR TSA and more J2EE certified and Java application interfaces for JDBC and SQLJ Support for open source interfaces like PHP Python and Perl Native XML support A graphical integrated toolset for managing local and remote databases Productivity tools for visual development and migration Support for the InfiniBand I O high spee
92. editing eere oe ete ee hee ek eee pha ee ee eee ee e A 213 5 3 4 ER Diagramming siske sssrini kannn ee eae 216 5 3 5 Data and object management 00 e eee eee 217 5 3 6 Data Web Services 0 000 c cee 219 537 MIPS sass piaia d aaa seen eee ed ae ee eee eee 220 Chapter 6 Administering databases 00005 223 6 1 DB2 database backup and recovery 0 0 cee eee eee 224 6 1 1 Enable roll forward recovery and log archiving 226 6 1 2 Recovery history file 0 0 0 eee ee 231 6 1 38 Enable usage of TSM nananana naaa 233 6 1 4 Backuprutility 2 c0 s cee nce aw nee ed ee wee ete a E 235 6 1 5 DB2 database recovery 00 cee eee 249 6 1 6 Redirected restore sample scenario 002 0 eee eae 260 6 1 7 Recovering a dropped table sample scenario 264 6 2 Table index reorganization and statistics collection 269 6 2 1 Automatic table maintenance 0 00 e eee eee 269 6 2 2 Manual table maintenance 000 e eee ee 275 6 3 Moving data using EXPORT IMPORT LOAD and db2move 297 6 3 1 Export data to files from database tables and views 298 Contents v 6899TOC fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6 3 2 Import data from files into database tables or views 301 6 3 3 Load data from files into database tables 305 6 3 4 Using db2move utility
93. enable the automatic resize feature By default this option is set to NO You can turn this feature on and off after you have created the table space Table spaces with this feature enabled will increase their size automatically up to the file system limit as the space is required You can specify the initial size the maximum size and the increase size 96 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Raw devices You can create DMS table space containers on block devices directly This approach offers the superior performance but also requires more administration Note Prior to Version 9 direct disk access using a raw controller utility on Linux was used This method is now deprecated and its use is discouraged The database manager will still allow you to use this method if the Linux operating system still supports it however there will be a message in the db2diag log indicating that its use is deprecated DB2 also allows you to create normal SMS and DMS table spaces in the file system with the option NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING The term normal means that they are created in the file system and not as raw devices This option same as for raw devices will bypass the double buffering caused by the file system buffer and the buffer pools However device files still have a little performance advantage over table spaces created with the NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING option The reason is
94. essential in ensuring that they are optimized for performance and recover ability DB2 offers the configurable automatic table maintenance function If you are unsure about when and how to reorganize your tables and indexes and collect statistics information you can incorporate automatic reorganization as part of your overall database maintenance plan If you want to manually reorganize the tables and indexes DB2 provides a REORG utility to do this After finishing the reorganization tasks use the RUNSTATS utility to gather information about the physical data storage characteristics of a table and the associated indexes Such information includes for example the number of records the table has how many pages are occupied by the table and the associated indexes the cluster ratio of the associated clustering index and so forth The DB2 optimizer will take advantage of these statistics when determining the access path to the data to gain better performance for subsequent database operations If you create a database in Version 9 1 or 9 5 automatic statistics collection is enabled by default With automatic statistic collection enabled the DB2 database manager automatically runs the RUNSTATS utility in the background to ensure that the correct statistics are collected and maintained 6 2 1 Automatic table maintenance Starting with Version 8 2 DB2 provides automatic maintenance capabilities for performing database backup keeping statisti
95. export KKKKK DB2MOVE KKKKK Action EXPORT Start time Wed Feb 6 16 51 37 2008 Connecting to database ITSO successful Server DB2 Common Server V8 2 8 Binding package automatically Bind file home db2inst1 sql1ib bnd db2move bnd Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 187 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Bind was successful EXPORT 2 rows from table DB2INST1 LOCATION EXPORT 2 rows from table DB2INST1 BRAND EXPORT 2 rows from table DB2INST1 CUSTOMER Disconnecting from database successful End time Wed Feb 6 16 51 38 2008 db2inst1 gemini temp gt db2look d itso e o unidb ddl 1 x f No userid was specified db2look tries to use Environment variable USER USER is DB2INST1 Creating DDL for table s Output is sent to file unidb ddl Binding package automatically Bind is successful Binding package automatically Bind is successful db2inst1 gemini temp gt vi unidb dd gt This point we did the step 4 lt db2inst1 gemini temp gt db2 terminate DB200001 The TERMINATE command completed successfully db2inst1 gemini temp gt db2 drop db itso DB200001 The DROP DATABASE command completed successfully db2instl gemini temp gt db2stop 02 06 2008 16 55 00 0 0 SQL1064N DB2STOP processing was successful SQL1064N DB2STOP processing was successful gemini opt ibm db2 V9 5 instance db2imigr db2inst1 System
96. for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 6 36 delete rows from table db2instl mensa gt db2 select count from item 3000000 1 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 tvf tmp itemdel sq delete from item where itemid gt 250000 and itemid lt 500000 DB20000I1 The SQL command completed successfully delete from item where itemid gt 750000 and itemid lt 1000000 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully delete from item where itemid gt 1250000 and itemid lt 1500000 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully delete from item where itemid gt 1750000 and itemid lt 2000000 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully delete from item where itemid gt 2250000 and itemid lt 2500000 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully delete from item where itemid gt 2750000 and itemid lt 3000000 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2instl mensa gt db2 select count from item 1500000 1 record s selected 3 Use REORGCHK with UPDATE STATISTICS option to obtain the new statistics and check the table again Example 6 37 Example 6 37 Using REORGCHK to update statistics for table db2inst1 mensa gt db2 reorgchk update statistics on table db2instl item Doing RUNSTATS Table statistics Fl 100 OVERFLOW CARD lt 5 288 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm F2 100 Effectiv
97. gt lt sequence gt lt complexType gt lt complexType name productType gt lt sequence gt lt element name description type tns descriptionType minOccurs 1 maxOccurs 1 gt lt element gt lt sequence gt lt attribute name pid type int gt lt attribute gt lt complexType gt lt complexType name productsType gt lt sequence gt lt element name product type tns productType minOccurs 1 maxOccurs unbounded gt lt element gt lt sequence gt lt complexType gt lt schema gt Figure 5 18 shows how it looks like in the XML schema editor ema http exam ple org ema gt Directives E Elements products productsT ype descriptionT ype productsT ype E productT ype Figure 5 18 Top view of the XSD If you double click the products element at the left side you can see its definition Figure 5 19 214 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm al productsT ype cos __ product 1 productT ype Figure 5 19 Definition of the products element Double clicking the title bar of the productsType element presents you its definition as shown in Figure 5 20 on page 215 productT ype pid int E productst ype e product 1 productType ees e description 1 1 descriptionType Figure 5 20 Definition of the product element To see the definition
98. gt lt name gt Nylon pants lt name gt lt price gt 9 99 lt price gt lt description gt lt product gt 446 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm lt products gt DB2 pureXML store the XML data is stored in database in a tree structure It does not store the XML document in text format but parses the document and stores the attribute values in a tree The attribute names are not stored in the tree but in a lookup table This storage model provides efficient data retrieval The DB2 components such as indexes explain the programming languages and the optimizer support this XML data model too Figure 8 3 on page 447 shows the storage layout for the XML document in Example 8 25 D products xml E lt products gt E lt product gt lt product gt E lt description gt Edeecriptions Legend D document node E element nodes A attribute nodes A T text nodes Figure 8 3 Storage layout for products xml 8 4 2 Using XML data In this section we demonstrate by examples how XML data can be used in DB2 Example 8 26 shows the DDL to create a simple XML table PRODUCTS for storing document ID timestamp and XML document Example 8 26 Create a table with an XML column CREATE TABLE product entityid INTEGER NOT NULL lastchange TIMESTAMP NOT NULL xdata XML PRIMARY KEY entityid
99. gt db2level DB21085I Instance db2inst1l uses 32 bits and DB2 code release SQL08028 with level identifier 03090106 Informational tokens are DB2 v8 1 3 136 s070720 MI00194 and FixPak 15 Product is installed at opt IBM db2 V8 1 with root user gemini opt ibm db2 V9 5 instance db2imigr db2inst1 db2ckmig was successful Database s can be migrated DBI1070I Program db2imigr completed successfully with DB2 instance owner db2inst1 gemini gt db2level DB21085I Instance db2inst1 uses 64 bits and DB2 code release SQL09050 with level identifier 03010107 Informational tokens are DB2 v9 5 0 0 s071001 LINUXAMD6495 and Fix Pack 0 Product is installed at opt ibm db2 V9 5 4 5 Migrating to a new database In this section we demonstrate by a simple example how to migrate to a new database to leverage the DB2 9 5 features and functions enabled in database creation time For example Unicode is set when a database is created To Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 185 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm convert from a non Unicode database to a Unicode database creating a new database is required The procedure to convert a DB2 Version 8 or Version 9 1 non Unicode database to a DB2 9 5 Unicode database is the same Be aware that the migration can take some time and requires large disk space if you have a huge database The following are t
100. in graphical view You can right click or double click on the graphical items to get more details EN Access Plan Graph SAMPLE Statement Node View Tools Help BPS ETTE 8 awh Package NULLID SYSSH200 Section number 65 Explain date and time 02 04 2008 7 36 39 PM Parallelism None Data Joiner No TBSCAN S 323 07 DB2INST 1 EMPMDC Figure 8 7 Access path in visual explain 8 5 2 Design advisor The Design Advisor can help you significantly improve the performance of your queries It takes a set of SQL statements called workload and suggests ways to improve the performance The suggestions may include New indexes New materialized query tables MQTs Clustering indexes Conversion to multidimensional clustering MDC tables Redistribution of tables Deletion of unused indexes and MQTs vvvvvy There are two ways to call the Design Advisor from the command line by using the command db2advis and from the Control Center Note The Design Advisor is described in detail in Tuning Database Performance SC23 5867 00 and in the Information Center in Database fundamentals Performance tuning Tuning database performance gt Design Advisor Chapter 8 Application development 457 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2advis db2advis reads the workload from a file containing the SQL statements or from the command line directly The following command calls the advisor for our s
101. instance has its own databases which other instances cannot access directly and all its database partitions share the same system directories It also has separate security from other instances on the same machine system allowing for example both production and development environments to be run on the same machine under separate DB2 instances without interfering with each other Instance s Databases Database partition group s g Table Space long data Figure 1 3 DB2 database objects 14 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm Databases A relational database presents data as a collection of tables A table consists of a defined number of columns and any number of rows Each database includes a set of system catalog tables that describe the logical and physical structure of the data a configuration file containing the parameter values allocated for the database and a recovery log Database partition groups A database partition group is a set of one or more database partitions Before creating tables for the database you first need to create the database partition group where the table spaces will be stored and then create the table space where the tables will be stored If a partition group is not specified there is a default group where table spaces are allocated In earlier versions of DB2 database partition groups were known as node groups In a non part
102. language Chapter 2 Installation 59 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Typical installs most DB2 components except for the Base application development tools Click the View Features button to see what components will get installed Compact installs only basic DB2 features and functionality Custom allows you install whatever components you want An advantage of the Custom option is that it allows you to install the Base application development tools with DB2 With the Typical option the Base application development requires a separate installation 1 Introduction 2 Software License Agreement 3 Installation type 4 Installation action GF meranen Select the installation type Typical 400 490 MB Compact 390 470 MB Irec AE Custom 390 680 MB Information about the installation type Typical The typical setup includes basic database server function database e administration tools and most product features and functionality B To add features for application development and other optional functionality later in the setup process click Custom pe To view all available features and those selected for a typical installation press the View Features button p View Features z IE 4 Back Next gt Finin Cancel Help Figure 2 1 Non root installation Select the installation type 6 O
103. lastname lastname XMLELEMENT NAME firstname firstnme XMLELEMENT NAME salary salary FROM employee WHERE salary lt 37000 The function XMLELEMENT is used to construct the XML data structure You can see the output in Example 8 37 Example 8 37 Example for extracted XML db2instl puget gt db2 x tf extract_xml sql cut cl 130 lt emp oyee gt lt empno gt 000280 lt empno gt lt 1 as tname gt SCHNEIDER lt 1astname gt lt firstname gt ETHEL lt firstname gt lt salary gt 0036250 00 lt salary gt lt emp1oyee gt lt emp 1oyee gt lt empno gt 000290 lt empno gt lt 1 astname gt PARKER lt 1astname gt lt firstname gt JOHN lt firs tname gt lt salary gt 0035340 00 lt salary gt lt emp1oyee gt lt emp oyee gt lt empno gt 000310 lt empno gt lt 1 astname gt SETRIGHT lt 1astname gt lt firstname gt MAUDE lt f irstname gt lt salary gt 0035900 00 lt salary gt lt emp oyee gt lt emp oyee gt lt empno gt 200310 lt empno gt lt 1 astname gt SPRINGER lt 1astname gt lt firstname gt MICHELLE lt firstname gt lt salary gt 0035900 00 lt salary gt lt emp loyee gt lt emp oyee gt lt empno gt 200330 lt empno gt lt 1 astname gt WONG lt 1astname gt lt fi rstname gt HELENA lt firs tname gt lt salary gt 0035370 00 lt salary gt lt emp1oyee gt lt emp oyee gt lt empno gt 200340 lt empno gt lt 1 as tname gt ALONZO lt 1astname gt lt firstname gt ROY lt first name gt lt salary gt 0031840 00 lt salary g
104. lt 5 F2 100 Effective Space Utilization of Data Pages gt 70 F3 100 Required Pages Total Pages gt 80 SCHEMA NAME CARD OV NP FP ACTBLK TSIZE F1 F2 F3 REORG Table DB2INST1 ITEM 1502010 0 3702 3702 30040200 0 100 100 Index statistics F4 CLUSTERRATIO or normalized CLUSTERFACTOR gt 80 F5 100 Space used on leaf pages Space available on non empty leaf pages gt MIN 50 100 PCTFREE F6 100 PCTFREE Amount of space available in an index with one less level Amount of space required for all keys lt 100 296 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm F7 100 Number of pseudo deleted RIDs Total number of RIDs lt 20 F8 100 Number of pseudo empty leaf pages Total number of leaf pages lt 20 SCHEMA NAME INDCARD LEAF ELEAF LVLS NDEL KEYS LEAF_RECSIZE NLEAF_RECSIZE LEAF_PAGE_OVERHEAD NLEAF_PAGE OVERHEAD F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 REORG Table DB2INST1 ITEM Index DB2INST1 PK_ITEM_ITEMID 1502010 3128 0 3 0 1502010 4 4 1340 1340 100 91 12 0 0 Here you may find that FP File Pages for table and LEAF Leaf Pages for index are lowered if the data were fragmented For table statistics you may find that is reported It means no REORG is required at present 6 Rebinding packages Rebinding is required to take advantage of the new statistics information For example if statistics information for the tables or indexes rela
105. lt lt 0 lt db2 backup db itsodb to db2backup db2_all lt lt O lt db2 backup db itsodb to db2backup Whether you back up the database partition one at a time or using db2_all managing backup images can be difficult due to the timestamp difference in each database partition backup image The log files can not be included in the backup image In Version 9 5 when you perform a backup operation from the catalog node of a partitioned database you can specify which database partitions to include in the backup or specify that all the database partitions should be included The specified database partitions will be backed up simultaneously and the backup timestamp associated with all specified database partitions will be the same Also you can include database logs with a SSV backup including logs in backup images is the default behavior for SSV backup that is if you specify the ON DBPARTITIONNUM parameter Finally when you restore from a SSV backup image you can specify to roll forward to end of logs which is the minimum recovery time calculated by the database manager Chapter 6 Administering databases 237 6899ch06 fm 238 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 6 13 shows the command to backup all database partitions The ON DBPARTITIONNUMS options specifies the database partition to be backup If you like to exclude the log files from the backup image use the EXCLUDE LOGS command parameter Example
106. made and releases the locks on the target table You can also specify that commit is taken place periodically during the import Chapter 6 Administering databases 301 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm The import utility can be invoked through the command line processor CLP the Import notebook in the Control Center by calling the ADMIN_CMD stored procedure or by calling the application programming interface API db2Import You can specify the MESSAGES parameter for the IMPORT utility to record errors warnings and informational messages associated with the IMPORT operation Attention If the volume of output messages generated by an import operation against a remote database exceeds 60 KB the utility will keep the first 30 KB and the last 30 KB Import table data through CLP Example 6 48 shows the IMPORT command issued through the CLP Example 6 48 Using IMPORT through DB2 CLP db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 create table itemimp like item DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 import from from item ixf of ixf commitcount 100000 messages itemimp msg insert into itemimp Number of rows read 3000000 Number of rows skipped 0 Number of rows inserted 3000000 Number of rows updated 0 Number of rows rejected 0 Number of rows committed 3000000 In Example 6 48 the COMMITCOUNT parameter is used It means that DB2 will per
107. manager In our example we show you how to archive DB2 logs to disk and TSM storage Our first task is to create the file system and directory that will hold the archived log files Use fdisk or any preferred tool to create the file system db2archive and mount it on each host of the database partitioned environment Create directory db2archive db2inst1 and set read write permissions for the instance owner user ID so that DB2 can access the directory mkdir db2archive db2inst1 chown db2instl db2iadml db2archive db2inst1 Turn on log archiving by updating database configuration db2 update db cfg for itsodb using logarchmethl disk db2archive Note The command applies to both a single and a multi partitioned database environment DB2 9 5 provides a single view of all database configuration elements across multiple partitions You can update the database configuration across all database partitions by invoking the UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION command against one database partition You no longer need to use the db2_all command To verify use the following command db2_all db2 get db cfg for itsodb grep LOGARCHMETH1 These steps can also be done through the DB2 Control Center Right click on the database name shows you the context menu Figure 6 4 on page 228 Chapter 6 Administering databases 227 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm All Systems All Databases Control Center ons Customize C
108. needed for application delivery and support in order to reduce the time and cost of empowering a broader user audience with more powerful data driven applications IBM Data Studio a foundation for innovation and a comprehensive data management solution is a family of integrated tools for database development and administration It empowers you to effectively design develop deploy and manage your data databases and database applications throughout the data management life cycle utilizing a consistent and integrated user interface Figure 5 1 on page 195 illustrates the life cycle of data management IBM Data Studio provides the capability for architects developers and administrators to gt Increase productivity for all roles throughout the data life cycle Slash development time up to 50 with an integrated data management environment Promote collaboration across roles to optimize data server and application performance gt Simplify and speed development of new skills Learn once use with all supported data servers Extensible with Eclipse plug ins to customize the environment for each team member gt Accelerate data as a service for Service Oriented Architecture Develop and publish data as a Web service without programming Info 2 0 Ready support for Web 2 0 protocols and format 194 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm Data M
109. of descriptionType element double click it Figure 5 21 al productType f descriptionType pid int name 1 1 string price 1 1 double e description 1 1 descriptionType Figure 5 21 Definition of the description element The XML schema editor GUI navigates through the XML structure and allows you to add or modify definitions easily With the guidance you are able to avoid syntax errors You also have the choice to switch to the source and edit the file directly You can create an XML document from the XML schema definitions you have created In the Data Project Explorer right click XML Documents and select New XML At the Create XML File panel select Create XML file from an XML schema file Provide the name for the project the new XML file and the schema file After going through the rest of panels you get to the XML editor for that file The XML editor guides you based on the schema definition Figure 5 22 on page 216 Just right click the elements and it provides you with only the valid options The options come from the previously defined XSD document Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 215 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm S ProductsSchema xsd X NewFile xm Eil 72 xml V e tns products xmins tns xmins xsi xsi schemaLocation z m version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 product http www example org TestSchem
110. on TSM server version 5 5 0 and TSM client and client API version 5 4 0 After installing the TSM client and TSM API on each database server we have to configure DB2 so that DB2 can communicate with TSM server Edit the file INSTHOME sq 1ib userprofile to add the TSM variables as shown in Example 6 4 Example 6 4 TSM definition in the DB2 instance userprofile export DSMI_DIR opt tivoli tsm client api bin64 export DSMI_CONFIG opt tivoli tsm client api bin64 dsm opt export DSMI_LOG HOME sq11ib db2dump Chapter 6 Administering databases 233 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Note If the DSMI variables are changed you need to restart the DB2 instance To be sure that the right values are used during db2start time run the following commands db2stop export grep DSMI db2start If you want to verify the DSMI variables for a running DB2 use the ps command as follows ps fu db2inst1 grep db2sysc ps eww lt PID of_db2sysc gt The TSM client must be configured as well In the following file define the TSM server to be used opt tivoli tsm client api bin64 dsm sys Example 6 5 shows the file in our test environment Example 6 5 Sample dsm sys configuration file on the database server SErvername TSM_SERVER1 NodeName db2mensa passwordaccess generate COMMmethod TCPip TCPServeraddress 9 43 86 125 TCPPort 1500 The value specified for SErvername has to be specified in the dsm opt file as
111. on Rails 8 3 1 Perl Here we introduce Perl programming on DB2 and describe how to set up a Perl application development environment on DB2 for Linux Perl overview Perl is a popular general purpose programming language that is freely available on Linux It was originally developed for text manipulation but is now used for a wide range of tasks including system administration Web development network programming and GUI development It has also become the premier scripting language of the Web According to Larry Wall its creator he included in Perl all the cool features found in other languages and left out those features that weren t so cool Perl is typically provided by the Linux distributions but you can also download it from http www cpan org Perl and DB2 You can create DB2 applications using Perl by using the DBD DB2 driver with the Perl Database Interface DBI Module Both of these components are freely available on the Internet Currently DB2 supports the following versions gt Perl 5 8 or later gt DBI 1 41 or later Perl is an ideal language to use with DB2 426 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm gt It is an interpreted language and has a DBI Module that uses dynamic SQL This is ideal for quickly creating and revising prototypes of DB2 applications The Perl DBI module uses an interface that is quite similar to the CLI and JDB
112. or statistical views These characteristics include number of records number of pages and average record length The optimizer uses these statistics when determining access paths to the data For a table this utility should be called when the table has had many updates or after reorganizing the table For a statistical view this utility should be called Chapter 6 Administering databases 281 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm when changes to underlying tables have substantially affected the rows returned by the view The view must have been previously enabled for use in query optimization using the ALTER VIEW command The RUNSTATS command can be issued from any database partition in the db2nodes cfg file It can be used to update the catalogs on the catalog database partition In a partitioned database the RUNSTATS command collects the statistics on only a single node If the database partition from which the RUNSTATS command is executed has a part of the table then the command will execute on that database partition directly Otherwise the command executes on the first database partition in the database partition group across which the table is partitioned It is possible to perform read or write operations to the table where RUNSTATS is taking place by using different RUNSTATS command parameters For example ALLOW READ ACCESS specifies that other users can have read only access to the table while stat
113. reached 8 1M bytes time was 301 956 Snapshot data collection stored in collect file gt Running db2top in replay mode with automatic performance analysis Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 387 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm To analyze the most active sessions issue the following command in another terminal session while db2top is running in collection mode in the first terminal session See As shown in Example 7 13 db2top f collect file b 1 A The analysis report will be generated when the job in the first terminal session is finished Example 7 13 Analyzing the most active sessions db2inst1 mensa software db2top linux_amd_64 gt db2top f collect file b 1 A Analyzing objects doing the most Cpu Total in function Sessions End of input stream reached size was 8514313 Top twenty performance report for Sessions between 01 17 40 and 01 22 26 Sort criteria Cpu _Total Rank Application_Handle Stat Percentage fromTime toTime sum Cpu _ Total 1 44930 35 4578 01 17 40 01 22 26 673060 2 44947 64 5422 01 17 40 01 22 26 1225140 3 65595 0 0000 01 17 40 01 22 26 0 4 44934 0 0000 01 17 40 01 22 26 0 5 83 0 0000 01 17 40 01 22 26 0 6 82 0 0000 01 17 40 01 22 26 0 7 81 0 0000 01 17 40 01 22 26 0 Performance report breakdown by 300 seconds fromTime sum Cpu Total Percentage Top Five in 300 seconds interval nen ee ee ee eee
114. restore script as required You can modify Restore options Automatic storage paths Container layout and paths 3 Run the modified redirected restore script In a partitioned database environment you have to perform these steps for each database partition because the table space container definitions may be different For our sample database ITSODB we will change the location and the size of a table space using a redirected restore with a generated script Example 6 24 shows you first how we generate the scripts for our partitioned database Example 6 24 Prepare database and generate scripts for redirected restore db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias 260 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 tvf tscrt sql create tablespace TSDATA1 in IBMDEFAULTGROUP managed by database using file tablespaces db2inst1 itsodb NODEQ000 TSDATA1 000 40M on dbpartitionnum 0 using file tablespaces db2inst1 itsodb NODEO001 TSDATA1 000 40M on dbpartitionnum 1 DB20000I1 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 create table TAB1 id int not null primary key name char 10 in tsdatal DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully d
115. results SQL Routine Debugger Allows you to debug SQL stored procedures Java Routine Debugger You can create your Java procedures promote them to the server and even debug them remotely on the database server as you are used to do with standalone Java applications XML Editor It allows you to edit your XML document in a tree structure You do not need to deal with the XML syntax XML Schema Editor It allows you to edit your XML schemas in a graphical way You do not need to deal with the XML syntax Visual Explain It shows the access plan of your query so that you can troubleshoot performance problems ER Diagramming You can create your ER diagrams directly from the database schema or vice versa The connection between the diagrams and the database remains so that changes of the one are reflected in the other Data Web Services With a few mouse clicks you can create a Web service based on a query deploy it to an application server or create a WAR file from it pureQuery for Java pureQuery offers an easy access level to the database In relationship to JDBC it simplifies many tasks The editor GUI supports all the features you know from Java program editing You can create edit context assist and run queries directly by selecting them within the program code Chapter 8 Application development 461 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm In this section we implement and debug a
116. select from employee hist order by empno EMPNO SALARY OLD SALARY NEW BONUS OLD BONUS NEW CHG DATE 000070 96170 00 55000 00 700 00 700 00 2008 01 29 03 06 17 126586 000070 55000 00 65000 00 700 00 700 00 2008 01 29 03 06 19 649943 000110 66500 00 45000 00 900 00 900 00 2008 01 29 03 06 17 287657 000170 44680 00 55000 00 500 00 500 00 2008 01 29 03 06 17 353814 4 record s selected 8 2 2 Use defined functions DB2 provides many functions called built in functions There are two types of built in functions scalar functions such as date length month and substr and column functions such as count sum max avg and min User defined function UDFs are functions that can be added to the database They can include scalar function row function column function or table functions UDFs can be written in languages such as C Java or in pure DB2 SQL This section discusses UDFs written in SQL Developing UDF using C and Java is provided in UDF in C on page 438 and Stored procedures in Java on page 444 separately Chapter 8 Application development 421 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm UDFs are very useful if you want to share business logic between different applications The applications can run on different systems and on different architectures Use the CREATE FUNCTION DDL statement to register a function in the database Note The CREATE FUNCTION statement is explained in more detail
117. shown Figure 6 47 on page 338 You can input general info for a task in this panel For example the name and type for the task the instance and database partitions the task will be running on and so on If you choose Grouping task for the type then you can add several tasks into a group and then specify scheduling failure and success conditions as well as related actions to the group Chapter 6 Administering databases 337 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Gree y Testing task for demonstration purpose only Not categorized T Figure 6 47 General info input for a new task 3 Command script for the new task Here you can input the script for the task By default the semicolon is used as the DB2 statement termination character If you want you can change it Our sample script is shown in Figure 6 48 connect to itsodb runstats on table db2inst1 item connect reset Figure 6 48 Command script input for the new task Running properties setting You can define the specific success code for your task and choose if DB2 should stop execution when failure happens during the task execution In our example we choose Stop execution at first return code that is failure when failure happens Figure 6 49 338 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Figure 6 49 Run properties for the task 5 Schedule the task
118. simple Java stored procedure to demonstrate some of the Data Studio s powerful features The general introduction of the Data Studio is provided in Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio on page 193 Setting up a project The Data Studio can be started with the command opt 1BM SDP70 eclipse Alternatively you can start it by selecting the Start menu gt Development gt IBM Data Studio Developer or Start menu gt IBM Software Development Platform as shown in Figure 8 10 All Applications E gt IEJ Development A Games Graphics IBM Installation Manager amp Internet Multimedia amp Otice System We Utilities 4 Find Files Folders a Home Personal Files 8 IBM Sotware Development Platiorm La Personal Settings SUSE Help Genter Actions Recent Documents Wi My System 9 Run Command A Switch User B Lock Session O Log Out t IBM Dat Studio Developer gt a IBM Installation Manager gt a Uninstall IBM Installation Manager yvrvrVyY IE dbOinst vmsuse Shell Ki OAMOASE IB db2insti vmsuse Shell 462 Figure 8 10 Start Data Studio from the Start menu Take the default or choose another location for the workspace as shown in Figure 8 11 on page 463 If you open a workspace the first time the Data Studio shows a help screen Close the help will lead you to the Select a workspace panel Up and Running with
119. single process memory space You can reduce the memory usage for each database so that you can activate all databases successfully However the database server performance is impacted Note You cannot specify the bit size for the instance when you create or migrate an instance The bit size for new instances is determined by the operating system where DB2 9 5 is installed Table 4 5 shows some important details about available support for 32 bit and 64 bit DB2 Table 4 5 Available support for 32 bit and 64 bit DB2 9 5 gt 32 bit instances only gt 32 bit DB2 server client and GUI tools packages gt 32 bit IBM Software Development Kit SDK for Java 184 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm 64 bit instances 32 bit and 64 bit DB2 libraries available 64 bit DB2 server and client 64 bit applications and routines 32 bit client side application support 32 bit fenced stored procedures UDFs only non Java Java fenced Stored Procedures UDFs 64 bit IBM SDK for Java gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt If you are running in a validated 64 bit environment converting from 32 bit to 64 bit is done automatically during the migration process Example 4 17 shows in few details of a migration from Version 8 2 32 bit to Version 9 5 64 bit Example 4 17 Migrating from Version 8 32 bit to Version 9 5 64 bit with db2 instance owner db2instl gemini
120. sqllib misc EXPLAIN DDL 8 5 1 Explain facility Before DB2 executes an SQL statement it creates an access plan that describes how DB2 accesses the data in order to generate the result set For static SQL statements the access plan is stored in the related package For dynamic SQL statements the access plan is generated at runtime If you want to tune a query you can use explain facility to view the access plan to understand how DB2 accesses the tables to form the result set You can then decide if the query performance can be improved by adding indexes or rearrange the query There are two tools for creating a visual access path Visual explain and the explain command Note The explain facility is described in detail in Tuning Database Performance SC23 5867 00 in Visual Explain Tutorial SC23 5868 00 and in the Information Center in Database fundamentals Performance tuning gt Tuning database application performance Explain facility 454 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Explain command Use the explain command from command line to get access plan The following statement explains a SELECT query on the non indexed column on the EMPMDC table db2 EXPLAIN ALL WITH SNAPSHOT FOR select count from empmdc where expltest TEST We then use the explain command to format the output as follows db2exfmt d sample e db2inst1 g TIC o explain out w 1 n
121. tables the db2move utility can be helpful for such a situation 6 3 1 Export data to files from database tables and views The DB2 export utility can be used to write data from a DB2 database to one or more files stored outside of the database The exported data can then be imported or loaded into another DB2 database using the DB2 import or the DB2 load utility respectively or it can be imported into another application for example a spreadsheet The user specifies the data to be exported by supplying a SELECT statement or by providing hierarchical information for typed tables Before invoking EXPORT you need to establish a connection to the database explicitly or implicitly You can invoke the export utility through the DB2 Command Line Processor CLP the DB2 Control Center by calling the ADMIN_CMD stored procedure or through an Application Programming Interface API Export table data through CLP Example 6 46 is a sample to export data from a table named ITEM which is spread across two database partitions by using the DB2 CLP Example 6 46 Export all data from table ITEM db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 export to item ixf of ixf select from item SQL3104N The Export utility is beginning to export data to file item ixf SQL3105N The Export utility has finished exporting 3000000 rows Number of rows exported 3000000 The data across all the two database partitions has been exported If you want to expor
122. task within the Task Center For example you can change the schedule or disable the follow up actions The scheduling function is also available for many other DB2 Wizards or GUI tools such as export import load runstats reorg backup and restore You can take advantage of these useful functions for task automation purposes in your environment Chapter 6 Administering databases 345 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 346 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 This chapter discusses DB2 s monitoring and troubleshooting features the following topics are discussed Health monitor and Health Center Memory Visualizer and Memory Tracker db2mitrk IBM single system monitor view for DB2 db2top Log files for troubleshooting DB2 PD PSI tools Linux system monitoring tools vvvvvy Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 347 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 7 1 Health monitor and Health Center Health monitor and Health Center are two DB2 features that can help you monitor the health of your DB2 systems These tools add a management by exception capability to DB2 by alerting you to potential system health issues This enables you to address health issues before they become real problems that affect your system 7 1 1 Health indicator and health monitor Health
123. the etc sysctl conf file automatically Chapter 2 Installation 31 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 1 7 Additional software requirements Depending on your DB2 requirements you may be required to install additional software packages for DB2 to function properly Make sure that the following software is installed prior to using DB2 gt IBM Software Development Kit SDK for Java is required to run DB2 graphical tools and to create and run Java applications including stored procedures and user defined functions If the correct version of JDK is not already installed IBM SDK 5 Service Release 5 will be installed for you during the installation process if you use either the DB2 Setup wizard db2_install or a response file to install the product IBM SDK 1 4 2 to SDK 5 is also supported Note On Linux DB2 GUI tools only run on x86 and x86_64 AMD64 EM64T gt One of the following browsers is required to view online help and to run First Steps db2fs Mozilla 1 4 and up Firefox 1 0 and up gt X Window System software capable of rendering a graphical user interface You need this if you want to use the DB2 Setup wizard a graphical installer to install DB2 or any DB2 graphical tools gt Table 2 6 provides additional package requirements for SUSE Linux and Red Hat distributions for DB2 9 5 For single partition database only ibaio and compat libstdc packages are required Tab
124. the CVS perspective by selecting Window Open Perspective Other In the Open Perspective panel select CVS Repository Exploring This perspective allows you to specify a repository location and check out a project from there Once a project is checked out to your local workspace it is connected with that repository location and you can check in or synchronize your content at any time with the repository In that way all your work is shared between your team members too 5 3 3 XML editing The Data Studio contains a powerful graphical XML and XSD editor A GUI tool is provided to guide you through the creation steps if you are not familiar with the XML and XSD syntax This helps both experienced and inexperienced application developers to create error free XML and XSD documents Example 5 1 shows the source of an XSD document Example 5 1 Example XSD document lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt schema xmlns http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema targetNamespace http www example org TestSchema xmlns tns http www example org TestSchema elementFormDefaul t qualified gt lt element name products type tns productsType gt lt element gt lt complexType name descriptionType gt Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 213 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm lt sequence gt lt element name name type string gt lt element gt lt element name price type double gt lt element
125. the Control Center Select Maintenance to start the wizard The wizard open with general information Figure 6 17 on page 272 Chapter 6 Administering databases 271 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Figure 6 17 Configure Automatic Maintenance wizard You can specify maintenance windows for the execution of the online activities like the RUNSTATS utility and for the offline activities like the REORG utility Figure 6 18 on page 273 shows a sample 272 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Configure Automatic Maintenance Figure 6 18 Specify maintenance panel To enable the automatic table maintenance activities you have to select the related check box at the activities page as shown in Figure 6 19 on page 274 Chapter 6 Administering databases 273 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 1 Introduction Select a maintenance activity to configure 2 Type Automatic maintenance includes the following set of activities Select a maintenance activity to view its current settings To 3 Timing enable and disable automation of the activity and notification select the Automate and Notify check boxes To update the 4 Notification settings select the Configure Settings button 5 Activities ef Maintenance activity Backup database BACKUP Defragment table and index data REORG Optimiz
126. the Web server environment Learning PHP is easy but developing and managing applications properly takes some care Fortunately there is a large community of users and a myriad of libraries to make your job easier In particular the Zend Framework and CakePHP provide Web application foundations and database abstraction facilities which ease migration to DB2 from another data server such as MySQL The PEAR project also provides many high quality components written in PHP intended for reuse Tip You can learn more about PHP at IBM developerWorks Refer to the Recommended PHP reading list http www ibm com developerworks opensource 1library os php read PHP and DB2 There are four extensions that you can use to write PHP applications with DB2 All of the PHP interfaces ultimately communicate with DB2 using the Call Level 430 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Interface CLI The interfaces are PHP extensions which are written in C and compiled with the DB2 libraries when you install PHP ibm_db2 provides the db2_ functions PDO_IBM provides the PDO object for CLI PDO_ODBC provides the PDO object for ODBC Unified ODBC provides the odbc_ functions vvvy IBM recommends using ibm_db2 or PDO_IBM to get the best performance and features out of DB2 Which you choose is dependent on the type of application you are writing and the version of PHP 4 or 5 Refer
127. the home directory is db2home db2inst1 We create ssh directory with required authorization as shown in Example 2 16 Example 2 16 mkdir ssh directory for user db2inst1 log in as db2inst1 cd db2home chmod 700 db2instl mkdir ssh chmod 700 ssh Generate a key pair From ssh directory generate a public key private key pair Example 2 17 shows how to generate a public key private key pair for RSA Example 2 17 Generate an RSA encrypted key pair cd ssh ssh keygen t rsa You also can generate a DSA key pair Example 2 18 on page 56 shows how to generate a public key private key pair for DSA Example 2 18 Generate a DSA encrypted key pair ssh keygen t dsa 5 Refer to Creating users on page 50 56 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Whenever prompted for input press Enter to accept the default value You then are prompted to enter a passphrase In our environment we do not want a passphrase so we press Enter twice Two new files are generated in the ssh directory id_rsa the private key and id_rsa pub the public key for RSA encryption In a similar manner name files are generated for DSA encryption id_dsa the private key and id_dsa pub the public key 3 Enable the key pair Example 2 19 shows the commands to enable the RSA key pair Example 2 19 Enable the RSA key pair cd ssh mv id_rsa identity
128. the middle pane At each of these actions you can see how the query is constructing accordingly in the upper pane As alast step we add a condition on the SALARY column Select the Conditions tab on the bottom pane Double click left mouse button on a field opens the field for you to enter a value or use the dropdown menu to choose one We select EMPLOYEE SALARY in the Column field choose lt for operator and enter the value 37000 in the value column Now we have finished the steps Figure 8 19 on page 469 shows the complete Query Builder window after our changes 468 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm j EmpSalary x SELECT DB2INSTL AMPLOYER FMPNO DE2INSTL FMPLOYEE LASTNAME DE2INSTL DEPARTMENT DEP TNO TE2INSTL DEPARTMENT DEP TNAME TROM IE2INSTL EMPLOYEE JOIN DE INSTL DEPARTMENT ON DE2INSTL FMPLOYEE WORKDEPT DE2INSTL DEPARTMENI WHERE IDB2INSTL EMPLOYEE SALARY lt 37000 p i EMPNO g L DEPTNO FIRSTNME J DEPTNAME i MIDINIT C MGRNO i Z LASTNAME C ADMRDEPT DEPARTMENT H i WoRKDEPT LOCATION C PHONENO C HIREDATE S M JOB J Statement EmpSalary E DISTINCT Columns Conditions Groups Group Conditions DB2INST1 EMPLOYEE SALARY lt Figure 8 19 Query Builder We can save our query Select File gt Save In the panel select our DataProject project as s
129. the output using the cut command Example 8 29 Result of the XQuery db2instl puget gt db2 x tf xquery_example sql l cut c1 30 lt name gt Jean lt name gt lt name gt Shirt lt name gt You can also use SQL statement to retrieve data with the XQuery expression in the FROM clause as shown in Example 8 30 The function XMLEXISTS matches all records from the XQuery expression Example 8 30 Match XML records in the FROM clause select _xquery sql SELECT entityid 448 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm FROM product WHERE XMLEXISTS i description price lt 9 PASSING xdata AS i 3 The output is shown in Example 8 31 on page 449 Example 8 31 Result of the script select_xquery sq db2instl puget gt db2 tf select_xquery sql ENTITYID 2 record s selected In Example 8 32 we retrieve the result of the XQuery as a table and join it up to other relational tables directly Example 8 32 Retrieve XML data as a table select_table sql SELECT p entityid Xi FROM product p XMLTABLE i description price lt 9 PASSING p xdata AS i COLUMNS name CHAR 30 PATH name price DECIMAL 9 2 PATH price AS x The function XMLTABLE converts the XML document into a table You can see the result in Example 8 33 The column ENTITYID comes from the relational table and the columns name and price come from the XML data Example 8 33 Retri
130. the table resides Under some conditions you may want to load data for a specific database partition or partitions then you can choose to Load data into selected database partitions Under Distributing partitions you can specify which database partitions will be used to do the data partitioning work In general you can just leave as Let DB2 decide which database partitions participate Chapter 6 Administering databases 323 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD SEJE Figure 6 38 Specify which database partitions participate in the load 6 Define the input columns and their mapping to the output columns Figure 6 39 on page 325 You can simply use the default mapping if you think this is appropriate for your situation or you can make some modifications in this panel if needed For example if large object LOB is involved in your load you may need to specify LOB related options here 324 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD Figure 6 39 Define column related properties for load 7 Specify performance and statistics collection options Figure 6 40 on page 326 You can specify options which will impact load performance For example you can specify how the load utility will update the existing indexes rebuild all indexes or rebuild indexes incrementally A full index reb
131. their indexes and their long data A system temporary table space TEMPSPACE1 is required by DB2 to support activities like sorting data join tables create indexes If you do not specify them at the CREATE DATABASE command DB2 will choose defaults for them gt Allocation of the database recovery log The DB2 recovery log tracks all changes made against your database It is also called the transaction log It is used with the recovery history file to recover data in case of failure gt Creation of the database configuration file and the default values are set The database configuration file is used to provide DB2 information such as how much memory it can use where the log has to be stored and DB2 optimizer relevant information gt Binding of the database utilities to the database Programs which contain SQL statements have to be bound against the database This binding process is used for DB2 utilities like import and load The Embedded SQL on page 435 provides some background information about the bind process There are two methods to create databases in a existing instance gt DB2 Create Database Wizard which is a Java based graphical tool 104 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm gt Use create database command from a command line processor window You must have sysadm or sysctrl authorization to create a new database Before creating a database se
132. time gt Database code page The database code page determines what characters you can store in the database You can not change the code page once the database is created In DB2 9 5 the default code page default is Unicode gt Database territory This determines the date and time formats This option must be defined during database creation gt Database collating sequence The order in which character data is sorted in a database depends on the structure of the data and the collating sequence defined for the database The database collating sequence is specified during database creation time and can not be changed afterward Discontinued and deprecated functionality Here are some of the discontinued and deprecated functionality in Version 9 5 gt w option for db2icrt db2ilist and db2iupadt gt db2undgp command gt Some registry and environment variables like DB2LINUXAIO DB2_LGPAGE_BP Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 167 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt IMPORT command options CREATE and REPLACE_CREATE are deprecated gt XML Extender is deprecated When you are migrating DB2 UDB Version 8 you have to review changes that occurred in Version 9 1 too The following are some of them gt Alternate Fix Pack images are discontinued gt Type 3 JDBC support is discontinued gt The Data Warehouse Center and the Information Catalog Center are no longer included gt Text Ext
133. to chapter 4 of Developing PHP Applications for IBM Data Servers SG24 7218 to learn more about choosing and installing a PHP extension for DB2 Tip The Zend Core for IBM provides all of the DB2 interfaces for PHP in an easily installed and supported package http www zend com en products core for ibm PHP and the Web server PHP is most often built as an Apache module though it can also be used through CGI Many other Web servers support PHP too including the Apache based IBM HTTP Server If you intend to use PHP with DB2 using a Web server front end you should consult chapter 1 of Developing PHP Applications for IBM Data Servers SG24 7218 to guide your decision on an HTTP server and learn how to install it with PHP and DB2 Note If you intend to share an HTTP server with WebSphere Application Server the IBM WebSphere Developer Technical Journal article Pair J2EE with PHP to implement a common Web application infrastructure provides instructions to help them coexist http www ibm com developerworks websphere techjournal 0505_krook 0505_kroo k htm Here are some further resources for maximizing the benefits of using PHP with DB2 gt Official PHP documentation http www php net docs php Chapter 8 Application development 431 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Zend Core for IBM is a seamless out of the box easy to install and supported PHP development and production environment f
134. to put SQL statements directly into the C C code You can embed them into the code This requires a precompilation step of the program before it can be compiled with the native C C compiler The precompile step produces a bind file package and a program source file The package has the suffix bnd The program file can then further be compiled by the C C compiler The package contains the access plan for the embedded SQL statements This package is dedicated to this particularly compiled file If you compile it again you ll get a new bind file Before you can run a program you need to bind the related packages to the database The advantage of using the package is that the access plans of the SQL statements have already been generated during the precompilation step They don t need to be generated at the runtime anymore For complex SQL statements that may save a considerable amount of execution time Packages also allow you to grant permissions to the users or applications on package level without the need to grant access to the individual tables Chapter 8 Application development 435 6899ch08 fm In order to run embedded SQL programs you need at least a DB2 client installed Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm on the local system Example 8 11 shows a simple C program using embedded SQL It reads records from the EMPLOYEE table and uses a cursor to cycle through the result set Before running the example you
135. ts_last_resize_fail Disabled Enabled ts ts_util_auto_resize Yes Threshold based 80 o oO ts ts_used_pages ts ts page size ts ts_max_size 100 Actions Threshold or State checking Disabled Enabled 3 Populate a desired amount of data into the table space Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 361 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm We populate a certain amount of data into the table space to trigger the threshold DB2 common table expression is used in our example to generate specified number of rows Example 7 4 In our example 280 000 rows are inserted into the table and the threshold value of table space utilization will be exceeded Example 7 4 Populating data to trigger threshold for table space utilization db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1l script gt more ins_empinfo db2 INSERT INTO db2instl empinfo WITH tmpinfo ID AS VALUES 1 UNION ALL SELECT ID 1 FROM tmpinfo WHERE ID lt 250000 SELECT ID TRANSLATE CHAR INTEGER RAND 1000000 CASE MOD ID 4 WHEN O THEN aeiou bcdfg WHEN 1 THEN aeiou hjkim WHEN 2 THEN aeiou npqrs ELSE aeiou twxyz END 1234567890 AS LASTNAME CURRENT DATE RAND 20000 DAYS AS HIREDATE INTEGER 10000 RAND 200000 AS SALARY FROM tmpinfo db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1l script gt db2 tvf ins_empinfo db2 INSERT INTO db2instl empinfo WITH tmpinfo ID AS VALUES 1 UNION ALL SELECT
136. utilization is 95 362 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm percent and severity level is Alarm The timestamp at that time the alarm condition was triggered is also shown Journal Last 50 records Health monitor notifications only gt Database Backup Required gt Monitor Heap Utilization gt Statistics Collection Required gt Table Space Operational State Table Space Utilization Alarm Feb 20 2008 3 30 31 db2inst1 1 ITSOD table space Alarm Feb 20 2008 3 26 51 db2inst1 0 ITSOD table space Figure 7 15 Administration notification log for health monitor indicator An e mail is sent to designated contact with content the one shown in Figure 7 16 Subject Alarm alert for ts ts_util for table space db2inst1 0 1TSODB TBSPDMS_0 on system men From db2inst1 mensa itsos sanjose ibm com To db2instl itsos sanjose ibm com ADM1O500E Health indicator Table Space Utilization ts ts_util breached the upper alarm threshold of 90 with value 95 on table space db2instl1 O ITSODB TBSPDMS_O Calculation ts ts_used_pages ts ts_usable_pages 100 1184 1248 100 95 History Timestamp Value Formula Please do not respond to this message as it was generated by DB2 software Additional help is provided in the following paragraphs Figure 7 16 Notification for health indicator by e
137. we briefly introduce IBM Data Studio We cover the following topics gt Introduction A short introduction about Data Studio gt Installation This section describes the installation steps for Data Studio We briefly talk about how to migrate projects from the Developer workbench into Data Studio gt Features and functions In this section we briefly introduce the features and functions of Data Studio Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 193 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 5 1 Introduction Enterprises of all sizes and across all industries share common drivers of the investments they are making in the management of their business data The complexity and cost of supporting and managing data from initial design of the data structure throughout all phases until properly sunsetting the data continue increasing The demand to deliver an increasing amount of data more rapidly across and beyond the business keeps growing The expensive human resources developers architects and administrators work in silos that cause issues such as data models not shared across silos Web services are difficult to develop and deploy complex environments use different tools for each data server life cycle of data is poorly understood and challenging to manage and so on The innovation will be restrained when silos of information are disconnected inaccurate incomplete and out of context New approaches are
138. you through different steps and options to recover your data Restore Data Wizard level of recovery Task Overview Figure 6 14 Restore Data Wizard You can choose for instance if you want to do a full or table space restore which backup image to restore and how far the roll forward should be done Chapter 6 Administering databases 259 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Note For a detailed explanation of the database recovery options refer to Part 2 Data recovery in Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC23 5848 00 6 1 6 Redirected restore sample scenario Using a redirected restore you can change the physical location of table space containers stored in the backup image when restoring the database into same database or into another database Redirected restore is one using the RESTORE DATABASE command with the REDIRECT parameter or by using the Restore Database wizard in the Control Center You have to redefine each table space container you want to modify with the SET TABLESPACE CONTAINER command or in the wizard With Version 9 5 alternatively you can generate a redirected restore script from a backup image and modify it as needed The steps are as follows 1 Use the restore utility to generate the redirected restore script The RESTORE DATABASE command must be called with the REDIRECT option and the GENERATE SCRIPT option 2 Edit the generated redirected
139. your E mail address has been entered as a candidate for notification of various events managed by the DB2 Tools Thank you Figure 7 6 The testing e mail sent by DB2 automatically Note Before using the e mail notification function you need to make sure that the e mail system which is residing on the mail server specified by SMTP_SERVER in administration configuration is up and running normally After your contact list is added you can select Configure Alert Notification from the pop up panel Figure 7 3 on page 351 Then add the available contacts to the Health notification contact list as shown in Figure 7 7 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 353 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Configure Health Alert Notification db2inst1 itsosj sanjo Contact Figure 7 7 Configure health alert notification The people in the notification list will be informed if any alert is generated with a severity covered by the current notify level setting By default the notification information will be written into DB2 instance s notification log which is located under directory HOME sqllib db2dump file name is lt instance name gt nfy For details regarding the notification log as well as its setting refer to 7 4 1 DB2 administration notification log on page 389 Usage sample In this section we demonstrate how to configure a health indicator in the Health Center or by DB2 C
140. 0 Database Backup in Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC23 5848 00 Enable automatic backup DB2 provides automatic maintenance capabilities for performing database backup keeping statistics current and reorganizing tables and indexes as necessary When enabling automatic backup you can specify the following criteria for determining when a backup is required gt Maximum time between backups gt Maximum log space used between backups Using these settings DB2 determines if a backup is required and runs the backup job on the next available maintenance window a user defined time period for running the automatic maintenance activities Note You can still perform manual backup operations when automatic maintenance is configured DB2 will perform the automatic backup operations only if they are required You can configure automatic backup using the graphical user interface tools the command line interface or the AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICY stored procedure Configure automatic backup using the wizard In this section we demonstrate how to enable automatic database backup for the ITSODB database using the Configure Automatic Maintenance wizard The wizard can be launched from the DB2 Control Center as shown in Figure 6 10 on page 246 Chapter 6 Administering databases 245 Systems Databases ntrol Center Figure 6 10 Configure Automatic Maintenance in Control Center Figure 6 11 shows the pane
141. 0 It lists the path where DB2 products are installed on our system and the DB2 product level To get more information for each DB2 product installed on the system you can use the commands as shown in Example 7 26 Example 7 26 product information db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db21s q p b opt ibm db2 V9 5 Install Path opt ibm db2 V9 5 Product Response File ID Level Fix Pack Product Description ENTERPRISE_SERVER_EDITION 9 5 0 0 0 DB2 Enterprise Server Edition db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db21s q b opt ibm db2 V9 5 Install Path opt ibm db2 V9 5 404 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Feature Response File ID Level Fix Pack Feature Description BASE_CLIENT 9 5 0 0 0 Base client support JAVA_SUPPORT 9 5 0 0 0 Java support SQL_PROCEDURES 9 5 0 0 0 SQL procedures BASE_DB2_ENGINE 9 5 0 0 0 Base server support JDK 9 5 0 0 0 for Java TM 6899ch07 fm IBM Software Development Kit SDK CONNECT_SUPPORT 9 5 0 0 0 Connect support COMMUNICATION SUPPORT_TCPIP 9 5 0 0 0 Communication support TCP IP REPL_CLIENT 9 5 0 0 0 Replication tools CONTROL_CENTER 9 5 0 0 0 Control Center DB2_DATA_SOURCE_SUPPORT 9 5 0 0 0 DB2 data source support LDAP_EXPLOITATION 9 5 0 0 0 DB2 LDAP support INSTANCE_SETUP_SUPPORT 9 5 0 0 0 DB2 Instance Setup wizard XML_EXTENDER 9 5 0 0 0 XML Extender APPLICATION _DEVELOPMENT_TOOLS 9 5 0 0 0 Base application development tools FIRST_STEPS 9 5 0
142. 0 0 sdc 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdd 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sde 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 411 6899ch07 fm 7 6 4 sar Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm sdf 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 The sar command is an integrated and powerful System Activity Report sar utility You can use it to collect and report CPU utilization memory and swap space utilization statistics I O and transfer rate statistics as well as network statistics and so forth You can save the output of the sar command into a designated file and retrieve information from that file at a later time The general syntax to run the sar command is sar options interval count Table 7 3 gives some frequently used command options for sar that are extracted from sar s man pages Table 7 3 Frequently used command options for sar eee en M u flag is equivalent to specifying bBcdqrRuvwWy I SUM I XALL n FULL P ALL gt Reports 1 O and transfer rate statisties 0 Reports VO and transfer rate statisties o and transfer rate statistics Reports process creation activity o Reports activity for each block device Sets the ending time of the report Extracts records from filename created by the o filename flag The default value of the filename parameter is the current daily data file the var log sa sadd file The f option is exclusive of the o option Reports network statistics Saves the readings i
143. 0 0 First Steps DB2_SAMPLE_DATABASE 9 5 0 0 0 Sample database source 7 5 5 db2support The db2support utility is designed to automatically collect all DB2 and system diagnostic data This program generates information about a DB2 server including information about its configuration and system environment The output of this program is stored in one compressed file named db2support zip located in the directory specified as part of the command invoked under command line In one simple step the tool can gather database manager snapshots configuration files and operating system parameters which should make the problem determination quicker You can use the command db2support h to display the complete list of command options The following basic invocation is usually sufficient for collecting most of the information required to diagnosis a problem db2support outputpath d dbname c For example execute the following command to collect information about database ITSODB db2support d ITSODB c The zipped output file db2support zip is in the current directory You can send this file to your DB2 technical service representative for analysis Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 405 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Note If the c option is used the utility will establish a connection to the database 7 6 Linux system monitoring tools There are many Linux system monitoring tools avail
144. 001 The ROLLFORWARD command completed successfully The minimum recovery time is updated by DB2 when data definition language DDL statements are run against the table space or against tables in the table space The table space must be rolled forward to at least the minimum recovery time so that it is synchronized with the information in the system catalog tables During a table space rollforward each log file needs to be read even if they do not contain log records that affect that table space This may be time consuming To skip the log files known not containing any log records affecting the table space set the DB2_COLLECT_TS_REC_INFO registry variable to ON the default value The table space change history file db2tschg his keeps track of which logs should be processed for each table space Note DB2 supports the recovery of a dropped table by using table space level restore if the table space where the table resides is enabled for dropped table recovery This can be done during table space creation or by altering an existing table using the DROPPED TABLE RECOVERY ON option An example is shown in section 6 1 7 Recovering a dropped table sample scenario on page 264 Monitoring restore and rollforward utilities Similar to the backup utility the RESTORE and ROLLFORWARD write entries into the database recovery history file for each backup You can query it using the LIST HISTORY command During the runtime of the utilities y
145. 08 April 2008 First Edition This revision reflects the addition deletion or modification of new and changed information described below New information gt DB2 9 5 features and functions Changed information DB2 installation Post installation tasks Migration Database administration Monitoring Application development vvvvvy Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved iii 6899chang fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm iv Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm 1 Introduction With a wide spectrum of offerings and capabilities DB2 for Linux allows you to access manage and analyze all forms of information across the enterprise DB2 gives you a robust easy to manage database that offers high performance complementing the stability and reliability of Linux Industry leading parallel technologies in DB2 make it one of the most scalable and powerful databases in production today and when combined with Linux clusters it allows you to manage mission critical data at a cost lower than other enterprise class databases DB2 for Linux test drive can be downloaded from the Web site http www ibm com software data db2 9 download htm1 http www ibm com software data db2 9 edition express c html and visit http ibm com db2 1inux for further information This chapter introduces DB2 Version 9 5 and its offerings for Linux and provides an o
146. 08 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Statistics can be collected either asynchronously in the background or synchronously by gathering runtime statistics when SQL statements are compiled By default automatic statistics collection is set to ON Real time statistics gathering can be enabled only when automatic statistics collection is enabled Real time statistics gathering is controlled by the AUTO_STMT_STATS configuration parameter If this configuration parameter is set to ON table statistics are automatically compiled at statement compilation time whenever they are needed to optimize a query Optional you can enable the automatic statistics profile generation by setting the following two configuration parameters to ON gt AUTO_STATS_PROF gt AUTO_PROF_UPD Automatic statistics profiling advises when and how to collect table statistics by detecting outdated missing or incorrect statistics and by generating statistical profiles based on query feedback Automatic reorganization After many changes to table data the table and indexes can become fragmented Logically sequential data may be on non sequential physical pages and so the database manager has to perform additional read operations to access data Among other information the statistical information collected by RUNSTATS shows the data distribution within a table In particular analysis of these statistics can indicate when and what kind of reorganization is necessary Automatic reorg
147. 096 semMap 256000 semIDs 1024 semNum 256000 semUndo 256000 semNumPerID 250 sem0ps 32 semUndoSize 20 semMaxVal 32767 semAdjustOnExit 32767 Information in this record is only valid at the time when this file was created see this record s time stamp Every time you use db2set to set or remove DB2 profile variables DB2 records a message in db2diag log when DIAGLEVEL is 1 or higher As shown in Example 7 16 you will see a message after executing following command db2set DB2COMM TCPIP You may consider to use this method to check when you doubt that db2diag log could not be written by DB2 engine Example 7 16 Message about setting DB2 profile variables 2008 02 14 10 18 46 710519 480 11285E292 LEVEL Event PID 32098 TID 47944161495904PROC db2set INSTANCE db2inst1 NODE 000 FUNCTION DB2 UDB oper system services db2set_main probe 40 CHANGE CFG DB2SET DB2COMM From TCPIP To TCPIP Example 7 17 shows a log message extracted from db2diag log It is written into the log file when running the following DB2 commana db2 update db cfg for ITSODB using NEWLOGPATH db2log This message shows that SQLCODE is 5099 with tokens db2log NEWLOGPATH 9 which are highlighted in bold in our example Use db2 sq15099 command to check the meaning of SQL5099 It tell us that reason code 9 means The path cannot be accessed In our example it is because the write access permission of db2log is only assigned to the root user Th
148. 1 ID INTEGER NOT NULL NAME CHAR 10 DISTRIBUTE BY HASH ID IN TSDATA1 DB20000I1 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa gt db2_all lt lt 0 lt db2 connect to itsodb db2 import from db2backup rest_table NODE0000 data of del insert into tab1 Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias SQL3109N The utility is beginning to load data from file db2backup rest_table NODE0000 data SQL3110N The utility has completed processing 0 rows were read from the input file SQL3221W Begin COMMIT WORK Input Record Count 0 SQL3222W COMMIT of any database changes was successful Chapter 6 Administering databases 267 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm SQL3149N 0 rows were processed from the input file 0 rows were successfully inserted into the table 0 rows were rejected oooCcCo oO Number of rows read Number of rows skipped Number of rows inserted Number of rows updated Number of rows rejected Number of rows committed mensa db2 connect to itsodb completed ok db2inst1 mensa gt db2_all lt lt 1 lt db2 connect to itsodb db2 import from db2backup rest_table NODE0001 data of del insert into tab1 Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias SQL3109N The util
149. 1 Schema Creator Columns Actions Open Chapter 6 Administering databases 277 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm In the Reorganize Table panel you can select the REORG method and different options Figure 6 21 Reorganize Table ITEM Oininread anc write at DU Syeteny tetris Figure 6 21 Reorganize Table panel Note that you can also schedule the REORG as a task Figure 6 22 shows you the generated command Show Command CONNECT TO ITSODB REORG TABLE DB2INST 1 ITEM INDEX DB2INST1 PK_ITEM_ITEMID ALLOW READ ACCESS Figure 6 22 Generated REORG TABLE command 278 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm There are several methods available to reduce the need of the reorganization of table and indexes for example setting PCTFREE for a table to preserve a certain percentage of each data page for subsequent insert and update operations For more information refer to Tuning Database Performance SC23 5867 00 Analyzing the statistics produced by RUNSTATS can indicate when and what kind of reorganization is necessary In addition the REORGCHK command can be used to calculate statistics on the database or use current statistics information to determine if tables or indexes or both need to be reorganized or cleaned up Important After reorganizing a table you should collect statistics on the table so that the optimizer has the
150. 11 2008 15 25 41 102272 SQL3519W Begin Load Consistency Point Input record count 0 SQL3520W Load Consistency Point was successful SQL3532I1 The Load utility is currently in the LOAD phase Chapter 6 Administering databases 315 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Number of rows read 1467592 Number of rows skipped 0 Number of rows loaded 1467592 Number of rows rejected 0 Number of rows deleted 0 Number of rows committed 0 Number of warnings 0 Tablestate Load in Progress db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load query table itemload Tablestate Normal Another way to monitor the LOAD utility is using the LIST UTILITY command Example 6 58 shows the output which was taken when loading the data into table ITEMLOAD The table resides on two database partitions Example 6 58 Using LIST UTILITIES to monitor LOAD status db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 list utilities ID 136 Type LOAD Database Name ITSODB Partition Number 0 Description OFFLINE LOAD DEL AUTOMATIC INDEXING REPLACE COPY NO DB2INST1 ITEMLOAD Start Time 02 11 2008 15 57 02 886822 State Executing Invocation Type User ID 88 Type LOAD Database Name ITSODB Partition Number 1 Description OFFLINE LOAD DEL AUTOMATIC INDEXING REPLACE COPY NO DB2INST1 ITEMLOAD Start Time 02 11 2008 16 00 40 095780 State Executing Invocation Type User db2inst1 mensa
151. 1207 60 662308 40 1471505 20 0 00 0 00 0 00 14 36 11 eth0 19 80 18 60 3153 20 17137 40 0 00 0 00 0 00 14 36 16 eth0 832 06 1154 51 654760 92 1455199 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 14 36 21 eth0 115 20 152 60 23889 60 165605 60 0 00 0 00 0 00 14 36 26 eth0 769 26 1063 47 638018 56 1315718 56 0 00 0 00 0 00 Average eth0 523 92 719 32 396419 44 884977 36 0 00 0 00 0 00 For the details about using the sar command refer to the man help pages for sar or other Linux documentation Note As mentioned in 7 6 3 iostat on page 410 the sar utility is in the sysstat package Before using this command you need to make sure that the sysstat package is installed in your system 7 6 5 Other system monitoring tools There are also a multitude of Linux system monitoring tools available for monitoring Linux system resource usage such as the ps command which is known to almost everybody is used to report processes status pstree can be 414 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm used to display a tree of processes netstat for printing network related information nfsstat for NFS specific statistics and so forth In addition pgrep and pkill commands are very helpful when you want to look up or signal processes based on name and other attributes of processes And if you like monitoring tools with graphical user interface utilities like gnome system monitor and ksysguard also can be used For more inform
152. 17 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Total Work 1 indexes Completed Work 0 indexes Start Time Not Started Using the SHOW DETAIL clause you get information about the LOAD phases and their progress Each LOAD writes an entry into the database recovery history file If you want to see the processed LOAD commands please use the command as shown in Example 6 59 The output shows the entries for a LOAD we did in Example 6 53 on page 309 Please note the two entries one for the LOAD 0p L and one for the COPY YES 0p C Example 6 59 List history for LOAD operation db2instl mensa gt db2 list history load all for itsodb Op Obj Timestamp Sequence Type Dev Earliest Log Current Log Backup ID L T 20080221114949001 R I S0000876 L0G S0000876 L0G DB2INST1 ITEMLOAD resides in 1 tablespace s 00001 TSDATA2 Comment DB2 Start Time 20080221114949 End Time 20080221115029 Status A EID 1209 Location DB2 Autoloader Data was partitioned on 2 node s and loaded on node 0 Op Obj Timestamp Sequence Type Dev Earliest Log Current Log Backup ID C T 20080221114949002 R S S0000876 L0G S0000876 LOG DB2INST1 ITEMLOAD resides in 1 tablespace s 00001 TSDATA2 Comment DB2 Start Time 20080221114949 End Time 20080221115029 Status A 318 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm EID 1210 Location db2backup datamove copydata ITSODB 4 db
153. 1M 320 0K 10 9M Memory for database ITSODB utilh pckcacheh other catcacheh bph 1 bph S32K 64 0K 192 0K 192 0K 192 0K 8 2M 832 0K bph S16K bph S8K bph S4K shsorth lockh dbh 576 0K 448 0K 384 0K 0 640 0K 18 8M apph 5231 apph 5230 apph 5229 apph 5227 appshrh 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 64 0K 128 0K Application Memory for database ITSODB appshrh 128 0K Memory for application 5230 apph other 64 0K 192 0K Memory for application 5229 apph other 64 0K 192 0K Memory for application 5227 apph other 64 0K 576 0K Memory for application 5231 apph other 64 0K 320 0K In the next example as shown in Example 7 9 on page 378 the buffer pool size of IBMDEFAULTBP is changed from default 1 000 8K pages to 10 000 8K pages dynamically You can monitor the change made by DB2 through db2mirk very clearly The first db2mtrk d command can be used to obtain the buffer pool size for IBMDEFAULTBP before the change which is highlighted in bold font in our example the value of the bph 1 is 8 2 MB Then you can use the ALTER BUFFERPOOL command to dynamically change the size of buffer pool IBMDEFAULTBP with the immediate parameter specified After doing that the Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 377 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm second db2mtrk d command shown in the example can be used to obtain the current buffer pool size for IBMDEFAULTBP It shows the size of the
154. 2 autonomic config gt lt Online Maintenance Window gt lt OnlineWindow Occurrence During startTime 00 00 00 duration 24 gt lt DaysOfWeek gt All lt DaysOflWeek gt lt DaysOfMonth gt All lt DaysOfMonth gt lt MonthsOfYear gt All lt MonthsOf Year gt 248 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm lt OnlineWindow gt lt DB2MaintenanceWindows gt now edit the file db2home db2inst1 sql1lib tmp window xm We will set the maintenance window with a duration of 4 hours only so we change duration 24 to duration 04 Now import the new settings db2instl mensa gt db2 CALL AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICYFILE MAINTENANCE _WINDOW window xml ue Return Status 0 The procedures can also be used to configure automatic backup reorg and runstats by replacing MAINTENANCE WINDOW in the commands above with one of the following gt AUTO_BACKUP gt AUTO_REORG gt AUTO_RUNSTATS There are four sample policy files one for each type shipped with DB2 under directory HOME sql1ib samples automaintcfg Note For more information see the topic Configuring an automated maintenance policy using SYSPROC AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICY or SYSPROC AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICYFILE in Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC23 5848 00 6 1 5 DB2 database recovery Database recovery means rebuilding of a database or table space after a problem s
155. 2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax02 fm DB2 Tools Catalog creation This appendix provides information related to the Tool Catalog creation and a sample to create the DB2 Tools Catalog Database manually Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 487 6899ax02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DB2 tools catalog creation If you did not create a tools catalog when you installed DB2 you can create it by using DB2 Control Center or by the Command Line Processor CLP If using DB2 Control Center to do that after invoking DB2 Control Center you can select Tools Tools Settings gt Scheduler Settings Figure B 1 Figure B 1 Defining Tools Catalog You can choose the system and then create a new tools catalog database as shown in Figure B 2 on page 489 488 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax02 fm ools Catalog MENSA abate ESECATO TOOLSCAT Wate Hoe SAMPLE fo Wee ain aii isle agaca RE Figure B 2 Create new Tools Catalog If you want to use the DB2 Command Line Processor here we provide a sample to create the Tools Catalog by using the DB2 CLP manually also included are the steps to check the DB2 administration server DAS configuration variations before and after creating Tools Catalog and the new table spaces and buffer pool created by CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command automatically Before we cr
156. 2inst1 NODE0000 CATNO000 20080221114949 001 Load table data using the Control Center The Load wizard is available in DB2 Control Center to invoke the Load wizard 1 From the Control Center expand the object tree until you find the Tables folder 2 Click the Tables folder Any existing tables are displayed in the pane on the right hand side of the panel the contents pane 3 Right click the table you want in the contents pane and select Load from the pop up menu The Load wizard panel opens Here we demonstrate how to use the Load wizard to load data into a sample table named ITEMLOAD which is defined on database partition O through 1 Detailed steps are as follows 1 Invoke the Load Wizard from DB2 Control Center Figure 6 34 on page 320 Chapter 6 Administering databases 319 6899ch06 fm 22 Control Center 4 O All Systems All Databases L J itsops Em 5 views Aliases G Nicknames 5 Cache Objects 5 Triggers E Schemas 5 Indexes 5 Table Spaces O Event Monitors Database partition groups G Buffer Pools G Application Objects G User and Group Objects G Federated Database Objects G XML Schema Repository SR W O ITSOREPL oi 0 SAMPLE A TooscaT 320 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Control Center DB2INST1 TSDATA2 DB2INST1 IBMDB2SAMP DB2INST1 TS 4 Figure 6 34 Invoking Load Wizard from DB2 Control Center 2 Choose th
157. 3000000 Options for loading table data into partitioned databases In a multi partition database large amount of data are located across many database partitions Distribution keys are used to determine on which database partition each portion of the data resides The data must be distributed before it can be loaded at the correct database partition We have demonstrated using the LOAD command with default settings to load data into a partitioned database table When loading data into a multi partition database you can also use one of the following modes gt PARTITION AND LOAD Data is distributed and loaded to all database partitions in parallel This is the default for the LOAD command Chapter 6 Administering databases 309 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt PARTITION ONLY Data is distributed and the output is written to files in a specified location on each loading database partition These files can be loaded into the database using the LOAD_ONLY mode gt LOAD ONLY The distribution process is skipped the data is loaded simultaneously on the corresponding database partitions gt LOAD ONLY VERIFY PART Like LOAD_ONLY additional each row is checked to verify that it is on the correct database partition gt ANALYZE An optimal distribution map with even distribution across all database partitions is generated To use these different modes there are some options that are specific for loading
158. 35045 State Executing Invocation Type User Throttling Priority Unthrottled Progress Monitoring Estimated Percentage Complete 98 Total Work 224002009 bytes Completed Work 220510145 bytes Start Time 02 21 2008 14 28 41 835055 The same information can be retrieved using the SNAPUTIL administrative view or the SNAP_GET_UTIL table function Used in conjunction with the SNAPUTIL_PROGRESS administrative view or the SNAP_GET_UTIL_PROGRESS table function the same information as the LIST UTILITIES SHOW DETAIL command are provided Example 6 15 shows how to use the administrative views Example 6 15 administrative views to monitor the backup db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select UTILITY_TYPE substr UTILITY_DESCRIPTION 1 15 UTILITY_STATE DBPARTITIONNUM from SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL UTILITY_TYPE 2 UTILITY_STATE DBPARTITIONNUM BACKUP online db EXECUTE BACKUP online db EXECUTE 1 2 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP UTILITY_STATE PROGRESS_START_TIME PROGRESS_TOTAL_UNITS PROGRESS_COMPLETED_UNITS DBPARTITIONNUM from SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL_PROGRESS SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP UTILITY_STATE PROGRESS_START_TIME PROGRESS_TOTAL_UNITS PROGRESS_COMPLETED_UNITS DBPARTITIONNUM 2008 02 21 14 28 43 442266 EXECUTE 2008 02 21 14 28 40 181510 304720105 88446673 0 2008 02 21 14 28 45 099408 EXECUTE 2008 02 21 14 28 41 835055 224002009 220510145 1 2 record s selected Chapter 6 Administering databases 239 68
159. 5 after making any required changes in your applications or environment you can do the instances and databases migration during off peak times to reduce system down time and reduce the number of people or systems affected by that downtime 168 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm We do not recommend this migration in your production environment without test 4 2 Migrating multi partitioned database This section provides a list of pre migration tasks and the migration procedures for partitioned databases The procedure to migration a multi partitioned database from DB2 Version 8 or 9 1 to Version 9 5 are in general the same The high level steps consist of the following gt Migration preparation This step prepares the instance and database for migration include backing up databases and checking if the database is ready for migration using the db2migr command DB2 Version 9 5 installation Migrating instance and databases Actual migrating instance and database Post migration Tasks to ensure that the DB2 servers perform as expected Enabling new DB2 9 5 functionality Migrating Administration Server Migrating DB2 clients 4 2 1 Pre migration tasks Perform the following steps to prepare for a safe and successful migration 1 The first step to migrate your environment is to determine if you can migrate your existing instances to a DB2 9 5 copy that you have
160. 5684 274036 2883968 0 0 0 50 792 529 0 098 2 0 0 0 6184 285684 274036 2883968 0 0 0 24 613 293 0 0100 0 0 0 0 6184 285700 274036 2883968 0 0 0 24 624 310 0 099 1 0 0 0 6184 285700 274036 2883968 0 0 0 36 614 301 0 0100 0 0 0 0 6184 285700 274036 2883968 0 0 0 24 614 296 0 0100 0 0 0 0 6184 285700 274036 2883968 0 0 0 32 786 521 0 099 1 0 The iostat command is used for reporting Central Processing Unit CPU statistics and monitoring system input output device statistics for devices and partition The report generated by the iostat command can be used to assist in changing the system configuration to better balance the input output load between physical disks Note The iostat command is contained in the sysstat package the sar command is also included in this package before using this command you need to install this package The first report generated by the iostat command provides statistics concerning the time since the system was booted Each subsequent report covers the time since the previous report There are some useful command options that can be used for the iostat command For example using k to display statistics in kilobytes instead of blocks using x to obtain extended statistics information for devices using to print the time for each report displayed and so on For more details please refer to the man help pages for iostat or other Linux documentation 410 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Re
161. 580 to 700 MB be installed and minimal configuration will be performed Custom This option allows you to select the 580 to 1020 MB features that you want to install and specify your configuration preferences You should also allocate disk space for required software communication products DB2 documentation and databases In DB2 Version 9 5 DB2 Information Center and PDF documentation are now provided on separate DVDs Installing DB2 Information Center in English requires 131 MB of disk space Additional space is required for additional languages We recommend that you allocate two GB of free space in the tmp directory 2 1 4 Memory requirements We recommend that you allocate a minimum 256 MB of RAM for DB2 anda minimum of 512 MB of RAM for a system running just a DB2 product and the DB2 GUI tools Additional memory should be allocated for other software and communication products When determining memory requirements be aware of the following gt We recommend that your SWAP space is at least as twice as much as your RAM gt For IBM data server client support these memory requirements are for a base of five concurrent client connections We recommend that you allocate an additional 16 MB of RAM per five client connections gt Memory requirements are affected by the size and complexity of your database system as well as by the extent of database activity and the number of clients accessing your system For DB2
162. 6 1 Message file types generated by partitioned LOAD operation Load Agent lt message file name gt load lt partitionnumber gt Partitioning Agent lt message file name gt part lt partitionnumber gt Pre partitioning Agent lt message file name gt prep lt partitionnumber gt Note We strongly recommend that the MESSAGES option be used for partitioned database load operations initiated from the CLP Monitoring the LOAD utility The LOAD QUERY command can be used to check the status of a load operation during processing and returns the table state You can connect to individual database partitions during a load operation and issue the LOAD QUERY command against the target table When issued from the CLP this command displays the contents of all the message files that currently reside on that database partition for the table that is specified in the LOAD QUERY command The output of the LOAD QUERY command in Example 6 57 is gathered when Example 6 55 on page 313 is running If a load job has finished the command returns the table state as shown in the last command in the example Example 6 57 Using LOAD QUERY to monitor LOAD status db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load query table itemload SQL3530I The Load Query utility is monitoring LOAD progress on partition wom SQL3109N The utility is beginning to load data from file db2backup datamove item del SQL3500W The utility is beginning the LOAD phase at time 02
163. 6 34 More details for sample table ITEM db2inst1 mensa gt db2 describe table item Data type Column Column name schema Data type name Length Scale Nulls ITEMID SYSIBM INTEGER 4 0 No AMOUNT SYSIBM DECIMAL 8 2 Yes 2 record s selected db2instl mensa gt db2 describe indexes for table item Index Index Unique Number of schema name rule columns DB2INST1 PK_ITEM_ITEMID P 1 1 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select dbpartitionnum itemid as part_no count as Counter from item group by dbpartitionnum itemid PART_NO COUNTER Chapter 6 Administering databases 285 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 0 1500364 1 1499636 2 record s selected The steps performed in this example are as follows 1 Run RUNSTATS to gather current statistics information 2 Delete half of the total rows within the ITEM table 3 Use REORGCHK with UPDATE STATISTICS option to update statistics and check the table again 4 REORG TABLE and REORG INDEXES with different options 5 Use REORGCHK with UPDATE STATISTICS option to update statistics and check the table again 6 Re binding packages if required Here are the details of each step 1 Use RUNSTATS to gather current statistics information for sample table ITEM see Example 6 35 Example 6 35 Using RUNSTATS and REORGCHK to gather and check statistics db2instl mensa gt db2 runstats on table db2instl item with distribution on all
164. 8 cluster 3 COBOL 426 code page 93 column function 421 columns 15 command df 42 iostat 406 ipcs 31 rpm 34 sar 406 showmount 47 sysctl 31 vmstat 406 Command Line Processor 298 488 command option 406 412 command line tool 430 commands ar 412 db2top 379 ssh 91 communication 46 requirements 29 compact 27 28 60 65 78 configuration file 136 499 68991X fm configuration parameters 136 archretrydelay 230 blk_log_dsk_ful 231 catalogcache_sz 137 dbheap 137 dft_degree 138 dft_monswitches 132 dftdbpath 132 diaglevel 119 132 176 183 391 diagpath 175 389 391 failarchpath 230 health_mon 350 instance_memory 133 intra_parallel 133 java_heap_sz 133 keepdari 425 keepfenced 425 logarchmeth1 224 230 logarchmeth2 224 230 logbufsz 137 logfilsiz 166 176 183 logprimary 176 183 logsecond 166 176 183 max_querydegree 133 maxfilop 137 mirrorlogpath 231 mon_heap_sz 132 notifylevel 389 numarchretry 230 sheapthres 132 sortheap 137 configuration task 93 console 211 contact group 352 contact management 351 content assist 220 content management 2 context assist 460 control center 488 Control Center 92 CPU utilization 413 crash recovery 250 create function 422 create procedure 423 create trigger 420 cumulative backup 225 custom 27 28 60 65 78 500 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm D dasupdt 5 Data 195 data compression 4 d
165. 8 2 10 pm facli a Figure 3 1 Choose the view in db2cc Figure 3 2 shows the main window of Control Center From there you can view all the cataloged systems and databases AN Control Center 3 Control Center oie All Systems All Databases 0 SAMPLE DB2INST1 USERSPACE1 DB2INST1 USERSPACE1 Views DB2INST1 USERSPACE1 G Aliases DB2INST1 USERSPACE1 Nicknames DB2INST1 USERSPACE1 Cache Objects Triggers Schemas Indexes 5 Table Spaces Tables E Event Monitors Database partition groups Actions Select an object from the list above to display mon Buffer Pools cp Create New Table G Application Objects User and Group Objects we Federated Database Objects G XML Schema Repository SR Figure 3 2 Main screen of the Control Center 92 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm 3 2 Preparation for the database creation There are a few configuration tasks that need to be done on Linux and DB2 before creating the database Here we discuss Code page considerations Table space consideration Linux specific configuration Multi partition specific configuration vvvy 3 2 1 Code page considerations In DB2 9 5 the default database code page is UTF 8 The code page is specified during database creation time If you want to change the code page afterwards the database would have to be recreated Figure 3 3 shows an example architec
166. 899bibl fm Related publications The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook IBM Redbooks For information on ordering these publications see How to get IBM Redbooks on page 498 gt gt gt DB2 UDB Exploitation of the Windows Environment SG24 6893 DB2 9 pureXML Overview and Fast Start SG24 7298 DB2 9 pureXML Guide SG24 7315 DB2 Security and Compliance Solutions for Linux UNIX and Windows SG24 7555 Database Partitioning Table Partitioning and MDC for DB2 9 SG24 7467 Developing PHP Applications for IBM Data Servers SG24 7218 Other publications These publications are also relevant as further information sources IBM DB2 9 5 gt gt gt What s New SC23 5869 00 Administrative API Reference SC23 5842 00 Administrative Routines and Views SC23 5843 00 Call Level Interface Guide and Reference Volume 1 SC23 5844 00 Call Level Interface Guide and Reference Volume 2 SC23 5845 00 Command Reference SC23 5846 00 Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference SC23 5847 00 Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC23 5848 00 Data Servers Databases and Database Objects Guide SC23 5849 00 Database Security Guide SC23 5850 00 Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 495 6899bibl fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Developing ADO NET a
167. 99ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm The license fees for DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition for zSeries are based on the size of the DB2 System z server measured in MSUs and are not affected by either the number of processors available to the DB2 Connect servers or the number of processors available to application servers where the application is running DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition for iSeries This product has the same specification as DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition for zSeries except that the license fees for DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition for iSeries are based on the number of processors allocated to the data source running on i5 OS or OS 400 operating systems Unlimited users are permitted DB2 for pervasive platforms The last but not the least DB2 offering is DB2 Everyplace DB2 Everyplace is a relational database and enterprise synchronization server that enables enterprise applications and enterprise data to be extended to mobile devices such as personal digital assistants PDAs and smart phones DB2 Everyplace can also be embedded into devices and appliances to increase their functionality and market appeal The product can be used as a local independent database on a mobile device or query information on remote servers when a connection is available 1 3 DB2 environment This section describes the various DB2 application configurations on Linux It also discusses the parallelism on SMP and clusters and
168. 99ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Check backup image You can use db2ckbkp to test the integrity of a backup image and to determine whether or not the image can be restored Example 6 16 shows how to use the tool to verify a backup image Example 6 16 db2ckbkp output db2inst1 mensa db2backup gt db2ckbkp ITSODB 0 db2inst1 NODE0000 CATNO000 20080204081423 001 1 Buffers processed tdHttttttttt Image Verification Complete successful The db2ckbkp utility can also be used to display the metadata stored in the backup header such as table space and container information or automatic storage paths The backup media header information is shown using the h option as illustrated in Example 6 17 The output shows that we used the INCLUDE LOGS clause and also the COMPRESS option to take the backup Example 6 17 Using db2ckbkp to show the backup media header db2inst1 mensa db2backup gt db2ckbkp h ITSODB 0 db2inst1 NODE0000 CATNO000 20080205141153 001 Server Database Name ITSODB Server Database Alias ITSODB Client Database Alias ITSODB Timestamp 20080205141153 Database Partition Number 0 Instance db2inst1l Sequence Number 1 Release ID C00 Database Seed 50B96082 DB Comment s Codepage Volume 0 DB Comment Volume DB Comment s Codepage System 0 DB Comment System Authentication Value 1 Backup Mode 1 Includes Logs 1 Compression 1 Backup Typ
169. 9ch02 fm opt ibm db2 V9 5 instance db2icrt p db2c_db2inst1 u db2fencl db2inst1 10 If there is other participating DB2 server physical node in the partitioned database environment repeat step 3 to step 9 in this section In our sample we do only have two DB2 servers mensa and gemini Modify sqllib db2nodes cfg by adding an entry to the db2nodes cfg file for each participating logical database partition server When you first view the db2nodes cfg file it should contain an entry similar to the following 0 ServerA 0 This entry includes the database partition server number node number the TCP IP host name of the server where the database partition server resides and a logical port number for the database partition server If you are installing a partitioned database environment with three machines and a logical database partition server on each machine the updated db2nodes cfg should appear similar to the following 0 ServerA 0 1 ServerB 0 2 ServerC 0 If you are installing a partitioned database environment with two machines and two logical database partition servers on each machine the updated db2nodes cfg should appear similar to the following 0 ServerA 0 1 ServerA 1 2 ServerB 0 3 ServerB 1 or 0 ServerA 0 1 ServerB 0 2 ServerA 1 3 ServerB 1 Example 2 28 shows the content of the db2nodes cfg in our sample Example 2 28 db2nodes cfg db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt more sqllib db2nod
170. ARTITIONNUM HOSTNAME cetus itsosj sanjase ibm com PORT 1 WITH db2stop force db2stan connect to ITSODB ALTER TABLESPACE TEMPSPACE1 ADD db2temp db2inst1 NODEO002 ITSODB TEMPSPACE1 ON DBF ALTER DATABASE PARTITION GROUP SNG_O1 ADD DBPARTITIONNUM 2 WITHOUT TABLESPACES ALTER TABLESPACE SAMPLE_SNG ADD db db2inst1 NODEO002 ITSODB SAMPLE_SNG ON DBPARTITI connect reset he command completed successfully Explanation No errors were encountered during the execution of this command User response No action required Figure 3 16 Messages after the partition has been created After executing these commands all tables within the affected table spaces have to be redistributed Then click on Redistribute in Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 Redistribute partition Then you get to the panel in Figure 3 18 on page 128 Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 127 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Er Redietibute Database Partition Group Date Database instance name MENSA NDEASSEE db2inst1 Select a database partition group then click redistribute to redistribute the data in that database partition group amongst its database partitions You may run the redistributions in parallel by specifying overlapping schedules in each redistribute wizard Database Partition Group Method Redistribute YV MENSA TSODB Figure 3 18 Redistribute the data Here you can select the par
171. Advanced Micro Devices Inc eXchange Java JDBC JDK JVM J2EE Sun and all Java based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both Excel Microsoft SQL Server Visual Studio Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both Intel Intel Xeon Pentium Intel logo Intel Inside logo and Intel Centrino logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States other countries or both UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both Other company product or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others iv Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899pref fm Preface Linux is one of the fastest growing server operating platforms within the past few years DB2 has long been known for its technology leadership This IBM Redbooks publication is an informative guide that describes how to effectively integrate DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows LUW with SUSE and Red Hat Linux operating systems This book provides both introductory and detailed information on installing configuring managing and monitoring DB2 in a Linux environment We describe the DB2 product family and features for
172. B2 program the data to be stored in the databases and the DB2 logs need disk space This can be achieved with either raw devices or file systems In this section we discuss storage planning for DB2 data servers Chapter 2 Installation 39 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm File systems A popular method for configuring disk space for DB2 on Linux is to use separate file systems to store and run DB2 File systems can be used by DB2 either as system managed storage SMS or as database managed storage DMS File systems have many benefits To name a few they can be distributed across a network and have network oriented authentication and replication capabilities which makes them essential for a partitioned database system The operating system by default caches file data that is read from and written to disk This behavior of caching data at the file system level is reflected in the FILE SYSTEM CACHING clause of the CREATE TABLESPACE statement Since the database manager manages its own data caching using buffer pools the caching at the file system level is not needed if the size of the buffer pool is tuned appropriately In some cases caching at the file system level and in the buffer pools causes performance degradation because of the extra CPU cycles required for the double caching To avoid this double caching most file systems have a feature that disables caching at the file system level This is generical
173. Business Partners and Clients Your efforts will help increase product acceptance and customer satisfaction As a bonus you will develop a network of contacts in IBM development labs and increase your productivity and marketability Find out more about the residency program browse the residency index and apply online at ibm com redbooks residencies html Comments welcome Your comments are important to us We want our books to be as helpful as possible Send us your comments about this book or other IBM Redbooks in one of the following ways gt Use the online Contact us review Redbooks form found at ibm com redbooks gt Send your comments in an e mail to redbooks us ibm com gt Mail your comments to vi Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899pref fm IBM Corporation International Technical Support Organization Dept HYTD Mail Station P099 2455 South Road Poughkeepsie NY 12601 5400 Preface vii 6899pref fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm viii Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899chang fm Summary of changes This section describes the technical changes made in this edition of the book This edition may also include minor corrections and editorial changes that are not identified Summary of Changes for SG24 6899 01 for Up and Running with DB2 on Linux as created or updated on April 17 20
174. C interfaces which makes it easy for you to port your Perl prototypes to CLI and JDBC Perl offers very powerful functions for formatting text and handling strings That allows you to generate reports very quickly Setting up a Perl application development environment In order to set up a Perl application development environment for DB2 on Linux the following components must be installed and configured on your workstation vvvy DB2 client or server Perl 5 8 or later DBI 1 41 or later DBD DB2 driver Here is the installation procedure 1 Install DB2 on your workstation Refer to Chapter 2 Installation on page 25 for instructions on how to install DB2 on Linux Install Perl 5 Perl is typically provided by the Linux distributions but you can download it from http www cpan org Build test and install the DBI module DBI is an open standard API that provides database access for client applications written in Perl Usually the Perl DBI module is shipped with your Linux distribution If you want to install it you can download it from the CPAN Web site at http www cpan org modules by category 07_Database_ Interfaces DBI Refer to the Readme file on this Web site for installation instructions Build test and install the DBD DB2 driver The DBD DB2 driver works with DBI and a DB2 client to access databases The latest DB2 Perl DBI driver can be downloaded from http www ibm com software data db2 per1
175. Change online log path By default the log path is configured as database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00001 SQLOGDIR To change the log path use Control Center or command to update the database configuration parameter NEWLOGPATH to the new path The new path will take effect once the database is in a consistent state and all users are disconnected from the database Note that it is not necessary to issue a db2stop and db2start When the first user reconnects to the database the log files are relocated The following is the procedure to change online log path by commands 1 Create the directories For a single partitioned database environment enter mkdir p db210g1 ITSODB 116 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm mkdir p db21og2 ITSODB and for the multiple partitioned environment enter db2_all typeset Z4 DB2NODE mkdir p db21log1 ITSODB db2_all typeset Z4 DB2NODE mkdir p db2log2 ITSODB 2 Set the database configuration manager parameter NEWLOGPATH to the new path Example 3 21 shows the command Example 3 21 Set the NEWLOGPATH parameter db2instl puget gt db2 UPDATE DB CONFIG FOR itsodb USING NEWLOGPATH db210g1 1TSODB DB20000I1 The UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION command completed successfully SQL1363W One or more of the parameters submitted for immediate modification were not changed dynamically For these configuration parameters al applications must di
176. Connection r Target schema for deploying an unqualified routine Schema DB2iNST1 r Duplicate handling Drop duplicates CO Treat duplicates as errors e Ignore duplicates and continue to the next routine Deploy by building the source Deploy using binaries if available in the database C Deploy source to the database Figure 8 32 Deploy Options Chapter 8 Application development 475 6899ch08 fm 476 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm In Routine Option keep the defaults See Figure 8 33 Press Next 22 Deploy Routines Routine Options Specify routine options v B amp Java Stored Procedures E 2 EMPSALARY IN SALAI Compile options fo Enable debugging JDK home home db2inst1 sqllib java jdk32 Browse JDK version 150 Database JRE version Apply Folder Settings Figure 8 33 Routine op Einish Cancel tions At the Summary panel Figure 8 34 on page 476 press Finish 3 Deploy Routines wy Summary The settings that you specified are summari zed here Target database SAMPLE Target schema DB2INST1 Routines to deploy EMPSALARY Error handling Stop and roll back on errors Duplicate handling Drop duplicates Denbow _Nenlou hu huildina the course Figure 8 34 Summary panel In the Data Output pan Up and Running with DB2 on Linux el Figure 8 35 you can see t
177. DB2PDOPT environment variable In Example 7 20 we set the default to agents to get information about running agents 398 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Example 7 20 Setting default option for db2pd db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2pd db2pd gt You are running db2pd in interactive mode db2pd gt If you want command line mode rerun db2pd with valid options db2pd gt Type h or help for help db2pd gt Type q to quit db2pd gt q db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt export DB2PDOPT agents db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2pd Database Partition 0 Active Up 0 days 23 49 40 Agents Current agents 6 Idle agents 0 Active coord agents 4 Active agents total 4 Pooled coord agents 2 Pooled agents total 2 Address AppHand1 nod index AgentEDUID Priority Type State ClientPid Userid ClientNm Rowsread Rowswrtn LkTm0Ot DBName 0x000000020023D600 1054 000 01054 527 0 Coord Inst Active 9045 db2inst1 db2bp 131 0 NotSet ITSODB 0x000000020023C140 1056 000 01056 554 0 Coord Inst Active 9045 db2instl db2taskd 2 0 NotSet ITSODB 0x00000002007C0080 1057 000 01057 555 0 Coord Inst Active 9045 db2instl db2wlmd 0 0 NotSet ITSODB 0x000000020023AC80 1058 000 01058 556 0 Coord Inst Active 9045 db2instl db2evmg_ 0 0 3 ITSODB 0x00000002007C1540 0 000 00000 557 0 Coord Pooled n a n a n a 0 0 NotSet ITSODB 0x00000002007C2A00 0 000 00000 558 0 Coo
178. Database Directory is empty No database has been processed DBI10701 Program db2imigr completed successfully db2instl gemini gt db2start 02 06 2008 16 58 39 0 0 SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful db2instl gemini gt db2level DB21085I Instance db2instl uses 64 bits and DB2 code release SQL09050 with level identifier 03010107 188 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm Informational tokens are DB2 v9 5 0 0 s071001 LINUXAMD6495 and Fix Pack 0 Product is installed at opt ibm db2 v9 5 db2inst1l gemini temp gt db2 create database itso automatic storage yes on database db2inst1 USING CODESET UTF 8 TERRITORY BR collate using SYSTEM_819_ BR DB20000I1 The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully Create database objects using the edited DDL db2instl gemini temp gt db2 tvf unidb ddl db2inst1l gemini temp gt db2move itso import Application code page not determined using ANSI codepage 1208 kkkkk DB2MOVE kkkkk Action IMPORT Start time Wed Feb 6 17 07 16 2008 Connecting to database ITSO successful Server DB2 Common Server V9 5 0 Binding package automatically home db2inst1 sqllib bnd db2common bnd successful Binding package automatically home db2inst1 sqllib bnd db2move bnd successful IMPORT table DB2INST1 LOCATION Rows read 2
179. Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm can be reused on all hosts In our example we only have two partition servers mensa and gemini Edit the file as shown in Example 2 8 Example 2 8 Edit the shosts equiv file mensa mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com gemini gemini itsosj sanjose ibm com Edit the ssh_known_hosts file The ssh server host system needs to have access to the public key of the ssh client host For host based authentication the trust mechanism looks for public keys in the ssh_known_hosts file The ssh_known_hosts file is found in the etc ssh directory on Linux If this file does not yet exist create the file Ensure that it is owned by the root user and only allows user read write access and group other read access See Example 2 9 Example 2 9 Create ssh_known_hosts and modify the file properties cd etc ssh touch ssh_known_hosts chown root root ssh_known_hosts chmod 644 ssh_known_hosts Add unqualified host name fully qualified host name and IP address of the client machine to the ssh_known_hosts file ass shown in Example 2 10 and Example 2 11 You can use the ssh keyscan utility to populate this file Example 2 10 Update the ssh_known_hosts file for RSA encryption cd etc ssh ssh keyscan t rsa mensa mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 90 gt gt ssh_known_hosts ssh keyscan t rsa gemini gemini itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 94 gt gt ssh_known_hosts Example 2 11 Update the ssh_known_
180. Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 0000 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully 0001 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080207095407 db2inst1 mensa gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2inst1 mensa gt db2 drop table tabl DB20000I1 The SQL command completed successfully db2instl mensa gt db2 select from tab1 SQLO204N DB2INST1 TAB1 is an undefined name SQLSTATE 42704 db2instl mensa gt db2 connect reset DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully To recover the dropped table tab1 t follow the following procedure 1 Restore the table space in which the dropped table is stored from a database or table space backup Please note that the whole table space is restored means also the other tables in that table space are restored and later rolled forward to the current state In our example the dropped table was in table space TSDATA1 which resides in database partitions 0 and 1 In Example 6 29 we restore the table space from the last full backup image Example 6 29 Table space restore for all database partitions db2inst1 mensa gt db2_all db2 restore db itsodb tablespace tsdatal online from db2backup taken at 20080207090432 DB20000I The RESTORE
181. E EMPLOYEE SALARY lt 37000 to WHERE EMPLOYEE SALARY lt SALARY Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Then save the file You can see it in the editor window as shown in Figure 8 31 a EmpSalary sql 30 EMPSALARY FL Sas beg gt JEC Stored Procedure MMPSALARY Package db2instl import java sql grec classes public class mrsarary public static void eMPSALARY int SALARY Resultset rsl throws sQLException Exception Get connection to the database Connection con Drivertanager get Connection jdbce default connection PreparedStatement stmt null boolean brlag String q sql SELECT PMPIOYER FMPNO FMPIOYEE LASTNAME DEPARIMENT DEPTNO DEPARTMENT DEP TNAME tia FROM EMPLOYEE JOIN DEPARTMENT ON FMPLOYEE WORK DEPT DEPARTMENT DEP TNO ya WHERE FMP LOYEE SALARY SALARY stmt con prepareStatement sql blag stmt execute xsl 0 stmt getResultset Figure 8 31 Java code of the stored procedure Now we are ready to deploy the code to the database server Expand the project DataProject Stored Procedures EMPSALARY right click on EMPSALARY and select Deploy Keep the Deploy options as shown in Figure 8 32 on page 475 Press Next II Deploy Routines Deploy Options Specify options for the deployment r Target database Use different database Database
182. EP TNO a SELECT Staf SELECT DE2INSTL EMPLOYEE FMPNO DE2 INSTL FMPLOYEE IE2INSTL DEPARTMENT DEP TNAME FROM IE2INSTL FMPLOYEE JOIN DE2INSTL DEPARTMENT E FIRSTNME VARCHAR 12 37000 MIDINIT CHAR 1 LASTNAME VARCHAR 15 gE WORKDEPT CHAR 3 PHONENO CHAR 4 HIREDATE DATE E JOB CHAR 8 EDLEVEL SMALLINT E SEX CHAR 1 WHERE DB2INSTL FMP LOY EE SALARY PMPIOY EE 7 EMPNO ot 4 C FIRSTNME L A DEPTNO DEPTNAME Figure 8 22 Content assist in Query Builder Creating a stored procedure in Java In Stored procedures in Java on page 444 we discussed how to create stored procedures from the command line In this section we show how easy this task can be accomplished by using the Data Studio The graphical aids provided by the tool makes this task much less error prone To start the creation in the Data Project Explorer expand DataProject SQL Script EmpSalary sql Right click on it and select Generate Stored Procedure We name the procedure EMPSALARY as shown in Figure 8 23 on page 471 We take the reset of default values to create a JDBC program Press Next 470 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm g3 New Stored Procedure KD Name and Language Specify basic options for creating a stored procedure To preserve case use delimiters for all SOL identi
183. G jurel Evrifirn ssayerel rior elicsetcny Figure 2 16 MPP Installation Set up Information for DAS 9 On the Set up a DB2 instance windows select Create a DB2 instance then click Next 10 On the Set up partitioning options for the DB2 instance window as shown in Figure 2 17 on page 80 select Multiple partition instance and specify the number of maximum logical partitions By default the number of maximum logical partitions is 4 Local services entries will be added in etc services after this installation and the entries should appear similar to Example 2 26 DB2 reserves four available ports after 60000 for db2inst1 Example 2 26 Local services entries in etc services DB2_db2inst1 60000 tcp DB2_db2inst1_1 60001 tcp DB2_db2inst1_2 60002 tcp DB2_db2inst1_END 60003 tcp When finished click Next Chapter 2 Installation 79 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm C Figure 2 17 MPP Installation Set up partitioning options for the DB2 Instance 11 On Set user information for the DB2 instance owner window set user information for the DB2 instance owner Choose existing user db2inst1 Note that in our sample db2inst1 s home directory is created on db2home which is NFS shared across the partitioned servers Click Next 12 Set user information for the fenced user choose existing user db2fenc1 This user is responsible for executing fenced user defined functions such as UDFs and store
184. IBM Data Studio 197 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm IBM Installation Manager gogg Install Packages t Select the packages you want to install Installation Packages Status Vendor License Key Type viv v vY IBM Data Studio of Version 1 1 1 IBM C Show all versions Check for Other Versions and Extensions O Next gt Cancel Figure 5 3 Select install package 6 On the Licenses panel accept the license agreement 7 The location tab is for specifying the locations for shared resources IBM Installation Manager and package groups On the first panel of the Location tab Figure 5 4 on page 199 specify the paths for the shared resources directory and the IBM Installation Manager The shared resources directory contains resources that can be shared by one or more package groups We use the default locations Note You can specify the shared resources directory only at the first time that you install a package You cannot change the directory location unless you uninstall all packages 198 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm T IBM Installation Manager Install Packages Select a location for the shared resources directory and a location for Installation Manager Install When you install packages files are stored in two locations 1 The shared resources direc
185. ID 1 FROM tmpinfo WHERE ID lt 280000 SELECT ID TRANSLATE CHAR INTEGER RAND 1000000 CASE MOD ID 4 WHEN O THEN aeiou bcdfg WHEN 1 THEN aeiou hjklm WHEN 2 THEN aeiou npqrs ELSE aeiou twxyz END 1234567890 AS LASTNAME CURRENT DATE RAND 20000 DAYS AS HIREDATE INTEGER 10000 RAND 200000 AS SALARY FROM tmpinfo DB20000I1 The SQL command completed successfully Check the notification sent by DB2 system Once DB2 health monitor detected that the threshold for warning or alarm has been exceeded it will send warning or alarm messages to the DB2 administration notification log as well as specified contacts if you have configured notifications In our example the notification will be sent to notification log and to a contact point through e mail We can use DB2 Journal to check the administration notification log To start the DB2 Journal select Tools Journal in any DB2 Tools panel where the Tools menu is available or from Health Center right click on the instance name and select Show Notification Log Then select the Notification Log tab choose Instance to view the notification log The instance in our example is db2inst1 The notification log for the instance is shown in the bottom pane of the panel Use the Notification Log Filter to set up a filter to show health monitor notifications only Figure 7 15 shows the notification log of our example It shows that the value of current table space
186. INST1 ITS TE Figure 7 29 db2top starting window 380 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Quit q Help Monitoring buffer pool utilization To monitor the buffer pool utilization press b By default this utility will refresh the display every two seconds You can override the default refresh interval using the command option i or press i after starting db2top Figure 7 30 on page 381 shows a sample Buffer pool information screen By default db2top issues global snapshots If you want to monitor a specific partition you can press P and then specify which partition you want to monitor Note this applies all the monitoring not just monitoring buffer pool utilization mensa itsosj sanjose ibm cos Figure 7 30 Monitoring buffer pool panel Monitoring dynamic SQL To monitor dynamic SQL press D In this panel Figure 7 31 on page 382 you can view the number of times a SQL has been executed Num Execution average execution time and average CPU time for a SQL statement Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 381 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 15 7 refresh 2s l OL Linux part 2 2 epee beau i Y a e p ALL p Enter SOL hash string 151217167448054867 SQL Statement zl Figure 7 31 Monitoring dynamic SQL window To check the SQL statement in the Monitoring dynamic SQ
187. IT LASTNAME WORKDEPT FK PHONENO HIREDATE B EDLEVEL EX BIRTHDATE ff EMP_RESUME EMPNO FK fh RESUME_FORMAT f RESUME com ca ma cma oa ma cm ma POR oma ma os ezag 5 D x 8 Figure 5 24 ER diagram of the EMPLOYEE and the EMP_RESUME table 5 3 5 Data and object management You can manage the data of your tables directly from the workbench of the Data Studio In order to do that open the tree Connections SAMPLE gt SAMPLE Schemas gt DB2INST1 Tables EMPLOYEE Right click on the table and select Data Edit You get an editor panel that allows you to manipulate the data Figure 5 25 Ta TestDiagram T Test2Diagram OverviewDiagram fay Statementt sql x EMPLOYEE X 4 G1 BE outline 38 EMPNO CHAR 6 FIRSTNME VARCHAR 12 MIDINIT CHAR 1 LASTNAME VARCHAR 15 WORKDEPT CHAR 3 PHOr An outline is not available 00010 CHRISTINE I HAAS MICHAEL THOMPSON oo000 SALLY1 KWAN JOHN GEYER IRVING STERN EVA PULASKI EILEEN HENDERSON T Properties Tasks Problems Error Log Model Report Be Data Output 3 Bookmarks Servers Status Action Object Name DB2INST1 EMPLOYEE Success Edit EMPLOYEE Messages Parameters Results Profiling Data update DB2INST1 EMPLOYEE set FIRSTNME SALLY1 where EMPNO CAST 000090 AS CHAR 6 Data successfully saved Inserted 0 row s Updated 1 row s Deleted 0 row s Figure 5 25 Update table data in Data Stu
188. IX and Windows Database version v95 Figure 8 17 Create a query in Data Studio 3 The Query Builder view shows From Database Explorer expand the tree Connections SAMPLE gt SAMPLE Schemas gt DB2INST1 gt Tables and drag and drop the EMPLOYEE and DEPARTMENT tables into the middle pane of the Query Builder The tables show up as boxes with the column names You can move them around or resize them Create the join Right click on the EMPLOYEE table in the Query Builder and select Create Join A window pops up where you can select the source and the target of the join The source table is EMPLOYEE the source column is WORKDEPT the target table is DEPARTMENT and the target column is DEPTNO Figure 8 18 on page 468 shows the Create Join panel After pressing OK you can see a line between the tables in the middle pane Chapter 8 Application development 467 6899ch08 fm 5 z Create Join O Source Table alias EMPLOYEE v Column WORKDEPT v Source column type CHAR Target Table alias DEPARTMENT Column PEPTNO v Target column type CHAR Join type Inner join O Left outer join Bight outer join Eull outer join cot Figure 8 18 Create a join in the Query Builder Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Select the columns for the query Just check EMPNO LASTNAME in the EMPLOYEE box and DEPTNO and DEPTNAME in the DEPARTMENT box in
189. Indicator Prior to using the health monitor you need to understand the concept of a health indicator A health indicator is a measurement that gauges the healthiness of some aspect of an object The health monitor uses these indicators to evaluate specific aspects of database manager or database performance DB2 comes with default settings for all health indicators Using the Health Center DB2 commands or APIs you can customize the settings of the health indicators and define who should be notified and what script or task should be run if an alert is issued For example you can customize the alarm and warning thresholds for the amount of space used in a table space Health monitor The health monitor is a server side tool that constantly monitors the health of the instance and all active database objects when DB2 is started The health monitor is enabled by default when a instance is created you can deactivate it using the database manager configuration parameter HEALTH MON The health monitor gathers information about the health of the system using new interfaces that do not impose a performance penalty It does not turn on any snapshot monitor switches to collect information The health monitor automatically evaluates a set of health indicators even without user interaction If the health monitor finds that a defined threshold has been exceeded for instance the available log space is not sufficient or if it detects an abnormal state f
190. It shows the percentage of total log space used the available and the used log space for each database partition Starting with DB2 9 5 DB2 maintains two copies of the log control file SQLOGCTL LFH 1 and SQLOGCTL LFH 2 You can configure DB2 to also mirror the database log files by setting the following database parameter gt MIRRORLOGPATH DB2 provides the capability to mirror the active log files to prevent log data loss in case of a disk crash We recommend that you place the secondary log path on a physically separate disk Another related parameter is gt BLK_LOG_DSK_FUL The database configuration parameter can be set to prevent disk full errors for the transaction when DB2 cannot create a new log file in the active log path because of a file system full condition If the parameter is set to YES DB2 will attempt to create the log file every five minutes until it succeeds Note For a detailed overview of the configuration parameters for database logging refer to Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC23 5848 00 6 1 2 Recovery history file DB2 log manager and the DB2 utilities such as backup restore load export or reorg write detailed information into the recovery history file In a Chapter 6 Administering databases 231 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm multi partitioned database this file exists in every database partition To see the entries in the recovery history fi
191. KTIMEOUT The default is set to 1 This means a connection can wait until it gets all resources Deadlock problems occur if a connection already holds locks which are required by another application To prevent too many deadlock situations for OTLP set it to 10 and for DSS set it to 60 gt LOGBUFSZ DB2 uses a buffer for log records before writing the records to disk If the value is set too small it results in unnecessary I O on the disk When increasing the value of this parameter you should consider increasing the DBHEAP parameter too since the log buffer memory is allocated from the database heap gt SORTHEAP Can be set to AUTOMATIC Each sort has its own amount of memory that is allocated by the database manager This parameter defines the maximum sort memory that can be used When increasing this value you should examine whether the SHEAPTHRES_SHR parameter in the database manager configuration file also needs to be adjusted gt DATABASE MEMORY Can be set to AUTOMATIC If it is set to AUTOMATIC STMM tunes it according to the available memory in the system and according to the needs of the different tuning areas If it is set Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 137 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm to a fixed value the memory for this particular database is limited to that value and STMM tunes the different areas based on that available memory gt DFT_DEGREE A value of 1 means no
192. Kernel parameter valueS 0 2 0 00 c ee es 29 2 1 7 Additional software requirements 00 0c eee eee 32 2 2 Installation considerations and planning 00 ee eae 35 2 2 1 Considerations 0000 a 35 2 2 2 Installation methods 0 eee es 38 2 2 3 Storage planning s es saaana 39 Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved iii 6899TOC fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 2 4 Lab environment 0 00 cece eee 45 2 2 5 Setting up NFS for a partitioned database environment installation 46 2 2 6 User and group setup 2 0 eee eae 49 2 2 7 Enabling ssh for a partitioned database environment installation 52 2 3 Installing DB2 secs oe Bees eri sra etek woe ed ees weenie 58 2 3 1 Non root installation 0 00 ee ee 58 2 3 2 Root installation 0 00 ee 65 2 3 3 Installing a partitioned database environment 77 2 3 4 Installing DB2 license files 0 0 002 e eee ee 84 2 3 5 Installing DB2 documentation 00 0 eee ee 85 Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 0000 000 eeaee 89 3 1 Control Center setup 2 2 0 eee 90 3 2 Preparation for the database creation 00000 eee eee 93 3 2 1 Code page considerations 0 ees 93 3 2 2 Table space considerations 000 0c 94 3 2 3 Linux specific configuration 2 eee ee 101 3 2 4 Multiple partitione
193. Key Data Type Length Scale Not Nul Generated Default Value Gene Privileges DEPTNAME VARCHAR 35 Z o Columns MGRNO O CHAR 6 o o Relationships ADMRDEPT 0 CHAR 3 Tal Statistics LOCATION CHAR 16 oO Documentation Sx Aun DOL gt Impacted Objects gt DDL Figure 5 27 table editor In a similar way you can manipulate the other database objects such as aliases buffer pools table spaces roles privileges 5 3 6 Data Web Services Data Web Services provides you the capability to generate a Web Service froma query without any coding Right click on the statement in the Data Project Explorer and select Add to Web Service Figure 5 28 Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 219 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm v os Y l DataProject SAMPLE jdbe db2 local host 50001 SAMPLE v ASAL Scripts E Statemer Open With gt Eel tS z AR Statementt sql amp USER SELECT FMPNO SALARY FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE SALARY 36000 ORDER EY LASTNAME b C3 Web Service CI XML z gt Delete BunsaL sh Visual Explain Validate Team P Compare With Replace With C Stored Proce m Rename User Defined i User Detin B Copy 10 Add to Web Service 20 Generate Stored Procedure a 4 Figure 5 28 Create a web service from a query This creates a Web service from that query You can build the WAR file and deploy it to an application server
194. L panel obtain the hash value of the query from the first column press L and input the hash value The SQL statement will be displayed as shown in Figure 7 32 on page 383 You can press e to get db2expln utility output or press x to get db2exfmt utility output to analyze dynamic SQL execution plan In some cases explain will fail if an object referenced by the query is not in the default schema In this case you can use the V option in the command line to specify a default schema for explains 382 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm BM OB2INST1 ITS Quit q Seip Figure 7 32 Query text window 7 3 3 Running db2top in the background mode db2top background mode provides you the capability of automatic performance analysis or data collection for analysis using Microsoft Excel Analyzing the db2top data using Microsoft Excel You can run db2top in background mode and analyze the data later using Microsoft Excel When using db2top with b command option db2top will display information in CSV format db2top provides an Excel report tool db2top Reports which is a macro for you to build graphical reports db2top Reports macro is in the sample Excel file db2top xls located in the samples directory after unzipping db2top 2 0 bin zip To use db2top Reports copy db2top xls to a working directory on a Windows platform and double click it to ope
195. LP commands to monitor DMS table space storage consumption In this example we expect when table space utilization which is measured as the percentage of space consumed exceeds the predefined threshold values for a warning or alarm DB2 system will send notification to the administration notification log and the specified contacts by e mail You can get recommendations from the Health Center or by DB2 CLP commands for such a situation and take actions accordingly Furthermore we also show you how to specify follow up actions for the occurrence of a warning or alarm for this specific health indicator You can have the DB2 system take the corrective action automatically when the values for a health indicator setting are exceeded 354 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm The example consists of the following steps Prepare DMS table space and table Review health indicator for the DMS table space Populate a desired amount of data into the table space Check the notification sent by DB2 system Take corresponding action to resolve current health alerts Set up additional follow up actions DRON These steps are given in detail 1 Prepare DMS table space and table In our example a DMS table space with file container is used The size of the table space is 10 MB on each partition at its first creation After the table space is created a table with a distribution key is created withi
196. Linux and provide step by step instructions for a single as well as for multiple partitions DB2 system installation and configuration We cover how to migrate single and multiple partition DB2 to DB2 Version 9 5 and discuss in detail DB2 database administration in a Linux environment procedures and tools for database backup and recovery online maintenance and system monitoring We cover DB2 integrated tools and their features and use We discuss aspects of DB2 application development in the Linux environment and provide general tips about building and running DB2 applications on Linux and the use of DB2 application development tools The team that wrote this book This book was produced by a team of specialists from around the world working at the International Technical Support Organization San Jose Center Whei Jen Chen is a Project Leader at the International Technical Support Organization San Jose Center She has extensive experience in database design and modeling DB2 system administration and application development Whei Jen is an IBM Certified Solutions Expert in Database Administration and Application Development as well as an IBM Certified IT Specialist Christian Hideaki Kondo is a DB2 Systems Support member in Brazil He has seven years of experience in DB2 and Informix He holds a degree in computer science from Universidade Estadual Paulista UNESP His areas of expertise include DB2 Engine and BI solutions including
197. MANAGER CONFIGURATION command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 get dbm cfg grep i health Monitor health of instance and databases HEALTH MON ON The HEALTH_MON parameter can be dynamically changed The update to the HEALTH_MON takes effect immediately Once the HEALTH_MON is turned on the default an agent will collect information about the health of the objects that are active in your database environment If an object is considered to be in an unhealthy condition based on threshold or object state the notifications can be sent and actions can be taken automatically Configuring Health Center You can use the toggle buttons to filter the alerts according to their severity Figure 7 2 on page 351 The Health Center is opened with the 350 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Object in Any Alert State toggle button third toggle button selected by default which helps to identify those instances with current alerts that should be addressed If the Health Center is opened for the first time you can choose All Objects toggle button the fourth toggle button to display All Objects to view the navigation tree with all cataloged LUW instances on the left pane of the panel bjects in Any Alert State JA A oe Welcome to the Health Center g Legend How to use the Health Center To view alerts within an instance or database sele
198. MP system 1 4 2 Database clusters The driving force behind using Linux clusters is that by distributing the load over several low cost servers running an open source operating system a larger task can be accomplished faster more reliably and much more economically And if the load increases the cluster can be extended for managing the additional demand without compromising on performance DB2 was the first commercial database on Linux to provide built in capabilities for clusters That is DB2 can be deployed across a Linux cluster right out of the box without the need for additional clustering software DB2 clusters on Linux are ideal for running demanding transactional applications and warehouses that involve large volumes of data while providing the following benefits Faster processing time Very large databases Excellent scalability Increased availability Reduced cost YYYY Y Combining the clustered approach with DB2 s support for 64 bit Linux environments provides additional performance and scalability advantages For the clustering feature of DB2 you have to setup a partitioned environment This is called inter parallelism Chapter 1 Introduction 17 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Database clustering architectures There are two primary database clustering architectures shared disk and shared nothing Shared disk is used by Oracle RAC DB2 for Linux employs shared nothing Shared di
199. Migrating instances and databases on page 174 In Example 4 14 our instance is dpfusr1 which has already been migrated Migrate tools catalog database using the steps provided in 4 2 3 Migrating instances and databases on page 174 Example 4 15 shows migrating the tools catalog database in our Lab Example 4 15 db2tdbmgr dpfusr1l gemini gt db2tdbmgr d toolsdb s cc Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 179 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Tools catalog database migrated successfully to the current level Tools catalog creation If you do not have a tools catalog yet you can create a new one now You can use an existing database or create a new one this database must be local The syntax for create a new database db2 create tools catalog lt catalog_ name gt create new database lt database_name gt Where catalog_name is used to identify the DB2 tools catalog and database_name is the new database Example 4 16 shows how to create a tools catalog database Example 4 16 Tools catalog tables creation in a new database dpfusr1l gemini gt db2 create tools catalog cc create new database toolsdb DB20000I The CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command completed successfully 4 2 7 Migrating DB2 clients Once the DB2 server is migrated we recommend that you migrate the DB2 Clients Considerations Mixing the server and client version will reduce the capability of using DB2 server f
200. NST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select substr tabschema 1 10 substr tabname 1 10 substr tbspace 1 10 from syscat tables where tabname ITEM DB2INST1 ITEM TSDATA2 1 record s selected db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 connect to itsorepl Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSOREPL Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select substr tabschema 1 10 substr tabname 1 10 substr tbspace 1 10 from syscat tables where tabname ITEM DB2VS ITEM USERSPACE1 332 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 1 record s selected For details regarding this utility refer to Command Reference SC23 5846 00 The ADMIN_COPY_ SCHEMA stored procedure is another method to copy a schema This stored procedure can be used to copy a specific schema and all objects contained in it The new target schema objects will be created using the same object names as the objects in the source schema but with the target schema qualifier Note The ADMIN_COPY_SCHEMA procedure can be used for copying schemas within the same database while the db2move utility is used across databases In Example 6 62 we create a schema called db2vs1 Example 6 62 Using ADMIN_COPY_SCHEMA procedure db2inst1 mensa db2
201. Oaa Eaa software Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm SG24 6899 01 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Experience the power of the integration of DB2 9 5 and Linux Make it easier to get DB2 for LUW up and running on Linux Leverage DB2 s powerful autonomic technology Whei Jen Chen Christian Hideaki Kondo Helmut Riegler Lifang LF Liu Veiko Spranger Redbooks ibm com redbooks Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm ES International Technical Support Organization Up and Running with DB2 on Linux April 2008 6899edno fm SG24 6899 01 6899edno fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information in Notices on page iii First Edition April 2008 This edition applies to DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows Version 9 5 Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 5 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 10 and Ubuntu 7 10 This document created or updated on April 17 2008 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2008 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899TOC fm Contents NOCES oo cee See deed dye tbe le DE Gene oye ee be deen iii Trademarks 2 244 secede miie wee eh te ee are ho ale ee iv PretaCe s 5 i pan w
202. P DATABASE command completed successfully 0001 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080201170437 Now the database is ready for log archiving To verify it use the following command db2 archive log for itsodb The active log files will be archived from the log directory to db2archive directory DB2 uses the following subdirectory structure for the archived log files lt logarchpath gt instance DBNAME PARTITION CHAIN In our case we see the archived log files for the partitioned database under db2archive db2inst1 ITSODB NODE0000 C0000000 YW r 1 db2instl db2grp1 12288 2008 02 01 17 38 S0000000 L0G db2archive db2inst1 ITSODB NODE0001 C0000000 YW r 1 db2instl db2grp1 12288 2008 02 01 17 38 S0000000 L0G The database is now enabled to take database backups in online mode as well as to backup individual table spaces More parameters for log file management With the setup we did the log files archived automatically by the DB2 log manager db2 ogmegr to another file system called db2archive Depending to your company s needs about log archiving you may consider to set some other database configuration parameters For log archiving check the following parameters gt LOGARCHMETH2 This parameters specifies a second location or method to archive the log files It can be set like LOGARCHMETH1 but points to a different location l
203. PPC64 s390x POWER zSeries SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 10 Table 2 2 Validated environments for DB2 9 5 Kernel architecture x86_64 PPC64 s390x POWER zSeries Coe ee Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 4 Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 4 e a a es ae SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 9 2 1 3 Required disk spaces You must take into account the following disk requirements while configuring your system The DB2 Setup wizard provides dynamic size estimates based on the components selected during a typical compact or custom installation as shown in Table 2 3 and Table 2 4 on page 28 Table 2 3 Required disk space non root installation Typical The typical setup includes basic 400 to 490 MB database server function database administration tools and most product features and functionality Compact Basic DB2 features and functionality will 390 to 470 MB be installed and minimal configuration will be performed Custom This option allows you to select the 390 to 680 MB features that you want to install and specify your configuration preferences Chapter 2 Installation 27 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Table 2 4 Required disk space root installation Typical The typical setup includes basic 630 to 760 MB database server function database administration tools and most product features and functionality Compact Basic DB2 features and functionality will
204. SDK and Type 4 driver It selects data from the EMPLOYEE table in the SAMPLE database 440 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm First the driver is loaded by the driver manager Then a connection is created based on the driver URL jdbc db2 lt hostname gt lt port gt lt database gt The application then performs a SELECT on the table and loops through the result set Before running the example the lt port gt must be replaced by the port number of your instance and lt password gt by the actual password Example 8 17 Sample JDBC Java program test_java java import import import import import public pub java sql Connection java sql DriverManager java sql SQLException java sql ResultSet java sql Statement class test_java ic static void main String args try Class forName com ibm db2 jcc DB2Driver Connection con DriverManager getConnection jdbc db2 localhost lt port gt SAMPLE db2inst1 lt password gt Statement stmt con createStatement ResultSet rs stmt executeQuery select empno salary from employee where salary lt 36000 order by lastname while rs next System out printIn rs getString empno rs getDouble salary con close catch SQLException e System out printIn e getMessage nSQLCode e getErrorCode SQLState e getSQLState catch Cl
205. SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful 02 07 2008 16 59 06 1 0 SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful SQL1063N DB2START processing was successful db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2stop 02 07 2008 17 05 02 0 0 SQL1064N DB2STOP processing was successful 02 07 2008 17 05 02 1 0 SQL1064N DB2STOP processing was successful SQL1064N DB2STOP processing was successful 2 3 4 Installing DB2 license files You must install a license key for each DB2 copy In a partitioned environment this means that you must install a license key on each machine participating in 84 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm the partitioned database system This is done by adding a DB2 license file using the db21icm command 1 Log in as root user or instance owner For non root installation log in as instance owner Enter the following command db2licm a lt filename gt Where filename is the filename containing valid license information For example if you want to install the license key with DB2 Workgroup Server Edition Authorized User Option enter the following command db2licm a db2wse_u lic On Linux the DB2 license keys are located in the DB2D Rilicense in a file called nodelock where DB2DIR is the instance directory where the DB2 copy is installed 2 3 5 Installing DB2 documentation DB2 Version 9 5 provides DB2 Information Center and PDF documentation on se
206. SVCENAME by entering db2 get dbm cfg grep SVC 2 Set the DB2COMM registry variable to tcp ip This will start the DB2 communications manager when the database manager is started Enter the following command as instance owner db2set DB2COMM tcpip 64 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 3 Stop and re start the instance for these changes to take effect db2stop db2start 2 3 2 Root installation For root installation you can use one of the following methods to install both single partition and multi partitioned database environments gt gt DB2 Setup wizard Response file installation db2setup command with a response file silent install db2_install utility DB2 Setup Wizard For root installation you can use DB2 Setup wizard in the following way 1 2 Log in as root Mount DB2 product CD or DVD using the following command mount t iso9660 o ro dev dvd mnt dvd Where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the CD or DVD 3 As root run db2setup and select Install a Product on the first window 4 Select Install New On Welcome to the DB2 Setup Wizard window click Next 5 On Software License Agreement window read the license agreement and then select Accept and click Next Select the installation type as show in Figure 2 5 on page 66 You may choose a Typical Compact or Custom installation Typical installs most DB2 c
207. Server Details address you can use that instead of the host name If you use a dynamic IP address monitoring services will not work when a new IP address is assigned Specify the hostname and ports for the Web server gt Setup Notification gt Select Start Up Options gt Configuration Options Server cetus itsosj sanjose ibm com gt Setup Monitoring The default port numbers for HTTP and HTTPS are 80 and 443 respectively You do not need to change these values unless these ports are being used by other applications gt Pre Installation Summary gt Installing gt Install Complete HTTP port 80 Verification HTTPS port 443 gt Start Up Restore Defaults Figure 5 10 Specify the host name and ports for the Web server 204 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm 7 On Setup Notification panel Figure 5 11 you can choose Enable e mail functions and configure STMP server Click Next IBM Data Studio Administration Console 1 1 2 Introduction Setup e mail notification vV License Agreement a i When data server problems occur you can use the built in V Choose Install Directory e mail function to forward alert details to other users Enter vV Specify Server Details the name of your outbound SMTP mail server to enable this gt Setup Notification e mail capability This function is not applicable to replication Select Start U
208. TIONNUM from SYSTBMADM SNAPUTIL_PROGRESS SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP UTILITY_STATE PROGRESS_START_TIME PROGRESS_TOTAL_UNITS PROGRESS COMPLETED_UNITS DBPARTITIONNUM 256 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 2008 02 21 15 23 03 523409 EXECUTE 1 record s selected 2008 02 21 15 23 01 033976 54837248 0 db2instl mensa gt db2 list utilities ID Type Database Name Partition Number Description Start Time State Invocation Type Progress Monitoring Estimated Percentage Complete 332 ROLLFORWARD RECOVERY ITSODB 0 Online Tablespace Rollforward Recovery 7 02 21 2008 15 25 20 435220 Executing User 0 db2instl mensa gt db2 list utilities show detail ID Type Database Name Partition Number Description Start Time State Invocation Type Progress Monitoring Estimated Percentage Complete Phase Number Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time Phase Number Current Description Total Work Completed Work Start Time 332 ROLLFORWARD RECOVERY ITSODB 0 Online Tablespace Rollforward Recovery 7 02 21 2008 15 25 20 435220 Executing User 0 1 Forward 38614 bytes 38614 bytes 02 21 2008 15 25 20 435226 2 Backward 5627893427 bytes 0 bytes 02 21 2008 15 25 20 988645 db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select UTILITY_TYPE substr UTILITY_DESCRIPTION 1 15 UTILITY_STATE DBPARTITIONNUM from SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL Chapter 6 Administering
209. Terminology IBM Data Studio is an Eclipse based application It uses the same terminologies as other Eclipse based applications such as workspace perspectives views and so on Workspace A workspace is a logical collection of projects that you define It contains all files of your current local working environment When you start the Data Studio it prompts you for a workspace location This Welcome panel contains several useful links for learning the Data Studio You can omit this prompt in the future by checking the check box on that panel You can use as many different workspaces as you want There is no direct relationship between them Different workspaces can be used to organize projects for different applications or different versions of a project Note You can always get back to the Welcome screen by selecting Help gt Welcome If you want to share a workspace in your team you should use the Team functions described in 5 3 2 Team function on page 212 A workspace is presented through the views which are laid out within a perspective When you close the Welcome panel a perspective that has information from the workspace is presented See Figure 5 13 Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 207 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 22 Data NewFile xmi IBM Data Studio Developer File Edit Source Navigate Search project Data Bun XML Window Help E pata facvs Repositor A
210. Thu Fri Sat Sunday ms NASI NA NA NAI NASI Figure 6 3 Incremental delta backup The backup strategy depends on your environment Database workload availability and recovery level are all decision factors A good backup strategy may be a daily offline backup if the database does not have a 24x7 availability requirement Another strategy can be to do an offline backup every weekend and an incremental backup during the week 6 1 1 Enable roll forward recovery and log archiving To use all functionality available in DB2 to prevent data loss we enable both roll forward recovery and log archiving This allows us to recover the database to the point in time of failure The following example walks you through this task in both single and multi partitioned database environments Setup log file management Starting with DB2 Version 8 2 a new log file manager which is fully integrated in the DB2 engine is provided The configuration is done using the database configuration parameters called LOGARCHMETH 1 and LOGARCHMETH2 226 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Note The user exit application db2uext2 is no longer needed The database configuration parameters LOGRETAIN and USEREXIT are deprecated in DB2 9 5 but are still being used by the data servers and clients with prior versions Any value specified for these configuration parameters will be ignored by the DB2 9 5 database
211. Wizard check if the Korn Shell profile file contains the following lines The following three lines have been added by IBM DB2 instance utilities if f db2home db2inst1 sqllib db2profile then db2home db2inst1 sqllib db2profile fi Using response file to install DB2 on the remaining machines After performing a partitioned installation on the primary machine the DB2 Setup wizard creates two response files db2ese_mpp rsp and db2ese_mpp_addpart rsp The db2ese_mpp rsp response file contains instructions to create an instance instance owning and fenced users as well as the tools catalog database if selected during install The second response file only installs the appropriate DB2 filesets specifies DAS properties and specifies languages to install Only use the db2ese_mpp_addpart rsp response file when installing database partition servers on the participating computers Example 2 27 shows the contents of the db2ese_mpp_addpart rsp in our sample Example 2 27 The db2ese_mpp_addpart rsp file Generated response file used by the DB2 Setup wizard generation time 2 7 08 3 28 PM Product Installation LIC_AGREEMENT ACCEPT PROD ENTERPRISE_SERVER_EDITION FILE opt ibm db2 vV9 5 INSTALL_TYPE TYPICAL F DAS_CONTACT_LIST REMOTE DAS_CONTACT_LIST_HOSTNAME mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com DAS_SMTP_SERVER smtp itsosj sanjose ibm com Chapter 2 Installation 81 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review Apr
212. You can use the DB_ HISTORY administrative view or SYSPROC ADMIN_LIST_HIST function to get the information from the history file in all database partitions Sample commands are db2 select from sysibmadm DB_HISTORY db2 select from table SYSPROC ADMIN LIST _HIST Over the time the recovery history file will increase in size So when an entry is no longer relevant because the associated recovery objects would no longer be needed to recover the database you might want to remove or prune those entries from the recovery history file This can be done by the prune history command or a call of the ADMIN_CMD procedure with the PRUNE_HISTORY parameter By setting the database configuration parameters NUM_DB_BACKUPS or and REC_HIS_RETENTN the DB2 database manager automatically prunes the database history file Note In Version 9 5 if you set the new configuration parameter AUTO_DEL_REC_OB4J to ON the database manager will also delete backup images load copy images and log files associated with any history file entries that it automatically prunes Once AUTO_DEL_REC_OB is enabled the system will only perform this maintenance when both the NUM_DB_BACKUPS and REC_HIS_RETENTN values are exceeded 6 1 3 Enable usage of TSM DB2 supports database backup and log archiving using TSM storage The TSM system consists of TSM server and TSM client The database server uses the TSM client API to communicate with the TSM server Our test was based
213. a gt echo DB2INSTANCE db2instl db2instl mensa gt The rah and db2_all command Before we start with the creation of the multi partitioned database we show you the db2_a11 and the rah command Both are very useful to execute commands on all partitions The db2_a1 command can be used to execute commands on all database partitions For instance if you want to create a directory on all partitions you can execute this command to create a directory on all nodes For instance in Example 3 14 Example 3 14 Example of the typeset command db2instl mensa gt db2_all typeset Z4 DB2NODE mkdir p database db2inst1 NODE DB2NODE ITSODB SAMPLE_MPL mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com typeset Z4 DB2NODE completed ok gemini itsosj sanjose ibm com typeset Z4 DB2NODE completed ok The rah command can be used to execute commands on all physical hosts The difference to the db2_al1 command is that the specified commands in rah are executed only once per physical host That is important if you have several logical partitions on one physical system Tip The command typeset Z4 DB2NODE returns a four digit number for every partition defined in db2nodes cfg for example O will be 0000 1 will be 0001 110 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Create database Example 3 15 shows the DDL to create multi partitioned database This DDL is almost identical as the DDL for creating singl
214. a http www w3 0rg 2001 XMLSchema instance http www example org TestSchema ProductsSchema xsd Add DTD Information Edit Namespaces Add Attribute Add Child Add Before tns product 8 Comment 2 Add Processing Instruction Figure 5 22 Sample in the XML editor 5 3 4 ER Diagramming 216 The Data Studio allows you to easily create ER diagrams from the database schema In the Database Explorer open the tree Connections gt SAMPLE gt SAMPLE Schemas gt DB2INST1 Tables for the list of tables Select the tables you want to create the ER diagram In our example we select the EMP_RESUME and the EMPLOYE Figure 5 23 E tables and right click on them Data X Alter M Bron 5 0 LI Mols C Nicknames C Packages Sequences 5 Stored Proced Tables gt Bact ide b EACL_SCHE y Refresh b FE DEPART b qyvvvv vl ES EMP_PH mz EMP_RE 2 EMPLOYEE b ES EMPMDC i FR raannnaiacr OF 38 al Add to Overview Diagram F Generate DDL 25 Update Statistics Value Distributions Table Spa Figure 5 23 Add tables to a diagram Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm Select Add to Overview Diagram enter OverviewDiagram as the diagram name You get an ER diagram for that two tables Figure 5 24 on page 217 EMPLOYEE Z EMPNO FIRSTNME MIDIN
215. a license is required For each feature there is information about whether a valid license for the feature is installed A sample output is shown in Example 3 42 Example 3 42 Using the ENV_FEATURE_INFO view db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select from sysibmadm env_feature_info FEATURE_NAME FEATURE_FULLNAME LICENSE_INSTALLED PRODUCT_NAME FEATURE_USE_STATUS DPF DB2_DATABASE_PARTITIONING FEATURE N ESE NOT_USED POESE DB2_PERFORMANCE_OPTIMIZATION FEATURE_FOR_ESE N ESE NOT_USED s0 DB2_STORAGE_OPTIMIZATION FEATURE N ESE NOT_USED AAC DB2_ADVANCED_ACCESS_CONTROL_FEATURE N ESE NOT_USED Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 159 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm GEO DB2_GEODETIC_DATA_MANAGEMENT FEATURE N ESE NOT_USED XMLESE DB2_PUREXML_FEATURE_FOR_ESE N ESE NOT_USED HFESE IBM_HOMOGENEOUS_ FEDERATION FEATURE_FOR_ESE N ESE NOT_USED HRESE IBM_HOMOGENEOUS_REPLICATION_FEATURE_FOR_ESE N ESE NOT_USED 8 record s selected Installing a license key To install a license key you must add the db2 ic license file using the db21 icm command To add a DB2 license file 1 Login as instance owner 2 Enter the following command db2licm a lt filename gt Where filename is the full path name and file name of the license file db2ese lic The license file is available from either the DB2 product or feature image you downloaded from Passport Advantage or from the Activation CD you received in the physical media pack
216. abase environment installation From DB2 Version 8 2 2 Version 8 FixPack 9 you can use secure shell ssh as an alternative of remote shell rsh to executing commands on remote DB2 nodes in the DB2 partitioned database environments Since ssh is more secure than rhost based authentication we recommend that you configure DB2 to use ssh in the partitioned database environments To run DB2 ESE successfully the ssh server and client have to be available on all machines in the partitioned database system Prior to enabling ssh ensure the ssh sever and client packages are installed They are not installed by default in some distributions 52 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm This section shows you how to configure ssh for host based and public key based authentication on Linux You can choose to use either the host based authentication or the public key based authentication when setting up ssh You can also choose to use either the Rivest Shamir Adleman algorithm RSA or the digital signature algorithm DSA encryption as the form of encryption The decision should be based on your organization security requirements Setting up host based authentication Host based authentication allows any user ID from machineA to use ssh to log in as that same user ID on machineB assuming that the ssh client on machineA is configured to use host based authentication and the ssh server on machi
217. abase files are located in local directories on each system The file db2nodes cfg defines the partitions which are part of the partitioned database Linux node 1 Linux node 2 Physical instance home export db2home lt instance gt Node config sqllib db2nodes cfg lt lt aS N May S Nan te J Instance home mounted db2home lt instance gt f lt NFS mount Instance home mounted db2home lt instance gt Local database files Local database files DMS database database db2log1 db2log1 db2log2 db2log2 db2logarc db2logarc Figure 3 4 Partition and file system layout for partitioned databases The setup of db2home lt instance gt and the file system structure for one partitionhas is shown in 2 2 3 Storage planning on page 39 This configuration of the file system structure must be done in the same way on the second system too For performance and availability reasons we recommend that you avoid putting user data on the catalog partition When restoring the catalog partition the restore is faster when there is no data on it db2nodes cfg To define which hosts are participating in a partitioned environment you have to modify the db2nodes cfg file located in INSTHOME sq11ib The format of the db2nodes cfg file is as follows nodenum hostname logic
218. abase name ITSODB Database path database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00002 Input database alias ITSODB Number of accessed tables 21 Table List Table Schema DB2INST1 Table Name ITEM Table Type User Data Object Pages 3697 Index Object Pages 3101 Rows Read Not Collected Rows Written 8251179 Overflows 0 Page Reorgs 8234 Table Reorg Information Node number 0 Reorg Type Reclustering Inplace Table Reorg Allow Write Access Reorg Index Reorg Tablespace 7 Start Time 02 13 2008 14 35 11 064496 Reorg Phase Max Phase Phase Start Time Status Started Current Counter 543 Max Counter 3696 Completion 0 End Time Database Partition 0 Database ITSODB Active Up 0 days 05 02 38 Table Reorg Information Address TbspaceID TableID PartID MasterTbs MasterTab TableName Type IndexID TempSpaceID 0x00002B6A7E8F1B28 7 4 n a n a n a ITEM Online 1 7 Table Reorg Stats Address TableName Start End PhaseStart MaxPhase Phase CurCount MaxCount Status Completion Chapter 6 Administering databases 293 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 0x00002B6A7E8F1B28 ITEM 02 13 2008 14 35 11 n a n a n a n a 550 3696 Started 0 Table Snapshot First database connect timestamp 02 13 2008 09 32 59 904159 Last reset timestamp Snapshot timestamp 02 13 2008 14 36 33 595307 Database name ITSODB Database path database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00002 I
219. able requires a Boolean argument the values YES 1 and ON are all equivalent and the values NO 0 and OFF are also equivalent To set registry values for instance level profile issue db2set i lt instance_name gt lt command gt To set registry values for global level profile issue db2set g lt command gt You can use the Configuration Assistant db2ca or db2set command to configure configuration parameters and registry variables When updating the registry changes do not affect the currently running DB2 applications or users Applications started after the update has happened use the new values Important registry variables Here is a list of some important registry variables gt DB2_DISABLE_FLUSH_LOG Default OFF When an online backup has completed the last active log file is truncated closed and made available to be archived This ensures that your online backup has a complete set of archived logs available for recovery gt DB2DBDFT Default null This specifies the database alias name to be used for implicit connects If any application has no database connection defined but contains an SQL statement it will connect to the database specified in DB2DBDFT gt DB2_PARALLEL_IO Default null This enables DB2 to read and write I O in parallel for a specific table space or all table spaces The degree of parallelism is determined by the prefetch size and extent size for the containers in the table space 142 Up and
220. able space utilization You can click Show Command to get the command based on options chosen See Figure 7 14 You can run the command in DB2 CLP to change configurations for the health indicator or click 0K to submit your changes Show Command UPDATE ALERT CFG FOR TABLESPACE TBSPDMS_O ON ITSODB USING ts ts_util SET ALARM 90 WARNING 80 SENSITIVITY 0 THRESHOLDSCHECKED YES IONSENABLED NO Figure 7 14 Set health indicator value command You can use the DB2 CLP command GET ALERT CFG to verify the setting as shown in Example 7 3 on page 361 360 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Example 7 3 Using GET ALERT CFG to view health indicator status db2inst1l mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 get alert cfg for tablespace tbspdms_0 on itsodb Alert Configuration Indicator Name Default Type Warning Alarm Unit Sensitivity Formula ts ts_util No Threshold based 80 o oO ts ts_used_pages ts ts_usable_pages 100 Actions Threshold or State checking Indicator Name Default Type Sensitivity Formula Actions Threshold or State checking Indicator Name Default Type Sensitivity Formula Actions Threshold or State checking Indicator Name Default Type Warning Alarm Unit Sensitivity Formula Disabled Enabled ts ts_op_status Yes State based 0 ts ts_status Disabled Enabled ts ts_auto_resize_status Yes State based 0 ts
221. able to assist you in identifying where the performance or system setting issue occurs These tools can be used to monitor system resource usage such as disk I O memory consumption CPU activities and network status Through the utilization of comprehensive information provided by these operating system tools combining database system monitoring tools from DB2 you can understand your system more clearly for example which table space containers are under high disk I O pressure whether or not the excessive sort heap allocation will lead to a mass of paging space activities if the network bandwidth is the bottleneck for poor response time of client applications and so on Then you can make pertinent adjustments to your applications database system or operating system to improve the system performance In this section we discuss some of the most commonly used performance monitoring tools for the Linux platform top iostat vmstat and sar 7 6 1 top The top utility is a very useful tool that gives you a lot of information on one screen Top can show you which process is taking the longest processor time the largest amount of memory both in percentages plus how long the system has been up and the amount of free memory By default the utility will refresh the display every 3 0 seconds You can override the default refresh interval via the command option d The users should be aware of that the top command does not report total memory use
222. ackup WITH 2 BUFFERS BUFFER 1024 PARALLELISM 1 COMPRESS WITHOUT PROMPTING Backup Database Partition Grouping 2 Run on database partition s 1 BACKUP DATABASE ITSODB ONLINE TQ db2backup WITH 2 BUFFERS BUFFER 1024 PARALLELISM 1 COMPRESS WITHOUT PROMPTING Figure 6 8 Generated backup statements You have two options either run this generated script immediately or let it run under control of the scheduler which is integrated in the Tools catalog See Figure 6 9 on page 243 Another way to backup the database is to generate the scripts through the Control Center and use your own scheduler to run this backup script periodically Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm TUEA by MESA A Aaneea Backup 2 5 08 2 43 48 PM PST 0 Backup Database Run once on 2 5 08 at 2 43 48 PM all Backup Database Backup Database Partition Grouping Finin Figure 6 9 Scheduling backup scripts Backup database sample script We already showed various backup commands in 6 1 4 Backup utility on page 235 In Example 6 18 we show you a script to backup our sample database ITSODB which is partitioned Call this script with the db2_all command db2_al11 db2home db2inst1 database_backup ksh db2inst1 itsodb Example 6 18 Backup script database_backup ksh usr bin ksh Script backing up database echo running against instance 1 echo running ag
223. admin start If you are logged in as instance owner or privileged DB2 user and have an X Window started you can use the db2cc amp command to start Control Center If you started your X Window as the root user you need to switch to the DB2 instance owner ID and set up the display before you can start the Control Center You have two ways to set up the environment for running Control Center Example 3 1 shows the simpler way Example 3 1 Start Control Center method 1 puget xhost puget su db2instl db2instl puget gt export DISPLAY 0 0 db2instl puget gt db2cc amp 1 6051 db2inst1 puget gt The amp sign after the command returns the shell prompt which allows you to use this shell for other commands Method 1 is not suggested for security critical production systems because it allows everybody to access your X server The more secure method would be to use Xauthority as demonstrated in Example 3 2 Example 3 2 Start Control Center method 2 puget su db2instl db2instl puget gt scp root localhost Xauthority tmp xauth tmp Password Xauthority 100 161 0 2KB s 00 00 db2instl puget gt export DISPLAY 0 0 db2inst1 puget gt xauth merge tmp xauth tmp 90 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm db2instl puget gt db2cc amp 1 6052 db2inst1l puget gt In method 2 we copy the file Xauthority from the server root user to t
224. age you are using Build install and test the required programs modules and drivers and make any necessary changes to permissions and paths 2 Identify and include DB2 specific drivers in your code In order for your program to access DB2 you must copy or reference the required code into your program 3 Connect to a specific DB2 database Usually an identifier is generated from the connect command which is used with the SQL requests in the program 4 Use SQL statements to manipulate and retrieve data in the database For performing software development in most cases you need install at least the IBM Data Server Client In addition to the programming laguages described in this section DB2 also support application development for the following gt ADO NET support Developing ADO NET and OLE DB Applications SC23 5867 00 Chapter 8 Application development 425 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt ODBC Call Level Interface Guide and Reference Volume 1 SC23 5844 00 Call Level Interface Guide and Reference Volume 2 SC23 5845 00 gt OLD DB Developing ADO NET and OLE DB Applications SC23 5867 00 gt COBOL Developing Embedded SQL Applications SC23 5852 00 gt Fortran Developing Embedded SQL Applications SC23 5852 00 gt REXX Administrative API Reference SC23 5842 00 gt Ruby Ruby on Rails Information Center Database application development Database applications gt Ruby
225. ainst database 2 INSTANCE 1 DB_ALIAS 2 Chapter 6 Administering databases 243 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DBHOME finger 1 INSTANCE grep Directory awk print 2 if f DBHOME sq llib db2profile then echo File not found DBHOME sq llib db2profile echo please check host and instancename echo u kkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk script abnormal ly ended KEKKKKEKKKKKKKEKKKE exit 1 fi DBHOME sq11ib db2profile for i in 1 2 3 do echo mi echo Start backing up database DB ALIAS on node DB2NODE echo nn db2 backup db DB_ALIAS to db2backup with 4 buffers parallelism 2 if 0 then szDate date echo echo backing up database DB ALIAS on node DB2NODE successfully szDate tee a DBHOME DB_ALIAS 1og echo exit 0 fi if i le 3 then echo Start another trial fi done szDate date echo echo backing up database DB ALIAS on node DB2NODE faild after 3 trials szDate tee a DBHOME DB_ALIAS 1og echo 244 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm exit 8 Modify this sample so that it fits your environment and requirements The new DB2 9 5 fewture single system view SSV backup is the recommended way for taking backup for all database partitions Example 6 13 on page 238 Note For a detailed explanation of backing up databases refer to Chapter 1
226. al memory configuration parameters The STMM manages memory for the following DB2 memory consumers Buffer pools Package Cache Locking memory Sort memory vvvy The tuning of these areas can be turned on and off individually Tuning will be done across different databases and different instances on the same system The memory available for tuning can be limited If no more memory for tuning can be allocated from the operating system for or if it hits the limit you defined the available memory is taken away from another area where the memory is not so much needed For instance if STMM figures out that more memory is needed for one buffer pool it can take away this memory from another one The frequency for the tuning is determined based on the workload and each tuning step is logged in db2diag 1log and in the directory stmmlog STMM also works on partitioned databases but in the case each system should be of the same hardware and the workload and the data should be distributed equally because the tuning parameters are determined on one partition called the tuning partition and then distributed to the other partitions Figure 3 19 on page 130 illustrate how the space in the memory is distributed among the different areas Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 129 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2inst1 db2inst2 db2inst3 Package cache Bufferpool f
227. al table spaces considerations By default DB2 creates three table spaces The catalog table space which stores the catalog tables the user table space which stores all table and index data and the temporary table space which is used for storing temporary data while SQL statements are being processed However it makes sense to split the data into more table spaces and to create your own layout Here are the main reasons for doing that gt The caching of the data in the table spaces can be tuned by the related buffer pools Buffer pools are caching areas and are assigned to one or more table spaces Having different table spaces allows you to tune the caching areas separately for them You can separate rarely used tables from heavily used ones You can also tune the I O performance of a table space by putting the containers of one table space on different physical disks gt You can perform backup on table space level Separate table spaces allow you to implement different backup strategies gt You can grant the permission to create objects to users in table spaces That allows you to implement more granular security control gt At the table creation you can specify that table data should go into one table space index data into another and also long data into another one It is especially recommended to put long data into a different table space because they are not cached in the buffer pool and require file system caching Once y
228. al_port 102 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Where nodenum represents the partition number hostname represents the host name or IP address of physical machine and logical port represents the logical port number of the partition on the same host In our example we have two machines which each hold one database partition The host mensa will be partition 0 and gemini will be partition 1 Example 3 8 shows the contents of db2nodes cfg for our setup Example 3 8 db2nodes cfqg file 0 mensa 0 1 gemini 0 To enable communications between the database partition servers that participate in your partitioned database system you have to reserve TCP IP ports in etc services for the Fast Communication Manager FCM If you install DB2 with the db2setup wizard a port range is automatically reserved on the primary instance owning computer Log on to each participating computer as root user and add the identical entries into etc services Example 3 9 shows four ports reserved for four local partitions on this host Example 3 9 Ports in etc services DB2_db2inst1 60000 tcp DB2_db2inst1_1 60001 tcp DB2_db2inst1_2 60002 tcp DB2_db2inst1_END 60003 tcp Now you are able to start DB2 in a multiple host multi partitioned environment To do this enter the db2start command on any host Refer to Example 3 10 Example 3 10 Start of a DB2 instance with four partition db2start
229. all IBM TSA or not then click Next Figure 2 8 Root installation Install TSA 10 Set user information for the DB2 Administration Server as shown in Figure 2 9 on page 68 This user administers the Database Administration Server 11 On the Set up a DB2 instance windows select Create a DB2 instance Click Next 12 On the Set up partitioning options for the DB2 instance window Figure 2 10 select single partition instance click Next Chapter 2 Installation 67 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm lo Q o N l fhome dasusr1 WS TEn MERIC EE 4 ISP fle Saecirigis Figure 2 10 Root installation Set up partitioning options for the DB2 instance 68 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 13 On Set user information for the DB2 instance owner window Figure 2 11 set user information for the DB2 instance owner By default DB2 Setup creates a new user db2inst1 in group db2adm1 You may change user and group names or configure an existing user to the new DB2 V9 5 instance by selecting the Existing user option Note that the default home directory is in home We recommend that you change the instance home directory to a DB2 specific directory such as db2home db2inst1 db2iadm1 1001 db2home db2inst1 Wee rete Figure 2 11 Root installation Set user information for the DB2 instance owner 14 Set user
230. ameters introduced in DB2 9 5 that can impact the behavior of DB2 server Also there are several deprecated and discontinued variables more detail in http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21uw v9r5 topic com ibm db2 1uw qb migration doc doc t0050543 html Update statistics 176 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm You must update the statistics for system catalog tables using the RUNSTATS command You may want to run the runstats command on tables particularly those tables that are critical to the performance of your SQL queries The runstats command updates statistics about physical characteristics of a table and associated indexes The optimizer uses these statistics to find the best access path to data 6 Rebind packages Any packages stored in a database are invalidated during migration but packages will be implicitly rebound the first time an application uses them after migrating your database To avoid this overhead during the user execution time after migration you can run the db2rbind command to rebind these packages as Example 4 12 shows Review the log file to ensure that everything is fine Example 4 12 db2rbind dpfusr1l gemini gt db2rbind sample 1 db2rbind log all Rebind done successfully for database SAMPLE 7 Migrate DB2 Explain tables The migrate database command does not migrate explain tables Perform this task if you want to keep exp
231. ample query db2advis d sample s select count from empmdc where expltest TEST t 5 Example 8 43 shows an excerpt of the output of the db2advis command In this example the tool suggests an index on the column EXPLTEST and that would improve the performance by 97 percent Example 8 43 Output of the db2advis command Recommending indexes total disk space needed for initial set 0 032 MB total disk space constrained to 21 722 MB Trying variations of the solution set Optimization finished 1 indexes in current solution 322 0000 timerons without recommendations 8 0000 timerons with current solution 97 52 improvement index 1 0 032MB CREATE INDEX DB2INST2 IDX802051509060000 ON DB2INST2 EMPMDC EXPLTEST ASC ALLOW REVERSE SCANS COMMIT WORK RUNSTATS ON TABLE DB2INST2 EMPMDC FOR INDEX DB2INST2 IDX802051509060000 COMMIT WORK Design Advisor The graphical version of the Design Advisor can be started from the Control Center To start it from the Control Center in the explorer view select the database with the right mouse button and select Design Advisor as shown in Figure 8 8 on page 459 458 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm LAT oe OT Figure 8 8 Select Design Advisor from the Command Center The advisor leads you through the process panel by panel At the Workload panel you can enter our test q
232. an be used only if your applications function without write access to tables during the reorganization In addition classic table reorganization will require the creation of a shadow copy of the table so approximately twice as much space as the original table will be required If your environment does not allow this restriction although inplace reorganization is slower it can occur in the background while normal data access continues Consider the features of each method and decide which method is more appropriate for your environment For both online and offline reorganization you can reorganize all database partitions or only one or a set of database partitions You can use the DB2 Control Center for table reorganization Expand the object tree in the Control Center until you find the Tables folder Existing tables are displayed in the contents pane on the right side of the panel Right click the table or view and select Reorganize See Figure 6 20 2 control Center O All Systems All Databases L F itsops EiT v es O Views O Aliases G Nicknames 5 Cache Objects 5 Triggers Schemas 5 Indexes 5 Table Spaces Event Monitors Database partition groups E Buffer Pools H Application Objects H a User and Group Objects G Federated Database Objects G XML Schema Repository SR W O ITSOREPL O SAMPLE A TooscaT Figure 6 20 Table context menu Control Center EB ITEMIMP E ITEMLOAD E ORG PoucY S Table 1
233. anagement Life Cycle Data Modeling Data access Data Server Administration Secure Data Development Logical Modeling sa SQL Configuration Physical Modeling x XQuery Performance User Defined Recovery Archiving Data Privacy Encryption Security Access Functions Design Develop Deploy Manage Govern Figure 5 1 Data management life cycle IBM Data Studio supports for DB2 and IDS on all platforms including i5 OS It is a full replacement of DB2 Developer Workbench plus much more The following are features provided gt Common features for DB2 and IDS ER diagramming Data Distribution Viewer Integrated Query Editor SQL Builder XML Editor XML Schema Editor Data Web Services Schema Management Data Management Security Access Controls Project Management gt Common Features for DB2 SQL Routine Debugger Java Routine Debugger gt Common features for DB2 LUW z OS Update Statistics Visual Explain Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 195 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm IBM Data Studio Administration Console DSAC introduced in Version 1 2 is a Web based interface to perform operational database management tasks DSAC provides quick analysis and resolution capabilities to identified data server conditions and scenarios With DSAC you can immediately access to critical data server information and functions from anywh
234. anization determines the need for reorganization on tables and indexes by using the REORGCHK formulas It periodically evaluates tables and indexes that have had their statistics updated to see if reorganization is required If so it internally schedules an index reorganization or a classic table reorganization for the table This requires that your applications function without write access to the tables being reorganized In a partitioned database environment the determination to carry out automatic reorganization and the initiation of automatic reorganization is done on the catalog partition The reorganization runs on all of the database partitions on which the target tables reside 6 2 2 Manual table maintenance If you are not using the automatic table maintenance feature you need to be sure that your table statistics are up to date and the tables are reorganized from time to time so that the performance of your applications can be kept optimal Chapter 6 Administering databases 275 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DB2 provides the following utilities to do this job manually gt gt gt REORG RUNSTATS REBIND Table reorganization The REORG TABLE option reorganizes a table to match their index and to reclaim space You can reorganize the system catalog tables as well as user tables DB2 provides two methods for reorganizing tables gt Inplace online reorganization Inplace tabl
235. ard Stop enforcement policy does not permit any connections that violate the license policy To change the enforcement policy from Soft Stop to Hard Stop enter the following command db2licm e db2ese HARD Likewise to change the enforcement policy from Hard Stop to Soft Stop enter db2licm e db2ese SOFT Generating a compliance report To verify license compliance of DB2 features you can generate a compliance report It lists DB2 features out of compliance with your current product entitlement Each DB2 feature status is listed as one of the following gt In compliance The feature has been used and is properly licensed gt Violation The feature is not licensed and has been used To generate a compliance report use the following command db2licm g lt filename gt where lt filename gt specifies the file name the output is to be stored To reset the license usage information use the db2licm x command Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 161 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 162 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm 4 Migration and Fix Packs When migrating DB2 from Version 8 or 9 1 to Version 9 5 there are several important steps to perform before and after installation to ensure a safe and successful migration In this chapter we cover DB2 server migration from Version 8 2 and 9 1 to Version9 5 as well as fix pack installat
236. ariety of distributed data sources Figure 1 1 on page 12 shows an example of the scalable 3 tier architecture Chapter 1 Introduction 11 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Tier 1 Client application or Web browser Tier 2 Application server cluster Tier 3 Partitioned databases failover cluster Application Load balancer proxy Application Database cluster Failover cluster in standby mode Application Figure 1 1 Sample scalable 3 tier architecture Tier 1 represents clients which connect to the application through an Intranet or Internet Tier 2 is the application hosted in an application server like WebSphere A load balancer and a proxy component distribute the requests equally to the different application servers If the traffic increases new application servers can be added easily in order to increase the throughput Tier 3 is the database tier It consists of 2 partitioned database clusters If the load on one database cluster increases a partition can be added to the database cluster easily to adhere to the new load The standby cluster is a copy of the running cluster In case of an outage of the primary database cluster the application server requests will be transparently redirected to the standby cluster In the Chapter 8 Application development on page 417 you can see a more detailed how applications can be configure
237. asks In the previous chapter we provided a detailed process of installing DB2 Version 9 5 on Linux In this chapter we discuss post installation tasks that should be performed to have a functional DB2 environment The following topics are covered Control Center setup Preparation for database creation Creating a database Further configuration Add a partition DB2 configuration Security Client configuration Configure licensing vvvvvvvvy Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 89 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 3 1 Control Center setup DB2 has a rich set of graphical tools that are used for database administrators to manage the database system and for application developers to develop stored procedures and user defined functions The Control Center is one of the general administration tools that is used to help you explore and administer your databases Other such tools include the Command Center which can be used to generate SQL queries and the Configuration Assistant which is an excellent tool for configuring your database environment If you want to administer your database server with the Control Center you must start the DB2 Administrator Server on each host of your database server environment The DB2 Administrator service setup procedure is provided in Chapter 2 Installation on page 25 To start the DB2 Administrator Server log on to every host as DAS user and issue db2
238. assNotFoundException e System out printIn e getMessage Example 8 18 shows the steps to compile and run this program Chapter 8 Application development 441 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 8 18 Compile and run the Java application test_java java db2inst1 puget gt DB2JAVA home db2inst1 sqllib java db2inst1 puget gt DB2JAVA jdk32 bin javac test_java java db2inst1 puget gt DB2JAVA jdk32 bin java classpath DB2JAVA db2jcc jar test_java class 200340 31840 0 000290 35340 0 000310 35900 0 200310 35900 0 200330 35370 0 Note that no DB2 client is needed for running this Java program Only db2jcc jar is required to be in the CLASSPATH On 64 bit systems you have to replace the jdk32 path with the jdk64 path Example 8 17 on page 441 uses the driver db2jcc jar which is a Type 4 driver and is the suggested driver type Type 2 driver is also available but is deprecated The name of the class file for the Type 2 driver is db2java zip DB2 9 5 supports JDBC 3 0 and JDBC 4 0 If you want to use JDBC 4 0 you have to use the driver db2jcc4 jar SQLJ SQLJ allows you to embed SQL statements into the Java code Example 8 19 shows an SQLJ program You have to replace lt port gt and lt password gt by the actual values Example 8 19 SQLJ example program test_sqlj sqlj import sqlj runtime import java sql sql context EzSqljCtx sql iterator EzSqljNameIter Str
239. at you create a response file by editing a sample response file then use this file to install DB2 The sample response file does not only install DB2 but can also configure users create instance set up notification create tools catalog and configure a large number of DBM parameters This is the quickest installation method if you already have all the information you need Unlike the DB2 Setup wizard the response file installation is not interactive and it takes a little bit longer to prepare the response file However you only have to take that longer way once and it can be used to install the same configuration on multiple machines Payload file deployment This method is an advanced installation method that is not recommended for most users It requires the user to physically install payload files A payload file is a compressed tarball that contains all of the files and metadata for an installable component Like db2_install this installation method requires manual configuration after the product files are deployed Note DB2 product installations are no longer operating system packages on Linux platforms You can no longer use rpm command for installation 2 2 3 Storage planning Both DB2 and data to be stored in the database required disk space DB2 uses both raw device and file systems It also requires log space In this section we discuss the storage planning for DB2 data server File systems versus raw devices The D
240. ata Studio Developer package If you want to change the choices you made on previous pages click Back and make your changes Once you are satisfied with your installation choices click Insta11 to install the package 202 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm EJ IBM Installation Manager Wot Install Packages Review the summary information Click Back to make changes or click Install Target Location Package Group Name Installation Directory IBM Software Development Platform fopt BM SDP 70 IBM Installation Manager fopt IBM InstallationManagerfeclipse Shared Resources Directory opt IBM SDP70Shared Features Feature IBM Installation Manager Y IBM Data Studio Data Studio Core Features Ps SQL Routine Development Environment Disk Space Information English Total Download Size 357 1 MB Total Installation Size 439 0 MB e r Total Available Space gt gt 916GB 4 Cancel Figure 5 8 Summary of features to be installed 10 When the update process is completed a message confirms the success of the process Click View Log File if you want to open the update log file or click Finish 5 2 2 Installing IBM Data Studio Administration Console You can install IBM Data Studio Administration Console DSAC using the following steps 1 2 Log in as root Enter th
241. ata distribution viewer 195 data management 195 data management solution 194 data population 4 data server 5 data warehouse 13 database administration server das 39 49 database code page 167 database collating sequence 167 database level privileges 147 database managed space DMS 15 database managed storage DMS 40 database managed table spaces 96 database object health indicator setting 355 database partition group 15 database territory 167 DB2 Administration Server DAS 75 DB2 Database Partitioning Feature DPF 9 DB2 Enterprise Server Edition ESE 8 DB2 Everyplace 10 DB2 object 420 DB2 setup wizard 38 50 DB2 tools catalog 487 DB2 Workgroup Server Edition WSE 8 DB2 Workgroup Server Unlimited Edition WSUE 8 db2_all 110 237 482 db2_call_stack 481 db2_install 38 db2_ps 485 db2admin start 90 db2ca 143 db2ckmig 173 db2diag 393 db2dump directory 120 db2exmig 177 db2expIn 382 db2fs 417 db2imigr 174 db2iupdt 5 db2jcc4 jar 442 db2In 76 db2logmgr 230 db2look 94 db2move 94 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2mtrk 376 377 db2pd_ 397 399 db2rbind 177 db2relocatedb 172 db2rmin 76 db2sampl 417 db2start 116 db2stop 116 db2undgp 171 DBI 426 debugger 460 delta backup 226 delta database backup 236 deploy 194 Design Advisor 458 Developer Workbench 206 diagnostic log file 394 digital signature algorithm 53 disable evaluation options 364 disk capacity 42
242. ataloged in your DB2 database directory userID represents the user ID used to connect to the database password represents the password for the user ID to connect to the database Example 8 7 shows a short Perl program which uses DBI It uses the SAMPLE database Before running the example you have to replace the lt passwora gt Example 8 7 Perl script using DBI perltest pl usr bin per use DBI 428 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm my dbhandle DBI gt connect dbi DB2 SAMPLE db2inst1 lt password gt my sth dbhandle gt prepare select empno lastname firstnme salary from employee where salary lt order by lastname or die Couldn t prepare statement dbh gt errstr sth gt execute 36000 s while data sth gt fetchrow_array print data 0 data 1 data 2 data 3 n exit 0 Example 8 8 shows the output of Example 8 7 on page 428 Example 8 8 Output of the DBI perl script db2inst1 puget redbook per1 gt perltest pl 200340 ALONZO ROY 31840 00 000290 PARKER JOHN 35340 00 000310 SETRIGHT MAUDE 35900 00 200310 SPRINGER MICHELLE 35900 00 200330 WONG HELENA 35370 00 Note RHEL 5 1 and SLES 10 1 include Perl and Perl DBI RPM packages Red Hat perl 5 8 8 10 and perl DBI 1 52 1 fc6 SUSE perl 5 8 8 14 2 and perl DBI 1 50 13 2 To create a DB2 application with Perl T
243. ated commands CONNECT TO ITSODB RUNSTATS ON TABLE DB2INST1 ITEM ON ALL COLUMNS WITH DISTRIBUTION ON ALL COLUMNS AND INDEXES ALL ALLOW WRITE ACCESS COMMIT WORK CONNECT RESET Figure 6 28 Generated RUNSTATS command Packages rebinding The command REBIND enables the user to take advantage of a change in the system without a need for the original bind file It is likely that a particular SQL 284 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm statement can take advantage of a newly created index The REBIND command can be used to recreate the package REBIND can also be used to recreate packages after RUNSTATS is executed thereby taking advantage of the new statistics Important After a RUNSTATS you have to use the REBIND or BIND command to recreate the package stored in the database otherwise the static SQL application will not be able to utilize the new DB2 statistics Additionally you can use the db2rbind utility to rebind all invalid packages or all packages within the database Examples This section provides examples demonstrating the usage of the utilities discussed in this section REORG TABLE REORG INDEXES REORGCHK and RUNSTATS We have created a table named ITEM across two database partitions and populated with 3 000 000 rows of data An unique index named PK_ITEM_ITEMID is associated with this table Example 6 34 shows some details for ITEM table Example
244. ation Self tuning memory provides a configuration that is dynamic and responsive to significant changes in workload characteristics Dynamic fast communication manager FCM buffers and new configuration parameters that can be tuned automatically by the DB2 database manager Label based access control LBAC This feature increases the control you have over who can access your data LBAC lets you decide exactly who has write access and who has read access to individual rows and individual columns Automatic statistics DB2 automatically runs the RUNSTATS utility in the background to ensure that the correct statistics are collected and maintained by default when you create databases Product licenses Easier management of product licenses using the License Center and the db2licm command Licensing changes for the DB2 Runtime Client allows you to freely distribute it Multiple DB2 versions The ability to install multiple DB2 versions and fix packs on the same computer Administrative SQL routines and views The administrative routines and views provide a primary easy to use programmatic interface to administer the DB2 database product through SQL DB2 9 5 provide more views 1 2 2 Supported platforms IBM is committed to Linux and supports it on a variety of hardware platforms 6 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm Nowadays DB2 products are supported on the following hardware
245. ation refer to Linux specific documentation Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 415 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 416 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm 8 Application development It has become increasingly important for a database to effectively support a wide range of open standards and open source products for application development DB2 provides accessibility for many standard interfaces and comes with a full suite of development tools This chapter discusses the following topics Application configuration DB2 application objects Programming languages Application development tools vvvy In this chapter we demonstrate the examples with the SAMPLE database DB2 provides You can create a sample database in your instance by running the command db2samp 1 from the command line Alternatively you can create the SAMPLE database from the First Steps db2fs at the end or after the installation In our examples we usually refer to the DB2 instance home directory as db2inst1 You can change that if you use a different instance name You can find startup information in Getting Started with Database Application Development GC23 5856 00 and on this Web site http www ibm com software data db2 ad DB2 provides many programming examples in the directory lt instance home gt sq11ib samples Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All r
246. ation guide for a package that you are installing Extend an existing Eclipse Eclipse IDE Eclipse JVM Figure 5 6 Eclipse version 8 Feature tab You can select the Data Studio features to be installed under this tab The first panel is for selecting the language Other features are listed in the second panel for your selection See Figure 5 7 on page 202 Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 201 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm IBM Installation Manager Sax Install Packages Select the features you want to install a a Install L cat Features gt umm Features LS M s IBM Installation Manager v IBM Data Studio K 9 Data Studio Core Features SQL Routine Development XML Development v v Database Object Management L v 2 Java Development Ca Java Routine Development Y SQLJ Development v P Web Services Development v Data Web Services WebSphere Application Server Community Edition Installer version 1 1 0 2 ClearCase Enablement X a E Show Dependencies Required by features you selected Restore Default Details Figure 5 7 Data Studio features 9 The Summary tab Figure 5 8 on page 203 shows all your installation specifications Review your choices before installing the IBM D
247. ay be used instead However it is the user s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non IBM product program or service IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner ser
248. b Inthe Actions tab Figure 7 24 select the Enable actions check box to enable the automatic running of the actions then click Add 368 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm able Space Utilization ts ts_util ETT OMED Figure 7 24 Enable actions in Configuring health indicator window c On the pop up panel as shown in Figure 7 25 on page 370 select the condition on which to run the action In our sample we choose Alarm the threshold breach On the Script tab choose system a predefined script and the type of script Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 369 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Add Script Action ly MENSA i db2home db2inst1 script alt_tbsp db2 y Figure 7 25 Add script action d On the Run properties tab as shown in Figure 7 26 on page 371 input the user ID and password for runtime authorization 370 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Add Script Action Figure 7 26 Runtime authorization e On the Command tab review the content of the predefined script specify the script statement termination character and working directory Click OK Add Script Action ALTER TABLESPACE tbspdms_O EXTEND FILE database db2inst1 NODEO idb2home db2inst1 script OK cece Her Figure 7 27 Review the content of the predefined scrip
249. b sites and URLs are also relevant as further information sources 496 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899bibl fm DB2 gt DB2 Information Center http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21uw v9r5 Database and Information Management home page http www ibm com software data DB2 Technical Support http www ibm com software data db2 support db2_9 DB2 Product Family Library http www ibm com software data db2 library DB2 developerWorks http www ibm com developerworks db2 DB2 for Linux http www ibm com software data db2 1inux http www ibm com software data db2 1inux validate DB2 Universal Database V9 Application Development http www ibm com software data db2 ad Planet DB2 http www planetdb2 com Linux gt IBM Software for Linux http www ibm com software os 1inux software Other gt SAP Standard Application Benchmarks http www sap com solutions benchmark index epx DBI perl org http dbi perl org DB2 Perl Database Interface http www ibm com software data db2 perl Comprehensive Perl Archive Network http www cpan org http www cpan org modules by category 07_Database_Interfaces DBI Apache HTTP Server Project http httpd apache org Related publications 497 6899bibl fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Perl apache org http perl apache org docs 1 0 guide gt PHP scripting la
250. b2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 insert into tabl values 1 Tina DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 connect reset DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 backup db itsodb on all dbpartitionnums to db2backup Part Result 0000 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully 0001 DB20000I The BACKUP DATABASE command completed successfully Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080206173239 db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2_all lt lt 0 lt db2 restore db itsodb from db2backup taken at 20080206173239 redirect generate script jtsodb_node0000 clp DB200001 The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully mensa db2 restore db itsodb completed ok db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2_all lt lt 1 lt db2 restore db itsodb from db2backup taken at 20080206173239 redirect generate script jtsodb_node0001 clp DB20000I The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully gemini db2 restore db itsodb completed ok db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt 1s clp itsodb_node0000 clp itsodb_node0001 clp Now we need to modify the two generated scripts one for each database partition In our case we change the table space container path and the size for TSDATA Example 6 25 on page 262 shows a part of the script which is related to table space TSDATA on database part
251. backup datamove gt db2 call sysproc admin_copy_schema DB2VS DB2VS1 COPY NULL USERSPACE1 USERSPACE1 SYS_ANY DB2VS2 ERRORTAB Value of output parameters Parameter Name ERRORTABSCHEMA Parameter Value Parameter Name ERRORTABNAME Parameter Value Return Status 0 db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select substr tabschema 1 10 substr tabname 1 10 substr tbspace 1 10 from syscat tables where tabname ITEM 1 2 3 DB2VS ITEM USERSPACE1 DB2VS1 ITEM USERSPACE1 2 record s selected db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select count from db2vs1 item Chapter 6 Administering databases 333 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 3000000 1 record s selected 6 4 Task Center Scheduler and DB2 Tools Catalog In this section we discuss how to use the DB2 Task Center to create and schedule a task to run on Linux The DB2 Administration Server and Tools Catalog database are the prerequisite for using the Task Center and most GUI tools We discuss the DB2 Administration Server and Tools Catalog database first as the preparation work for enabling the Task Center and Scheduler 6 4 1 DB2 Administration Server and Tools Catalog Database The DB2 Administration Server DAS is a control point used only to assist with tasks on DB2 servers You must have a running DAS if you want to use available tools such as the Task Center the Control Center or t
252. base configuration parameters A detailed sample can be find under section Recovering data using db2adutl in Chapter 11 Recover overview of the Data Recovery and High Availability Guide and Reference SC23 5848 00 6 1 7 Recovering a dropped table sample scenario It may be possible that user dropped a database table by mistake or the table data needs to be recovered In such a case DB2 provides a dropped table recovery feature In this section we demonstrate how to recover a dropped table through table space restore The table space will be restored from an older backup image and during the roll forward of the database the dropped table data will be exported To set up the scenario environment we first alter the table space TSDATA1 to allow table space level recovery take a database backup and drop table tab1 which is in table space TSDATA1 See Example 6 28 Example 6 28 Prepare for dropped table recovery db2inst1 mensa gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2inst1l mensa gt db2 alter tablespace TSDATA1 dropped table recovery on DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully db2instl mensa gt db2 connect reset DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb on all dbpartitionnums to db2backup Part Result 264 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux
253. based on mathematical principles and operations called relations Table data is accessed through Structured Query Language SQL a standardized language for defining and manipulating data in a relational database A query is used in applications or by users to retrieve data from a database The query uses SQL to create a statement in the form of Chapter 1 Introduction 15 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm SELECT lt data_name gt FROM lt table_name gt Buffer pools A buffer pool is the amount of main memory allocated to cache table and index data pages as they are being read from disk or being modified The purpose of the buffer pool is to improve system performance Data can be accessed much faster from memory than from disk therefore the fewer times the database manager needs to read from or write to a disk I O the better the performance You can create more than one buffer pool although for most situations only one is sufficient The configuration of the buffer pool is the single most important tuning area because you can reduce the delay caused by slow I O 1 4 Parallelism with DB2 A system with a single processor and disk has limitations for the amount of data users and applications that it can handle Parallel processing which is key for enterprise workloads involves spreading the load across several processors and disks allows for large volumes of data and high transaction rates to be pr
254. be default connection we Figure 8 28 Code Fragment panel In the summary panel Figure 8 29 on page 474 press Finish Chapter 8 Application development 473 6899ch08 fm 474 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 23 New Stored Procedure Summary The stored procedure settings that you specified are summarized here Template option Result Set Template option Errors SOL Exception Parameters Java Type INTEGER Figure 8 29 Summary page The procedure will be created It shows up in the Data Project Explorer under Stored Procedures and the code are presented See Figure 8 30 Data Project Explorer X Vv w DataProject SAMPLE jdbe db2 local host 50001 SAMPLE retrieve v SQL Scripts gt gt EmpSalary sq Y Stored Procedures v YOEMPSALARY v Java Source By EMPSALARY java C User Defined Functions C3 Web Services v XML wsDL C XML Documents 9 XML Schema D EmpSalary sq 0 EMPSALARY X N CREATE PROCEDURE FMPSALARY IN SALARY INTEGER SPECIFIC FMPSALARY DYNAMIC RESULT SETS l NOT DETERMINISTIC LANGJAGE Java EXTERNAL NAME FMPSALARY db2instl EMPSALARY eMP SALARY FENCED THREADGAF E PARAMETER STYLE JAVA Figure 8 30 New procedure created If you double click onto the Java program EMPSALARY java in the Explorer the Data Studio opens the Java program In the Java code change this line WHER
255. bilities 8 4 1 Storage model Prior to DB2 9 1 XML could be stored in DB2 in the follow ways gt Store as CLOB in the database This method preserves the original XML structure but you cannot search by attribute If you want to extract a particular attribute you have to parse the whole XML from the CLOB In order to implement search and extract more efficiently you could create separate columns for the attributes But that would increase the needed space and would add maintenance overhead gt Store all attributes in the relational data model Using this method you parse the XML document to insert into the database To have the original XML document structure recreating is required This will work out for simpler XML structures For more complex and more nested XML structures you have to create a much more complex relational data model DB2 pureXML supports the native storage of XML data in the DB2 database It allows you to work on the XML attributes using SQL statements or XQuery directly You can create indexes on particular XML attributes based on XQuery expressions Example 8 25 shows a simple XML document Example 8 25 Simple XML document products xml lt products gt lt product xmlns http posample org pid 10 gt lt description gt lt name gt Fleece jacket lt name gt lt price gt 19 99 lt price gt lt description gt lt product gt lt product xmIns http posample org pid 11 gt lt description
256. ccessfully Note In the file basecase db2 we use the character as a command terminator because the semicolon is already used to terminate the procedure statements Example 8 6 shows how to call the SQL procedure from the command line Example 8 6 Procedure call on command line db2inst1 puget gt db2 CALL update_salary 000100 1 424 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Return Status 0 A stored procedure usually runs in a separate process under the fenced user The fenced user is defined in the CREATE INSTANCE command db2icrt u lt fenced id gt lt instance id gt During development of SPs and UDFs you should change the database manager configuration parameter KEEPFENCED in previous version KEEPDARI to NO so that every time the procedure is invoked the actual version is loaded db2 update dbm cfg using KEEPFENCED NO Note More information about stored procedures can be found in Developing User defined Routines SQL and External SC23 5855 00 8 3 Programming languages In this section we introduce some of the programming languages you can use on Linux and explain how to set up the environment for each one The languages covered in this section are gt C C gt Java gt PHP gt Perl In general the following steps are required to use these languages with DB2 1 Set up the application development environment for the langu
257. columns and detailed indexes all allow read access DB20000I The RUNSTATS command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa gt db2 reorgchk current statistics on table db2instl item Table statistics Fl 100 OVERFLOW CARD lt 5 F2 100 Effective Space Utilization of Data Pages gt 70 F3 100 Required Pages Total Pages gt 80 SCHEMA NAME CARD OV NP FP ACTBLK TSIZE F1 F2 F3 REORG Table DB2INST1 ITEM 3000728 0 7394 7394 60014560 0 99 100 Index statistics F4 CLUSTERRATIO or normalized CLUSTERFACTOR gt 80 F5 100 Space used on leaf pages Space available on non empty leaf pages gt MIN 50 100 PCTFREE 286 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm F6 100 PCTFREE Amount of space available in an index with one less level Amount of space required for all keys lt 100 F7 100 Number of pseudo deleted RIDs Total number of RIDs lt 20 F8 100 Number of pseudo empty leaf pages Total number of leaf pages lt 20 SCHEMA NAME INDCARD LEAF ELEAF LVLS NDEL KEYS LEAF_RECSIZE NLEAF_RECSIZE LEAF_PAGE_OVERHEAD NLEAF_PAGE_ OVERHEAD F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 REORG Table DB2INST1 ITEM Index DB2INST1 PK_ITEM_ITEMID 3000728 6176 0 3 0 3000728 4 4 1340 1340 100 92 6 0 0 CLUSTERRATIO or normalized CLUSTERFACTOR F4 will indicate REORG is necessary for indexes that are not in the same sequence as the base table When multiple indexe
258. com 72 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm DAS user DAS_USERNAME dasusrl DAS_UID 997 DAS_GID 1003 DAS_GROUP_NAME dasadml DAS_HOME_DIRECTORY home dasusr1 DAS_ PASSWORD 34633227482829051517793564532265350013227 19040555913873342519614033763535200416 25453423 ENCRYPTED DAS_PASSWORD Instance properties INSTANCE instl inst1 TYPE ese Instance owning user inst1 NAME db2instl inst1 UID 999 inst1 GID 1001 inst1 GROUP_NAME db2iadml inst1 HOME DIRECTORY db2home db2inst1l inst1 PASSWORD 3463322748282905151779356453226535001322719040555913873342519614033763535200416 25453423 ENCRYPTED inst1 PASSWORD inst1 AUTOSTART YES inst1 SVCENAME db2c_db2inst1 inst1 PORT_NUMBER 50001 inst1 FCM_PORT_NUMBER 60001 inst1 MAX_LOGICAL_NODES 4 Fenced user inst1 FENCED_USERNAME db2fencl inst1 FENCED_UID 998 inst1 FENCED_GID 1002 inst1 FENCED_GROUP_NAME db2fadml inst1 FENCED_HOME_DIRECTORY db2home db2fencl inst1 FENCED_PASSWORD 7234413608936355365120643490665128227774547854466545365132477194452032722963741 33305018 ENCRYPTED inst1 FENCED PASSWORD Contact properties CONTACT contactl contact1 CONTACT_NAME db2instl contact1 EMAIL db2instl itsosj sanjose ibm com contact1 PAGER false contact1 NEW_CONTACT YES contact1 INSTANCE instl Installed Languages Chapter 2 Installation 73
259. commands groupadd g 999 db2iadml1 groupadd g 998 db2fadml groupadd g 997 dasadml In our setup we used the numbers 997 998 and 999 Make sure that the numbers you choose do not already exist on your machine by checking etc group file 3 Create a user that belongs to each group and specify the home directory useradd u 1001 g db2iadm1 m d db2home db2inst1 s bin ksh db2inst1 useradd u 1002 g db2fadm1 m d db2home db2fencl1 s bin ksh db2fencl useradd u 1003 g dasadml m d home dasusr1 s bin ksh dasusr1 In our setup we used the numbers 1001 1002 and 1003 Make sure that the numbers you choose do not already exist on your machine by checking etc passwd file 4 As root user set a password for each user that you created by entering the following commands passwd db2instl passwd db2fencl passwd dasusrl Creating users Multiple partition considerations In a partitioned database environment you only need to create one shared home directory for the instance owner and fenced user but remember to create users on each machine When creating users in a partitioned environment make sure Chapter 2 Installation 51 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm that the user and group IDs are the same on each machine In our setup we have gt A shared home directory db2home on the instance owning machine which is NFS mounted on the remaining machines in the cluster In this directo
260. configure disk partitions and file systems depending on your environment We suggest you follow these recommendations when configuring your system gt For single and partitioned database systems we recommend that you create a separate file system for the DB2 user home directories In our setup this file system is called db2home for single partition environment For partitioned database environments we recommend that you create a separate DB2 home file system on one of the machines in the cluster to be used as the instance home directory This file system is to be shared between all machines in the cluster via NFS that is NFS exported from the NFS server machine and NFS mounted on the remaining machines In our setup we created the file system export db2home with a mount point db2home gt We also recommend that you create a separate file system for storing databases For partitioned database systems there should be a separate database file system on each physical system that participates in the partitioned database In our setup we created a file system called database with mount point database gt For performance or availability reasons we recommend that you avoid putting user data on the catalog node When restoring the catalog node the restore is faster when there is no data on this node gt We also recommend that you create separate partitions for the primary copy of DB2 logs DB2 mirrored logs and DB2 temporary table
261. connection and stores all information about this project In the file system a project is represented as a subdirectory in your workspace Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 211 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm You can create a new project by selecting File gt New Project A panel lists wizards for creating different types of project shown Select the wizard suitable for your application The Data Studio will ask you a couple of project specific questions and switch to a particular perspective that is useful for that project type You can create as many projects as you want in your workspace Projects can be opened or closed as you need to work on them If you want to share projects between different workspaces or between different members in your team use the Team functions as described in 5 3 2 Team function on page 212 Just copying the project subdirectory is not supported 5 3 2 Team function 212 The team function introduces a powerful facility to share projects among team members or workspaces This function supports all version control applications that are available as plug ins for the Eclipse framework Examples are CVS SVN CMVC and Rational ClearCase Share a project A project can be shared by right clicking the project in the project explorer and select Team gt Share Project Figure 5 17 ts x gt Ol Gy sta 2p Ves gt pr N b Osa Close Project S
262. coverable database you can back up restore and roll individual table spaces forward rather than the entire database When you back up a table space online it is still available for use and simultaneous updates are recorded in the logs When you perform an online restore or a roll forward operation on a table space the table space itself is not available for use until the operation completes but users are not prevented from accessing tables in other table spaces Full or Incremental backup A full backup is a image copy of the entire database Figure 6 1 In a partitioned environment each database partition backup is written in a separate output file Sunday Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sunday tee Figure 6 1 Full backup An incremental backup takes an image copy of changed data since the most recent successful full backup This is a cumulative backup as shown in Figure 6 2 on page 226 The TRACKMOD parameter Track modified pages in the database configuration must be set to ON Chapter 6 Administering databases 225 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Sunday Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sunday i mse Sao Full Full Figure 6 2 Incremental backup A delta backup is basically an incremental backup It creates a copy of all data pages that have changed since the last successful backup of any types This is also known as a non cumulative backup Figure 6 3 Sunday Mon Tue Wed
263. creates all of the required users and groups for you during installation The default users and groups created are listed in Table 2 10 on page 50 DB2 Setup also gives you an option to specify your own user and group names Response file Users can also be created during a response file installation if you specify user and group information in the response file Example 2 5 shows the entries in our response file to create the three required users and groups for DB2 Example 2 5 Using a response file to create users and groups Instance Creation Settings db2inst1 NAME db2instl db2inst1 UID 1001 db2inst1 GROUP_NAME db2iadml db2inst1 GID 999 db2inst1 HOME DIRECTORY db2home db2inst1 db2inst1 PASSWORD XXXXXXXXXX Fenced User Creation Settings db2inst1 FENCED_USERNAME db2fencl 50 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm db2inst1 FENCED UID 1002 db2inst1 FENCED_GROUP_NAME db2fadml db2inst1 FENCED HOME_DIRECTORY db2home db2fenc1 db2inst1 FENCED_PASSWORD xxxxxxxxxx Administration Server Creation Settings DAS_USERNAME dasusrl DAS_UID 1003 DAS_GROUP_NAME dasadml DAS_GID 997 DAS_HOME_DIRECTORY home dasusrl DAS_PASSWORD XXXXXXXXXX Creating users and groups in OS command line To use this method follow these steps 1 Log on as root 2 Create groups for the instance owner the fenced user and the DAS user by using the following
264. cs current and reorganizing tables and indexes as necessary It can be time consuming to determine whether and when to run maintenance activities automatic maintenance removes the burden Chapter 6 Administering databases 269 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm from you You can manage the enablement of the automatic maintenance features simply and flexibly by using the automatic maintenance database configuration parameters The default values for a DB2 Version 9 5 database are shown in Example 6 33 Example 6 33 Automatic maintenance database configuration parameters db2inst1l mensa gt db2 get db cfg for itsodb grep Automatic Automatic maintenance AUTO_MAINT ON Automatic database backup AUTO_DB BACKUP OFF Automatic table maintenance AUTO_TBL_MAINT ON Automatic runstats AUTO_RUNSTATS ON Automatic statement statistics AUTO _STMT_STATS OFF Automatic statistics profiling AUTO_STATS_PROF OFF Automatic profile updates AUTO_PROF_UPD OFF Automatic reorganization AUTO_REORG OFF The hierarchy of the parameters allows you to tune all automatic maintenance on or off without affecting the respective activity settings For instance if AUTO_TBL_MAINT parameter is set to OFF the parameter AUTO_RUNSTATS is not of interest Enable automatic table maintenance Automatic table maintenance can be enabled by using the command line or the Configure Automatic Maintenance wizard To us
265. ct the object on the left hand side Databases are listed below their parent instance Filter the contents on the left by selecting the state toggle buttons at the top of the navigation view Current Instance Status Last refresh 2 18 08 4 26 PM Ay Refresh Alarm 0 Instances View Objects in Alarm State Warning A 0 Instances A View Objects in Alarm or Warning State Attention 0 Instances View Objects in Any Alert State Normal 1 Instances view All Objects Figure 7 2 Using toggle buttons to filter the alerts The Configuration option in the Heath Center allows you to set up notification for the instance and modify health indicator settings When you choose the Configure menu item a submenu with two items is displayed see Figure 7 3 You can view or change the health indicator settings by clicking Health Indicator Settings or you can use Alert Notification to set up the notification for the health monitor Objects QA lo Fay m Fay o eo eo oo Stop Health Monitor Configure Health Indicator Settings B Show Notification Log Alert Notification Refresh T Figure 7 3 Configure menu in Health Center erts db2inst1 There are currently no ale If you want to notify people using e mail or pager when an alert is generated you need to define a contact list first You can add a contact or contact group in the Contacts management panel or by using DB2 CLP commands
266. ction Choose to use a new connection or select an existing connection Create a new connection Figure 8 13 Select a new connection We re going to select a new connection for the SAMPLE database The we get to Figure 8 14 on page 465 If you haven t had a database connection established yet you ll get to the Connection Parameters panel automatically In the Connection Parameters Figure 8 14 on page 465 fill the connection information We use the SAMPLE database for the demonstration Test Connection allows you to test the connection before creating it If database connection test successes click Finish The new database connection shows up in the Database Explorer In the explorer tree you can view the database structure or perform database maintenance tasks If you have already had a database connection setup select Use an existing connection select the desired connection and click Next Then you ll get your project created and end up at Figure 8 16 on page 466 In our example we continue with Figure 8 14 on page 465 464 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 New Connection Connection Parameters Select the database manager JDBC driver and required connection parameters m Connection identification Use default naming convention Connection Name SAMPLE Select a database manager V DB2for Linux UNIX and Windows DB2 for iOS DB2 for z OS D
267. d db2temp db2inst1 NODE0002 ITSODB TEMPSPACE1 on dbpartitionnum 2 DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully 122 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm All database partition groups that will benefit from the new partition have to be altered so that the new partition can be used First we create a table in the table space SAMPLE_SNG which is in the partition group SNG_01 Example 3 29 Example 3 29 Create table in SNG_01 connect to itsodb CREATE TABLE PART1 P_PARTKEY INTEGER NOT NULL P_NAME VARCHAR 55 NOT NULL P_MFGR CHAR 25 NOT NULL P_ BRAND CHAR 10 NOT NULL P_ TYPE VARCHAR 25 NOT NULL P SIZE INTEGER NOT NULL P CONTAINER CHAR 10 NOT NULL P_RETAILPRICE FLOAT NOT NULL P_COMMENT VARCHAR 23 NOT NULL IN SAMPLE_SNG ALTER TABLE PART1 ADD PARTITIONING KEY P_PARTKEY Example 3 30 shows the statement for SNG_01 in our database ITSODB Example 3 30 Alter database partition group SNG_0O1 db2instl mensa gt db2 alter database partition group sng _01 add dbpartitionnum 2 without tablespaces SQL1759W Redistribute database partition group is required to change database partitioning for objects in nodegroup SNG_01 to include some added database partitions or exclude some dropped database partitions SQLSTATE 01618 The message SQL1759W is just a warning indicating that all tables in this database partition group have to be redistributed bu
268. d by the database in the SMS managed file systems gt The table space is full if one of the containers is full gt Creating an SMS table space requires less initial work because you do not have to predefine the container sizes gt You cannot split table index and long data into separate table spaces for tables which reside within an SMS table space DMS table spaces Database Managed Table spaces are managed by DB2 At the creation of the table space you specify the container files or raw devices and their sizes Although the size is defined at the table space creation it can be extended or reduced later on DB2 can also extend table spaces automatically as described in Automatic resizing of table spaces on page 96 gt You can split index data and long data into separate table spaces for tables which reside in DMS table spaces gt The size of a table space can be increased by adding or extending containers using the ALTER TABLE SPACE statement Existing data can be automatically rebalanced across the new set of containers to retain optimal I O efficiency gt DMS table spaces required more administrative overhead Work has to be performed on both Linux and DB2 levels when creating or extending DMS table spaces gt In general a well tuned set of DMS table spaces will outperform SMS table spaces Automatic resizing of table spaces DMS table spaces can be created with the option AUTORESIZE YES in order to
269. d 11b64 instead Example 8 14 Compiling a UDF db2inst1 puget gt SQLL home db2inst1 sqllib db2inst1 puget gt cc m32 fpic I SQLL include c tolower c D_REENTRANT db2instl puget gt cc m32 fpic shared o tolower tolower o W1 rpath SQLL 1ib32 L SQLL 1ib32 1db2 pthread db2inst1 puget gt cp tolower SQLL function The resulting executable tolower was copied to the directory lt instance home gt sql1lib function From there the database manager will access it once the function is registered by the CREATE FUNCTION command as shown in Example 8 15 Example 8 15 Activate the UDF CREATE FUNCTION to_lower VARCHAR 40 RETURNS VARCHAR 40 FENCED EXTERNAL NAME tolower to_lower NOT VARIANT NO SQL PARAMETER STYLE DB2SQL LANGUAGE C NO EXTERNAL ACTION After that it can be used as demonstrated in Example 8 16 Example 8 16 Execute the UDF db2inst1 puget gt db2 select to_lower AAA from sysibm sysdummy1 1 record s selected Chapter 8 Application development 439 6899ch08 fm 8 3 4 Java Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm If you want to drop the function you can run the command db2 DROP FUNCTION to_lower VARCHAR 40 UDFs can be run in fenced or not fenced mode Fenced routines run as a separate process They have some communication overhead involved Not fenced routines run as part of the database server They are a little bit more efficient than fenced routines On the other sid
270. d and non clustered environments Logical database partitions can provide better scalability Multiple database managers running on multiple logical partitions may make fuller use of available resources than a single database manager could The ability to have two or more partitions coexist on the same machine regardless of the number of processors allows greater flexibility in designing high availability configurations and failover strategies Upon machine failure a database partition can be automatically moved and restarted on a second machine that already contains another partition of the same database Chapter 1 Introduction 23 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 24 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 2 Installation This chapter guides you through the process of installing DB2 on Linux systems It covers both single and multiple partition environments and provides instructions for three installation methods DB2 Setup db2_install and response file installation The following topics are discussed Basic requirements Installation considerations and planning Multi partition installation considerations User and group setup Installing DB2 YYYY Y Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 25 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 1 Basic requirements Prior to installing DB2 it is important that you hav
271. d for DB2 correctly Top will overstate memory usage by counting shared memory segment multiple times Note In Linux DB2 will not free shared memory automatically To free the shared memory you need to recycle DB2 Some frequently used command line options for top are listed in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Frequently used command options for top i Specifies the delay between screen updates 406 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Monitor only processes with given process id This flag can be given up to twenty times i Start top ignoring any idle or zombie processes Displays command line instead of the command name only Batch mode Useful for sending output from top to other programs or to a file In this mode top will not accept command line input It runs until it produces the number of iterations requested with the n option or until killed Output is plain text suitable for display on a dumb terminal If you are not using batch mode to run top then when the output screen of top displays you can use the interactive command to control the display For example you can toggle off or on the display of CPU states or sort the processes list by the memory occupancy percentage or kill a process in the list Table 7 2 shows some commonly used commands Table 7 2 Frequently used interactive commands for top Immediately updates the display hor Displays a help scre
272. d interconnect Exploitation of the latest Linux Kernel capabilities Innovative self managing technologies to reduce DBA intervention Tools and wizards for monitoring and performance tuning Simplified management of large scale databases on clusters Federated Web Services for Information Integration Connection Concentrator for high user scalability Dynamic configuration without the need for restarting database Online tools and utilities like REORG LOAD storage and memory management Multidimensional clustering for improved performance of complex queries DB2 has been commercially available on Linux since Version 6 DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows LUW continuously offers industry leading performance scale and reliability database features and functions XML is supported natively in DB2 9 1 DB2 9 5 extends its innovative abilities as a hybrid data server and cost savings of deep compression to enable rapid use of data staying ahead of threats and extracting the full value of XML data in operational processes The new and enhanced DB2 9 5 features include gt pureXML Introduced in DB2 9 1 pureXML provides the capability to store XML data natively as a column in a DB2 database This seamless integration of XML with relational data speeds application development improves search performance with highly optimized XML indexes and is flexible because both SQL and XQuery can be used to query XML data In DB2 9 5 enhancements includi
273. d procedures Once again please note the home directory location is created on db2home 13 On the Prepare the DB2 tools catalog window accept default option Do not prepare the DB2 tools catalog and click Next 14 Set up notifications If you choose Set up your DB2 server to send notifications specify a Notification SMTP server here then click Next 15 On Specify a contact for health monitor notification window you can add Administration contact for this instance then click Next By default a health monitor runs on the DB2 instance you are setting up The DB2 health monitor will send a notification E mail to this person at the specified mail address when a health indicator threshold is reached If you check off Address is for a pager the notification message will be sent to the contact s pager 80 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 16 Start copying files and create response files This window provides a summary of your installation and configuration settings Scroll through this window to verify that your settings are correct then click Finish 17 After installation read the status report tab and check for any errors If all is well click Finish Note Install logs are located in tmp db2setup log and tmp db2setup err 18 Since we selected Create a DB2 instance in our sample and we created instance owner db2inst1 who uses Korn Shell ksh before running DB2 Setup
274. d specific configuration 101 3 3 Creating a database 00 0 104 3 3 1 Creating a single partitioned database 104 3 3 2 Creating a multiple partitioned database 109 3 4 Further configuration a 0 0 00 cee eee 116 3 4 1 Change online log path nananana 0 6 0 cee ee 116 3 4 2 Change the archive log path 0 0000 e eee eee 119 3 4 3 Change the path for db2diag log 0 0c eee ee eee 119 3 5 Add database partition 0 ee ee 121 3 6 DB2 configuration 0 0 0 eae 128 3 6 1 STMM Self tuning memory management 128 3 6 2 Database manager configuration parameters 132 3 6 3 Database configuration 0 2 00 cee ee 136 3 6 4 DB2 registry and environment variables 4 142 3 7 SOCUNIY a asare sa ani Seg eeeebbadedeneeia ede be Wedd e ete 145 3 8 Client configuration 0 0 0 ee 148 3 8 1 Installing IBM Data Server Client 00000005 149 3 8 2 Configuring IBM Data Server Client 00055 150 3 9 Configuring licensing eaaa c eee ee 155 3 9 1 DB2 License Center 0 0000 eee 156 3 9 2 Ab2ZIICM 00l 540 eee i tee eee dae wa YE ale Pha ka bale 159 Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 0000 e ee eae 163 4 1 Migration planning sassa saaana aaea 164 4 1 1 Migration requirements asussaan aaaea 165 4 1 2 Plan
275. d to implement the different tiers OLTP versus DSS You can distinguish between Online Transaction Processing OLTP and Decision Support System DSS systems based on the type of their workload OLTP systems process the business related transactions DSS based systems typically have large and long running reports DB2 offers many features to tune both types of workload Figure 1 2 shows an example architecture 12 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm Reporting Business Data mining applications Secialized datamart ETL Specialized datamart p DSS Replication Production system OLTP Ad hoc reporting General purpose data warehouse DSS Figure 1 2 Deployment based on workload Figure 1 2 shows an example architecture based on the workload type The business transactions take place on the production systems OLTP Here you have a lot of transactions which write to the database The type of queries and transaction are defined very well The data model is usually highly normalized These systems usually require a very high availability There is a general purpose data warehouse which receives the majority of the data from the production system on a regular basis by replicating the data with the data propagator For instance by replicating the data with the data propagator Here users can perform ad
276. database If you have several databases in your DB2 instance and you want to see the db2diag 1og entries only for one database use db2diag g db ITSODB The g option is a grep like filtering capability for a comma separated list of field pattern pairs Another example is 394 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm db2diag g db SAMPLE level Event pid 5971 It shows all events for process ID 5971 and not related to the SAMPLE database The field names are case insensitive while search patterns input fields are case sensitive To get a list of all available field names use db2diag h command gt Partitioned database In a partitioned database environment the db2diag 1og file contain the entries for all database partitions Every database partition writes their messages into the same file You can filter the output as follows To display only logged records for database partition 2 db2diag n 002 To display all logged records containing only errors for database partitions 0 and 2 db2diag node 0 2 1 Error warning gt Archive the db2diag 1og file If you want to archive the current db2diag 1og file and start a new one db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2diag A db2diag Moving db2home db2inst1 sql1ib db2dump db2diag 1og to db2home db2inst1 sql1lib db2dump db2diag 1log_2008 02 14 16 36 57 gt Format the db2diag output The followi
277. db2 V9 5 instance db2icrt s client db2vs If you have already installed a DB2 server product on your machine i e DB2 Enterprise Server Edition you can use the db2icrt command with the s client option to create a separate client instance Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 149 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Now you should configure the client to access a remote DB2 server To administer a DB2 database remotely you must connect to the server using TCP IP Both TCP IPv4 and TCP IPv6 are supported 3 8 2 Configuring IBM Data Server Client In order to accept connection requests from a Data Server Client using TCP IP you have to configure the database server On the DB2 server verify the following items gt The db2 services name and port is set in the file etc services for example db2c_db2inst1 50001 tcp gt DB2COMM registry variable is set for TCP IP Use the db2set a11 command and look for DB2COMM TCPIP gt TCP IP port name in database manager configuration should be set db2instl mensa gt db2 get dbm cfg grep SVCE TCP IP Service name SVCENAME db2c_db2inst1 If changes are done the DB2 server instance must be restarted Now you can configure the DB2 client There are two tools available for configuring client to server communications gt Configuration Assistant This is a graphical tool provided with Data Server Client and DB2 server products on Windows and Linux It is not provided with
278. diagnostic information Range valid path OR Cancel Sra Corriccictric Figure 3 13 Change DIAGPATH in Control Center 3 5 Add database partition If the load on a partitioned database becomes too high you can add a partition to take the advantage of the parallel processing This section describes the steps to do that In a partitioned database environment you can use the add dbpartitionnum CLP command or use the db2start command with the option dbpartitionnum to add a logical database partition to a database which is already populated with data The add dbpartitionnum command has two options gt LIKE DBPARTITIONNUM gt WITHOUT TABLESPACES The add dbpartitionnum command creates the database directory structure in the database path for example database on the partition where the new database partition has been created Without using the like dbpartitionnum parameter temporary table space definitions are retrieved from the catalog partition In our example we add a new logical database partition partition 2 on node 0 mensa That means we will have two logical partitions 0 and 2 on mensa and one partition 1 on gemini Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 121 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Check etc services that sufficient ports are reserved for the FCM Shutdown your DB2 instance db2stop so that you can modify db2nodes cfg file Add a new partition in INSTHOME s
279. dio Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 217 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm The data distribution viewer can be selected by a right click the EMPLOYEE table in the Database Explorer and select Value Distributions Multivariate You get the viewer panel where you can analyze your data Figure 5 26 Table statistics 42 rows Field name Data typ Values Nulls Minimur Maximur Range Total Mean Standard 1st Quart Mediz FIRSTNME Categorice MIDINIT Categorice Categoric WORKDEPT Categorice PHONENO Categorice HIREDATE Temporal Categorice Charts for selected fields Charts per page 4 gt C Show Frequencies in WORKDEPT N Eee ANALYST DESIGNER MANAGER PRES A0 B0 C01 D11 D21 CLERK FIELDREP OPERATOR SALESREP Figure 5 26 Data distribution viewer If you double click on any of the database objects in the Database Explorer you get an editor panel which allows you to manipulate the related object For instance if you double click on the EMPLOYEE table you get the panel as shown in Figure 5 27 on page 219 218 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm Data Object Editor Data Object Properties Specify additional properties to alter your data object Run DDL when you are done General E lt Table gt DEPARTMENT Preview DDL Partition Key Data Partitions Z E EAE A ee B E Table Spaces Name Primary
280. ds 38 There are four methods in which you can install DB2 on Linux gt DB2 Setup wizard gt db2_install command gt Response file installation gt Payload file deployment Each method has its own advantages and disadvantages The preferred method often depends on your level of expertise and type of environment but in general if a graphical terminal is available using DB2 Setup wizard is recommended DB2 Setup wizard The DB2 Setup wizard is a Java based graphical tool that installs DB2 It lays down the DB2 file sets the Java Developer Kit and allows you to create a new DB2 instance create new users and group or configure DB2 to existing users configure communications create the tools catalog database and set up notification DB2 Setup also has an option that allows you to create a response file This is the best method for less experienced users as most of the configuration is performed for you db2_install command The db2_install script installs all DB2 packages on your Linux system you cannot select or deselect components This method is reliable and commonly used by expert users for installing DB2 on larger more complex partitioned database environments Tasks such as users and groups set up instance creation tools catalog database creation and notification set up have to be performed manually after the installation Some people prefer this method because it bypasses the configuration performed by DB2 Setu
281. e 0 Comments L For bit data Figure 8 25 Add a parameter We are done now with the Parameter panel in Figure 8 26 Press Next 3 New Stored Procedure KD Parameters Specify parameters for the stored procedure SOL error handling code sa Exception v Parameters INTEGER Bemi 4l SSS 0 Jove Up Comments a Move Down Einish Figure 8 26 parameter panel 472 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm In the Deploy panel Figure 8 27 enter EMPSALARY in the Specific name field check Enable debugging Click Next 2 New Stored Procedure KD Deploy Options Specify additional options for deploying and debugging the stored procedure ma DB2INST1 Enable debugging Figure 8 27 Deploy options for stored procedure In the Code Fragments panel Figure 8 28 you can enter additional files with code fragments which are to be included into the procedure In our example we do not have additional file to add Click Next 2 New Stored Procedure KD Code Fragments Specify files containing code fragments Header fragment Imports fragment Data fragment a E E Method fragment i public class EMPSALARY public static void eMPSALARY int SALARY ResultSet rs1 throws SQLException Exception li Get connection to the database Connection con DriverManager getConnection jd
282. e 0 Backup Gran 0 240 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Status Flags 21 System Cats inc 1 Catalog Partition Number 0 DB Codeset UTF 8 DB Territory LogID 1202239916 LogPath database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00002 SQLOGDIR Backup Buffer Size 1048576 Number of Sessions 1 Platform 1E The proper image file name would be ITSODB 0 db2inst1 NODE0000 CATNO000 20080205141153 001 1 Buffers processed H Image Verification Complete successful For more options of the db2ckbkp utility see the Command Reference SC23 5846 00 Backup database with Control Center The backup utility is fully integrated within the DB2 Control Center Figure 6 7 shows where you can invoke the backup utility All Systems All Databases Control Center ions Customize Control Center Figure 6 7 Backup in Control Center Go through all of the panels and fill out all needed parameters At the end you can list the generated backup statements as shown in Figure 6 8 on page 242 Chapter 6 Administering databases 241 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 242 Show SOL The following commands may not run as expected in a multi database partition environment if executed from a single script Backup Database Partition Grouping 1 Run on database partitions 0 BACKUP DATABASE ITSODB ONLINE TO db2b
283. e 3 34 Compliance Report The License Center can also be used to reset the license usage information by selecting Reset Compliance Report from the License menu 158 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm 3 9 2 db2licm tool db21icm is a command line tool that manages licensing It is used to display license information add and remove license keys and specify user and enforcement policies It can also generate usage statistics and display connection information for current users To view all of your licensing information enter db2licm 1 as shown in Example 3 41 Example 3 41 View DB2 licensing information using db2licm command db2instl mensa gt db2licm 1 Product name DB2 Enterprise Server Edition License type Authorized User Option Expiry date Permanent Product identifier db2ese Version information 9 5 Number of licensed authorized users 25 Features DB2 Database Partitioning Not licensed DB2 Performance Optimization ESE Not licensed DB2 Storage Optimization Not licensed DB2 Advanced Access Control Not licensed DB2 Geodetic Data Management Not licensed DB2 pureXML ESE Not licensed IBM Homogeneous Federation ESE Not licensed IBM Homogeneous Replication ESE Not licensed The ENV_FEATURE_INFO administrative view and the ENV_GET_FEATURE_INFO table function also return information about all available features for which
284. e 6 54 on page 343 342 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Y Not categorized Runst ats Task Figure 6 54 Context menu of a task The result of our sample task is shown in Figure 6 55 on page 344 Chapter 6 Administering databases 343 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 28 08 11 34 34 AM PST 2 28 08 11 34 58 AM PST 00 00 24 Mating eels The task DB2INST 1 Runstats Task with status Successful ran on the DB2 Administrative Server on mensa itsosj sanjose ipm com and completed with return code 0 The task started on mensa O 1 at 2008 02 28 11 34 34 0 and completed at 2008 02 28 11 34 58 0 The task lasted 24 seconds Figure 6 55 Show result panel The task completed successful The command script and running output of the commands specified in the task are shown in Figure 6 56 on page 345 344 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Show Results connect to itsodb Database Connection Information AMAMERKU Database server DB2 LINUXK8664 9 5 0 SQL authorization ID DB2INST1 Local database alias ITSODB runstats on table db2inst1 item DB20000I The RUNSTATS command completed successfully connect reset DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully connect to itsodb Figure 6 56 DB2 command output Further modification can be done for the
285. e Server Edition from the Installed products menu as shown in Figure 3 33 on page 157 156 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm AACE Figure 3 33 DB2 License Center Installing a license key To install a license key using the License Center you must add a db2 lic license file as follows 1 Select Add from the License menu 2 Select the From a file option and choose the appropriate directory If you purchased a fully licensed DB2 product the db2ese lic license file is located in cdrom db2 license where cdrom is the root directory of your CD ROM Click OK To remove a license file select Remove from the License menu Setting up a license policy For DB2 Connect Enterprise Server Edition the license policy controls and monitors the number of users that can connect simultaneously to a DB2 Connect server For WebSphere Replication Server or WebSphere Federation Server the license policy controls and monitors the number of connectors to a non DB2 data source To setup the license policy using the License Center do this 1 Select Change from the License menu Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 157 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 In the Change License window select the type of license that you have purchased for your product Changing the enforcement policy The default enforcement policy is Soft Stop This means that
286. e Space Utilization of Data Pages gt 70 F3 100 Required Pages Total Pages gt 80 SCHEMA NAME CARD OV NP FP ACTBLK TSIZE F1 F2 F3 REORG Table DB2INST1 ITEM 1502010 0 3714 7394 30040200 0 50 50 Index statistics F4 CLUSTERRATIO or normalized CLUSTERFACTOR gt 80 F5 100 Space used on leaf pages Space available on non empty leaf pages gt MIN 50 100 PCTFREE F6 100 PCTFREE Amount of space available in an index with one less level Amount of space required for all keys lt 100 F7 100 Number of pseudo deleted RIDs Total number of RIDs lt 20 F8 100 Number of pseudo empty leaf pages Total number of leaf pages lt 20 SCHEMA NAME INDCARD LEAF ELEAF LVLS NDEL KEYS LEAF_RECSIZE NLEAF_RECSIZE LEAF_PAGE_OVERHEAD NLEAF_PAGE_OVERHEAD F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 REORG Table DB2INST1 ITEM Index DB2INST1 PK_ITEM_ITEMID 1502010 3106 2 3 2912 1502010 4 4 1340 1340 100 91 12 0 0 From the output we can see that DB2 has recommended that we reorganize the table based on the output underneath REORG in table statistics part The means REORG is recommended For more information regarding the explanation of the output from REORGCHK refer to Command Reference SC23 5846 00 4 Reorganize the index and table and monitor the procedure of reorganization using GET SNAPSHOT command In the Index statistics part of the output shown in Example 6 37 on page 288 we can see tha
287. e create tablespace statement It will be replaced by the partition number during runtime Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 113 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 3 18 Create multi partition table space connect to itsodb create tablespace sample_mpl in IBMDEFAULTGROUP pagesize 4k MANAGED BY SYSTEM using db db2inst1 NODEO00 N ITSODB SAMPLE MPL on dbpartitionnum 0 using db db2inst1 NODE000 N ITSODB SAMPLE_MPL on dbpartitionnum 1 extentsize 8 prefetchsize 32 Example 3 19 shows a creation of a database partition group sng_01 anda single partition table space on partition 1 We create a container on gemini partition 1 before creating the table space mkdir db db2inst1 NODE0001 ITSODB SAMPLE_SNG Example 3 19 Create single partition table space connect to itsodb create database partition group sng_01 on dbpartitionnum 1 create tablespace sample_sng in sng_01 pagesize 4k MANAGED BY SYSTEM using db db2inst1 NODE0001 ITSODB SAMPLE_SNG on dbpartitionnum 1 extentsize 8 prefetchsize 32 Now node 0 mensa should have table spaces SYSCATSPACE TEMPSPACE1 USERSPACE1 and SAMPLE_MPL and node 1 gemini has table spaces TEMPSPACE1 USERSPACE1 SAMPLE_MPL and SAMPLE_SNG To create tables in the newly created table space use the command line to execute DDL scripts like Example 3 20 using the db2 tvf command Example 3 20 Create table DDL connect to itsodb
288. e data access RUNSTATS J J Offline Online 4 i Maintenance activity settings The data access optimization maintenance activity automatically analyzes the data in tables to allow for applications to access the data as quickly as possible This activity will occur using the following settings Table scope All tables including system tables Configure Settings FI mie 4 Back Next gt Finish Cancel Figure 6 19 Select maintenance activity Use the Configure Settings button to specify the tables from which you want to automatically collect statistics or the tables that you want to automatically reorganize Note Using the Configure Automatic Maintenance wizard you can specify your maintenance objectives The database manager uses these objectives to determine whether the maintenance activities need to be done and runs only the required ones during the next available maintenance window a time period that you define Automatic statistics collection Automatic statistics collection helps improve database performance by ensuring that you have up to date table statistics The database manager determines which statistics are required by your workload and which statistics need to be updated The DB2 optimizer uses these statistics to determine which path to use to access the data 274 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 20
289. e db2 local host 50001 SAMPLE SOL Scripts C Stored Procedures C User Defined Functions C3 Web Services v OOXML C WSDL C XML Documents C XML Schema xs_t Figure 8 16 Data Explorer Creating an SQL statement With the SQL builder in Data Studio you can easily create complicate SQL queries and XQuery scripts with out knowing the syntax details To create a query follow these steps 1 In Database Explorer view expand the Connections right mouse click on SAMPLE database select New SQL or XQuery Script 466 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm 2 In the popup panel enter a name for the query and select SQL builder as shown in Figure 8 17 We name the query EmpSalary Press OK g Database Explorer m z TA E E E 5 BS O 2 a We yY i v E Connections caret Emsa S vV SAMPLE DB2 for Linux UNIX and Wind ESN PLE 1 Edit using a gt C Butter Pools O SQL editor for scripts that contain one or more SQL and XQuery statements gt Groups SQL builder for single SOL SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE statement gt C Partition Groups Statement type Serer tt s s S S E b C Remote Servers b O Roles b Schemas b O Table Spaces Cancel b O Users E Properties 53 Tasks Problems Error Log Model Report Data Output Bookmarks General 0 lt Database gt SAMPLE Privileges Name SANPIE Documentation Label Database type DB2 for Linux UN
290. e following command to start the DSAC installation program sh IBM_DSAC_V1 1 2_1 0 0 0 b199_Linux_x86_32_64 bin 3 On the Introduction panel click Next 4 On the license agreement panel read the license agreement and then select accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next On the Choose install Directory panel Figure 5 9 on page 204 specify the directory where you want to install DSAC or accept the default setting Click Next Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 203 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm IBM Data Studio Administration Console 1 1 2 v Introduction Where Would You Like to Install v License Agreement opt IBM DataStudioAdministrationConsole pe choose Install Directoy Restare Default Directory Choose gt S fy Server Details Setup Notification gt Select Start Up Options Configuration Options gt Setup Monitoring gt Pre Installation Summary gt Installing gt Install Complete rification gt Start Up Cancel Previous Next Figure 5 9 Choose Install directory 6 On the Specify Server Details panel Figure 5 10 specify the host name and ports for the Web server then click Next IBM Data Studio Administration Console 1 1 2 v Introduction v License Agreement 7 Enter the fully qualified hostname of your server For V Choose Install Directory example server ibm com If the server is assigned a static IP Specify
291. e for the operating platform for which the sample programs are written These examples have not been thoroughly tested under all conditions IBM therefore cannot guarantee or imply reliability serviceability or function of these programs Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved iii 6899spec fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation in the United States other countries or both Redbooks logo 6 DB2 Connect Rational eServer DB2 Universal Database Redbooks iSeries DB2 REXX i5 OS Informix System i purexXML IBM System z pSeries OpenPower System z9 zSeries OS 390 Tivoli zg OS 400 WebSphere AS 400 PowerPC ClearCase POWER The following terms are trademarks of other companies SAP and SAP logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries Oracle JD Edwards PeopleSoft Siebel and TopLink are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Snapshot and the Network Appliance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Network Appliance Inc in the U S and other countries DataStage are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ascential Software Corporation in the United States other countries or both AMD the AMD Arrow logo and combinations thereof are trademarks of
292. e if a not fenced routine crashes it will bring down the database server too Therefore it is suggested to develop routines in fenced mode Well tested routines on production systems can considered to be run as not fenced if performance is important Fenced routines can also be run under a different user ID That allows to secure them from the other instance files While developing the UDFs you should set the database manager parameter KEEPFENCED to NO So each call to the UDF will reload the function Note More information about UDFs can be found in Developing User defined Routines SQL and External SC23 5855 00 Java is an ideal language for writing programs that will run on multiple platforms Unlike languages such as C or C Java is completely specified and each Java enabled platform supports a known core of libraries One such library is JDBC which you can think of as a Java version of ODBC Using Java in conjunctlon with JDBC allows you to write portable database applications Note You can find information about programming Java for DB2 in Developing Java Applications SC23 5853 00 JDBC Because of their portability Java applications can be developed on any system If you want to develop Java programs under Linux you can use different tools like Data Studio Eclipse Rational Developer Netbeans or just a plain JDK from Sun Example 8 17 demonstrates the development of a small JDBC based Java program using the plain
293. e lead in bringing DB2 s proven performance scalability and ease of use features to Linux Over the years DB2 has kept up its lead by releasing the first database for clustered environments on Linux showcasing the first commercial database for Intel and AMD powered 64 bit platforms and continually being first to announce industry leading benchmarks on Linux IBM s commitment to Linux is further reflected through its ongoing efforts to exploit and enhance the Linux kernel for database workloads IBM is the market leader on Linux for relational database systems The reasons why major companies and governments around the globe choose to deploy DB2 for Linux in the enterprise setting are quite simple DB2 s rich set of features have been running on Linux almost four years and during this time while the Linux kernel matured through the efforts of thousands of programmers and volunteers the IBM teams were busy further hardening the kernel and DB2 on Linux for enterprise workloads Today DB2 is the most versatile and powerful database on Linux and capable of effectively handling terabytes of data in both decision support and transactional environments The combination of DB2 and Linux is a robust database platform for a variety of solutions and vertical applications including Back end for Web and application servers Business Intelligence and Data Warehousing Transactional enterprise systems Enterprise applications like ERP CRM SCM Information I
294. e load operation Figure 6 35 on page 321 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD Figure 6 35 Choose the load operation mode 3 Choose whether the original table data will be kept Figure 6 36 on page 322 Chapter 6 Administering databases 321 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD DATH paete cee 55 ellirinis teteil s ejcte Figure 6 36 Choose if the original table will be kept 4 Specify input and output files Figure 6 37 on page 323 In this panel you can specify the input file format and options specific for the selected format For example you can click DEL Options to set up your source DEL file related options You also can specify where the source resides Server or Remote host In addition you can specify the input file name and output message file name manually or by browsing files using button 322 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD Hian aeh file uia Of aar ir edje ori elects db2backup datamove item del ea db2backup datamove loadcc msg ey Figure 6 37 Specify input and output files 5 Specify which database partitions participate in the load Figure 6 38 on page 324 You can use the default choice of Load data into all database partitions if you just want to load data into all the database partitions where
295. e on mensa NFS is used to share this file system 1 If you haven t already done so create the DB2 home file system for example export db2home on the NFS server using utilities such as fdisk to create disk partition and mkfs to create file system on disk partition or the YaST tool on SUSE 2 Locally mount the DB2 home file system using the following command mount export db2home 3 Make sure that your new file system has been added to the etc fstab file This will mount the file system each time the system is rebooted Most Linux file system creation utilities for example Disk Druid YaST automatically add an entry to the etc fstab file when you create a new file system If your DB2 home file system is not found in the etc fstab file you may add it manually In etc fstab you should see an entry for export db2home In our setup the entry is Chapter 2 Installation 47 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm dev sdb5 export db2home ext3 data journal acl user_xattr 12 Next add an entry to the etc exports file to automatically export the NFS file system at boot time You only need to set up this file on your NFS servers The etc exports file follows this format directory_to_export machinel_name permissions machine2_name permissions machinen_name permissions For example in our etc exports file we have export db2home mensa rw no_root_squash sync gemini rw no_root_s
296. e partitoned database shown in Example 3 12 on page 109 We have only introduced the usage of the N variable which substitutes to the partition number Example 3 15 Create a partitioned database crdb sql CREATE DATABASE ITSODB AUTOMATIC STORAGE NO ON database ALIAS ITSODB USING CODESET UTF 8 TERRITORY US COLLATE USING SYSTEM PAGESIZE 4096 TEMPORARY TABLESPACE MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING db2temp db2inst1 NODE000 N ITSODB TEMPSPACE1 WITH Lab database for ITSO The argument N blank N is a database partition expression that can be used anywhere in the storage path Multiple database partition expressions can be specified The partition expression is terminated by a space character If there is no space character in the storage path after the database partition expression it is assumed that the rest of the string is part of the expression Table 3 1 shows you how N is used for the calculation of the path name Table 3 1 Calculation of N assuming the partition number is 10 Syntax Exampte Oo o o o oe O O TET blank N number N 100 blank N number number N 1 5 blank N number number N 4 2 fa is the modulo function Use the following command to run the create database script db2 tvf crdb sql Once the database is created you can connect to the database as shown in Example 3 16 We also list the table spaces in the catalog node mensa Example 3 16 List table
297. e reorganization allows applications to access the table during the reorganization In addition online table reorganization can be paused and resumed later by anyone with the appropriate authority by using the schema and table name A simple command for an online reorganization is db2 reorg table db2instl item inplace You can also use the ADMIN_CMD procedure to do the reorg db2 call sysproc admin_cmd reorg table item inplace Table db2inst1 item will be reorganized online The INPLACE option of the REORG command specifies an online reorganization If this is not specified an offline REORG is run Offline classic reorganization The offline method provides the fastest table reorganization especially if you do not need to reorganize LOB or LONG data LOBS and LONG data are not reorganized unless specifically requested In addition indexes are rebuilt in order after the table is reorganized Read only applications can access the original copy of the table except during the last phases of the reorganization in which the shadow copy replaces the original copy and the indexes are rebuilt A simple command for an offline reorganization is db2 reorg table db2instl item You can also use the ADMIN_CMD procedure db2 call sysproc admin_cmd reorg table db2instl item 276 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Note In general classic table reorganization is faster but c
298. e shows in the figure is the XML file NewFile xm1 file The Outline view at the right side shows the contents of the same file in a different way If you change anything in the editor the change will be reflected in the Outline view immediately Figure 5 15 shows that we have added a new product element jm version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 Ei NewFilexm l x B Outline ely Sil fq Statement sql 2xml xml Yv e products v e products v E product Y E product xmins http posample org xmins http posample org Y E description pid 10 E name v e description e price E name Fleece jacket YV E product xmins http posample org E price 19 99 YV E description product name xmins http posample org price b E description E description G product G description Design Source Figure 5 15 Views You can open new views by selecting Window gt Show View gt and then one of the sub menus The new view will be added somewhere in your perspective and you can rearrange it afterwards Here is a list of some other useful views gt Navigator Shows you the real file structure You can enable the filters to hide files Turn the filters off to see all files gt Servers Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm You can run and debug J2EE applications within the debugging framework In
299. e the command line you have to set each of the following configuration parameters to ON AUTO_MAINT AUTO_TBL_MAINT AUTO_RUNSTATS for automatic statistics collection AUTO_REORG for automatic reorganization v Yv y To use the Configure Automatic Maintenance wizard open the wizard from the Control Center by right clicking a database object as shown in Figure 6 15 on page 271 270 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Systems Databases Figure 6 15 Open Configure Automatic Maintenance wizard 6899ch06 fm Select Configure Automatic Maintenance from the pop up panel You can also open the wizard from the detail panel of the Control Center To do so expand the All databases tree in the Control Center and select the database On the bottom right of the Control Center is the detail panel Connect to the database from there and you will see more details about the database See Figure 6 16 Database ITSODB Alias name ITSODB System MENSA Type Local Actions fD Design Advisor E Activity Monitor fy Query qh Create New Database Status as of DBM State Last Backup Size Capacity Health Maintenance Hele x 2 19 08 4 24 PM amp Refresh Started fb Stop 2 18 08 3 50 PM 9 Backup Database 374 MB View Storage Unavailable Unavailable S Monitor DB Health Partially automated Maintenance h Figure 6 16 database detail panel of
300. e the required hardware and software You may be required to configure communications and install additional software packages in order for DB2 to run successfully In this section we cover the following installation prerequisites Hardware supported by DB2 Linux distributions supported by DB2 Required disk space Memory requirements Communication requirements Kernel parameter values Additional software requirements vvvvvvy 2 1 1 Hardware supported by DB2 DB2 products are supported on the following hardware x86 Intel Pentium Intel Xeon and AMD 32 bit Intel and AMD processors gt x64 64 bit AMD64 and Intel EM64T processors gt POWER IBM eServer OpenPower System i or pSeries systems that support Linux v gt eServer System z or System z9 2 1 2 Linux distributions supported by DB2 Make sure that your Linux distribution level is supported by DB2 For the latest information about currently supported Linux distributions kernels and libraries refer to the DB2 for Linux validation Web site http www ibm com software data db2 1inux validate The following Linux distributions show in Table 2 1 and Table 2 2 on page 27 have been successfully validated for use with DB2 Table 2 1 Recommended environments for DB2 9 5 Kernel architecture x86_64 PPC64 s390x POWER zSeries 26 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Kernel architecture x86_64
301. e user db2inst1 is not permitted to create a subdirectory under db2log After issuing the command chown R db2inst1 db2iadm1 db21og as root user the problem is resolved Example 7 17 Message about setting NEWLOGPATH 2008 02 14 10 32 09 904898 480 11578E825 LEVEL Error PID 25392 TID 47735688390976PROC db2sysc 0 INSTANCE db2instl NODE 000 APPHDL 0 7433 APPID NO db2inst1 080214183209 AUTHID DB2INST1 EDUID 1129 EDUNAME db2agent instance 0 FUNCTION DB2 UDB config install sqlfPdbUpdDbCfgReq probe 923 392 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm DATA 1 SQLCA PD_DB2_TYPE_SQLCA 136 bytes sqlcaid SQLCA sqlcabc 136 sqlcode 5099 sqlerrml 20 sqlerrmc db2log NEWLOGPATH 9 sqlerrp SQL09050 sqlerrd 1 0x00000000 2 0x00000000 3 0x00000000 4 0x00000000 5 0x00000000 6 0x00000000 sqlwarn 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 sqlstate 7 4 3 Operating system log The Linux operating system also has some system utilities which provide support for system logging and kernel message trapping Among those utilities syslogd provides a kind of logging that many modern programs use Every logged message by syslogd normally contains at least a time and a host name field plus a program name field but that depends on how trusty the logging program is The syslog conf file which is located in the etc directory is the main configuratio
302. e with your license agreement you should apply the license key The management of all these licenses are done through one of the following tools gt License Center within the Control Center gt db2licm a license management tool command Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 155 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm This section provides instructions about how to configure licensing using both of these tools We discuss the following topics Installing a license key Setting up a license policy Changing the enforcement policy Generating a compliance report vvvy If you installed a DB2 product with a Try and Buy license and now you want to upgrade to a full license you do not need to reinstall the DB2 product You simply upgrade your license 3 9 1 DB2 License Center The DB2 License Center is a graphical tool within the Control Center that manages licensing You can use this tool to view license status and usage information for DB2 products installed on your system add and remove license keys and specify user and enforcement policies It can also generate usage statistics and display connection information for current users To access the License Center do the following 1 Log in as instance owner 2 From Control Center select License Center from the Tools menu 3 Select the system and product on which you want to configure licensing You may configure a local or remote system Select DB2 Enterpris
303. eate the Tools Catalog by CLP as in Example B 2 Example B 2 Creating Tools Catalog by using CLP db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 create database toolscat DB20000I1 The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 create tools catalog esecat0 use existing database toolscat DB20000I The CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command completed successfully Note In the preceding example if you want you can create the new database here it is TOOLSCAT using the CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command with the CREATE NEW DATABASE clause directly For details regarding the command syntax refer to Command Reference SC23 5846 00 Then you can check the DAS configuration parameters again and you may find that the parameters associated with the Tools Catalog were changed automatically See Example B 3 Example B 3 DAS Tools Catalog parameters changed automatically db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 get admin cfg Admin Server Configuration Authentication Type DAS AUTHENTICATION SERVER_ENCRYPT DAS Administration Authority Group Name DASADM GROUP dasadml 490 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax02 fm DAS Discovery Mode DISCOVER SEARCH Name of the DB2 Server System DB2SYSTEM MENSA Java Development Kit Installation Path DAS JDK_PATH AUTOMATIC db2home db2inst1 sqllib java jdk64 Java Development Kit Installation Path DAS JDK_64 PATH AUTOMATIC db2home db2inst1 sqllib java
304. eate the tools catalog we use GET ADMIN CFG to get the current configurations for DAS as shown in Example B 1 You can see that some parameters associated with the tools catalog are empty currently including TOOLSCAT_DB TOOLSCAT_INST TOOLSCAT_SCHEMA We will use this information to compare the DAS configuration changes made by the CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command at a later time Example B 1 Checking current DAS configuration db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 get admin cfg Admin Server Configuration Authentication Type DAS AUTHENTICATION SERVER_ENCRYPT DAS Administration Authority Group Name DASADM_GROUP dasadm1 DAS Discovery Mode DISCOVER SEARCH Name of the DB2 Server System DB2SYSTEM MENSA Appendix B DB2 Tools Catalog creation 489 6899ax02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Java Development Kit Installation Path DAS JDK_PATH AUTOMATIC db2home dasusr1 das java jdk Java Development Kit Installation Path DAS JDK_64 PATH AUTOMATIC db2home dasusr1 das java jdk DAS Code Page DAS_CODEPAGE 0 DAS Territory DAS_TERRITORY 0 Location of Contact List CONTACT_HOST Execute Expired Tasks EXEC_EXP_TASK NO Scheduler Mode SCHED ENABLE OFF SMTP Server SMTP_SERVER Tools Catalog Database TOOLSCAT_DB Tools Catalog Database Instance TOOLSCAT_INST Tools Catalog Database Schema TOOLSCAT_SCHEMA Scheduler User ID Diagnostic error capture level DIAGLEVEL 2 Now let s cr
305. eaturing tight integration with DB2 drivers http www zend com en products core for ibm gt Zend Framework is based on simplicity object oriented best practices corporate friendly licensing and a rigorously tested agile codebase http framework zend com gt CakePHP enables PHP users at all levels to rapidly develop robust Web applications http cakephp org gt PEAR is a framework and distribution system for reusable PHP components http pear php net gt The PDT project provides a PHP Development Tools framework for the Eclipse platform http www eclipse org pdt 8 3 3 C C C and C are very popular and powerful programming language under Linux Currently DB2 for Linux supports the C C programming languages and compilers shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Supported C C compilers Linux on x86 GNU Linux gcc versions 3 3 and 3 4 32 bit DB2 instances and compilers only Intel C Compiler Version 9 0 Linux on AMD64 EM64T x86 64 x64 GNU Linux gcc versions 3 3 and 3 4 Intel C Compiler Version 9 0 Linux on IPF IA64 GNU Linux gcc versions 3 3 and 3 4 64 bit DB2 instances and compilers only Intel C Compiler Version 9 0 Linux on POWER GNU Linux gcc versions 3 3 and 3 4 PowerPC iSeries pSeries IBM XL C C Advanced Edition Version 7 0 for Linux Linux on zSeries s 390x GNU Linux gcc versions 3 3 and 3 4 In order to develop C C code you need the DB2 client installed on your system
306. ed for immediate modification were not changed dynamically For these configuration parameters al applications must disconnect from this database before the changes become effective db2instl puget gt db2 terminate DB200001 The TERMINATE command completed successfully db2instl puget gt db2 connect to itsodb 118 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Database Connection Information Database server DB2 LINUX 9 5 0 SQL authorization ID DB2INST1 Local database alias ITSODB db2instl puget gt db2 get db config for itsodb grep NEWLOGPATH MIRRORLOGPATH Path to log files Changed path to log files NEWLOGPATH Path to log files db210g1 ITSODB NODE0000 Mirror log path MIRRORLOGPATH db210g2 ITSODB NODE0000 This action is also logged in db2diag 1og The logging parameters can also be changed in the Command Center Right click on the database under All Databases select Configure Database Logging Here you can change and apply the changes and save them 3 4 2 Change the archive log path By default circular logging is set for a new database With this type of logging only full and offline backups of the database are allowed For recovery the database can only restored to last offline backup not to the point of failure In order to enable full recovery of the database up to a point in time archive logging has to be enabled These archived logs
307. ed in the backup ID column Example 6 31 Example 6 31 Roll forward with the table ID db2 rollforward db itsodb to end of logs on all dbpartitionnums and complete tablespace tsdatal online recover dropped table 000000000000350800040004 to db2backup rest_table Rollforward Status Input database alias itsodb Number of nodes have returned status 2 Node number Roll forward Next log Log files processed Last committed transaction status to be read 266 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 0 not pending 2008 02 07 01 32 41 000000 UTC 1 not pending 2008 02 07 01 36 12 000000 UTC DB200001 The ROLLFORWARD command completed successfully 5 Upon finishing the roll forward DB2 restores the table data to the export directory in the subdirectory NODEnnnn in a file called data Now get DDL from the history file to create the table and load all data from the export file into the table The CREATE TABLE DDL was put into the recovery history file during the DROP TABLE command as seen in Example 6 30 on page 266 The commands we need to do now to recover the table are shown in Example 6 32 Example 6 32 Recreate the table and Import the data db2inst1 mensa gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB db2inst1 mensa gt db2 CREATE TABLE DB2INST1 TAB
308. ed on the local system Instead you use a driver that supports the direct connection to the 418 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm remote database For instance a Type 4 JDBC driver The database server is installed on the other machine Separating the application and the database servers as in scenario 2 and 3 is usually a preferred architecture for the larger installations It provides more flexibility in tuning the servers separately applying maintenance tasks and implementing failover DB2 supports multi version installation on one system Different versions or the same version with different fix pack levels can co exit in the same machine For instance you can run a DB2 version 8 2 and a DB2 version 9 5 instance on same machine or V8 1 FixPak 1 and V8 1 FixPak 2 in one system An instance is related to a Linux user ID and can be accessed through the network by a TCP IP port If you want to access a database remotely the database has to be configured to listen on a particular port The port can be configured by using db2 UPDATE DBM CONFIG USING SVCENAME 50000 In addition the TCP IP protocol must be enabled by using db2set DB2COMM tcpip The database manager needs to be restarted afterwards Figure 8 2 shows the concept of the instance setup Linux server se Instance for a V8 2 Instance for a V9 5 database listening database listening on port 50000 on po
309. ed successfully DB21056W Directory changes may not be effective until the directory cache is refreshed db2vs puget gt db2 list node directory Node Directory Number of entries in the directory 1 Node 1 entry MENSA DB Server MENSA Node name Comment 154 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Directory entry type LOCAL Protocol TCPIP Hostname mensa Service name 50001 db2vs puget gt db2 list db directory System Database Directory Number of entries in the directory 1 Database 1 entry Database alias ITSODB Database name ITSODB Node name MENSA Database release level c 00 Comment Test database for ITSO Directory entry type Remote Authentication SERVER Catalog database partition number 1 Alternate server hostname Alternate server port number db2vs puget gt db2 connect to itsodb user db2inst1 Enter current password for db2instl Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias Note For more details about DB2 commands refer to the Command Reference SC23 5846 00 3 9 Configuring licensing Each DB2 product and DB2 feature comes with its own license key To assist you in managing your licenses a compliance report lists the compliance or noncompliance of DB2 features with your current product entitlement To be in complianc
310. ed the procedure for applying DB2 fix packs Now updating DB2 instance and DAS running db2iupdt and dasupdt are automated In addition binding occurs automatically at the first connection This means once you start the database manager the DB2 product is ready to use immediately after fix pack installation To apply a DB2 fix pack perform the following steps 1 Download the code of the latest fix pack from http www ibm com software data db2 udb support htm 2 Read carefully the Readme file and release notes and perform all the necessary tasks 3 Install the DB2 fix pack 190 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm If you are running a non root installation and root based features are enabled you must rerun db2rfe command each time a fix pack is applied in order to re enable those features Details about non root installation see Chapter 2 Installation on page 25 Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 191 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 192 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm 5 IBM Data Studio IBM Data Studio is a comprehensive data management solution It empowers you to effectively design develop deploy and manage data databases and database applications throughout the data management life cycle utilizing a consistent and integrated user interface In this chapter
311. ee pages should be equal to or greater than used pages Temporary table space Total pages for the system temporary table TEMPSPACE1 by default space should be twice the amount of total pages for the system catalog table space If you are upgrading from Version 8 check the row size in your result sets If it is close to the maximum row length limit for your existing system temporary table spaces you might need to create a system temporary table space with a larger page size This is because DB2 Version 9 1 and Version 9 5 use larger record identifiers RID that increases the row size in the result sets from queries or positioned updates To check the size of your DMS table spaces use the following commands as instance owner db2 list database directory db2 connect to dbname db2 list tablespaces show detail To increase space in a DMS table space you can add additional containers or increase the size of your existing containers To increase space in a SMS table space you can free sufficient disk space on the corresponding file systems or increase the size of your file systems if you are using a volume manager gt Ensure that you have sufficient log file space prior to migration We recommend that you significantly increase the values of LOGFILSIZ LOGPRIMARY and LOGSECOND to prevent log file space from running out The amount of required space depends on your system setup Also on partitioned database environments you onl
312. em monitoring toolS 0 00 eee 406 TOA OP sce beter de iia see ace he bed aa sed ademas bane eos 406 TG2 VMStabi et aa Na de ba eee ee eek ae Oe ed dae eae 409 FOB AOSTA sca ic oe ee ka ete hades eee oe eee bee ee le 410 TGA Sie seek eRe Bake bee el a phd a Pade k ae Cee ee pa eae 412 7 6 5 Other system monitoring tools 00 0c eee eee 414 Chapter 8 Application development 0000 eee 417 8 1 Application configuration 0 0 0 00 ee ee 418 8 2 DB2 application objects 1 2 0 0 ee eee 420 8 2 1 TOIS esaeo et ea eee seedy beeen ee ewe ed Reed on eee eee 420 8 2 2 Use defined functions 2 0 2 0 ee ee 421 8 2 3 Stored procedures 1 0 0 cc eee eee 423 8 3 Programming languageS naaa aaaea 425 BSA Perlis ewes poe adi Sata ian a ba Heda be Pat 426 83 2 PHPictsie ie hae ee dai Ea a a atin owe Mang Mace eae 430 8 3 3 C C Fees nia i ead a aiie e bee tedden eeawtn Pak 432 vi Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899TOC fm 8 3 4 JWA cs decacndye derives bY ded aaer hee ede Reese DEERE eek 440 8 4 DUIEXMb er ee eeereler ay ee er eed eke ee rata Heed aks 446 8 4 1 Storage model 2 0 cee 446 8 4 2 Using XML data iso cran urrara EEr rE EWERAN EA 447 8 5 Application development tools 0 0 ee 453 8 5 1 Explain facility 2 0 0 eee 454 8 5 2 Design advisor 00 eee 457 8 5 3 Application development wi
313. en giving a brief summary of commands and the status of secure and cumulative modes nor Changes the number of processes to display You will be prompted to enter the number C oooi erne moo ree W Write current setup to toprc This is the recommended way to write a top configuration file Example 7 27 shows a interactive screen of top where some interactive commands are used For example press M to re order the processes list by resident memory usage by default it is ordered by process ID press c to Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 407 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm toggle full command line display and using n to control the number of tasks that will be displayed Example 7 27 Using top to monitor system resource usage top 16 58 23 up 9 days 16 12 6 users load average 0 05 0 04 0 01 Tasks 112 total 1 running 111 sleeping 0 stopped 0 zombie Cpu s 0 0 us O 2 sy 0 0 ni 99 2 id 0 7 wa 0 0 hi 0 0 si 0 0 st Mem 3842648k total 3558428k used 284220k free 274856k buffers Swap 8393920k total 6184k used 8387736k free 2884176k cached PID USER PR NI VIRT RES SHR S CPU MEM TIME COMMAND 1785 db2instl 25 0 1255m 152m 118m S 0 4 1 0 07 46 db2sysc 0 2928 db2fencl 15 0 522m 56m 33m S 0 1 5 0 00 40 db2fmp 0 0 0 0 0 2921 db2fencl 15 0 532m 55m 33m S 0 1 5 0 00 30 db2fmp 1 0 0 0 0 1783 root 16 0 980m 44m 25m S 0 1 2 0 00 09 db2wdog
314. ender is no longer supported gt Audio Image and Video AIV Extenders are no longer supported gt DB2_SCATTERED_IO registry variable is discontinued 4 1 3 Migration test consideration The entire migration process consists of two parts 1 Installing DB2 9 5 code and 2 Migrating instances and databases Installing DB2 9 5 does not require system down time Migrating instances and databases is the actual step which converts your DB2 system from Version 8 or 9 1 to Version 9 5 You need to stop DB2 to perform the instances and databases migration We recommend that you install and test Version 9 5 before migrating any Version 8 or Version 9 1 instances to Version 9 5 If you have a test environment which is a mimic of the production system you can install DB2 Version 9 5 migrate DB2 instances and databases test all your applications on the test system and then carry the same procedure to the production environment However if you have limited test environment or no test environment you can utilize the DB2 features to test your applications under the new version Since multiple versions of DB2 can coexist on Linux you can install DB2 9 5 while the application is still up and running under Version 8 or 9 1 You can then create Version 9 5 test instances and databases with a small amount of data to test your applications while production transactions are running When you are convinced to move your production systems up to Version 9
315. enter 3 Control Center Ho All Systems All Databases L J itsops views Aliases G Nicknames Cache Objects 5 Triggers Schemas G Indexes Table Spaces G Event Monitors Database partition groups G Buffer Pools 0 Application Objects eo User and Group Objects Federated Database Objects G XML Schema Repository SR O ITSOREPL O SAMPLE A TooiscatT Figure 6 23 Table context menu 280 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux dp Create New Tak In the Reorganize Indexes panel you can configure the REORG method and different options Figure 6 24 on page 281 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Figure 6 24 Reorganize Indexes panel Figure 6 25 shows you the generated commands Show Command CONNECT TO ITSODB REORG INDEXES ALL FOR TABLE DB2INST1 ITEM ALLOW WRITE ACCESS CONNECT RESET Figure 6 25 Generated REORG INDEX command You can reduce the need of index reorganization through a variety of means for example setting PCTFREE for indexes or enabling the online index defragmentation by setting MINPCTUSED Setting MINPCTUSED will trigger online index leaf page merging when specific conditions are matched This means it may reduce the likelihood of causing index page splits when future activities such as inserts happen on the table Statistics information collection The RUNSTATS option updates the statistics about the characteristics of a table and or associated indexes
316. erby Informix b b b b Connection URL details JDBC driver IBM Data Server Driver for JDBC and SQLJ ER orn re r Database ame o Host icant Port number woo 3X Hh O Use client authentication JDBC driver class oom ibm dbe jec DB2Driver opt IBM SDP70Shared plugins com ibm data Browse Connection URL jd bc db2 localhost 50000 SAMPLE retrieveMessagesFromServerOnGetMessage true User information User ID fateinstt X z Figure 8 14 Create connection panel in Data Studio 6899ch08 fm Then press Next At the schema selection panel At this panel you can specify what schemas are displayed in the Database Explorer We take the default Figure 8 15 on page 466 Chapter 8 Application development 465 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 New Data Development Project i a Specify Schema Filter Specify a filter by selecting a predicate and entering a value or by indicating whether to include or exclude a selection of items Expression Name Does not start with the characters v sys _ Selection _ Disable filter Finish Figure 8 15 Schema selection panel Now press Finish to create the connection and the project The newly created project DataProject is presented in the Data Project Explorer See Figure 8 16 Data Project Explorer X beg w DataProject SAMPLE jd b
317. ere anytime In Version 1 2 DSAC functions include gt Health and availability monitoring Problem determination and recommendations 72 hours of history Ability to monitor up to 100 databases gt Q Replication monitoring and administration For more detailed information refer to the following sources gt General information about Data Studio http www ibm com software data studio gt Online documentation of the Data Studio http publib boulder ibm com infocenter dstudio vlr1m0 index jsp gt For general information about the Eclipse platform http www eclipse org 5 2 Installation This section provides the procedures to install IBM Data Studio There are three methods by which you can install IBM Data Studio on Linux gt Installing from the Launchpad program gt Using the IBM Installation Manager graphical interface gt Installing silently that is response file installation 5 2 1 Installing IBM Data Studio You can download IBM Data Studio free of charge from http www ibm com software data studio In this section we show you how to install IBM Data Studio from an electronic image For installing Data Studio from other media refer to the Data Studio installation Guide The installation steps are as follows 196 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm 1 Review the Preinstallation tasks in the IBM Data Studio Installation Guide to
318. es cfg 0 mensa 0 1 gemini 0 Enabling ssh Configuring DB2 to use ssh as the remote shell utility 1 Configuring DB2 to use ssh Chapter 2 Installation 83 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm To set up DB2 to start with ssh support you must enable the DB2 registry variable DB2RSHCMD and point it to the path of the ssh command shell Example 2 29 shows the db2set command The default is for DB2 to use rsh therefore you only need to set this variable if you plan to use ssh Example 2 29 Enable DB2 to use ssh db2set DB2RSHCMD usr bin ssh 2 To verify ssh configuration in DB2 environment log on to each machine as the DB2 partitioned instance owning user ID and enter the commands as shown in Example 2 30 Example 2 30 Verify ssh configuration in DB2 environment ssh mensa echo hi ssh gemini echo hi db2_all echo hi db2_al db2_all echo hi These commands should complete successfully without prompting for additional verification Starting stopping instance manager to verify installation You can issue db2start command to verify installation now If all is well you can use the db2start db2stop commands to start or stop instance manager on primary machine or any participating machine Example 2 31 shows the output of the db2start db2stop commands on mensa Example 2 31 Using db2start db2stop to verify installation db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2start 02 07 2008 16 59 05 O 0
319. essage to file in INSTHOME sqllib redist lt dbmame gt lt part group gt lt time gt See Example 3 33 Example 3 33 Sample redistribution Data Redistribution Utility The following options have been specified Database partition group name SNG_01 Data Redistribution option U Redistribute database partition group uniformly No of partitions to be added 1 List of partitions to be added 2 No of partitions to be dropped 0 List of partitions to be dropped Delete will be done in parallel with the insert The execution of the Data Redistribution operation on Begun at Ended at Table poolID objectID 18 19 49 DB2INST1 PART1 4532 18 19 49 DB2INST1 PART1 4 2 All tables have been successfully redistributed 124 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Attention The redistribute utility issues SQL insert and delete operations therefore you should ensure that sufficient log space is available Redistributing is a very time consuming process and should be done when tables are not in use by applications DB2 packages which have a dependency on a table which was redistributed are set as invalid They will be automatically be rebound at the first SQL request but to save delay time rebind these packages manually with the rebind command Another recommendation is to update statistics by issuing the runstats table command and rebind affected pac
320. et this parameter to 3 or higher before migration Issue the following command db2 update dbm cfg using diaglevel 3 Disconnect all the connections in Version 8 or Version 9 1 databases a Stop the DB2 license service using db2licd end b Stop all command line processor sessions by issuing db2 terminate on each session window Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 171 6899ch04 fm 9 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm c Disconnect all applications and users For a list of all database connections enter the db2 list applications command You can disconnect applications and users by entering db2 force applications all If you use replication archive all of your DB2 log files using the archive log command This command closes and truncates the active log file for your database The command syntax is as follows db2 archive log for database lt database_alias gt user lt user_name gt using lt password gt 10 Back up databases We suggest you do a full offline backup from each local database You can use DB2_ALL command with the BACKUP DATABASE command to back up a database in a partitioned database environment See Chapter 6 Administering databases on page 223 for more details about this option and others ways to perform a back up If you are using raw devices for database logs or table space containers you have to change them to block devices a Ensure that backup taken at step 10 is successful
321. eter DBPARTITIONNUM lt number gt Important DB cfg parameters This section describes some important database configuration parameters and the recommended settings Some of the parameters are handled by STMM STMM is discussed in 3 6 DB2 configuration on page 128 gt AVG_APPLS Can be set to AUTOMATIC 136 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm This lets DB2 know how many concurrent applications run in your system in average When set to 1 DB2 gives every application all current available memory in the buffer pool Changing this parameter can have a huge impact in the performance gt CATALOGCACHE SZ This holds database table space table and index information in memory DB2 looks first in this cache when it prepares an execution of a plan Sufficient memory avoids cost intensive disk I O Check with db2 get snapshot for database on db_name and compute the hit ratio with 100 Catalog cache inserts X100 Catalog cache lookups gt MAXFILOP This is the number of files each application can open The default value is mostly too small Opening and closing files slows SQL response times and burns CPU cycles If files are being closed adjust the value of MAXFILOP until the opening and closing stops Use the command db2 get snapshot for database on db_name And look at Number of files closed f the value is more then 0 increase MAXFILOP value gt LOC
322. etting the value of the DATABASE_MEMORY database parameter to AUTOMATIC It is supported on RHEL5 and on SUSE 10 SP1 and newer All other validated Linux distributions will return to COMPUTED if the kernel does not support this feature Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 131 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 3 6 2 Database manager configuration parameters 132 The database manager configuration DBM cfg parameters are stored in a file named db2systm in INSTHOME sq11ib To modify these parameters use the graphical interface Control Center or use DB2 command line interface Important DBM cfg parameters Here are the important DBM cfg parameters gt DFTDBPATH By default it is set to INSTHOME We recommend that you set it to your desired path In a partitioned environment usually INSTHOME is on a NFS file system but DB2 does not support NFS for the database path DFT_MONSWITCHES Set all monitor switches to ON to let DB2 gather statistics data Use the get snapshot command to show details about the behavior of DB2 DIAGLEVEL For trouble determination set to 4 DB2 will write all errors warnings and informational messages to the db2diag 1og into the path defined by DIAGPATH The default is 3 Note that the log level 4 may have severe performance impacts MON_HEAP_SZ Can be set to AUTOMATIC The memory required for maintaining the private views of the database system monitor data is
323. eve the XML data as table db2instl puget gt db2 tf select_table sql ENTITYID name price Chapter 8 Application development 449 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 4 Shirt 3 99 2 record s selected Example 8 34 shows an enhanced XQuery example which retrieves an HTML list Example 8 34 XQuery example with a loop select_xq sql VALUES XMLSERIALIZE XMLQUERY lt yu gt for x in db2 fn xmlcolumn PRODUCT XDATA description name price lt 9 return lt 1i gt data x lt li gt lt ul gt AS CLOB 70 We use the function XMLSERIALIZE to convert the data into a CLOB The function XMLQUERY retrieves the result of the XQuery expression The result is shown in Example 8 35 Example 8 35 Result of XQuery example db2instl puget gt db2 tf select_xq sql lt ul gt lt 1i gt Jean lt 1i gt lt 1i gt Shirt lt 1i gt lt ul gt 1 record s selected As you can see XML is seamless integrated into DB2 You can convert between the relational and the XML structure The query in Example 8 34 on page 450 can be embedded into PHP very easily In Example 8 36 we retrieve relational data into an XML structure Example 8 36 Extract XML structure from a table extract_xml sql SELECT XMLELEMENT NAME employee XMLELEMENT NAME empno empno 450 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm XMLELEMENT NAME
324. eveloping DB2 applications In this section we cover the explain facility design advisor and applicaiton development using IBM Data Studio In addition to the development tools described in this section the following tools are also supported gt Rational Application Developer gt Microsoft Visual Studio Chapter 8 Application development 453 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Eclipse 3 2 Zend Framework PHP development Alphablox Blox Builder Ruby on Rails vvvy For demonstrating the explain facility and the design advisor we add a column EXPLTEST to the EMPMDC table in the SAMPLE database as shown in Example 8 41 on page 454 Example 8 41 Add a column to EMPMDC for testing EXPLAIN db2inst1 puget gt db2 alter table EMPMDC add column expltest character 20 DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully db2instl puget gt db2 update empmdc set expltest TEST where div 1 DB20000I1 The SQL command completed successfully db2instl puget gt db2 runstats on table db2inst2 empmdc and indexes all DB200001 The RUNSTATS command completed successfully This column is created without an index We populate it with sample data and perform a runstats so that the index statistics are up to date The new column is used to demonstrate the usage of explain and the design advisor As a second preparation step we create the explain tables running the script db2 tvf lt instance dir gt
325. ew package group Package Group Name Installation Directory IBM Software Development Platform fopt IBM SDP70 Package Group Name IBM Software Development Platform Installation Directory opt IBM SDP70 Browse Details Disk Space Information Shared Resources Directory opt IBM SDP 70Shared Volume Available Space t 916GB Figure 5 5 Package group IBM Data Studio is an Eclipse based application A version of Eclipse integrated development environment IDE is bundled in the installation package The next panel allows you to extend an existing version of Eclipse IDE instead of installing a new one See Figure 5 6 on page 201 200 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm Install Packages Select the check box only if you want the packages you are installing to extend an existing version of Eclipse Sa nstal License ccatior Feature immar Packages are bundled with a version of the Eclipse integrated development environment IDE or workbench Click Next for this default installation new one When you extend Eclipse the package functions are available in your Eclipse IDE but the package files are still installed in their own A However if you already have a compatible version of the Eclipse IDE on your system you can extend that version of Eclipse instead of installing a directory For more information see the install
326. eysign on SUSE cd usr 1ib64 ssh chown root root ssh keysign chmod 4755 usr libexec openssh ssh keysign Example 2 15 Fix permissions on ssh keysign on Red Hat cd usr libexec openssh chown root root ssh keysign chmod 4755 usr 1libexec openssh ssh keysign Chapter 2 Installation 55 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Setting up public key authentication Public key based authentication allows a single user ID in our case the DB2 instance owning ID in our partitioned database environment to log in as the same user ID on each partition server without being prompted for a password Since the home directory of DB2 partitioned instance owner is shared across all machines a pre requisite for DB2 partitioned database environment it is possible to complete the entire setup from a single machine The steps to set up public key authentication is as follows 1 Create ssh directory Log in as the DB2 partitioned instance owning user ID If this ID does not already have a ssh directory create one and ensure that the ssh directory does not allow group or other the write access At the same time ensure that your home directory does not allow group or other the write access ssh views this as a security exposure and will not allow public key based authentication if the directory permissions are not restrictive enough On our testing environment mensa the instance owning ID is db2inst1 and
327. f Partitioning Agents Rows Read 3000000 Rows Rejected 0 Rows Partitioned 3000000 Summary of LOAD Agents Number of rows read 3000000 Number of rows skipped 0 Number of rows loaded 3000000 Number of rows rejected 0 Number of rows deleted 0 Number of rows committed 3000000 db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 select dbpartitionnum itemid as Partitionnumber count as Counter from db2instl itemload group by dbpartitionnum itemid NODENUMBER COUNTER 0 1500364 1 1499636 2 record s selected As seen in Example 6 51 on page 306 the data were loaded into table itemload which is spread across two database partitions To verify the load result and distribution within the same example we use an SQL statement to count the number of rows distributed on different database partitions from the output of SQL execution we find that the rows are distributed to the database partitions evenly Note When the COPY NO option is specified for a recoverable database the table space will be placed in the backup pending state when the load operation begins This is to ensure that you can recreate your database with all the data because the load is not logged in the database log files Since we set up log archiving for our database and we did not specify COPY YES with the LOAD command the default COPY NO is used The table space of Chapter 6 Administering databases 307 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review
328. feature is enabled by default In DB2 9 5 further enhancements are provided including free unused space at the end of a table space set the maximum size for automatic storage database containers and support for multi partitioned environment gt Additional automatic configuration parameters There are more tuning parameters that the data server automatically handles without requiring you to stop and restart your instance or database gt Automated maintenance improvements You can use new DB2 stored procedures to configure and collect information about automated maintenance for the following areas Chapter 1 Introduction 5 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Maintenance windows Automatic backups Automatic table and index reorganizations Automatic table RUNSTATS operations The DB2 stored procedures for collect information are e SYSPROC AUTOMAINT_GET_POLICY e SYSPROC AUTOMAINT_GET_POLICYFILE To configure automated maintenance use e SYSPROC AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICY e SYSPROC AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICYFILE Trusted context A Trusted Context is a database object that describes a trust relationship between the database and an external entity such as a middle tier application server Trusted context provides greater control while using restricted sensitive privileges and allows middle tier servers or applications to assert the identity of the end user to the database server Self tuning memory alloc
329. fiers Project DataProject zj New Name EMPSALARY Language ava Java options Jaya package dteinsti Dynamic SAL using JDBC QO Static SAL using SQLJ Root package st 12735 SQLJ translator location home db2inst1 sqllib java sqlj zip Browse coo uate e _ Figure 8 23 Create a stored procedure Name and Language In SQL Statement panel we use all the default value as shown in Figure 8 24 Click Next 2 New Stored Procedure SQL Statements Create a new SAL statement or import an SAL statement that is saved in your project Statements Statement details Statement 2 SELECT EMPLOYEE EMPNO EMPLOYEE LASTNAME DEPARTMENT DEPTNO DEPARTMENT DEPTNAME FROM EMPLOYEE JOIN DEPARTMENT ON EMPLOYEE WORKDEPT DEPARTMENT DEPTNO WHERE EMPLOYEE SALARY lt 37000 Remove Create SQL Validate Import Show All Result set Pne Cej e Figure 8 24 Create a stored procedure SQL Statement Chapter 8 Application development 471 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm In Add Parameters panel Figure 8 25 we add an integer parameter with the name SALARY and leave the rest of values on the panel unchanged Press OK 23 Parameters AD Add Parameter Parameter mode In O Out O Inout Name SALARY SAL type INTEGER Length 5 Unit Byte Precision fo Scal
330. figuration parameters can be quickly and conveniently entered by using the command line processor Use GET DATABASE MANAGER CONFIGURATION to show current values Use UPDATE DATABASE MANAGER CONFIGURATIONUSING lt parameter gt to change current values Use RESET DATABASE MANAGER CONFIGURATION to reset all database manager parameters to their default values Use AUTOCONFIGURE to let DB2 determine the values Example 3 35 shows some examples of DBM parameter changes Example 3 35 Example for DBM configuration change db2 get dbm cfg db2 update dbm cfg using DFT_MON_BUFPOOL on automatic db2 get dbm cfg show detail db2 autoconfigure using mem_precent 60 apply db and dbm 3 6 3 Database configuration For allocation and control of system resources DB2 uses a separate configuration file for every database in a DB2 instance This file is named SQLDBCON and is stored in database_path DB2INSTANCE NODE0000 SQL00001 In partitioned environment the SQLDBCON exists in every database partition Therefore it is possible to have different settings for each partition To modify these database configuration DB cfg parameters use the Control Center or use the DB2 command line db2 update db cfg for lt database gt using lt parameter gt In a partitioned environment you have to issue this command on each partition The UPDATE DB CONFIG command applies to all partitions If you want to apply it on a particular partition please use the param
331. fm MSGMAX should be change to 64 KB that is 65536 bytes and MSGMNB should be increased to 65536 Modifying kernel parameters on SUSE and Red Hat In this example we explain how to update kernel parameters and set them after each reboot 1 Log in as root 2 Using a text editor add the following entries to etc sysctl conf Example shmmax for a 64 bit system kernel shmmax 1073741824 Example shmall for 90 percent of 16 GB memory The kernel requires this value as a number of pages kernel shmal 1 3774873 kernel sem 250 256000 32 1024 kernel msgmni 1024 kernel msgmax 65536 kernel msgmnb 65536 3 Load these entries into sysctl by using the following command sysctl p Now if you enter in command ipcs 1 you can see that the kernel parameters have been updated in sysctl To view all sysctl settings use the command sysctl a If you want to update kernel parameters for run time only use the sysctl w command For example to change kernel msgmni to 1024 enter the following command sysctl w kernel msgmni 1024 However these settings will not remain after the next reboot unless they are saved in the etc sysctl conf file 4 To make the changes effective after every reboot SUSE Linux Make boot sysctl active su root chkconfig boot sysctl boot sysctl off chkconfig boot sysctl on chkconfig boot sysctl boot sysctl on Red Hat The rc sysinit initialization script will read
332. form a COMMIT after every n records are imported With the COMMITCOUNT option if the import is interrupted for some reason the committed rows will remain in the target table despite the failure of the import procedure You can continue the import with the option INSERT with RESTARTCOUNT parameter to import the reset of data Another choice is to use the REPLACE or REPLACE_CREATE option The messages file is a convenient way of monitoring the progress of an import as you can access it during the import In the event of a failed import operation message files can be used to determine a restarting point by indicating the last row that was successfully imported Example 6 49 shows a part of the messages file during our import Example 6 49 Monitor IMPORT progress with the messages file db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt tail 10 itemimp msg SQL3222W COMMIT of any database changes was successful 302 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm SQL3221W Begin COMMIT WORK Input Record Count 2500000 SQL3222W COMMIT of any database changes was successful SQL3221W Begin COMMIT WORK Input Record Count 2600000 SQL3222W COMMIT of any database changes was successful Import table data using the Control Center Similar to EXPORT you also can use the DB2 Control Center to invoke the import utility Use these steps to perform import from the Control Center 1 From
333. g a response file using the sample response file You can create the response file manually by editing the templates provided The response files have a rsp extension and are located in the mnt dvd db2 inux samples or mnt dvd db2 inuxamd64 samples directory on the DB2 product DVD Where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the CD or DVD For example you can find a sample response file for DB2 Enterprise Server Edition in mnt dvd db2 linuxamd64 samples directory named db2ese rsp To create your own response file from the sample you must copy the sample response file to a local file system and edit it Activate items in the response file by removing the asterisk to the left of the keyword then overwrite the default setting with the new setting The range of possible settings is listed to the right of the equal sign Refer to the Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers GC23 5864 00 for guidance on configuring these parameters Your custom response file is what you make of it To give you an idea of the final product Example 2 25 shows a response file db2ese rsp generated by the DB2 Setup wizard Example 2 25 Sample response file db2ese rsp Generated response file used by the DB2 Setup wizard generation time 2 7 08 11 15 AM Product Installation LIC_AGREEMENT ACCEPT PROD ENTERPRISE_SERVER_EDITION FILE opt ibm db2 vV9 5 INSTALL_TYPE TYPICAL DAS_CONTACT_LIST LOCAL DAS_SMTP_SERVER smtp itsosj sanjose ibm
334. g focus to the Containers page of the Alter Table pace notebook Click OK to alter the table space Figure 7 23 Reviewing the required actions and taking action v On the Summary panel click Close to quit Recommendation Advisor utility Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 367 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm b Another way to get recommendations is using the DB2 CLP command GET RECOMMENDATIONS with specified health indicator The following command can be used to get recommendation details for our example db2 get recommendations for health indicator ts ts_util Then the details of recommendations associated with the specified health indicator will be shown You can get the indicator name from the Health Center where you define properties for the health indicator In general the name such as s ts_ util is listed in the Description field For details about the indicators refer to System Monitor Guide and Reference SC23 5865 00 6 Set up additional follow up actions There are situations when you need a proactive action plan for the error condition This can be accomplished by using a predefined script or task a To enable the predefined script or task on the Object Health Indicator Configuration panel Figure 7 12 on page 359 double click a specific health indicator The Configure Health Indicator panel is shown Figure 7 13 on page 360 select the Actions ta
335. get gt db2 CALL sqlj install_jar file lt path gt hello jar HELLOJAR DB20000I The CALL command completed successfully On 64 bit systems you have to use jdk64 instead of jdk32 Next we create a UDF in DB2 use this Java routine as shown in Example 8 23 Example 8 23 Create the UDF in DB2 CREATE FUNCTION hello VARCHAR 40 RETURNS VARCHAR 60 FENCED EXTERNAL NAME HELLOJAR hello hello NOT VARIANT NO SQL PARAMETER STYLE java LANGUAGE java NO EXTERNAL ACTION The external name references the jar file HELLOJAR which was registered by the call sqij install_jar The first hello refers to the class name and the second hello refers to the method name Now we can run the UDF as shown in Example 8 24 Example 8 24 Running the java UDF db2inst1 puget gt db2 select hello Java Guru from sysibm sysdummy1 Hello to Java Guru 1 record s selected When developing UDFs we recommend that you set the database manager parameter KEEPFENCED to NO so the UDF will be reload in each call For troubleshooting UDF check db2diag log for a Java stack trace Chapter 8 Application development 445 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 8 4 pureXML XML becomes more and more important for Web Java and J2EE development It is used to store configuration information or to exchange data in a system independent way DB2 has now implemented native XML support This section provides an overview over the XML capa
336. gives a description of DB2 architecture 1 3 1 Deployment topologies DB2 for Linux can be used with a wide range of applications whether they are developed in house or pre packaged The applications can be deployed with DB2 using a number of configurations which are gt Single tier In this configuration the application and the database reside on the same system In enterprise environments it may be rare to see such a configuration because remote access to a database server is typically required Nonetheless this is quite common for developing applications that can later be deployed transparently in a multi tier DB2 environment without any changes gt Client Server or 2 tier 10 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm The application and the database reside on separate systems The machines where the application runs typically have a DB2 client installed which communicates over the network to a database server For the application the physical location of the data is transparent The application communicates with the DB2 client using a standard interface for example ODBC and the DB2 client takes over the task of accessing the data over the network In some cases such as browser or Java based access it is not necessary to have the DB2 client running on the same machine where the application executes DB2 provides exceptional flexibility for mixing and matching client a
337. group and can be member of several more groups The database instance is more or less a dedicated user ID which runs all DB2 processes that are part of this instance It offers access from the network through a TCP IP port Security considerations for DB2 on Linux level are done based on that assumptions File System permissions When an instance is created DB2 places all DB2 under the home directory of the instance user ID These files have to be accessible by users who want to use this instance All further files you create such as table space containers transaction logs archive logs backups diagnostics log and so on do not need to be accessible by the users directly Therefore you can restrict their permission to only the instance user Many Linux systems have set the umask to 0022 by default that makes all newly created files readable by everyone If security is a concern you should consider to set it to 0027 for the instance user Fenced user ID UDFs and stored procedures can be configured so that they run under the fenced user ID to shield the UDFs from the core of the database manager So a crashing UDF cannot bring down the database manager It adds some communication overhead to the call of the UDF though Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 145 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm The use of fenced user IDs can serve also another purpose It allows them to run under a different user ID than
338. gt IBM Data Server Client This is a full installation client It includes all the components as well as graphical and non graphical tools for administering DB2 systems and developing applications with DB2 Add ins for Eclipse and Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 development environments are also included Use this client if you need database administration support and application development using an application programming interface API IBM Data Server Runtime Client The Runtime Client is a light weight non graphical client that provides the functionality required for your application to access DB2 servers It provides application support to run applications that use embedded SQL CLI JDBC SQLJ ODBC OLE DB NET and PHP interfaces Use this client if you need Command Line Processor CLP support and basic client functionality for application runtime and deployment support IBM Data Server Driver for ODBC CLI and NET 148 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm It is a light weight deployment solution for Windows applications Use it if you need runtime support for the DB2 CLI API ODBC API and NET API for Windows applications without the need of installing the Data Server Client or the Data Server Runtime Client The client selection depends on your application environment Only the IBM Data Server Client provides the BIND support All client versions are available
339. gure 3 27 Change registry from db2ca You will get to the panel shown in Figure 3 28 where you can change the registry variables BS DB2 Registry DB2ADMINSERVER dasusrl DB2SYSTEM wmsuse Instance DB2COMM tcpip Figure 3 28 Change registry variables Multi page allocation For system managed table spaces SMS we recommend that you enable multi page file allocation It reduces the time needed for formatting new pages To enable this parameter issue the command db2empfa for every database Exclusive access is needed because in existing table spaces all empty pages will be filled up to the last extent To check this issue the command db2 get db cfg for lt dbname gt grep Multi page Multi page file allocation enabled YES 144 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm In a multi partition environment issue db2empfa on every database partition 3 7 Security In this section we briefly discuss the security in DB2 We introduce security in Linux instance database and network levels For detail information on this subject refer to the following gt DB2 Security and Compliance Solutions for Linux UNIX and Windows SG24 7555 gt Database Security Guide SC23 5850 00 gt Information Center under Database fundamentals gt Security Security on Linux level On Linux level the security is managed in terms of users and groups A user has one primary
340. h improves performance and simplifies configuration and optimization Also simplifications to memory management eliminate most agent level configuration parameters and automate the rest gt Deployment improvements Deployment improvements simplify the process of installing and maintaining your DB2 data server Two previously manual steps required after applying fix packs the running of the db2iupdt and dasupdt commands are now automated In addition binding occurs automatically at the first connection Non root users can perform installing applying or rolling back fix packs configuring instances adding new features and uninstalling gt Easier management of partitioned database systems There is a single view of all database configuration elements across multiple partitions With this new functionality you can update or reset a database configuration across all database partitions by issuing a single SQL statement or a single administration command from any partition on which the database resides The BACKUP DATABASE command can now back up all partitions of a multi partition database at once with the same timestamp gt Automatic storage management enhancements Automatic storage automatically grows the size of your database across disk and file systems It eliminates the need to manage storage containers while taking advantage of the performance and flexibility of database managed space Starting DB2 9 1 this
341. have to replace the lt passwora gt Example 8 11 Embedded SQL program test_emb sqc EXEC SQL INCLUDE SQLCA include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt int main int argc char argv EXEC char char char char EXEC SQL BEGIN DECLARE SECTION empno 7 database 20 user 20 password 20 SQL END DECLARE SECTION strcpy database SAMPLE strcpy user db2inst1 strcpy password lt password gt EXEC SQL CONNECT TO database USER user USING password if sqica sqlcode 0 fprintf stderr Error connect d n sqlca sqlcode exit sqlca sqlcode EXEC SQL DECLARE EMP_CUR CURSOR FOR SELECT EMPNO FROM EMPLOYEE WHERE SALARY lt 36000 EXEC SQL OPEN EMP_CUR if sqlca sqlcode 0 fprintf stderr Error open cursor d n sqlca sqlcode exit sqlca sqlcode EXEC SQL FETCH EMP_CUR INTO empno if sqlca sqlcode 0 fprintf stderr Error fetch cursor d n sqlca sqlcode exit sqlca sqlcode while sqlca sqlcode 100 436 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm printf s n empno EXEC SQL FETCH EMP_CUR INTO empno if sqlca sqlcode 0 if sqlca sqlcode 100 fprintf stderr Error fetch cursor d n sqlca sqlcode exit sqlca sqlcode EXEC SQL CLOSE EMP_CUR if sqlca sqlcode 0 fprintf stderr Error close cursor d n sqlca sqlc
342. he Configuration Assistant The DAS supports the Control Center and Configuration Assistant when working on the following administration tasks gt Enabling remote administration of DB2 servers gt Providing the facility for job management including the ability to schedule the running of both DB2 and operating system command scripts gt Defining the scheduling of jobs viewing the results of completed jobs and performing other administrative tasks against jobs located either remotely or locally to the DAS using the Task Center gt Providing a means for discovering information about the configuration of DB2 instances databases and other DB2 administration servers in conjunction with the DB2 Discovery utility The DAS on Linux plus UNIX and Windows includes a scheduler to run tasks such as DB2 and operating system command scripts defined using the Task Center Task information includes commands to be run schedules notifications and completion actions associated with the task The run results are stored ina DB2 database called the Tools Catalog database The Tools Catalog database is created as part of the general setup If you did not create the Tools Catalog database when installing DB2 it can be created and activated through the Control Center or through the CLP using the CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command For information regarding how to create Tools Catalog in DB2 Control Center or using DB2 CLP commands refer to Appendix B DB2
343. he Configure Parameter option By selecting the Configure Parameter option in the Control Center the following window appears Figure 3 24 on page 140 After selecting a parameter a brief description of this parameter is displayed at the bottom under Hint Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 139 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Database Configuration ITSODB o x COUNTRY DATABASE_LEVEL Oxc0O DB_MEM_THRESH 10 E iii DFT_MTTB_TYPES S DFT _QUERYOPT 5i DFT_REFRESH_AGE 0 a E v Figure 3 24 Change database parameter After all desired changes are done press OK and all changes will be applied to the database Figure 3 25 he Database configuration settings were updated successfully Figure 3 25 Confirmation after update database configuration Using the Configuration Advisor option The Configuration Advisor is a smart tool that will help you configure your databases easily With the Configuration Advisor you can tune the database without a strong knowledge of DB2 Simply provide the advisor with the requested information about your system such as planned workload and 140 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm connection information and the wizard will give you a recommendation of what changes you should make Figure 3 26 shows the main window eB Configuration Advisor Figure 3 26 Configurat
344. he Red Hat and SUSE users only have to install and compile the DBD DB2 package More examples can be found under lt instance home gt sqllib samples perl Here are some good references for Perl application development on DB2 gt Everything you need to know about mod_perl technology http perl apache org docs 1 0 guide Chapter 8 Application development 429 6899ch08 fm 8 3 2 PHP Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Useful information about DBI http dbi perl org gt The IBM DB2 Perl database interface Web site http www ibm com software data db2 per1 Note More information about Perl development can be found in Developing Perl and PHP Applications SC23 5854 00 If your requirements call for a Web application consider using DB2 for Linux with PHP PHP Hypertext Preprocessor PHP excels when chosen to develop applications that need to be up and running very quickly without a large commitment of staff or budget resources You might use PHP to provide department access to DB2 data over the LAN through a Web browser or you can build an e commerce store which demands high transactional integrity on the Internet PHP is very flexible and can leverage your investment in DB2 in many innovative ways PHP overview PHP is a scripting language most often embedded in HTML documents and executed on the server before output is sent to the Web browser It can also be used as a command line tool outside of
345. he client db2inst1 user and merge it with the existing one We chose the scp command for convenience That allows the user db2inst1 to access the root owned X server We also set the DISPLAY to the same host and use the ampersand sign amp to run the command in the background By using method 2 only the user who uses the Xauthority file is allowed to access the X server If you connect from a remote client the steps for method 1 or method 2 could be adjusted accordingly However in that case it would be easier to use the ssh command as demonstrated in Example 3 3 Example 3 3 Use SSH for db2cc db2instl vmsuse gt ssh X db2inst1l puget Last login Thu Jan 31 16 55 09 2008 from 9 125 7 139 db2instl puget gt db2cc amp 1 28832 db2inst1 puget gt The option X instructs ssh to tunnel the X11 port to the local system set the DISPLAY correctly and to perform the Xauthority authentication If you have set up the SSH authentication properly you even do not need to provide a password If you come from a Windows system and you use Exceed or Cygwin as a local X server you can use putty The putty program has an option which allows X11 forwarding After you start the Control Center you are asked first to specify the view options See Figure 3 1 on page 92 Select Advanced In this chapter we provide our demonstrations in that view Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 91 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 200
346. he most recent events recorded are the furthest down the file Note The administration and diagnostic logs grow continuously When they get too large back them up and then erase the files A new set of files is generated automatically the next time they are required by the system Here we illustrate some examples on how to db2diag gt Run db2diag command without any option db2inst1 mensa gt db2diag If you use the db2diag command without any parameter the tool process the db2diag 1og file from the current directory and print it out to the screen If the file is not found in the current directory the directory set by the DIAGPATH variable is searched Observe the db2diag 1og file during runtime in a console mode To view the growth of the db2diag 1og file use db2diag f This displays all records written to the db2diag 1og up to now and the display continues until you press Ctrl C to stop it View logs in certain time interval To display all messages logged after timestamp 2008 02 14 10 00 inclusively db2diag t 2008 02 14 10 00 To put all entries between 2008 02 14 12 00 30 and 2008 02 14 at 3 PM to an output file called db2diag_082014noon log db2diag t 2008 02 14 12 00 30 2008 02 14 15 o db2diag_ 082014 log The format for the date and time is YYYY MM DD hh mm ss nnnnnn however you do not need to use the full time stamp To display the entries of the last three days db2diag H 3d View logs for a specific
347. he result of the deployment Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm a Properties Tasks Problems Error Log Model Report isieis ETT T ab 4 SAMPLE DB2INST1 EMPSALARY IN SALARY INTEGER V Messages Parameters Results Profiling Data EmpSalary sq FENCED THREADSAFE PARAMETER STYLE JAVA DB2INST1 EMPSALARY Create stored procedure completed DB2INST1 EMPSALARY Removed temporary working directory home db2inst1 IBM rationalsdp7 O workspace metadata plugins com ibm datatools db2 routines deploy ui bid 1202419779153 DB2INST1 EMPSALARY Deploy for debug successful Figure 8 35 Output of the deployment action Now the code is deployed on the server The procedure is ready to be run In the Data Project Explorer right click EMPSALARY from DataProject gt Stored Procedures gt EMPSALARY and select Run as shown in Figure 8 36 on page 477 SOL Serips gt gt EmpSalary sq Stored Procedures CI XML Schd G Bun Figure 8 36 Run the procedure You will be asked for the parameter as shown in Figure 8 37 Enter the value 37000 Chapter 8 Application development 477 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 23 Specify Parameter Values EMPSALARY _ Specify the parameter values that you want to use for running or debugging the stored procedure You can set selected strings or user defined types to
348. he steps to convert a non Unicode database to a Unicode database using db2move You can find more detail about how db2move works in 6 3 4 Using db2move utility on page 330 1 Export data using db2move command to a directory with enough space db2move ITSO export 2 Generate a DDL script for your existing database using the db2look command db2look d itso e o unicode ddl 1 x f 3 Create a Unicode database this is default in DB2 9 5 db2 create database unidb automatic storage yes on database db2inst1 collate using SYSTEM_819_BR 4 Edit DDL script unicode ddl created by db21ook for the new DB name Replace all occurrences of the database name to the new Unicode database name For example change connect to itso to connect to unidb Increase the column lengths for character columns in your tables that is because characters converted to Unicode could be expanded If you want to keep your existing database you must also change the file name specification for table spaces in the unicode ddl file Otherwise you can drop the existing database and use the same table space files 5 Recreate the database structure by running the edited DDL script db2 tvf unicode dd 6 Import data into the new Unicode database using the db2move command db2move unidb import Note The maximum LOB column size db2move moves is 32 KB DB2move will truncate LOB over 32 KB Example 4 18 shows a conversion from
349. her servers lending itself to virtually unlimited scalability This is one reason DB2 for Linux can support up to 1000 partitions And because there is no coordination overhead for accessing resources additional machines can easily be added to the cluster with linearly scalable performance which implies if doubling of the data volume is matched by the doubling of the cluster resources the high performance of the database will be maintained at the same level If one partition in a cluster fails its resources can dynamically be transferred to another machine ensuring high availability Another benefit of the shared nothing approach used by DB2 for Linux is that it does not require specialized hardware making the solution much simpler less expensive and suitable for Linux based commodity hardware High Speed Interconnect Figure 1 6 Shared nothing architecture 1 4 3 Partitioned database DB2 exploits the power of Linux clusters by employing database partitioning Ina partitioned environment a database is distributed across multiple partitions usually residing on different machines Each partition is responsible for a portion of a database s total data A database partition is sometimes also called a node or a database node Because data is divided across database partitions you can use the power of multiple processors on multiple physical nodes to satisfy requests for information Data retrieval and update requests a
350. hoc reports On such a system the transactions are not known very well because users are theoretically able to execute any query The availability of this warehouse can be lower than the one from the production system The data model can be normalized at the same level as the production system or can already be a little bit denormalized It depends on the needs The data marts are very specialized data warehouses They are designed to run a quite well defined set of reports The data is mostly denormalized and transformed into a CUBE or into star schemas Cubes and star schemas are data models designed to support the queries running on these systems You have ETL Export Transform Load processes to transfer the data from the production system to the data marts on a regular base That can be done by Chapter 1 Introduction 13 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm tools like WebSphere DataStage or WebSphere QualityStage The availability of a data mart is usually lower than for the production systems 1 3 2 DB2 database objects In this section we introduce some DB2 objects and their relationship to each other Instances An instance sometimes called a database manager is DB2 code that manages data It controls what can be done to the data and manages system resources assigned to it Each instance is a complete environment It contains all the database partitions defined for a given parallel database system An
351. hosts file for DSA encryption cd etc ssh ssh keyscan t dsa mensa mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 90 gt gt ssh_known_hosts ssh keyscan t dsa gemini gemini itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 94 gt gt ssh_known_hosts Restart the ssh daemon etc init d sshd restart 54 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm SSH client configuration Perform the following steps to configure SSH client 1 Edit the etc ssh ssh_config file Change the line HostbasedAuthentication from no to yes as shown in Example 2 12 Example 2 12 Edit the ssh_config file HostbasedAuthentication no HostbasedAuthentication yes Note that the ssh server configuration file is sshd_config Add a line to the ssh_config file to tell the ssh client to use the ssh keysign utility to read the host s private key as shown in Example 2 13 Example 2 13 Add a line to the ssh_config file EnableSSHKeysign yes Ensure ssh keysign is a suid root executable Check ssh keysign setting On SUSE ls 1 usr 1ib64 ssh ssh keysign rwsr xr x 1 root root 173952 2007 05 18 03 55 usr lib64 ssh ssh keysign On Red Hat ls 1 usr libexec openssh ssh keysign rwsr xr x 1 root root 175424 Jul 13 2007 usr libexec openssh ssh keysign If the permissions and owner do not resemble the sample output above then fix the permissions as shown in Example 2 14 and Example 2 15 Example 2 14 Fix permissions on ssh k
352. hown in Figure 8 20 2 Save As Save As Save file to another location Enter or select the parent folder DataProject he j Eile name Empsalary sal e Figure 8 20 Save query in data project The query shows up in the Data Project Explorer under the SQL Scripts folder The query can be tested by right clicking on EmpSalary sql and select Run SQL The result is presented in the Data Output view as shown in Figure 8 21 on page 470 Chapter 8 Application development 469 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm a Properties Tasks Problems Error Log Model Report RIAs E ete snap Bookmarks EmpSalary sq EmpSalary sql F Messages Parameters Results Profiling Data EMPNO LASTNAME DEPTNO DEPTNAME 00280 SCHNEIDER E11 OPERATIONS SPRINGER E11 OPERATIONS SETRIGHT E11 OPERATIONS PARKER E11 OPERATIONS WONG E21 SOFTWARE SUPPORT ALONZO E21 SOFTWARE SUPPORT Figure 8 21 Data Output view The Data Studio allows you to easily create and run queries However you are not limited to the graphical way to create queries You can also enter the SQL statement as text directly When creating your query manually you can get help using Content Assist Figure 8 22 which can be invoked by pressing the shortcut Ctrl Space or right clicking on the query and selecting Content Assist i fj EmpSalary sq X m Outline x IE2INSTL DEPARTMENT D
353. iate buffer pool is available in all circumstances 3 With Version 9 5 the p option which lists private agent memory heaps of the db2mtrk command is deprecated and has been replaced with the a option which lists all application memory consumption 378 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm For a detailed explanation about command parameters and a field description of the output of db2mirk refer to Command Reference SC23 5846 00 7 3 db2top The db2top monitoring utility also known as IBM single system monitor view for DB2 monitors a DB2 environment on Linux platforms quickly and efficiently At the time of writing this book the db2top version is 2 0 and the information about db2top is available on IBM AlphaWorks Web site http www alphaworks ibm com tech db2top You can download the zipped file for db2top db2top 2 0 bin zip from following Web site http www alphaworks ibm com tech db2top download 7 3 1 db2top installation Use these steps to install db2top 1 Unzip db2top 2 0 bin zip The directory content of the unzipped file looks like 2007 06 06 22 13 202 153 db2top User Manual pdf 2007 06 07 00 00 2 995 973 db2top 2 0 bin tar gz 2007 07 19 14 43 lt DIR gt license 2007 06 06 21 11 lt DIR gt man 2007 06 06 21 13 lt DIR gt samples The db2top User Manual pdf is the user manual and the db2top 2 0 bin tar gz contains executable files for al
354. ications written by application developers This information can be very beneficial to the database administrators for resolving database or system related problems quickly and easily For the Linux platform the notify log is a text file located in the directory specified by the database manager configuration parameter DIAGPATH7 This also is the directory where db2diag log resides The name for notify log is lt instance owner gt nfy For example db2home db2inst1 sqllib db2dump db2inst1 nfy here the instance owner is db2inst1 and DIAGPATH is db2home db2inst1 sqllib db2dump The Database manager parameter NOTIFYLEVEL can be utilized to specify the type of administration notification messages that are written into the administration notification log Valid values for this parameter are 2 You may consider to change DIAGPATH to a directory on other file system than instance home s Then the file system full problem of the diagnostic data directory will not impact your instance home Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 389 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 0 No administration notification messages captured This setting is no recommended 1 Fatal or unrecoverable errors Only fatal and unrecoverable errors are logged 2 Immediate action required Conditions are logged that require immediate attention from the system administrator or the database administrator This level will capture hea
355. ieweck oh doled Soe ee he Sed ead ee belek wees iii The team that wrote this book 6 00 eee eee iii Acknowledgements 000 cece eae v Become a published author 0 0 0 0 cee tee vi Comments welcome 000 eaae vi Summary of changes 000 cece tees iii April 2008 First Edition sassari iaai aa wd a a a do eee iii Chapter 1 Introduction a n ee 1 1 1 OVEIVIOW i 5 owl ddaa niet bak Gein neha ee Lb heed tad ed 2 1 2 DB2 for Linux features and offerings 0 0 e eee eee 3 1 2 1 F atureS wit ciate ieee berea dea neta kenn a eaa 3 1 2 2 Supported platforms 0 000 cee 6 1 2 3 DB2 products and packagesS 0 cece eee eee 7 1 3 DB2 environment 0 0 eee 10 1 3 1 Deployment topologies 2 0 ee eee 10 1 3 2 DB2 database objects 0 0 eee eee 14 1 4 Parallelism with DB2 0 0 0 eee 16 1 4 1 SMP environments 0 0000 e eee ee 16 1 4 2 Database clusters 0 0 cee eee 17 1 4 3 Partitioned database 1 ee 19 Chapter 2 Installation 0 000 00 c eee 25 2 1 Basic requirements 0 0 000 eee 26 2 1 1 Hardware supported by DB2 00 2 ee 26 2 1 2 Linux distributions supported by DB2 006 26 2 1 3 Required disk spaces 0 cee eee ee 27 2 1 4 Memory requirements 2 00 00 cee ee 28 2 1 5 Communication requirements 0000 0c eee eee eee 29 2 1 6
356. ights reserved 417 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 8 1 Application configuration DB2 supports local and remote application development that provides the flexibility in application design Figure 8 1 illustrates threedifferent database connection configurations Scenario 1 Application and database server Application SA Scenario 2 Application server Application Locally cataloged DB2 for the remote database Scenario 3 Application server Application SA Database server SA Database server Figure 8 1 Connection scenarios for applications gt Scenario 1 A local client connects to a local database This configuration requires a locally installed database server In this scenario the application and the database run on the same server This is useful for small systems or for test and development systems gt Scenario 2 A local client connects to a remote database by using a locally cataloged node This configuration requires only a locally installed DB2 client The database is hosted on another system that has a DB2 data server installed After cataloging the database node the remote database looks like a local database from the application point of view gt Scenario 3 A local client connects to a remote database directly This configuration does not require any DB2 software install
357. ike another file system or TSM If both LOGARCHMETH1 and LOGARCHMETH2 are specified each log file is archived twice This means that you will have two copies of archived log files in two different locations gt ARCHRETRYDELAY NUMARCHRETRY and FAILARCHPATH It may be possible that the log archive method specified fails such as the archive file system full or the TSM server is not available In such a case DB2 will retry the archive after the time specified by the ARCHRETRYDELAY 230 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm parameter NUMARCHRETRY specifies the number of attempts that will be made to archive the log files before they are archived to the path specified by the FAILARCHPATH configuration parameter FAILARCHPATH is a temporary storage area for the log files until the log archive method that failed becomes available again at which time the log files will be moved from this directory to the log archive method By moving the log files to this temporary location log directory full situations might be avoided This parameter must be a fully qualified existing directory The log files are critical for database recovery You should manage the log files and the log space carefully Note To monitor the current log file usage for a running database use the GET SNAPSHOT command or the LOG_UTILIZATION administrative view as follows db2 SELECT FROM SYSIBMADM LOG_UTILIZATION
358. il 17 2008 2 10 pm DAS user DAS_USERNAME dasusrl DAS_UID 1003 DAS_GROUP_NAME dasadml DAS_HOME_DIRECTORY home dasusr1 Installed Languages INSTALL_TSAMP YES Use db2setup command with r option to install DB2 using the response file on the remaining machines in the cluster For example 1 Log in primary machine as instance owner In our sample log in mensa as db2inst1 2 Issue db2stop command to stop DB2 instance db2stop force 3 Remove sqlllib directory rm rf sqllib 4 Log in other machine as root In our sample log in gemini as root 5 Transfer the db2ese_mpp_addpart rsp file from the primary machine and place it on the root directory 6 Mount DB2 product DVD 7 Run db2setup command for example mnt dvd db2setup r root db2ese_mpp_addpart rsp where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the DVD After installation has finished check the installation log tmp db2setup log to ensure that no errors have occurred 8 Copy instance related TCPIP service entries in etc services file on primary machine to etc services file on current server In our sample add following entries in etc services on gemini db2c_db2inst1 50001 tcp DB2_db2inst1 60000 tcp DB2_db2inst1_1 60001 tcp DB2_db2inst1_2 60002 tcp DB2_db2inst1_END 60003 tcp 9 Issue following command to create physical node on current server 82 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 689
359. in a partitioned database environment for example gt PART_FILE_LOCATION The fully qualified location of the partitioned files gt OUTPUT_DBPARTNUMS A list of partition numbers which represent the database partitions on which the load operation is to be performed gt PARTITIONING_DBPARTNUMS A list of partition numbers that will be used in the partitioning process gt MODE The mode in which the load operation will take place when loading a partitioned database such as PARTITION_AND_LOAD PARTITION_ONLY LOAD_ONLY and so on gt PARTITIONED DB CONFIG Allows you to specify partitioned database specific configuration options in a LOAD command Example 6 54 demonstrates how to use the PARTITIONED DB CONFIG parameter to specify partitioned database specific options for LOAD With the PARTITION_ONLY option the data are distributed to each database partition but not loaded The output is written to files in the specified location on each of the database partitions The data can then be loaded at later time We load the data from the files into the table ITEM using the LOAD_ONLY mode Example 6 54 Using PARTITIONED DB CONFIG parameter in LOAD command db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load from item del of del replace into jtemload partitioned db config mode partition_only part_file_location db2backup datamove load partitioning _dbpartnums 0 1 Agent Type Node SQL Code Result LOAD_TO_ FILE 000 00000000 Success
360. in administrative routines administrative views provide an easy to use programmatic interface for performing a variety of DB2 administrative tasks These routines and views can be invoked from an SQL based application a DB2 command line or a command script To configure automatic backup using the AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICY system stored procedure you have to create an XML configuration input specifying details like backup media whether the backup should be online or offline and frequency of the backup The AUTOMAINT SET POLICY stored procedure takes two input parameters gt Maintenance type AUTO_BACKUP AUTO_REORG AUTO_RUNSTATS or MAINTENANCE_WINDOW gt Configuration A BLOB type argument or an XML file specifying the configuration in XML format The procedure AUTOMAINT GET POLICYFILE allows you to obtain details on the policies in XML format The XML file can be edited as needed and the changes are re imported by using the AUTOMAINT SET POLICYFILE stored procedure In Example 6 20 we obtain the current settings from the database edit the file to define the duration to four hours and set settings for the database Example 6 20 Change maintenance window db2instl mensa gt db2 call AUTOMAINT_GET_POLICYFILE MAINTENANCE_WINDOW window xml db2inst1l mensa gt cat db2home db2inst1 sql1ib tmp window xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt DB2MaintenanceWindows xmlns http www ibm com xmlns prod db
361. in the Information Center in Database fundamentals SQL Statements gt CREATE FUNCTION and in SQL Reference Volume 2 SC10 4250 Example 8 3 creates an SQL UDF called salary_diff which receives an employee ID as input and calculates the difference between the old and new salary values from the EMPLOYEE_HIST which is populated through our trigger see Example 8 1 on page 420 To get the detailed information from the EMPLOYEE table with history data stored in EMPLOYEE_HIST we can join EMPLOYEE and EMPLOYEE_HIST to calculate the column salary_diff or we can use an UDF to perform the function Example 8 3 UDF to calculate salary difference from audit table CONNECT TO sample CREATE FUNCTION salary_diff emp CHAR 6 RETURNS DECIMAL 9 2 LANGUAGE SQL READS SQL DATA NO EXTERNAL ACTION DETERMINISTIC RETURN SELECT salary_new salary_old AS salary_diff FROM employee_hist h employee o WHERE h empno emp AND h empno o empno AND h chg_date SELECT MAX chg_date FROM employee_hist WHERE empno h empno Note The statement SELECT MAX chg_date is required because for each empno there can exist more than one row in EMPLOYEE_HIST table but a UDF can return only one row In Example 8 4 on page 423 we can use the newly created function salary_diff in our query 422 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm Example 8 4 Use the UDF in a select statement db2inst1
362. info for the fenced user This user is responsible for executing fenced user defined functions such as UDFs and stored procedures Once again note the home directory location We recommend that you change the fenced user home directory to a DB2 specific directory such as db2home 15 On the Prepare the DB2 tools catalog window accept default option Do not prepare the DB2 tools catalog and click Next 16 Set up notifications Figure 2 12 on page 70 If you choose Set up your DB2 server to send notifications specify a Notification SMTP server here then click Next Chapter 2 Installation 69 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm smtp itsosj sanjose im com fanaa 052 saree Figure 2 12 Root installation Set up notifications 17 On Specify a contact for health monitor notification window Figure 2 13 on page 71 you can add Administration contact for this instance then click Next By default a health monitor runs on the DB2 instance you are setting up The DB2 health monitor will send a notification e mail to this person at the specified mail address when a health indicator threshold is reached If you check off Address is for a pager the notification message will be sent to the contact s pager Note If you choose Defer this task until after installation is complete you can specify contacts after installation using the Task Center 70 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review Ap
363. ing and troubleshooting DB2 373 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Normal Total pages 2560 Useable pages 2528 Used pages 1184 Free pages 1344 High water mark pages 1184 Page size bytes 8192 Extent size pages 32 Prefetch size pages 32 Number of containers 1 Minimum recovery time 2008 02 21 22 46 03 000000 DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table Spaces on the current node are listed gemini db2 list tablespaces completed ok After corrective actions taking effect the health indicator returns to the normal state and keep monitoring the system 7 2 Memory Visualizer and Memory Tracker In this section we discuss two memory monitoring tools Memory Visualizer and Memory Tracker Memory Visualizer The Memory Visualizer can assist you in monitoring memory utilization for a DB2 instance It uses visual displays and plotted graphs to help you understand memory components and their relationships to each other and helps you uncover and fix memory related problems on a DB2 instance You can start Memory Visualizer in the Control Center by right clicking an instance and selecting View memory usage To start the Memory Visualizer from the command line issue the db2memvis command The Memory Visualizer panel appears as shown in Figure 7 28 374 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm ry
364. ing empno Double salary public class test_sqlj public static void main String args throws ClassNotFoundException try Class forName com ibm db2 jcc DB2Driver Connection con DriverManager getConnection jdbc db2 localhost lt port gt SAMPLE db2instl lt password gt EzSqljCtx ctx new EzSqljCtx con 442 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm EzSqljNameIter iter sql ctx iter select empno salary from employee where salary lt 36000 order by lastname while iter next System out printIn iter empno iter salary iter close ctx close catch SQLException e System out printIn e getMessage nSQLCode e getErrorCode SQLState e getSQLState catch ClassNotFoundException e System out printIn e getMessage Example 8 20 shows how to compile and run the SQLJ program Example 8 20 Compile and run an SQLJ program db2inst1 puget gt DB2JAVA home db2inst1 sqllib java db2inst1 puget gt export PATH DB2JAVA jdk32 bin PATH db2instl puget gt sqlj test_sqlj sqlj db2inst1 puget gt db2sqljcustomize url jdbc db2 localhost lt port gt SAMPLE user db2instl password lt password gt test_sqlj_SJProfile0d ser jcc sqlj icc sqlj Begin Customization icc sqlj Loading profile test_sqlj_SJProfiled icc sqlj Customization complete for profile test_sqlj_SJPr
365. ing user For example we enter in opt ibm db2 V9 5 instance db2icrt u db2fencl db2inst1 Create links for DB2 files optional If you are developing or running applications you may want to create links for the DB2 files to the usr lib directory and for the include files to the usr include directory This will avoid having to specify the full path to the product libraries and include files If you create links on one version of DB2 the links on the other version will be overwritten Chapter 2 Installation 75 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm To create links 1 2 Log in as root Enter the following command opt ibm db2 v9 5 cfg db21n Assume that DB2 is installed to the default installation directory Note If multiple versions or copies of DB2 co exist we recommend that you do not use db21n command to create links for DB2 files Consider using db2rmln command from a DB2 version or a copy to remove existing links Configure TCP IP for the DB2 instance You must configure your instance with the TCP IP protocol in order for it to accept requests from remote DB2 clients Follow these steps 1 Update the etc services file to specify the service name and port number that the DB2 server will listen on for client requests To update the etc services file use a text editor to add a connection entry For example we added db2c_db2inst1l 50001 tcp DB2 connection service port Where
366. intra partition parallelism A value of 1 or ANY means the optimizer determines the degree of intra partition parallelism based on the number of processors and the type of query On OLTP systems you should turn intra partition parallelism off On OLAP systems you should consider to turn it on so that large queries can take advantage of several CPUs in a multiprocessor system Note For a complete and detailed description of all the Database configuration parameters refer to the Information Center at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21 uw v9r5 index jsp topic com ib m db2 1luw admin config doc doc c0004555 html Monitor and update DB configuration Configuring DB2 database settings can be done either through the Control Center or the DB2 Command line Control Center Use these steps to update database configuration parameters gt Start the Control Center and expand the tree up to the desired database gt Right click on it to open the pop up window and choose Configure Parameters Figure 3 23 on page 139 138 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm config Figure 3 23 Change database parameter from the Control Center There are two options to modify database configuration parameters gt Configure Parameters Use this option to change specific parameters gt Configuration Advisor This option is comparable with the autoconfigure command Using t
367. ion We discuss Migration planning Migrating multi partitioned database Migrating single partitioned database Post migration tasks Client and server compatibility Fix pack installation vvvvvy For complete information about migrating a DB2 server and other components such as clients and applications in your DB2 environment refer to the DB2 Information Center at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21 uw v9r5 index jsp topic com ibm d b2 uw qb migration doc doc c0023662 htm1 DB2 also provides migration tools and services from other databases such as Oracle and Microsoft SQL Server For further information refer to this Web site http www ibm com db2 migration Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 163 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 4 1 Migration planning Prior to installing DB2 9 5 it is essential that you prepare your system and databases for the migration Additional table space and log space is required for migration as well as a recovery plan in case of failure This section discusses migration requirements Figure 4 1 illustrate the migration roadmap You have to consider the entire DB2 environment to determine an optimal migration strategy ad Migrate DB2 servers t Migrate clients Test application and routines Successful Not successful Migrate applications and routines Are DB2 servers and c
368. ion advisor main window After finishing all sections the wizard gives you suggestions of what to change At the end you have a choice to apply the change immediately or save the SQL to run later Any parameter can require a reactivation of the database Command line Commands to change the settings can be quickly and conveniently entered by using the command line processor Use GET DATABASE CONFIGURATION FOR lt db_name gt to show current values Use UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION FOR db_name USING lt parameter gt to change current values Use RESET DATABASE CONFIGURATION FOR db_name to reset all database parameters to their default values Example 3 36 on page 142 shows database configuration update command examples Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 141 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 3 36 Examples for the database configuration change db2 get db cfg for itsodb db2 update db cfg for itsodb using DBHEAP 1200 db2 get db cfg for itsodb show detail 3 6 4 DB2 registry and environment variables All configuration settings in DB2 are stored as either environment variables or registry variables On UNIX based systems all environment variables such as DBZ INSTANCE DB2NODE DB2PATH and DB2INSTPROF are set using the export command Usually in file db2profile located in INSTHOME sq 1ib Registry variables are set through the db2set command and require a DB2 restart If a registry vari
369. ips Example 2 22 Gather the DSA public keys ssh keyscan t dsa mensa mensa itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 90 gt gt ssh known_hosts ssh keyscan t dsa gemini gemini itsosj sanjose ibm com 9 43 86 94 gt gt ssh known_hosts Verify ssh configuration To verify ssh configuration log onto each machine as the DB2 partitioned instance owning user ID and type following commands as shown in Example 2 23 Example 2 23 Verify ssh configuration ssh mensa echo hi ssh gemini echo hi These commands should complete successfully without prompting for additional verification 2 3 Installing DB2 In this section we explain how to install DB2 using the DB2 Setup db2_ install and response file installation methods The following topics are covered Non root installation Root installation Installing a DB2 license files Installing DB2 documentation Adding an additional partition YYYY Y Note With DB2 Version 9 and later DB2 license files are shipped separately You have to install DB2 license files for each DB2 copy no matter which installation method you choose See 2 3 4 Installing DB2 license files on page 84 2 3 1 Non root installation For non root installation you can use one of the following methods to install single partition database environments 58 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm gt DB2 Setup wizard gt Response file installati
370. irst one is a regular table space that is used to store the tasks related tables and the second one is a temporary table space In addition a new buffer pool named BP32K0000 is created with a page size of 32K You need to recycle the database manager to have all the new changes take effect Before you stop the instance if you use LIST APPLICATIONS command you may find that some applications are connected to the Tools Catalog Database with the application name db2dastm as shown in Example B 5 Example B 5 Applications connected to Tools Catalog Database db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 list applications Auth Id Application Appl Application Id DB of Name Handle Name Agents DBZINST1 db2dasstm 271 NO db2inst1 080128234908 TOOLSCAT 1 To restart the database manager you may use DB2STOP with FORCE option see the following steps as the instance owner here db2inst1 1 db2set all grep ADMINSERVER to get the name of the DAS user here dasusr1 2 db2home dasusr1 das bin db2admin stop 3 db2stop force force may be required if other applications are still connected 4 db2start 5 db2home dasusr1 das bin db2admin start At this point in time the Tools Catalog is ready to use You can now start defining schedules using the Task Center Appendix B DB2 Tools Catalog creation 493 6899ax02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 494 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6
371. is number can now be used to create the table space CREATE TABLE SPACE dms1 MANAGED BY DATABASE USING DEVICE dev sdb5 52216 Example 3 5 shows the result Example 3 5 List table space container for a raw device db2instl puget gt db2 list tablespace containers for 3 show detail Table Space Containers for Table Space 3 Container ID 0 Name dev sdb5 Type Disk Total pages 52216 Useable pages 52160 Yes Accessible If you create your table space with a size which smaller than the highest possible one for that device you will see a message in the file db2diag log as shown in Example 3 6 Example 3 6 db2diag log message if table space is too small 2008 02 11 11 07 25 876502 480 E288662G688 LEVEL Warning PID 4185 TID 2976902048 PROC db2sysc 0 INSTANCE db2inst1 NODE 000 DB ITSODB APPHDL 0 21 APPID LOCAL db2inst1 080211185714 AUTHID DB2INST1 EDUID 25 EDUNAME db2agent ITSODB 0 FUNCTION DB2 UDB buffer pool services sqlbDMSAddContainerRequest probe 105 MESSAGE ADM6037W Container dev sdb5 was created to be 208840 KB in size on a device that is 208864 KB in size Extra storage will be wasted The container can be extended to use the wasted space by using ALTER TABLE SPACE Chapter 3 Post installationtasks 99 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Automatic storage for databases Automatic storage is a new feature introduced in DB2 9 1 It simplifies st
372. ist 396 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm db2diag h brief displays help for all options without examples db2diag h examples displays a few typical examples to get started db2diag h tutorial displays more advanced examples covering all features db2diag h notes displays usage notes and restrictions that apply db2diag h all displays help in the most complete form with detailed information about all options and usage examples More information can be find in Troubleshooting Guide Gl11 7857 00 and Command Reference SC23 5846 00 7 5 2 db2pd The db2pd tool can be used for monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 problems It collects information from the DB2 database system memory sets without acquiring any latches or using any engine resources and returns the result very fast If you use the db2pd command without any option db2pd starts in interactive mode and you can enter options You also can run db2pd with option directly Both are shown in Example 7 19 Example 7 19 db2pd command prompt db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2pd db2pd gt You are running db2pd in interactive mode db2pd gt If you want command line mode rerun db2pd with valid options db2pd gt Type h or help for help db2pd gt Type q to quit db2pd gt memsets Database Partition 0 Active Up 0 days 23 19 41 Memory Sets Name Address Id Size Kb Key DBP Type
373. istics are calculated and ALLOW WRITE ACCESS specifies that other users can read from and write to the table while statistics are calculated Note Because reorganizing a table usually takes more time than running statistics you might execute RUNSTATS to refresh the current statistics for your data and rebind your applications If refreshed statistics do not improve performance then reorganization may help The RUNSTATS utility is also available in the DB2 Control Center as seen in Figure 6 26 on page 283 282 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Control Center 2 control Center E All Systems O All Databases S F itsops Berane G Views Aliases E Nicknames Cache Objects 5 Triggers Schemas 5 Indexes 5 Table Spaces O Event Monitors Database partition groups G Buffer Pools G Application Objects G User and Group Objects G Federated Database Objects XML Schema Repository SR H O ITSOREPL E O SAMPLE A TooscaT Figure 6 26 Table context menu In the Run Statistics panel you can select different options for the RUNSTATS command Figure 6 27 on page 284 Chapter 6 Administering databases 283 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Run Statistics ITEM m Figure 6 27 Run Statistics panel You can schedule the RUNSTATS command as a task in the Task Center as well Figure 6 28 shows a sample of the gener
374. it fills up Example 3 25 shows how to change the location for db2diag log Example 3 25 Relocate db2diag log db2instl puget gt db2 get dbm config grep DIAGPATH Diagnostic data directory path DIAGPATH home db2inst1 sq11ib db2dump db2inst1l puget gt db2 update dbm config using DIAGPATH db2diag DB20000I1 The UPDATE DATABASE MANAGER CONFIGURATION command completed successfully db2instl puget gt db2 get dbm config grep DIAGPATH Diagnostic data directory path DIAGPATH db2diag Note This is a configuration change on instance level You only need to perform it once for the whole instance The DIAGPATH can also be changed from the Control Center From All Systems gt lt HOSTNAME gt Instances right click on db2inst1 select Configure Parameters Change the DIAGPATH value in DBM Configuration pane Figure 3 13 Note For a partitioned database the command is the same The UPDATE DBM CONFIG applies to all nodes because the home directory is shared by an NFS mount 120 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm E DBM Configuration KD YMSUSE db2inst1 Select the value field of a parameter to change its value lt Keyword value DIAGLEVEL 3 db2diag INDEXREC During database restart NOTIFYLEVEL 3 V Environment z Zz 78 of 78 items displayed 4 x d Gal Default View Vie Hint he fully qualified path for DB2
375. ition 0 with the changes we did Chapter 6 Administering databases 261 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 6 25 Part of the changed redirected restore script Tablespace name TSDATA1 Tablespace ID 4 Tablespace Type Database managed space Tablespace Content Type All permanent data Large table space Tablespace Page size bytes 8192 Tablespace Extent size pages 32 Using automatic storage No Auto resize enabled No Total number of pages 5120 Number of usable pages 5088 High water mark pages 96 kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SET TABLESPACE CONTAINERS FOR 4 IGNORE ROLLFORWARD CONTAINER OPERATIONS USING FILE tablespaces db2inst1 itsodb NODE0000 TSDATA1 000 5120 FILE tablespaces ITS00000 TSDATA1 000 4000 Once both scripts are changed we create the new container directory on each database partition and run the scripts against their database partition Example 6 26 shows the output for database partition 0 Example 6 26 Execute the script for database partition O db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt mkdir tablespaces ITSO0000 db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt export DB2NODE 0 db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 terminate DB20000I1 The TERMINATE command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 t
376. itioned environment all the data resides in a single partition therefore it is not necessary to worry about partition groups Table spaces A database is organized into parts called table spaces A table space is a place to store tables When creating a table you can decide to have certain objects such as indexes and large object LOB data kept separately from the rest of the table data A table space can also be spread over one or more physical storage devices Table spaces reside in database partition groups Table space definitions and attributes are recorded in the database system catalog Containers are assigned to table spaces A container is an allocation of physical storage such as a file or a device A table space can be either system managed space SMS or database managed space DMS For an SMS table space each container is a directory in the file space of the operating system and the operating system s file manager controls the storage space For a DMS table space each container is either a fixed size pre allocated file or a physical device such as a disk and the database manager controls the storage space Tables A relational database presents data as a collection of tables A table consists of data logically arranged in columns and rows All database and table data is assigned to table spaces The data in the table is logically related and relationships can be defined between tables Data can be viewed and manipulated
377. itive invert matching invert v invert the sense of matching for all filtering options exist record field must exist in order to be processed pid find all records for a list of process IDs tid find all records for a list of thread IDs eduid find all records for a list of EDU IDs node gt n find all records for a list of nodes error e find all records for a list of errors level 1 find all records for a list of severity levels history H display the history of logged records for a time interval time t display all the records within a particular time interval count C display a count of matching records verbose V display all record fields whether they contain data or not strict display records using one field value pair per line cbe display records in the Common Base Event CBE format fmt format tool s output using a format string output 0 save output into a file follow f continuously display appended records as the file grows archive A archive a diagnostic log file readfile read from a file ignoring terminal input used in scripts rc display descriptions of DB2 error return codes ZRC or ECF ecfid display function info extracted from the numeric ECF ID facility fac display messages from a particular facility db2diag h lt option1 option2 option3 gt displays additional help and usage examples for one or more options specified in the options l
378. ity can handle most data types including XML large objects LOBs and user defined types UDTs In general the load utility is faster than the import utility because it writes formatted pages directly into the database while the import utility performs SQL INSERTs The load utility does not fire triggers and does not perform referential or table constraints checking other than validating the uniqueness of the indexes The load process consists of four distinct phases gt Load During which the data is written to the table gt Build During which indexes are produced gt Delete During which the rows that caused a unique or primary key violation are removed from the table and stored in the load exception table if one was specified Chapter 6 Administering databases 305 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Index copy During which the index data is copied from a system temporary table space to the original table space This will only occur if a system temporary table space was specified for index creation during a load operation with the READ ACCESS option specified To use the LOAD utility you must have SYSADM authority DBADM authority or LOAD authority on the database together with the needed privilege depending on the load mode you choose i e for REPLACE mode you need INSERT and DELETE privilege on the table The load utility can be invoked through the command line processor CLP the L
379. ity is beginning to load data from file db2backup rest_table NODE0001 data SQL3110N The utility has completed processing 2 rows were read from the input file SQL3221W Begin COMMIT WORK Input Record Count 2 SQL3222W COMMIT of any database changes was successful SQL3149N 2 rows were processed from the input file 2 rows were successfully inserted into the table 0 rows were rejected Number of rows read Number of rows skipped Number of rows inserted Number of rows updated Number of rows rejected Number of rows committed iT NOON Oh gemini db2 connect to itsodb completed ok db2instl mensa gt db2 select from tab1 268 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 1 Tina 2 Jonas 2 record s selected The table was recreated and the table data are available 6 2 Table index reorganization and statistics collection When considerable changes have been made to a table the physical data pages for the table and its indexes will become discontinuous or fragmented If a clustering index exists for a specific table it may become badly clustered after a lot of changes have been made against the table and index key entries Additional cost such as CPU time and I O operations will be required to deal with similar workload under these conditions It may lead to obvious performance degradation Performing maintenance activities on your databases is
380. ization 276 ins 194 instance 14 instance owning machine 52 instant level authority SYSADM 146 SYSCTRL 146 SYSMAINT 146 SYSMON 146 Integrated Query Editor 195 interactive mode 397 intra parallelism 16 iostat 410 ipcs 30 ISO8859 1 94 J Java 425 Java Routine Debugger 195 JDBC 3 jdk32 444 jdk64 444 journal filesystem 42 K kernel 26 kernel parameter 26 kernel parameters sem 30 keyboard shortcut 220 kilobytes 410 ksysguard 415 L large object LOB 15 layout 220 libaio 32 license status 156 life cycle 194 life sciences 2 Linux distribution 26 502 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm load balancer 12 load copy image 4 local workspace 213 Locking memory 129 LOCKTIMEOUT 137 log 44 log directory 230 log file manager 226 logmanager 230 log mirroring 44 logpath 44 116 log space 35 logical database partition 22 logical partition 21 485 logical_port 103 logprimary 166 M memory 26 memory component 374 375 memory consumption 406 Memory Tracker 376 memory usage 375 Memory Visualizer 374 message queue limit 30 migrate database 177 migration 163 165 migration roadmap 164 migration strategy 164 minimum recovery time 255 mirror 44 mirrored logs 43 mobile devices 10 module 425 monitoring memory 374 multiple partition environment MPE 481 multithreaded architecture 5 multi tier 10 multi tier application 5 N Navigator 210
381. jdk64 DAS Code Page DAS_CODEPAGE 0 DAS Territory DAS_TERRITORY 0 Location of Contact List CONTACT_HOST Execute Expired Tasks EXEC_EXP_TASK NO Scheduler Mode SCHED ENABLE ON SMTP Server SMTP_SERVER Tools Catalog Database TOOLSCAT_DB TOOLSCAT Tools Catalog Database Instance TOOLSCAT_INST db2inst1 Tools Catalog Database Schema TOOLSCAT_SCHEMA ESECATO Scheduler User ID Diagnostic error capture level DIAGLEVEL 2 In addition to the automatic DAS parameters change within the Tools Catalog Database a series of new tables are created with the schema name specified by TOOLSCAT_SCHEMA here it is ESECATO Also two new table spaces and a related buffer pool with page size of 32K are created within the database You can use the commands and SQL statements shown in Example B 4 to check that Example B 4 New table spaces and buffer pool created automatically db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 list tablespaces Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID 0 Name SYSCATSPACE Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Regular table space State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal Tablespace ID 1 Name TEMPSPACE1 Appendix B DB2 Tools Catalog creation 491 6899ax02 fm 492 Type Contents State Detailed Normal Tablespace Name Type Contents State Detailed Normal Tablespace Name Type Contents Space State Detailed Normal Tablespace Name Type Co
382. kages Note More information to add a database partition is described in DB2 manuel Partitioning and Clustering Guide SC23 5860 00 An alternate method to add a logical database partition is to use the Add Database Partition wizard Figure 3 14 E Control Center Control Center Selected Edit View Tools Help gt J HPSAas OS SE obi Vie 3 Control Center systems Name Node name Operati a Instances el MENSA DAS999A9 Linux She cre S VMSUSE YMSUSE Linux EL myc pen New Control Center i Open Database Partition Servers H ef VMSUSE Add Database Partitions A hacar See Figure 3 14 Add a partition to a database The wizard guides you through the process At the container tab Figure 3 15 on page 126 you have to defined the container locations on the new partitions Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 125 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Set Containers MENSA ITSODB 2 Pee Mie V IBMTEMPGROUP vy TEMPSPACE1 db2temp db2inst1 NODEO002 ITSODB TEMPSPACE1 Directory wv SNG_O1 vy SAMPLE_SNG db db2inst1 NODEO002 ITSODB SAMPLE_SNG Director Figure 3 15 In Figure 3 16 on page 127 you can see the generated commands to add a database partition and the result of the command 126 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm db2stan dbpanitionnum 2 ADD DBP
383. l puget gt db2 select empno firstnme lastname salary_diff empno as salary_diff from employee where empno in 000110 000070 EMPNO FIRSTNME LASTNAME SALARY_DIFF 000110 VINCENZO LUCCHESSI 25000 00 000070 EVA PULASKI 10000 00 2 record s selected Note More information about UDFs can be found in Developing User defined Routines SQL and External SC23 5855 00 8 2 3 Stored procedures A stored procedure helps to reduce unnecessary data transfer over the network between client and server The SQL statements and definitions are stored on the database server The client sends only the necessary data over the network to call the stored procedure and gets the results sent back This helps to improve the overall performance of client server applications Like UDFs stored procedures are very useful to put common business logic into a central place and to make it accessible to any client The CREATE PROCEDURE DDL statement defines a procedure within an application server There are two types of procedures external procedures which are written in a programming language and SQL procedures which are written in SQL Stored procedures written in other languages than SQL are handled very similar like UDFs written in other languages Chapter 8 3 3 C C on page 432 and Chapter 8 3 4 Java on page 440 discuss UDFs written in C and Java Example 8 5 on page 424 shows an SQL procedure that calculates the new salary and bonu
384. l supported platforms 2 Read the license agreement HTML format in license directory Note This license agreement indicates that this program is still at Early Release of Programs stage at the time of writing this book We recommend that you use db2top in development environment only 3 If you accept this license agreement for Early Release of Programs upload db2top 2 0 bin tar gz to your Linux system 4 Enter the following commands to extract db2top executable files on Linux gunzip db2top 2 0 bin tar gz tar xvf db2top 2 0 bin tar For DB2 9 5 32 bit db2top executable file is placed in inux_amd_32 directory and 64 bit db2top executable is placed in inux_amd_64 directory Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 379 6899ch07 fm 7 3 2 Monitoring with db2top in interactive mode Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2top User Manual pdf is the documentation for db2top usage You also can obtain detailed online help by entering the following command in a Linux terminal db2top h A simple syntax of the db2top is as follows db2top d dbname To start db2top issue the following command in a Linux terminal db2top d ITSODB Where ITSODB is the database name in this book The db2top starting window shows in Figure 7 29 on page 380 You can press h to enter help panel To get back to original page from help panel press Enter We provide two samples in this section feOB2
385. l where you can specify the time frame in which the automatic maintenance can be performed Configure Automatic Maintenance Figure 6 11 Specify maintenance panel At the activities page you have to select the check box for automatic backup see Figure 6 12 on page 247 Use the Configure Settings button to specify policy settings details such as backup location 246 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm 1 Introduction 2 Type 3 Timing 4 Notification 6 Summary Select a maintenance activity to configure Automatic maintenance includes the following set of activities Select a maintenance activity to view its current settings To enable and disable automation of the activity and notification select the Automate and Notify check boxes To update the settings select the Configure Settings button 5 Activities Maintenance activity Maintenance window used Automate 4 Backup databa KUP Online Defragment table and index data REORG Offline Optimize data access RUNSTATS Online Maintenance activity settings The backup maintenance activity automatically backs up your database using the following settin Criteria Balance database recoverability with performance Media File system Location database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00002 DB2AUTOBACKUPS A NOTE Backup images will be automatically pruned from this i gt directory Please do
386. lain table information that you previously gathered If you don t want to keep this information you can later recreate the explain tables and gather new information To migrate explain tables use the db2exmig command as follows db2exmig d lt database_name gt e lt explain_schema gt u userid password Where database_name is the name of the database where the explain tables are stored explain_schema represents the schema name of the explain tables to be migrated and userid and password are the current user s ID and password The user ID and password parameters are optional 8 If you obtained customized code page conversion tables from the DB2 support service copy all of the files for those tables from the DB2OLD conv to DB2DIR conv where DB2OLD is the location of your DB2 9 1 or DB2 UDB Version 8 copy and DB2DIR is the location of your DB2 9 5 copy You do not need to copy standard code page conversion tables 9 After all steps are completed perform back up for all of your databases 10 An optional task can be performed now Check if index or tables need to be reorganized using REORGCHK command Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 177 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 4 2 5 Enabling new DB2 9 5 functionality After databases and instance migrations you might want to enable important new features to enhance the functionality and improve the performance If you are coming from Version 8 2 c
387. le use the LIST HISTORY command Example 6 2 illustrates a sample output with the backup information It shows the backup timestamp and the log files that were active during the backup was taken Example 6 2 Backup history db2instl mensa gt db2 list history backup all for itsodb List History File for itsodb Number of matching file entries 2 Op Obj Timestamp Sequence Type Dev Earliest Log Current Log Backup ID B D 20080201170437001_ F D 0000000 L0G S0000000 LOG Contains 2 tablespace s 00001 SYSCATSPACE 00002 USERSPACE1 Comment DB2 BACKUP ITSODB OFFLINE Start Time 20080201170437 End Time 20080201170449 Status A EID 1 Location db2backup You can also retrieve the history entries for ROLLFORWARD REORG CREATE TABLESPACE ALTER TABLESPACE DROPPED TABLE LOAD RENAME TABLESPACE and ARCHIVE LOG To see the archived log files you have to use the command shown in Example 6 3 Example 6 3 Archive log history db2instl mensa gt db2 list history archive log all for db itsodb Op Obj Timestamp Sequence Type Dev Earliest Log Current Log Backup ID Comment Start Time 20080207090530 End Time 20080207090543 232 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Status A EID 25 Location db2archive db2inst1 ITSODB NODE0000 C0000001 S0000005 LO0G In a multi partitioned database environment you have to run the list history command on each database partition
388. le 2 6 Package requirements for Linux SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 Contains the asynchronous libaio 0 3 104 14 2 x86_64 rpm library required for DB2 SLES 10 SP1 x86 servers libaio 0 3 104 14 2 i586 rpm RHEL 5 x86_64 libaio 0 3 106 3 2 x86_64 rpm RHEL 5 x86 libaio 0 3 106 3 2 i386 rpm 2 The db2_install utility does install the JDK for you 32 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Package name compat libstdc openssh rsh server SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 compat libstdc 5 0 7 22 2 x86_ 64 rpm SLES 10 SP1 x86 compat libstdc 5 0 7 22 2 i586 rpm RHEL 5 x86_64 compat libstdc 33 3 2 3 61 x86 _64 rpm compat libstdc 33 3 2 3 61 i38 6 rpm RHEL 5 x86 compat libstdc 33 3 2 3 61 i38 6 rpm SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 ksh 93r 12 28 x86_64 rpm RHEL 5 x86_64 ksh 20060214 1 4 x86_64 rpm SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 openssh 4 2p1 18 25 x86_64 rpm RHEL 5 x86_64 openssh 4 3p2 24 el5 x86_64 rp m openssh clients 4 3p2 24 el5 x86 _64 rpm openssh server 4 3p2 24 el5 x86 _64 rpm openssh askpass 4 3p2 24 el5 x8 6_64 rpm SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 rsh server 0 17 573 2 x86_64 rp m RHEL 5 x86_64 rsh server 0 17 37 el5 x86_64 rp m 6899ch02 fm Contains libstdc so 5 which is required for DB2 servers and clients Korn Shell This package is required for partitioned database environments This package contains a set of server and client programs which allow users to run commands on and fr
389. le SQL_HANDLE STMT hdbc amp hstmt SQL_SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLAllocHandle n cliRC exit cliRC directly execute the statement cliRC SQLExecDirect hstmt SQLCHAR select empno from employee where salary lt 36000 SQL_NTS if cliRC SQL_SUCCESS Chapter 8 Application development 433 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLExecDirect n cliRC exit cliRC bind columns to variables if cliRC SQLBindCol hstmt 1 SQL_C_CHAR empno val sizeof empno val amp empno ind SQL_SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLBindCol 1 n cliRC exit cliRC fetch each row and display if cliRC SQLFetch hstmt SQL SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLFetch n cliRC exit cliRC while cliRC SQL_NO DATA FOUND bind columns to variables if cliRC SQLGetData hstmt 1 SQL_C_CHAR empno val sizeof empno val amp empno ind SQL_SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLGetData 1 n cliRC exit cliRC printf 6 6s n empno val if cliRC SQLFetch hstmt SQL_SUCCESS if cliRC SQL_NO DATA FOUND fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLFetch n cliRC exit cliRC Free statement handle if cliRC SQLFreeHandle SQL_HANDLE_STMT hstmt SQL_SUCCESS fprintf stderr CLI error d in SQLFreeHandle n cliRC exit cliRC
390. le Schema DB2INST1 Table Name ITEM Table Type User Data Object Pages 1851 Index Object Pages 3101 Rows Read Not Collected Rows Written 8251179 Overflows 0 Page Reorgs 8921 Table Reorg Information Node number 0 Reorg Type Reclustering Inplace Table Reorg Allow Write Access Reorg Index Reorg Tablespace 7 Start Time 02 13 2008 14 35 11 064496 Reorg Phase Max Phase Phase Start Time Status Completed Current Counter 1850 Chapter 6 Administering databases 295 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Max Counter 1850 Completion 0 End Time 02 13 2008 14 36 34 691349 Database Partition 0 Database ITSODB Active Up 0 days 05 03 36 Table Reorg Information Address TbspaceID TableID PartID MasterTbs MasterTab TableName Type IndexID TempSpaceID 0x00002B6A7E8F1B28 7 4 n a n a n a ITEM Online 1 7 Table Reorg Stats Address TableName Start End PhaseStart MaxPhase Phase CurCount MaxCount Status Completion 0x00002B6A7E8F1B28 ITEM 02 13 2008 14 35 11 02 13 2008 14 36 34 n a n a n a 1850 1850 Done 0 5 Use the REORGCHK with UPDATE STATISTICS option to obtain the new statistics after the index and table reorganization Example 6 44 Example 6 44 Using REORGCHK to update statistics after table reorganization db2inst1 mensa gt db2 reorgchk update statistics on table db2instl item Doing RUNSTATS Table statistics Fl 100 OVERFLOW CARD
391. les The DB2 product is installation ready for use immediately after installation DB2 Administration Server Yes No DAS and its associated Available Not available commands Control Center Yes No Available Not available Operating system based Yes No authentication You can lift this limitation by having a root user run the db2rfe command DB2 instance actions can A DB2 instance created by Anon rootinstance can be be performed a user with root authority updated or dropped using canbe updated or dropped the db2_deinstall only by a user with root command only by the authority non root user who owns the non root instance Support partitioned No database Only single partition databases are supported in non root installations For the details about the limitations of non root installations refer to the IBM DB2 9 5 Information Center http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21 uw v9r5 topic com ibm db2 1luw qb s erver doc doc c0050568 html Support changes for 32 bit and 64 bit DB2 servers In DB2 9 5 support for 32 bit and 64 bit servers has the following changes gt Only 64 bit instances could be created on 64 bit Linux kernel on x86_64 POWER and zSeries gt No 32 bit DB2 Enterprise Server Edition DB2 9 5 Enterprise Server Edition ESE is only supported on 64 bit architectures Chapter 2 Installation 37 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 2 2 2 Installation metho
392. lients No D Yes Migration complete Figure 4 1 Migration roadmap 164 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm 4 1 1 Migration requirements Make sure your system satisfies the following software and space requirements prior to Version 9 5 migration gt Migration is supported from DB2 UDB Version 8 and DB2 9 1 If you have DB2 UDB Version 7 or earlier you need to migrate to DB2 UDB Version 8 before migrating to DB2 9 5 If you are running DB2 UDB Version 8 1 we recommend you upgrade to DB2 UDB Version 8 2 first You can only migrate to a root installation of DB2 9 5 DB2 9 5 Enterprise Server Edition is only supported on 64 bit architectures Check the recommended and validated environment for DB2 9 5 from the following Web site http www ibm com software data db2 1inux validate Restoring full database offline backups from DB2 UDB Version 8 or DB2 Version 9 1 is supported However rolling forward of logs from a previous level is not possible Perform hardware and operating system upgrades prior to DB2 database product migration If you migrate DB2 server you might also need to migrate your database applications and routines to support changes for 64 bit instances SQL stored procedures Java Virtual Machine JVM and development software Migrate all of your DB2 servers to Version 9 5 before you migrate any of your DB2 clients t
393. ll Databases SAMPLE 0 Tsong All Databases O All Systems Figure 3 10 Database created Command line The command which was used to create the database is shown in Example 3 11 Example 3 11 Create database statement with automated storage ON CREATE DATABASE ITSODB AUTOMATIC STORAGE YES ON database 108 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm DBPATH ON database ALIAS ITSODB USING CODESET UTF 8 TERRITORY US COLLATE USING SYSTEM PAGESIZE 4096 WITH Lab database for ITSO The above script is a direct output of the wizard and can be used instead of the Create Database Wizard to create the same database If you want to control where to place your container files for the table spaces Example 3 12 shows an example of a CREATE DATABASE statement with automatic storage off and manually defined table space containers Example 3 12 DDL to create the database with containers specified CREATE DATABASE ITSODB AUTOMATIC STORAGE NO ON database ALIAS ITSODB USING CODESET UTF 8 TERRITORY US COLLATE USING SYSTEM PAGESIZE 4096 CATALOG TABLESPACE MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING db2catalog USER TABLESPACE MANAGED BY DATABASE USING FILE db2user contl tbsp 89600 TEMPORARY TABLESPACE MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING db2temp WITH Lab database for ITSO Note The CREATE DATABASE command is explained in more detail in Command Reference SC23 5846 00 3 3 2 Creating
394. lly you have to roll forward to the end of backup point in time This can be done with the V9 5 command db2 rollforward db itsodb to end of backup and stop If you used the backup command with the INCLUDE LOGS clause you can specify the LOGTARGET option within the restore command Example 6 21 shows how this works for a single partition database Example 6 21 Version recovery with online backup and included logs db2instl mensa gt db2 restore db itsodb from db2backup taken at 20080206143831 logtarget db2backup logs DB200001 The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa gt db2 rollforward db itsodb to end of backup overflow log path db2backup logs Rollforward Status Input database alias itsodb Number of nodes have returned status 1 Node number 0 Rollforward status DB working 0000001 L0G 0000000 L0G S0000000 L0G 2008 02 06 22 38 32 000000 UTC Next log file to be read Log files processed Last committed transaction DB200001 The ROLLFORWARD command completed successfully db2instl mensa gt db2 rollforward db itsodb stop Rollforward Status Input database alias itsodb Number of nodes have returned status 1 Node number 0 Rollforward status Next log file to be read Log files processed Last committed transaction not pending 0000000 LOG S0000000 LOG 2008 02 06 22 38 32 000000 UTC DB200001 The ROLLFORWARD command completed successfully Chapter 6 Admi
395. lth monitor alarms 3 Important information no immediate action required Conditions are logged that are non threatening and do not require immediate action but might indicate a non optimal system This level will capture health monitor alarms health monitor warnings and health monitor attentions 4 Informational messages Messages written into notify log by setting a higher level include messages applicable to lower levels for example setting notify level to 3 will cause the administration notification log to include messages applicable to levels 1 and 2 Example 7 14 is an excerpt the messages from notify log when lock escalation happens It tells you when the lock escalation occurs which instance database and partition it takes place the process ID and thread ID associated with the lock escalation the application ID component and function of DB2 used when the problem happens In addition detailed information specific to this occurrence of lock escalation is also displayed Example 7 14 DB2 administration notification log 2008 02 07 15 34 44 809250 Instance db2instl Node 001 PID 10328 db2agntp ITSODB 1 TID 3506432320 Appid NO db2inst1 080207233036 data management sqldEscalateLocks Probe 2 Database ITSODB ADM5500W DB2 is performing lock escalation The total number of locks currently held is 816 and the target number of locks to hold is 408 2008 02 07 15 34 44 859382 Instance db2instl Node 001 PID 10328 db2agntp
396. ly referred to as non buffered I O On Linux this feature is commonly known as Direct I O or DIO The database manager supports this feature with the NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING table space clause When this is set the database manager automatically takes advantage of CIO on file systems where this feature exists This feature might help to reduce the memory requirements of the file system cache thus making more memory available for other uses Prior to Version 9 5 the keyword FILE SYSTEM CACHING was implied if neither NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING nor FILE SYSTEM CACHING was specified With Version 9 5 if neither keyword is specified the default NO FILE SYSTEM CACHING is used This change affects only newly created table spaces Existing table spaces created prior to Version 9 5 are not affected This change applies to Linux with the following exceptions where the default behavior remains to be FILE SYSTEM CACHING gt Linux for System z gt All SMS temporary table space files gt SMS permanent table space files except for long field LF data and large object LOB data files Table 2 8 shows the supported configuration for using table spaces without file system caching 40 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Table 2 8 Supported Linux platform and configuration for using table spaces without file system caching Linux distributions SLES 9 and RHEL 4 x86 x86_64 IA64
397. m from sysibmadm SNAPDB lt SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP DB_STATUS DBNAME DBPARTITIONNUM 2008 02 15 17 42 32 773025 ACTIVE ITSODB 2008 02 15 17 42 29 024832 ACTIVE ITSODB 1 2 record s selected You can capture the same information using table functions Each table function returns a table with one row per monitored object for the specified database partition The column names of the returned table correlate with the monitor element names In Example 7 24 we capture the same snapshot of database information as in Example 7 23 using the SNAPDB administrative view but this time we use the table function SNAP_GET_DB_V95 Example 7 24 Getting snapshot using table function db2inst1 mensa gt db2 SELECT SNAPSHOT TIMESTAMP DB STATUS substr DB_NAME 1 10 DBNAME DBPARTITIONNUM FROM TABLE SNAP_GET_DB_V95 ITSODB SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP DB_STATUS DBNAME DBPARTITIONNUM 2008 02 15 17 58 26 933775 ACTIVE ITSODB 2008 02 15 17 58 25 915850 ACTIVE ITSODB 1 2 record s selected To list all available snapshot table functions use the following command SELECT SUBSTR FUNCSCHEMA 1 10 FUNCSCHEMA SUBSTR FUNCNAME 1 30 FUNCNAME FROM SYSCAT FUNCTIONS WHERE FUNCNAME LIKE SNAP The SQL table functions have two input parameters gt Database name If you enter NULL the name of the currently connected database is used gt Database partition number To capture a snapshot for the currently connected database partition enter a value of 1 To ca
398. mail In addition to the notifications to the administration notification log and contact there is more information regarding the alert available within Health Center The Health Center GUI has red yellow orange and green state indicator icons prefixed to the DB2 objects The state icon provides you a quick view of system health condition In Figure 7 17 you find that the red Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 363 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm circle icon prefixed to the instance name and database name in the left pane within the Health Center is displayed It means alarm conditions happened within the instance or any of its databases or their table spaces and containers On the right pane of the window the Health Center lists all the alerts Health Center Table Space Utilizati Table Space Stora 0 Table Space Utilizati Table Space Stora 1 Figure 7 17 Monitor health indicators in Health Center You can work on the alert directly from here Select one of the alerts which corresponds to your desired health indicator then right click the alert entry It provides you the Show details and Disable Evaluation options To get detailed information choose Show Details to get the recommendation for this alert choose Recommendation Advisor to disable the health indicator choose Disable Evaluation Figure 7 18 shows these options Figure 7 18 Choosing the options
399. make sure that the installation requirements are met 2 Unzip the Data Studio zip file unzip ibm_data_studio_v111_linux zip 3 Run the setup executable provided setup Data Studio uses IBM Installation Manager to install the product If you haven t had the IBM Installation manager yet the setup program will install the IBM Installation Manager for you 4 Figure 5 2 shows the first panel presented You can browse the installation guide and release note Select Install IBM Data Studio to install the product i IBM Data Studio Version 1 1 1 Mozilla Firefox vena Software Development Platform Language selection Say x IBM Data Studio The IBM Data Studio is a rich and robust desktop application that allows database professionals to perform database design development deployment and management tasks Using this application you can develop and test routines deploy data centric web services create and run SQL and XQuery queries and develop Java applications that access databases or in memory data In addition you can perform database administration tasks such as creating and altering database objects and managing privileges Install 1BM Data Studio Installation Guide Release Notes Figure 5 2 Installing IBM Data Studio 5 In the Install Packages panel Figure 5 3 on page 198 the IBM Installation Manager is also selected if it has not been installed in the system yet Chapter 5
400. me TEMPSPACE1 Type System managed space Contents System Temporary data State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal Tablespace ID 2 Name USERSPACE1 Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Large table space State 0x0000 Appendix A Issuing commands to multiple database partitions 483 6899ax01 fm Detailed explanation Normal Tablespace ID Name Type Contents State Detailed explanation Normal DB210111 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm on the current node are listed 3 IBMDB2SAMPLEREL Database managed space All permanent data Large table space 0x0000 In a partitioned database server environment only the table spaces Mensa db2 CONNECT TO itsodb completed ok Database Connection Information Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID Name Type Contents Space State Detailed Normal Tablespace ID Name Type Contents State Detailed Normal Tablespace ID Name Type Contents State Detailed explanation 484 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux explanation explanation 0 SYSCATSPACE Database managed space All permanent data Regular table 0x0000 1 TEMPSPACE1 System managed space System Temporary data 0x0000 2 USERSPACE1 Database managed space All permanent data Large table space 0x0000
401. ment business logic in a central place A trigger becomes part of the transaction which fires it Example 8 1 demonstrates how to create a trigger to audit changes on either the SALARY or BONUS column in the table EMPLOYEE of our SAMPLE database The changes are captured into the table EMPLOYEE_HIST Example 8 1 Trigger sample to store history data CONNECT TO sample CREATE TABLE employee_hist empno CHAR 6 salary_old DECIMAL 9 2 salary_new DECIMAL 9 2 bonus_old DECIMAL 9 2 bonus_new DECIMAL 9 2 chg_date TIMESTAMP 420 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm CREATE TRIGGER employee_audit AFTER UPDATE OF salary bonus ON employee REFERENCING OLD AS old_row NEW AS new_row FOR EACH ROW MODE db2sql INSERT INTO employee_hist Values old_row empno old_row salary new_row salary old_row bonus new_row bonus current timestamp In Example 8 2 we modify some salary amounts on the employee table to fire the trigger and populate the EMPLOYEE_HIST table By selecting data from EMPLOYEE_HIST you can see how our trigger works Example 8 2 Each update forces one insert into employee_hist db2 update employee set salary 55000 where empno 000070 db2 update employee set salary 45000 where empno 000110 db2 update employee set salary 55000 where empno 000170 db2 update employee set salary 65000 where empno 000070 db2instl puget gt db2
402. migrations and performance and tuning services He also is IBM Certified Advanced Database Administrator for DB2 9 Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved iii 6899pref fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Helmut Riegler is an IT Specialist working for the World Wide Learning Applications Development in Vienna He is the technical lead for the ongoing support of the learning applications He has been with IBM since 1998 and has a broad experience in software development and database administration Before he joined IBM he developed CAD software He holds the degree of an Engineer for Electrical Engineering Lifang LF Liu is a Senior IT Specialist of Software Group IBM China His major job responsibilities are solution design and proposal delivery technical support at presale stage and helping the customers finish the PoC PoT in their projects Lifang focuses on supporting DB2 OLTP business recently especially focuses on large ISV OEM customers support and DB2 SAP selling Prior to this position he was a DB2 worldwide L2 support engineer working in Technical Support Center IBM China He is IBM Certified Advanced Database Administrator of DB2 His areas of expertise include DB2 troubleshooting database performance management and database maintenance Veiko Spranger is an Advisory IT Specialist in it Services and Solutions GmbH an IBM subsidiary He has 14 years of experience in DB2 focus on DB2 Distributed
403. monly used command prefix sequences for db2_all and rah D Runs the commands in sequence in the background 482 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax01 fm Runs the commands in sequence in the background and terminates the command after all remote commands have completed i Runs the commands in parallel in the background II amp or Runs the commands in parallel in the background and terminates the command after all remote commands have completed lt Commands sent to all the machines for running except this one sent to all the machines for running Commands sent to all the machines for running except this one this one lt lt nnn lt a sent to all other database partitions but not the database partition nnn for running Commands sent to only database partition nnn for running gt Substitutes occurrences of lt gt with the machine name a occurrences of by the machine index and substitutes occurrences of by the node number The Example A 1 shows how to connect and list all the table spaces on all database partitions Example A 1 Using db2_all on a multiple partitions environment db2inst1 gemini gt db2_all db2 CONNECT TO itsodb db2 LIST TABLESPACES Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID 1 Na
404. mory allocation data to or from a file for a Memory Visualizer window db2mirk DB2 also provides you a command line tool to obtain memory usage information for a DB2 instance It is called Memory Tracker The command name is db2mtrk This command outputs the following memory pool allocation information Current size Maximum size hard limit Largest size high water mark Type identifier indicating function for which memory will be used Agent who allocated pool only if the pool is private Application vvvvvy You can obtain detailed help message for this tool by entering the following command in a Linux terminal db2mtrk h Example 7 8 shows you how to use db2mtrk to monitor memory usage by DB2 instances databases and application Example 7 8 Using db2mirk to monitor DB2 memory usage db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2mtrk i d a Tracking Memory on 2008 02 12 at 14 19 24 Memory for instance other monh fcmbp 32 1M 192 0K 10 9M No active databases No active applications db2instl mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2mtrk i d a Tracking Memory on 2008 02 12 at 14 20 38 Memory for instance 376 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm other monh fcmbp 32
405. most accurate data for evaluating query access plans Index reorganization To get the best performance from your indexes consider reorganizing your indexes periodically because table updates can cause index page prefetch to become less effective The REORG INDEX option reorganizes all indexes that are defined on a table by rebuilding the index data into unfragmented physically contiguous pages If you specify the Cleanup Only option while reorganizing an index cleanup is performed without rebuilding the indexes During online index reorganization using the REORG INDEXES command with the ALLOW WRITE ACCESS option all indexes on the specified table are rebuilt while read and write access to the table is allowed Any changes made to the underlying table that would affect indexes while the reorganization is in progress are logged in the database logs The reorganization will process the logged changes while rebuilding the index Note The default behavior of the REORG INDEXES command is ALLOW NO ACCESS which places an exclusive lock on the table during the reorganization process You can specify ALLOW READ ACCESS or ALLOW WRITE ACCESS to permit other transactions to read from or update the table Same as table reorganization index reorganization is also integrated into the DB2 Control Center See Figure 6 23 on page 280 Chapter 6 Administering databases 279 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Control C
406. n Example 7 2 Example 7 2 Prepare table space and table for Health Center db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1l script gt db2 tvf crt_sample db2 CREATE LARGE TABLESPACE tbspdms_0 IN DATABASE PARTITION GROUP IBMDEFAULTGROUP PAGESIZE 8192 MANAGED BY DATABASE USING file database db2inst1 NODEO00 N ITSODB T0000008 C0000000 LRG 10M AUTORESIZE NO DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully CREATE TABLE db2instl empinfo ID INTEGER NOT NULL LASTNAME VARCHAR 30 HIREDATE DATE SALARY INTEGER PRIMARY KEY ID in tbspdms_0 DISTRIBUTE BY HASH ID DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully 2 Review health indicator settings for the DMS table space To configure the health indicator for DMS table spaces in the Health Center select Configure Health Indicator Settings to start Health Indicator Configuration Launchpad panel as shown in Figure 7 8 on page 355 Objects in Any Alert State Ba fon a im Pay le yx oo ao oo 8 Ej dbzinst1 REM B ITsof Configure Health Indicator Settings B same Configure Automatic Maintenance Too Manage Utilities There are current Figure 7 8 Configuring health indicator settings 1 For test purpose we change AUTORESIZE parameter for table space from default YES to NO Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 355 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Health Indicator Configuration Launchpad Figu
407. n Select Enable Macros db2top Reports is presented for you to analyze db2top data see Figure 7 33 on page 384 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 383 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm M db2top Reports V0 3 0B2 n Generate Unix script to capture db2top data Generate Clear graphics Build graphics Save workbook Help Run db2top in background mode db2top b to capture data in csv format press the Generate button to generate a unix script that will capture db2top data either from an active database or from a collection file Then copy all generate csv files and this macro in a windows directory Then press Build graphics button to generate graphics Figure 7 33 db2top Reports tool Follow these steps to create graphical reports 1 Generate an UNIX script to capture db2top data This is an one time task db2top Reports uses specific file format You are required to use the script to produce the data files Click Generate on db2top Results tool panel Example 7 10 shows the generated script Example 7 10 db2top txt This script generates data for the db2top excel macro It will create a directory called tmp background Copy this directory under windows Copy the db2top excel macro in the directory Open the excel document and run full report SR SR SR OS OSE ORO SHER export WAITTIME 1 5 in minutes 384 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux
408. n file for the syslogd It specifies rules for logging by syslogd It is a text file and you can edit it with any favorable text editor to make it applicable to your environment or simply use the default values which were set during Linux installation It is a good habit to check the system log file the file could be var log messages if you have not changed the default configuration when you are facing problems that you are not sure if it is related to the system setting or not For more information regarding how to set up syslog conf and how to interpret the system log refer to Linux specific documentation Note Instead of syslogd package SUSE 10 installs syslog ng package by default The syslog ng conf file is the main configuration file and is located in etc syslog ng directory 7 5 DB2 Tools for troubleshooting DB2 product comes with several tools that can help you monitor and troubleshoot the DB2 system We introduce some of these helpful tools and provide their usage examples 7 5 1 db2diag db2diag log contains DB2 system running information and should be viewed periodically You can use the db2diag analysis tool to filter and format the Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 393 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2diag 1og file As an alternative to using db2diag you can use a text editor to view the diagnostic log file on the machine where you suspect a problem to have occurred T
409. n a separate file system and disk For example in our system we created the file system db2temp with mount point db2temp to store our temporary table spaces In a partitioned database environment the catalog node should contain all three default table spaces and the other database partitions should each contain only TEMPSPACE1 and USERSPACE1 Example 2 4 shows how to create a system temporary table space on multiple nodes in the db2temp file system Example 2 4 Create temp table space in a different file system CREATE TEMPORARY TABLESPACE tempspace2 IN ibmtempgroup MANAGED BY SYSTEM USING db2temp db2inst1 NODE0000 ITSODB TEMPSPACE2 ON DBPARTITIONNUM 0 USING db2temp db2inst1 NODE0001 ITSODB TEMPSPACE2 ON DBPARTITIONNUM 1 EXTENTSIZE 8 PREFETCHSIZE 32 BUFFERPOOL ibmdefaul tbp DROP TABLESPACE tempspacel 2 2 4 Lab environment In this book we use the following systems to demonstrate DB2 installation configuration and management for the partitioned database environment gt Mensa Hostname mensa Domain itsosj sanjose ibm com Host IP address 9 43 86 90 Linux distribution SUSE SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 Partitioned database setup Chapter 2 Installation 45 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm e The partitioned instance has one logical partition node 0 initially on this physical node that is the coordinate node of the partitioned database environment We add m
410. n page 328 Chapter 6 Administering databases 327 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD Figure 6 42 Set advanced options for load operation 10 Scheduling task execution If you want to run the load operation without saving task history choose Run now without saving task history Figure 6 43 on page 329 If you want to create it as a task in the Task Center you can specify the details here 328 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm SEI fa sree Load 2 8 08 5 06 58 PM PST brani Uy yy Demieamera acii ifaniie Figure 6 43 Scheduling task execution 11 View the task summary and execute it In Figure 6 44 on page 330 the DB2 CLP commands which were generated based on your choices are displayed You may click Finish to submit the command or click Back for further modification of your choices Chapter 6 Administering databases 329 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm ard 1TEMLOAD CONNECT TO ITSODB LOAD FROM db2backup datamove item del OF DEL ME do2backup datamove loadcc msg REPLACE INTO DB2Ir AMOUNT COPY NO INDEXING MODE AUTOSELECT ISOLATI LOAD_ERRS_ONLY MODE PARTITION_AND_LOAD CONNECT RESET Figure 6 44 View task summary After running the load you can check the message files for more details regarding the load operation within the DB2 Control Center
411. n the Select the Installation response file creation or both window as shown in Figure 2 2 on page 61 we recommend you that select install DB2 and save your settings in a response file Then click Next 60 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm fdb2home db2inst1 db2wse rsp Figure 2 2 Non root installation Select Installation response file creation or both 7 On the nstallation directory window as shown in Figure 2 3 click Next db2home db2insti sqllio E Figure 2 3 Non root installation Installation directory Note Since it is a non root installation you can not change the installation directory 8 Start copying files and create response files This window provides a summary of your installation and configuration settings as shown in Figure 2 4 on page 62 Scroll through this window to verify that your settings are correct then click Finish 9 After installation read the status report tab and check for any errors If all is well click Finish Chapter 2 Installation 61 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DB2 Setup DB2 Workgroup Server Edition Version 9 5 Java support SQL procedures Base server support IBM Software Development Kit SDK for Java TM Communication support TCP IP Replication tools DB2 data source support DB2 LDAP support DB2 Instance Setup wizard First Steps Sample database source La
412. n the file in binary form Reports memory and swap space utilization statistics Sets the starting time of the data causing the sar command to extract records time tagged at or following the time specified Reports CPU utilization Reports status of inode file and other kernel tables fq Reports queue length and load averages paw Reports system switching activity 412 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Selene on OOE Reports statistics for a given process Some samples of using sar command are provided below In Example 7 31 at first sar is started with 4 command option and the output is saved in sartest bin file sar A o Sartest bin 5 60 gt dev null amp Where sartest bin is the output file name the interval is five seconds and repeat 1000 times To see the CPU utilization information since a specified starting time use the following command sar u s 14 34 00 f sartest bin more If you are loading data into DB2 database in a multiple partition environment use you can use this command to see the CPU consumption of the DB2 data load The following command can be used to get process creation fork and system context switch information sar w c s 14 34 45 e 14 35 30 f sartest bin more The following command can be used to obtain network statistics for a specific network interface sar n DEV s 14 36 00 f sartest bin egrep eth0 IFACE
413. nce DB2HOME bin db2imigr instname Where DB2HOME is the location the DB2 9 5 client is installed and instname is the instance Instead of migrate your existing client instance you can create a new one using the following command DB2HOME bin db2icrt s client instname Then import the configuration collected in step 2 4 3 Migrating single partitioned database This section describes single partitioned database migration procedure In general single partitioned database migration steps are a subset of the procedure for migrating multi partitioned database Here we provide the steps required and call out for the differences For the details in each step refer to 4 2 Migrating multi partitioned database on page 169 The following are single partitioned database server migration steps 1 Check if you can migrate your instance to your Version 9 5 that you have Save packages and table spaces information Back up DB2 configuration and diagnostics information db2support Ensure that the database do not contain any indoubt transaction Revoke the EXECUTE privilege on migrated routines from PUBLIC This is an optional step 6 Set DIAGLEVEL parameter to 3 or higher 7 Take the DB2 Version 8 or Version 9 1 databases inactive af oO DN 182 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm 8 Archive all of the DB2 log files if replication is used 9 Back up databases We s
414. nce db2pd edus In DB2 Version 9 5 the implementation of the DB2 engine has evolved from a process based model to a thread based on Linux and UNIX systems When invoking the ps command with the fu instancename option the output lists only two DB2 processes db2sysc and db2acd To display the individual threads associated with the db2sysc process you must use the applicable thread options on the ps command On Linux you can use the 1Lfp option or use the db2pd command with the new edus option As you can see from the our examples the db2pd command is a very powerful tool for problem determination To list all options use db2pd h Many more examples and information are in Troubleshooting Guide Gl11 7857 00 and Command Reference SC23 5846 00 400 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm 7 5 3 DB2 snapshot command Like the db2pd command you can use the snapshot monitor to capture information about the database and any connected applications at a specific time If you take it at regular intervals they are also useful for observing trends and foreseeing potential problems A number of different snapshot request types are available each returning a specific type of monitoring data When using the command in a partitioned database environment the snapshots can be taken at any partition of the instance or globally A global snapshot aggregates the data collected at each partiti
415. nd To install DB2 Information Center manually use the doce_install command Chapter 2 Installation 87 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 1 Log in as root 2 Decide where you want to install the documentation In our environment we created a directory called documentation which is located in the db2home directory for example db2home documentation 3 Insert and mount the DB2 Information Center DVD 4 Use doce_install command to install DB2 Information Center The syntax of the doce_install command is as follows doce_install b install_path p doce n L language b install path Specifies the path where the DB2 Information Center is to be installed The default installation path is opt ibm db2ic V9 5 This parameter is mandatory when the n parameter is specified n Specifies non interactive mode L language Specifies national language support The default is English To install multiple languages at the same time this parameter can be specified multiple times For example to install both English and Simplified Chinese specify L EN L CN For example enter the doce_install command using the following format doce_install b db2home documentation p doce n L EN L CN Note The doce_uninstall command could be used to uninstall DB2 Information Center 88 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm 3 Post installation t
416. nd OLE DB Applications SC23 5851 00 gt Developing Embedded SQL Applications SC23 5852 00 gt Developing Java Applications SC23 5853 00 gt Developing Perl and PHP Applications SC23 5854 00 gt Developing User defined Routines SQL and External SC23 5855 00 gt Getting Started with Database Application Development GC23 5856 00 gt Getting Started with DB2 installation and administration on Linux and Windows GC23 5857 00 gt Internationalization Guide SC23 5858 00 gt Message Reference Volume 1 Gl11 7855 00 gt Message Reference Volume 2 Gl11 7856 00 gt Migration Guide GC23 5859 00 gt Net Search Extender Administration and User s Guide SC23 8509 00 gt Partitioning and Clustering Guide SC23 5860 00 gt Query Patroller Administration and User s Guide SC23 8507 00 gt Quick Beginnings for IBM Data Server Clients GC23 5863 00 gt Quick Beginnings for DB2 Servers GC23 5864 00 gt Spatial Extender and Geodetic Data Management Feature User s Guide and Reference SC23 8508 00 gt SQL Reference Volume 1 SC23 5861 00 gt SQL Reference Volume 2 SC23 5862 00 gt System Monitor Guide and Reference SC23 5865 00 gt Troubleshooting Guide Gl11 7857 00 gt Tuning Database Performance SC23 5867 00 gt Visual Explain Tutorial SC23 5868 00 gt Workload Manager Guide and Reference SC23 5870 00 gt pureXML Guide SC23 5871 00 gt XQuery Reference SC23 5872 00 Online resources These We
417. nd Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm System 1 System 2 Instance 1 Instance 2 Partition 1 Partition 2 Partition 3 logical partition logical partition physical partition Partition group 1 Index 1 Table 1 Table space 1 Partition group 2 Table space 2 Index 3 Index 2 Table space 3 Long data 4 Long data 2 Long data 3 Figure 1 8 DB2 database objects in a partitioned environment You can see that in a partitioned environment the partition groups are expanded transparently across the partitions We have got 2 logical partitions on the first system and one physical logical partition on the second system Table spaces are assigned to one partition group After you add a system or a logical physical partition you just have to extend the partition groups you want to the new partition In the above example we have one partition group spanning partition 2 and partition 3 and we have one partition group which spans all 3 partitions The table data is distributed among the partitions using an updatable partitioning map and a hashing algorithm which determine the placement and retrieval of each row of data For example if a row is being added to a table the coo
418. nd server platforms in a heterogeneous environment DB2 client and server code is available for a wide variety of platforms For example the application can execute on a Windows based machine with a DB2 client for Windows which can then access a DB2 database on a Linux server Likewise the Linux machine can act as a client and access data from UNIX servers or mainframes gt Multi tier In a multi tier configuration the application DB2 client and the data source typically reside on separate systems Examples of such configurations include but are not limited to scenarios illustrated below Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Multi tier configuration examples Web browser Web Server DB2 Database Server DB2 Client Application Client Application Server DB2 Database Server 1 DB2 Client DB2 Database Server 2 Application DB2 Connect Gateway 0S 390 DB2 Client AS 400 VM VSE Application DB2 Server Secondary Data Sources for DB2 Client example Mainframe DB2 Non DB2 non relational IBM recognizes that in many cases there may be a need for accessing data from a variety of distributed data sources rather than one centralized database The data sources can be from IBM such as DB2 or Informix or non IBM databases such as Oracle or even non relational data such as files or spreadsheets As illustrated in the last scenario in the table above IBM offers the most comprehensive business integration solution by allowing federated access to a v
419. nd to check the path to log files entry db2_all db2 connect to itsodb db2 get db cfg for itsodb grep Path This change is logged in db2diag 1log as shown in Example 3 23 If you receive error messages during the change you will see additional information here Example 3 23 Entry in db2diag log for LOG change 2008 02 12 10 30 16 368903 480 13909906483 LEVEL Event PID 10434 TID 2968513440 PROC db2sysc 0 INSTANCE db2inst1 NODE 000 DB ITSODB APPHDL 0 41 APPID LOCAL db2inst1 080212175506 AUTHID DB2INST1 EDUID 61 EDUNAME db2agent ITSODB 0 FUNCTION DB2 UDB config install sqlfLogUpdateCfgParam probe 20 CHANGE CFG DB ITSODB Newlogpath From To db21log1 ITSODB 2008 02 12 10 30 43 496729 480 13914746474 LEVEL Info PID 10434 TID 2968513440 PROC db2sysc 0 INSTANCE db2inst1 NODE 000 DB ITSODB APPHDL 0 84 APPID LOCAL db2inst1 080212183043 AUTHID DB2INST1 EDUID 61 EDUNAME db2agent ITSODB 0 FUNCTION DB2 UDB data protection services sqlpgnip probe 1240 MESSAGE Active log path is moved to db210g1 ITSODB NODE0000 We also activate the mirrored logs in order to enhance the availability as shown in Example 3 24 on page 118 Example 3 24 Activate the mirror logs db2instl puget gt db2 UPDATE DB CONFIG FOR itsodb USING MIRRORLOGPATH db210g2 1TSODB DB20000I1 The UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION command completed successfully SQL1363W One or more of the parameters submitt
420. ne incremental delta use tsm Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080204091912 236 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Note To enable incremental or delta backup you need to set the TRACKMOD database configuration parameter to ON as follows db2 update db cfg for itsodb using TRACKMOD ON Once the TRACKMOD is set to ON you need to do a full database backup once before starting incremental or delta backup Backing up partitioned databases In a partitioned database environment there are three possible ways to back up the database gt Back up each database partition one at a time gt Use the db2_all command with the BACKUP DATABASE command to back up all the database partitions that you specify gt Runasingle system view SSV backup to back up some or all of the database partitions simultaneously Backup each database partition one at time is time consuming and error prone Using the db2_all command to issue the backup database command on all the database partitions simplifies and process and save some time However since the database partition containing the catalog can not be backed up simultaneously with non catalog database partitions you still have to back up the catalog database partition first then backup the rest of the database partitions Assuming that database partition 0 is the catalog partition the commands are db2_all
421. neB is configured to allow host based authentication In your partitioned database environment each partition server needs to be configured to use host based authentication and each partition server must have the ssh client and ssh server configured correctly SSH server configuration Use the following steps to configure SSH server These steps should be applied on each physical node 1 Edit the sshd_config file The sshd_config file can be found in etc ssh on Linux Log in as root Change the HostbasedAuthentication parameter to Yes as shown in Example 2 6 This allows the ssh server to accept host based authentication requests from the ssh clients We comment out the default setting and left it in the file Example 2 6 Edit the sshd_config file HostbasedAuthentication no HostbasedAuthentication yes 2 Edit the etc ssh shosts equiv file The shosts equiv file can be found in etc ssh on Linux If this file does not yet exist create the file Ensure that the file is owned by the root user and only allows user read write access group other read access See Example 2 7 Example 2 7 Create shosts equiv and modify the file properties cd etc ssh touch shosts equiv chown root root shosts equiv chmod 644 shosts equiv Each host must be able to communicate with every other host in a partitioned database environment so you must set up the shosts equiv file such that it Chapter 2 Installation 53 6899ch02 fm Draft
422. netstat 415 network 406 Network File System NFS 47 48 NFS 46 415 NFS server machine 43 nfsstat 415 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm No cascade before 420 no_root_squash 48 nodegroups 15 non root 36 normal state 173 notification 38 39 349 351 353 354 362 NUM_POOLAGENTS 132 O object setting 356 ODBC 3 426 offline backup 225 offline reorganization 276 OLAP 3 OLD DB 426 OLTP 12 online backup 236 online table reorganization 276 Oracle RAC 18 OS 390 11 outline view 210 P package cache 129 package group 198 paging 409 parallel O 96 parallel processing 16 parallelism 3 parameter 29 partial declustering 22 partition group 15 21 partitioned database environment 45 PDO_IBM 431 PDO_ODBC 431 performance 2 42 Perl 4 425 426 Perl Database Interface 426 personal digital assistants PDAs 10 perspective 208 pgrep 415 PHP 4 425 physical partition 21 physical storage devices 15 pkill 415 pointin time 226 pop up window 353 processor time 406 68991X fm processors 18 procps 409 programming laguage 425 project explorer 212 Project Management 195 protocol 64 76 194 proxy component 12 pstree 414 public key based authentication 53 Python 4 Q query 13 R rah 482 raw device 35 39 97 real time statistics 178 rebind package 177 reboot 409 recommendation 166 recoverable database 225 recovery history file 231 recovery log 15 recovery time 4
423. ng command formats the output of db2diag to only show the time stamp database partition number the message level and the message text db2diag fmt Time ts Partition node Message Level level n Message msg n gt DB2 internal error return codes To get the description about a DB2 internal error code 0x860FOO0A db2diag rc 0x860FO00A To display a list of all DB2 ZRC return codes available enter db2diag rc zrc The different options can be combined There are a lot more options available use the command db2diag h to see all options of db2diag The output is shown in Example 7 18 To display more details and examples use command db2diag h tutorial for instance Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 395 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 7 18 Output of db2diag help db2inst1 mensa gt db2diag help db2diag The db2diag log Analysis Tool db2diag is a tool for filtering and formatting the db2diag log file Command syntax V gt gt db2diag i S option filename Command parameters filename one or more space separated path names of diagnostic logs help h help information To get help on help try db2diag h h filter g case sensitive search for a list of field pattern pairs gi case insensitive search for a list of field pattern pairs gV case sensitive invert matching gvi gt giv case insens
424. ng command to the user profile under user s home directory INSTHOME profile SINSTHOME sql1ib db2profile db2profile contains all settings that allow users to work with DB2 databases Do not modify this file because db2profile will be replaced after installing a FixPak If you want to make changes specific to your environment make changes in INSTHOME sq 1ib userprofile which is called by db2profile This file is useful for setting special environment variables such as TSM parameters Notes gt INSTHOME should be replaced with the actual value of the home directory of the instance gt DB2 provides db2cshrc under INSTHOME sqllib for csh users to set up the DB2 environment 3 2 4 Multiple partitioned specific configuration In DB2 a database partition is a part of the database which consists of its own data indexes configuration files and transaction logs Partitions are used to create clustered databases where one logical database is split on several systems The partitions can be on the same system logical partitions or on a different system physical partitions Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 101 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Figure 3 4 shows the file system layout for our sample partitioned database db2home lt instance gt is the instance home directory In the partitioned database environment db2home is an NFS mount to export db2home on the first system The other dat
425. ng non unicode XML database support are added Data compression enhancements Data compression dictionaries can be automatically created during data population operations on tables for which you have defined the COMPRESS attribute that means DB2 can automatically compress the data without DBA intervention Database backup enhancements DB2 9 5 can automatically delete backup images load copy images and old log files that are no longer needed for recovery There are new options for automated backup such as compression incremental and delta backups and log files in backup In addition rolling forward to minimum recovery time is possible now with new TO END OF BACKUP parameter 4 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm gt Workload Manager The workload management features help you to identify manage and monitor data server workloads These features provide the first workload management solution truly integrated into the DB2 data server Support for identity assertion enables you to provide workload management for individual users or groups in a multi tier application environment By associating workload definitions to service classes each unique workload can be prioritized using either a predictive or reactive model This allows businesses to align their business goals with their IT applications gt Multithreaded architecture extensions DB2 uses a multithreaded architecture whic
426. nguage http www php net How to get IBM Redbooks You can search for view or download Redbooks Redpapers Hints and Tips draft publications and Additional materials as well as order hardcopy Redbooks or CD ROMs at this Web site ibm com redbooks 498 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Index Symbols nfy 389 Xauthority 91 etc 393 Numerics 2 tier 10 64 bit 2 A access path 177 access plan 435 active log file 230 admin_cmd stored procedure 298 administration notification log 183 363 administration server 36 ADO NET 425 AMD 2 analysis tool 393 APIs 348 application client 11 archive logging 119 224 archive storage pool 234 AS 400 11 automatic backup 245 automatic statistics collection 178 automatic storage 167 automatic storage paths 260 availability 17 availability monitoring 196 availability requirement 226 B backup 42 backup image 4 backup image file 250 backup pending state 173 backup storage pool 234 backup strategy 226 benchmarks 2 bio informatics 2 block device 97 Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 68991X fm block IO 409 bookmarks 211 buffer pool 16 95 buffer pool size 377 built in function 421 business intelligence 2 Cc cache 18 catalog table space 95 catalog tables 95 cataloged system 92 central processing unit CPU 410 centralized database 11 chown 392 circular logging 119 224 CLI 3 CLP 29
427. nguages English All Products Target directory db2home db2inst1 sq Space required 393 MB New instances Instance name db2inst1 Start instance on reboot Yes TCP IP configuration Figure 2 4 Non root installation Installation summary window Note In this case the setup logs are located in tmp db2setup_db2inst1 log and tmp db2setup_db2inst1 err Response file install Unlike the DB2 Setup wizard a DB2 response file installation let you install DB2 products without any user interaction A response file is an English only text file that contains setup and configuration information A response file specifies configuration and setup parameters and the products and components to install Response files have a file type of rsp for example db2wse rsp See Figure 2 2 on page 61 However you have the option to change the name and destination directory while using the DB2 Setup wizard Creating a response file You can run the DB2 Setup wizard in graphical mode once and capture the values you enter to a response file 62 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm You also can create the response file manually by using the templates provided The response files have a rsp extension and are located in the mnt dvd db2 inux samples or mnt dvd db2 inuxamd64 samples directory on the DB2 product DVD where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the CD or DVD Note On
428. ning considerations sasaaa anaa 167 iv Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899TOC fm 4 1 3 Migration test consideration 0 00 eee ee eee 168 4 2 Migrating multi partitioned database eee eae 169 4 2 1 Pre migration taskS 1 0 2 ssaa eee ee 169 4 2 2 Install DB2 Version 9 5 0 0 ce ee 174 4 2 3 Migrating instances and databases 000000 174 4 2 4 Post migration tasks 0 2 suauu ce eee 176 4 2 5 Enabling new DB2 9 5 functionality 005 178 4 2 6 Migrating the DB2 Administration Server 178 4 2 7 Migrating DB2 clients 0 2 cee ee 180 4 3 Migrating single partitioned database 00000 eee 182 4 4 32 bit to 64 bit conversion 6 2 6 et eee 184 4 5 Migrating to anew database 0 ce ee 185 4 6 Fix pack installation 2 2 0 0 eae 190 Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 000000 193 5 1 INtOGUCHION e ved a aeepa eae a ese he ee ee bees Pea ete 194 5 2 Installato seprana eee 196 5 2 1 Installing IBM Data Studio 1 0 0 0 0 00 0 cee eee 196 5 2 2 Installing IBM Data Studio Administration Console 203 5 2 3 Migration from the Developer Workbench 206 5 3 Features and functions 0 arrana naran ee 206 5 3 1 Terminology 00 ce eee 207 5 3 2 Team function 0 0 ee eee 212 5 3 3 XML
429. nistering databases 251 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Full database restore with incremental The best way to restore an incremental backup image is to use the AUTO option DB2 will collect the needed backup images full and incremental to restore the database db2 restore db itsodb incremental auto from db2backup taken at 20080204091912 If you want to know which backup images are required to restore an incremental backup you can use the db2ckrst command as follows db2ckrst d itsodb t 20080204091912 The command queries the database history and generates a list of timestamps for the backup images and suggested restore order Rollforward recovery To use the rollforward recovery method the database must be set up as a recoverable database At the end of the restore operation the database will be in rollforward pending state which gives you the possibility to roll forward the database to a specific point in time or to the end of log Note Restore and roll forward of the database is done in two steps using the RESTORE and the ROLLFORWARD commands You can use the RECOVER command to restore and roll forward the database with only one command db2 recover database itsodb The RECOVER command reads the database history file to get all needed information to restore and roll forward the database You can check the progress of the rollforward with the command db2 rollforward db itsodb query status
430. nnect to itsodb Database Connection Information Database server DB2 LINUX 9 5 0 SQL authorization ID DB2INST1 Local database alias ITSODB db2instl puget gt db2 get snapshot for database on itsodb grep i storage Number of automatic storage paths 1 Automatic storage path database datal db2inst1 puget gt db2 alter database itsodb add storage on database data2 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully 100 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm db2instl puget gt db2 get snapshot for database on itsodb grep i storage Number of automatic storage paths 2 Automatic storage path database datal Automatic storage path database data2 Note More information about the automatic storage feature can be found in the Information Center in Automatic storage section http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21uw v9r5 topic com ibm db2 luw a dmin dbobj doc doc c0052484 htm1 3 2 3 Linux specific configuration In order to access DB2 each Linux user must set up his or her Linux environment During creation of an instance DB2 creates a subdirectory named sqllib in the instance home directory INSTHOME In this directory there are important files such as db2nodes cfg db2profile and userprofile These files are used to set up the DB2 environment To set up a user environment to use DB2 every time the user logs on to the Linux system add the followi
431. not put any non automatic backup images in this directory as they will also be pruned Config J 4 Back Next gt Finish Cancel Figure 6 12 select maintenance activity Configure automatic backup using the CLP Enabling the automatic maintenance features is controlled by the automatic maintenance database configuration parameters as shown in Example 6 19 Example 6 19 Automatic maintenance parameters db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 get db cfg for itsodb grep Automatic Automatic maintenance AUTO_MAINT ON Automatic database backup AUTO_DB BACKUP OFF Automatic table maintenance AUTO_TBL_MAINT ON Automatic runstats AUTO_RUNSTATS ON Automatic statement statistics AUTO _STMT_STATS OFF Automatic statistics profiling AUTO_STATS_PROF OFF Automatic profile updates AUTO_PROF_UPD OFF Automatic reorganization AUTO_REORG OFF To configure automatic backup using the command line interface you have to set AUTO_MAINT and AUTO_DB_BACKUP to ON Chapter 6 Administering databases 247 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Configure automatic backup using AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICY DB2 provides a stored procedure AUTOMAINT_SET_POLICY to specify your automated maintenance policy for automatic backup also for AUTO_REORG and AUTO_RUNSTATS as well as to set the days and times for the online and offline maintenance windows Note The DB2 built
432. nput database alias ITSODB Number of accessed tables 21 Table List Table Schema DB2INST1 Table Name ITEM Table Type User Data Object Pages 3697 Index Object Pages 3101 Rows Read Not Collected Rows Written 8251179 Overflows 0 Page Reorgs 8921 Table Reorg Information Node number 0 Reorg Type Reclustering Inplace Table Reorg Allow Write Access Reorg Index Reorg Tablespace 7 Start Time 02 13 2008 14 35 11 064496 Reorg Phase Max Phase Phase Start Time Status Truncate Current Counter 1850 Max Counter 3696 Completion 0 End Time 294 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Database Partition 0 Database ITSODB Active Up 0 days 05 03 34 Table Reorg Information Address TbspaceID TableID PartID MasterTbs MasterTab TableName Type IndexID TempSpaceID 0x00002B6A7E8F1B28 7 4 n a n a n a ITEM Online 1 7 Table Reorg Stats Address TableName Start End PhaseStart MaxPhase Phase CurCount MaxCount Status Completion 0x00002B6A7E8F1B28 ITEM 02 13 2008 14 35 11 n a n a n a n a 1850 3696 Truncat 0 Table Snapshot First database connect timestamp 02 13 2008 09 32 59 904159 Last reset timestamp Snapshot timestamp 02 13 2008 14 36 34 887245 Database name ITSODB Database path database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00002 Input database alias ITSODB Number of accessed tables 21 Table List Tab
433. ntegration and Content Management Gateway to mainframe and host data Retail financial public sector and manufacturing applications Life sciences and bio informatics solutions Store for spatial and geographical systems High Performance Computing applications including vvvvvvvvvy 2 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm Financial modeling Oil and gas exploration Research and scientific Despite implementing a wide array of solutions in different industries customers of DB2 for Linux generally talk about a few common themes regarding the benefits they derive Foremost among them is the exceptional value that DB2 for Linux delivers DB2 is renowned for critical self tuning and self healing features The Self tuning Memory Manager STMM automatic storage and others autonomic maintenance features make DB2 easy to use and maintain while spending less time managing it IBM s alliances with all the major Linux distributors and the ability to get 24x7 support for both DB2 and Linux directly from IBM provides added piece of mind DB2 Version 9 5 extends its innovative abilities as a hybrid data server and cost savings of deep compression to enable rapid use of data staying ahead of threats and extracting the full value of XML data in operational processes The following sections provide an overview of DB2 s features and product offerings available on Linux as well as the
434. ntents State Detailed Normal explanation ID explanation ID explanation ID explanation Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm System managed space System Temporary data 0x0000 2 USERSPACE1 Database managed space All permanent data Large table space 0x0000 3 TBSP32K0000 System managed space All permanent data Regular table 0x0000 4 TBSP32KTMP0000 System managed space System Temporary data 0x0000 DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table spaces on the current node are listed db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 select substr tbspace 1 15 TBSPACE tbspaceid substr dbpgname 1 15 DBPGNAME bufferpoolid from syscat tablespaces TBSPACE TBSPACEID BUFFERPOOLID SYSCATSPACE TEMPSPACE1 USERSPACE1 TBSP32K0000 TBSP32KTMP0000 5 record s selected 1 1 IBMDEFAULTGROUP 1 2 2 db2inst1 Mensa gt db2 select substr bpname 1 15 BPNAME bufferpoolid substr dbpgname 1 15 DBPG npages pagesize from syscat bufferpools Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax02 fm BPNAME BUFFERPOOLID DBPG NPAGES PAGESIZE IBMDEFAULTBP 1 1000 4096 BP32K0000 2 250 32768 2 record s selected In the preceding example the table spaces TBSP32K0000 with table space ID 3 and TBSP32KTMP0000 with table space ID 4 were created automatically by the CREATE TOOLS CATALOG command each with a page size of 32K The f
435. null INTEGER Set to nun Figure 8 37 Enter run parameter The output can be seen in the Data Output view See Figure 8 38 Properties Tasks Problems Error Log Model Report Bg Data Output 2 Bookmarks m Action Object Name SAMPLE DB2INST1 EMPSALARY IN SALARY INTEGER aje lt 2 Success Run EMPSALARY Messages Parameters Results Profiling Data v Success Deploy EMPSALARY ee Buces SHUN EmpSalary sql SCHNEIDER E11 OPERATIONS 200810 SPRINGER E11 OPERATIONS 000310 SETRIGHT E11 OPERATIONS 000230 PARKER E11 OPERATIONS 200630 WONG E21 SOFTWARE SUPPORT 200040 ALONZO E21 SOFTWARE SUPPORT Figure 8 38 Run the stored procedure Alternatively you can run the stored procedure from the command line as following db2 call EMPSALARY 37000 If you want to debug the procedure set a breakpoint in the procedure select Debug instead of the Run when you right click on EMPSALARY The Run Configuration window is presented See Figure 8 39 478 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm ka 6899ch08 fm 4 X Ei 8 Apache Tomcat gt O DB2 Stored Procedure Eclipse Application Equinox OSGi Framewor 8 Generic Server F Generic Server External E Java Applet v D Java Application O New_configuration Ju JUnit Jf JUnit Plug in Test a Remote Java Application Easwr Application Name
436. ny indoubt transactions by using the LIST INDOUBT TRANSACTIONS command to get a list of indoubt transactions and to interactively resolve any indoubt transactions During the database migration to DB2 Version 8 the EXECUTE privilege is granted to public for all existing functions methods and external stored procedures You can use the db2undgp command to revoke this privilege on all these routines db2undgp is no longer supported in DB2 9 5 If you want to revoke the EXECUTE privilege using this command you have to do it before the migration to DB2 9 5 If you ran the db2undgp command after migrating your databases to DB2 UDB Version 8 or DB2 9 1 you do not have to run this command again after migrating to DB2 9 5 Example 4 4 shows a db2undgp execution In this example a file that contains all the REVOKE statements needed to remove the EXECUTE privilege from PUBLIC is created You can review or edit this file Example 4 4 db2undgp dpfusrl mensa gt db2undgp d dpfsamp o dpfhome dpfusr1 revoke db2 db2undgp processing begins for database dpfsamp db2undgp has completed successfully db2undgp complete successfully for database dpfsamp Grant the EXECUTE privilege on all your routines to specific users or group only The following statement shows how to grant this privilege on all functions under a specific schema db2 grant execute on function lt schema name gt to lt user gt If the DIAGLEVEL parameter is set to 2 or less s
437. o Version 9 5 Some problems may occur if you migrate your clients first If you have 32 bit instances and you migrate to DB2 9 5 on a 64 bit system you need to manage incompatibilities due to the shared library path specification and discontinued features to run successfully your applications and routines The files SQLSPCS 1 and SQLSPCS 2 contain table space information During migration from DB2 UDB Version 8 to DB2 9 5 these files grow to four times their previous size but the total data size on disk does not exceed the new size of the SQLSPCS 1 and SQLSPCS 2 files Ensure that you have sufficient free space in the tmp directory on the machine where you will be migrating an instance The instance migration trace file is written to tmp The minimum size required is 20MB Ensure that you have sufficient space in the file system where the table spaces of the databases you are migrating are located Additional space is required for both old and new database catalogs during migration The Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 165 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 166 amount of required space depends on your system but some general recommendations are provided in Table 4 1 on page 166 Table 4 1 Space recommendations for migration Table space Space recommendation System catalog space gt For SMS table spaces you should allocate SYSCATSPACE 2x the space currently occupied For DMS table spaces fr
438. o the Task Center import an existing script or Chapter 6 Administering databases 335 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm save the options from a DB2 dialog or wizard such as the Load wizard A script can contain DB2 commands SQL or operating system commands For each task by using the Task Center you can do the following gt Schedule the task gt Specify success and failure conditions gt Specify actions that should be performed when this task completes successfully or when it fails gt Specify e mail addresses including pagers that should be notified when this task completes successfully or when it fails You can specify conditional coding by creating task actions Each task action consists of a task and the action that should be performed by the task For example task one can have the following task actions gt If task one is successful task action A enables the schedule for task two gt If task one fails task action B runs task three The following is a sample with detailed steps to create a task within the Task Center Task scheduling is also included 1 Start the Task Center and create a new task Figure 6 46 on page 337 336 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Task Center ommand Testing task for demonstrat mensa Figure 6 46 Task Center main panel 2 General information input for a new task is
439. oad wizard in the Control Center by calling the ADMIN_CMD stored procedure or an application programming interface API dbo2Load Data for load can be in the form of a file tape or named pipe Data can also be loaded from a cursor defined from a query running against the currently connected database or a different database under the same instance or by using a user written script or application You can use the LIST UTILITIES or LOAD QUERY command to monitor the progress of the load operation Load table data through CLP Example 6 51 shows a simple LOAD command issued through the CLP Example 6 51 LOAD from command line db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 create table itemload like item in TSDATA2 DB200001 The SQL command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 export to item del of del select from item SQL3104N The Export utility is beginning to export data to file item del SQL3105N The Export utility has finished exporting 3000000 rows Number of rows exported 3000000 db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load from item del of del insert into itemload Agent Type Node SQL Code Result LOAD 000 00000000 Success LOAD 001 00000000 Success 306 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm PARTITION 001 00000000 Success PRE_PARTITION 000 00000000 Success RESULTS 2 of 2 LOADs completed successfully Summary o
440. ocessed In many environments the data volumes are growing ata phenomenal rate therefore a database management system needs to be able to easily scale to increased loads with the addition of more disks and CPUs DB2 s parallel technology enables highly scalable performance on large databases by breaking the processing into separate execution components that can be run concurrently on multiple processors Elapsed times for queries can be dramatically reduced by processing the individual queries in parallel DB2 supports a scalable growth path to easily add more processing power to an existing system by either scaling up SMP or scaling out MPP or both 1 4 1 SMP environments In the past complex enterprise workloads have typically run on high end SMP symmetric multi processor machines A large number of processors running within the same machine and connected with a high bandwidth bus can deliver excellent performance Because DB2 for Linux shares much of its code with DB2 running on high end UNIX systems it inherits the ability to exploit SMP architectures DB2 s ability to run on SMP systems is only restricted by today s Linux SMP scalability DB2 can take advantage of multiple processors easily without setting up a clustered system This is called intra parallelism 16 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm Very Large Database Figure 1 4 Database on a large S
441. ode exit sqlca sqlcode In Example 8 12 we compile and run the program The precompile step generates the c and the bnd file The first cc step compiles the C program and the second cc step links it Example 8 12 Run the embedded SQL program db2instl puget gt db2 connect to SAMPLE Database Connection Information DB2 LINUX 9 5 0 DB2INST1 SAMPLE Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2instl puget gt db2 precompile test_emb sqc bindfile package LINE MESSAGES FOR test_emb sqc SQLOO60W The C precompiler is in progress SQLO091W Precompilation or binding was ended with 0 errors and 0 warnings db2inst1 puget gt cc c I home db2inst1 sqllib include test_emb c db2inst1 puget gt cc o test_emb L home db2inst1 sqllib lib ldb2 test_emb o db2inst1 puget gt test_emb 000290 000310 200310 200330 200340 Chapter 8 Application development 437 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm If you want to run this program on another database you have to bind the package first by issuing the following command db2 bind test_emb bnd Otherwise you ll receive a 805 SQL error Note More documentation can be found in Developing Embedded SQL Applications SC23 5852 00 Administrative API The administrative API offers an application interface for different programming languages It allows you to perform a variety of administrative commands on the database f
442. of Linux You can use the block device as DB2 DMS table space container now The block device method uses Direct I O to achieve an equivalent performance compared to using the character device method File system configuration We recommend that you create different partitions during your Linux OS installation It has become customary for certain basic directories such as Chapter 2 Installation 41 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2home or software in our example to be placed in separate file systems or partitions for several reasons gt Disk capacity There is a limited amount of space on each disk and you might run out of space if you use a single disk for multiple purposes gt Performance The root directory has to be searched linearly every time any path name in Linux is accessed If the root directory is cluttered this will impair performance of the entire system gt Backup It is better to separate important and frequently changing data from massive and seldom changing data This way you can save system resources by backing up some file systems more frequently than others gt User convenience It s easier to find things if the naming convention is well organized File system configuration or partitioning is typically performed by using the fdisk tool For SUSE you can also use the graphical YaST tool Linux provides several journal file system formats such as ext3 JFS
443. ofileO ser icc sqlj Begin Bind icc sqlj Loading profile test_sqlj_SJProfiled icc sqlj Driver defaults user may override BLOCKING ALL VALIDATE BIND STATICREADONLY YES icc sqlj Fixed driver options DATETIME ISO DYNAMICRULES BIND icc sqlj Binding package TEST S01 at isolation level UR jcc sqlj Binding package TEST S02 at isolation level CS icc sqlj Binding package TEST S03 at isolation level RS icc sqlj Binding package TEST_S04 at isolation level RR icc sqlj Bind complete for test_sqlj_SJProfiled db2inst1 puget gt DB2JAVA jdk32 bin java classpath DB2JAVA db2jcc jar test_sqlj 200340 31840 0 000290 35340 0 000310 35900 0 Chapter 8 Application development 443 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 200310 35900 0 200330 35370 0 On 64 bit systems the path jdk32 needs to be replaced by the path jdk64 If you want to run the java code on another database you have to bind the package there first For that you need the file with the suffix ser and run the following command db2sqljbind url jdbc db2 localhost lt port gt SAMPLE user db2inst2 password lt password gt test_sqlj_SJProfile0 ser Like embedded SQL programs in C SQLJ also use a precompiled access path at runtime Therefore no compilation of the SQL statements happens at runtime You can also grant access to the users on package level instead on table level Stored procedures in Java
444. ollowing command cd mnt dvd where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the DVD 4 Enter db2setup to launch the DB2 Setup wizard 5 Once the launchpad opens you can view installation prerequisites and the release notes or you can proceed directly to the installation Click Install a Product and the Install a Product window displays 7 On the Install a Product page if you do not have an existing DB2 Information Center installed on your computer launch the installation by clicking Install New On the Welcome to the DB2 Setup wizard page click Next The DB2 Setup wizard will guide you through the program setup process To proceed with the installation you must accept the license agreement On the Software License Agreement page select Accept and click Next 10 On the Select installation response file creation or both window select Install DB2 Information Center on this computer and save my settings in a response file if you want to use a response file to install the DB2 Information Center on this or other computers at a later time You can specify where the response file will be saved Click Next 11 On the Select the languages to install panel Figure 2 18 select the languages the DB2 Information Center will install By default the DB2 Information Center is installed in the opt ibm db2ic V9 5 directory However you can specify your own installation path Click Next 86 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux
445. om remote computers via a secure shell This package is not required if you use the default configuration of DB2 with rsh This package contains a set of server programs which allow users to run commands on remote computers log in to other computers and copy files between computers rsh rexec rlogin and rcp This package is not required if you configure DB2 to use ssh Chapter 2 Installation 33 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm nfs utils SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 Network File System support nfs utils 1 0 7 36 21 x86_64 rpm package It allows access for RHEL 5 x86_64 local files to remote nfs utils lib 1 0 8 7 2 22 x86_64 r computers pm a For RHEL 5 both 32 bit and 64 bit compat libstdc packages are required for 32 bit applications to run b For SLES 10 and RHEL 5 ksh is required instead of pdksh To check whether you have these packages installed use the rpm q command For instance to check whether pdksh has been installed enter the following command rpm qa grep compat libstdc To install these packages on Red Hat and SUSE use rpm ivh command For example to install compat libstdc on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 10 on x86_64 mount the SLES 10 SP 1 x86_64 DVD 1 and enter the following command rpm ivh mnt dvd suse x86_64 compat 1ibstdct 5 0 7 22 2 x86_64 rpm gt If your Red Hat distribution has X Window System software you can install these package
446. omponents except for the Base application development tools Click the View Features button to see what components will get installed Compact installs only basic DB2 features and functionality Custom allows you install whatever components you want An advantage of the Custom option is that it allows you to install the Base application development tools with DB2 With the Typical option the Base application development requires a separate installation 7 You can use db2setup i lt anguage gt to run the DB2 Setup wizard in another language Chapter 2 Installation 65 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DB2 Setup DB2 Enterprise Server Edition Version 9 5 J cuiii MEGTETT maw Fidan Figure 2 5 Root installation Select the installation type 7 On the Select the Installation response file creation or both window Figure 2 6 on page 66 we recommend you that select install DB2 and save your settings in a response file Then click Next Figure 2 6 Root installation Select installation response file creation or both 66 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 8 On the Select the installation directory window as shown in Figure 2 7 on page 67 click Next jopt ibm db2 Y9 5 E Figure 2 7 Root installation Select the installation directory 9 On the next windows as shown in Figure 2 8 you can choose to inst
447. on db2setup command with a response file silent install gt db2_install utility DB2 Setup wizard For non root installation you can use DB2 Setup wizard as follows 1 Ask Linux system administrator who has root authority to mount DB2 product CD or DVD using the following command mount t iso9660 o ro dev dvd mnt dvd Where mnt dvd represents the mount point of the CD or DVD 2 Log in as anon root user run db2setup and select Install a Product on the first window Note If you use X Window System software you may need to set the DISPLAY variable for non root user to starting a Java based graphical tool You can get the DISPLAY variable setting from root user For example as root enter the following command echo DISPLAY 127 0 0 1 1 0 This shows the DISPLAY variable for root user is 127 0 0 1 1 0 You need run xhost command to allow clients access at first For example as root enter the following command xhost 127 0 0 1 Then as the non root user enter the following command export DISPLAY 127 0 0 1 1 0 3 Select Install New On Welcome to the DB2 Setup Wizard window click Next 4 On Software License Agreement window read the license agreement and then select Accept and click Next 5 Select the installation type as show in Figure 2 1 on page 60 You may choose a Typical Compact or Custom installation 6 You can use db2setup i lt language gt to run the DB2 Setup wizard in another
448. on and returns a single set of values Example 7 21 has two samples showing the difference Example 7 21 global snapshot db2instl mensa gt db2_all db2 get snapshot for all on itsodb grep Locks held currently Locks held currently 1 mensa db2 get snapshot for completed ok Locks held currently 8 gemini db2 get snapshot for completed ok db2instl mensa s gt db2 get snapshot for all on itsodb global l grep Locks held currently Locks held currently 9 db2inst1 mensa gt db2_all db2 get snapshot for all on itsodb grep Lock list Lock list memory in use Bytes 5888 mensa db2 get snapshot for completed ok 3392 Lock list memory in use Bytes gemini db2 get snapshot for completed ok db2inst1 mensa gt db2 get snapshot for all on itsodb global grep Lock list Lock list memory in use Bytes 9280 In 6 2 2 Manual table maintenance on page 275 we used the GET SNAPSHOT command from DB2 command line CLP to monitor the inplace table reorganization You can also capture a snapshot from administrative views SQL table functions or by using the snapshot monitor APIs in a C or C application There are several snapshot administrative views available for you to query the snapshot information Example 7 22 shows the list Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 401 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 402 Example 7 22 Snapshot administrative views
449. on the AIX HP UX Linux Solaris and Windows platforms For more information about the IBM Data Server clients and installation requirement details refer to Quick Beginnings for IBM Data Server Clients GC23 5863 00 3 8 1 Installing IBM Data Server Client Once you have checked the prerequisites as specified in 2 1 Basic requirements on page 26 perform the following tasks to install IBM Data Server Client 1 Insert and mount the product DVD Change to the directory where the DVD is mounted or the install image resides Run db2setup command to start the DB2 Setup Wizard Choose Install a Product when the DB2 launchpad opens Select the client you want to install af oO NM Follow the DB2 Setup wizards instructions to install the client Note With DB2 Version 9 5 you can install the IBM Data Server Client without root privileges The DB2 installer automatically creates and configures a non root instance during the non root installation Non root installation includes most of the functionality of root installation There are differences and limitations such as DB2 Control Center and the Configuration Assistant are not available Please see 2 3 1 Non root installation on page 58 for more information If not already done during the installation you have to create a Data Server Client instance using the following command as root user In our case we create a DB2 Data Server Client instance called db2vs opt ibm
450. onment the import utility can be enabled to use buffered inserts This reduces the messaging that occurs when data is imported resulting in better performance However since details about a failed buffered 304 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm insert are not returned this option should only be enabled if you are not concerned about error reporting Use the DB2 bind utility to request buffered inserts capability The import package db2uimpm bnd must be rebound against the database using the INSERT BUF option See Example 6 50 Example 6 50 Enable INSERT BUF for IMPORT in a partitioned database db2instl mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information Database server DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 SQL authorization ID DB2INST1 Local database alias ITSODB db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 bind sqllib bnd db2uimpm bnd insert buf LINE MESSAGES FOR db2uimpm bnd SQLO061W The binder is in progress SQLOO91N Binding was ended with 0 errors and 0 warnings For more information regarding using IMPORT for example using IMPORT with Large Objects XML data or identity columns refer to Data Movement Utilities Guide and Reference SC23 5847 00 and Command Reference SC23 5846 00 6 3 3 Load data from files into database tables The load utility provides an efficient way to move large quantity data into new or existing tables The util
451. onsider using the following features Self tuning memory Large RIDs record identifiers Data compression Label based access control Trusted context YYYY Y If you are coming from Version 9 and have already using the features above now you may want to enable the new DB2 9 5 features The same way if you were from Version 8 gt Enable automatic agent configuration for your databases gt Enable the use of non buffered I O operations gt Enable automatic statistics collection that use real time statistics gt Enable the use of the Workload Manager functionality gt In partitioned database environments take advantage of single system view backups by issuing the BACKUP DB command with the ON ALL DBPARTITIONNUMS clause You can find more details in Chapter 6 Administering databases on page 223 4 2 6 Migrating the DB2 Administration Server In a partitioned database system a separate DAS service typically runs on each machine in the cluster This allows each machine to act as a coordinator node for requests issued to the instance from the Control Center or Configuration Assistant This reduces the overhead that exists when one administrative coordinator node is spread across multiple partitions in an instance and helps to balance incoming connections If you are running in a single partition you still have to migrate DAS to use the Control Center If you do not want to keep your existing configuration you can just drop
452. ontrol Center Figure 6 4 Database context menu Choosing Configure Database Logging opens the Wizard as shown in Figure 6 5 Configure Database Logging Wizard Figure 6 5 Configure Database Logging Wizard 228 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Choose Archive Logging and on the next page let DB2 automatically archive the log files You need to update the primary archive log path as shown in Figure 6 6 Configure Database Logging Wizard db2archive Figure 6 6 Primary archive log path You can go through all the pages to configure all the related database logging parameters After enabling log archiving DB2 sets the database in backup pending state to ensure a full offline backup is taken before starting with log archiving To do the backup in a single database partition environment use the following command db2 backup db itsodb to db2backup In a partitioned database environment there are different ways to take the backup We explain in more detail under 6 1 4 Backup utility on page 235 For now Example 6 1 on page 230 shows one way of backing up a partitioned database Chapter 6 Administering databases 229 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 6 1 Back up all database partitions db2inst1 mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb on all dbpartitionnums to db2backup Part Result 0000 DB20000I The BACKU
453. or an object for example an instance is down the health monitor raises an alert There are three types of alerts attention warning and alarm Any time an alert is raised the health monitor may take any of the following actions to report it gt Record the alert information in the Journal all alarm alerts are written to the Journal gt Send alert notifications through e mail or a pager address to the person responsible for the system 348 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm gt Carry out one or more predefined actions for example running a task You can use DB2 commands or APIs to retrieve health information from the health monitor allowing you to integrate DB2 health monitoring with existing system wide monitoring solutions 7 1 2 Monitoring with the Health Center The Health Center provides the graphical interface to the health monitor You use it to configure the health monitor to define the threshold values for desired health indicators and related activities when the threshold values are exceeded for example a notification to DBA or a follow up task will be executed You can also use Health Center to view the rolled up alert state of your instances and database objects Using the health monitor s drill down capability you can access details about current alerts and obtain a list of recommended actions that describe how to resolve the alert You can star
454. or the production environment Additional DB2 Enterprise features Additional DB2 Workgroup and Express features Products for accessing legacy and host data vvvy Chapter 1 Introduction 7 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DB2 packages for the production environment DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows provides different packages for users to select based on their business need This section introduces the various DB2 packages DB2 Express C Edition DB2 Express C 9 5 is a fully functional edition of the DB2 data server and is available for download and deployment at no charge DB2 Express C helps developers midmarket partners and multibranch companies accelerate their time to value and reduce total cost of ownership DB2 Express C 9 5 includes pureXML and the autonomic features available in the larger enterprise editions To upgrade to the other editions of DB2 9 5 you simply install the license certificate with no changes to your application code The no charge edition of DB2 Express C can utilize up to two processor cores and 2 GB of memory while a licensed support option can use four cores and 4 GB of memory DB2 Express Edition DB2 Express 9 5 is a full function DB2 data server which provides very attractive entry level pricing for the small and medium business SMB market DB2 Express 9 5 includes the same autonomic manageability features of the more scalable editions You never have to change your
455. orage management for table spaces When you create a database you specify the storage paths where the database manager will place your table space data The database manager will manage the container and space allocation for the table spaces as you create and populate them Databases are created with automatic storage on by default If you do not want to enable it create the database with the option AUTOMATIC STORAGE NO Note You cannot change the automatic storage setting after a database was created For an automatic storage enabled database you have the option to create table spaces to be managed automatically or not using MANAGED BY clause MANAGED BY AUTOMATIC STORAGE specifies the storage of a table space to be managed by database manager automatically MANAGED BY SYSTEM or MANAGED BY DATABASE define the storage of a table space to be managed manually If you omit the MANAGED BY clause the table space is managed by automatic storage If you have not enabled your database for automatic storage you cannot specify the option MANAGED BY AUTOMATIC STORAGE In Example 3 7 we create a database with automatic storage enabled and add one path for automatic storage The snapshot data shows the storage path for the database Example 3 7 Create a database with automatic storage enabled db2instl puget gt db2 create database itsodb on database datal DB20000I1 The CREATE DATABASE command completed successfully db2instl puget gt db2 co
456. ore logical partitions later e The partitioned instance s home directory db2home is exported from this machine Gemini Hostname gemini Domain itsosj sanjose ibm com Host IP Address 9 43 86 94 Linux Distribution SUSE SLES 10 SP1 x86_64 Partitioned database setup e The partitioned instance has one logical partition node 1 on this physical node We add more logical partitions later 2 2 5 Setting up NFS for a partitioned database environment installation 46 If you have a configuration that uses more than one machine for a single database instance you must configure communications before installing DB2 In this section we discuss how to set up ssh and Network File System NFS In order to get NFS up and running you need to configure the etc exports and etc fstab files The exports file is configured on the server side and specifies which directories are to be shared with which clients and the access rights for each client The fstab file is configured on the client side and specifies which servers to contact for each directory as well as where to place them in the directory tree In this section we lead you through the steps that are required to set up NFS gt gt Get the NFS service running on each machine in the cluster On a single machine in the cluster the NFS server create a file system to be used as the instance home directory if not already created Mount this file sy
457. ose add Cnange Test Connection x Test Connection ITSODB EEE SSSS 7 SK E Starts testing for th selected connections Figure 3 31 Test Connection panel To configure many client machines perform all configurations on one client machine and export the definition to a flat file using the Configuration Assistant Figure 3 29 on page 128 Transfer the configuration profile to each client machine and import the definition using Configuration Assistant Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 153 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Configuration Assistant NDE410D7 Figure 3 32 Export client configuration definition Configuring Client using the command line In addition to Configuration Assistant you can use DB2 Command Line Processor CLP to configure DB2 clients Example 3 40 shows the commands for configuring a client called puget to access our sample database ITSODB on server called mensa Example 3 40 Configure client using the command line db2vs puget gt db2 catalog tcpip node mensa remote mensa server 50001 ostype LINUX with DB Server MENSA DB20000I The CATALOG TCPIP NODE command completed successfully DB21056W Directory changes may not be effective until the directory cache is refreshed db2vs puget gt db2 catalog database ITSODB as ITSODB at node mensa authentication server with Test database for ITSO DB20000I The CATALOG DATABASE command complet
458. ou can use the LIST UTILITY command to monitor RESTORE and ROLLFORWARD The same information Chapter 6 Administering databases 255 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm can be retrieved using the administrative views SNAPUTIL and SNAPUTIL_PROGRESS or the table functions SNAP_GET_UTIL and SNAP_GET_UTIL_PROGRESS Example 6 23 shows the output for a table space restore on database partition 0 and a following rollforward Example 6 23 Monitor restore and rollforward db2instl mensa gt db2 list utilities ID 331 Type RESTORE Database Name ITSODB Partition Number 0 Description tablespace TSDATA2 Start Time 02 21 2008 15 23 01 033971 State Executing Invocation Type User db2instl mensa gt db2 list utilities show detail ID 331 Type RESTORE Database Name ITSODB Partition Number 0 Description tablespace TSDATA2 Start Time 02 21 2008 15 23 01 033971 State Executing Invocation Type User Progress Monitoring Completed Work 54837248 bytes Start Time 02 21 2008 15 23 01 033976 db2inst1l mensa gt db2 select UTILITY_TYPE substr UTILITY_DESCRIPTION 1 15 UTILITY_STATE DBPARTITIONNUM from SYSIBMADM SNAPUTIL UTILITY_TYPE 2 UTILITY_STATE DBPARTITIONNUM RESTORE tablespace TSDA EXECUTE 0 1 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select SNAPSHOT_TIMESTAMP UTILITY_STATE PROGRESS _START_TIME PROGRESS _TOTAL_UNITS PROGRESS COMPLETED UNITS DBPARTI
459. ou have defined the table spaces for a table you can change that only by recreating the table gt Storage usage of a table is limited within a table spaces If one table in a table space taken up the entire disk space of a table space tables in other table spaces will not be affected Defining more table spaces requires more design implementation and maintenance work How many table spaces should be defined and how the table spaces should be placed on the disks are depends on the complexity and requirements of the application SMS table spaces System Managed table spaces are handled by the underlying operating system which is Linux in our case At the creation of the table space you specify directory names as containers Here some considerations for choosing SMS table space gt The disk space is not allocated until it is used gt It is easy to increase the SMS table spaces You only have to increase the underlying file system space DB2 will use it automatically Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 95 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Because of the above 2 reasons it is a good practice to use a SMS table space for the temporary table space gt You cannot add or delete containers This can be an issue if you want to enhance the parallel I O performance by adding another container on a separate physical disk gt You may reach file system related limits with the file size of the files create
460. overy is the process where all uncommitted changes are rolled back to a consistent state of the data gt Archive logging By using archive logging the database is considered as a recoverable database To enable archive logging set the LOGARCHMETH1 or LOGARCHMETH2 database configuration parameters to a value other than OFF Active logs are still available for crash recovery but you also have the archived logs which contain committed transaction data After a successful restore you can roll the database forward that is past the time when the 224 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm backup image was taken by using the active and archived logs to either a specific point in time or to the end of the active logs DB2 provides different backup mechanisms You need to decide between the following Offline or Online backup During an offline backup applications cannot connect to the database This is the default backup method when you do not specify any parameter in the BACKUP command After an offline backup you have a consistent image copy of the entire database Recoverable database backup operations can also be performed online Online mean that other applications can connect to the database during the backup operation During an online backup operation rollforward recovery ensures that all table changes are captured and reapplied if that backup is restored If you have a re
461. p It allows you to configure DB2 your preferred way in the first place and gives you more control over database management Particularly for larger multi partition systems we recommend that the databases be stored in a separate file system for example database Performing manual configuration allows you to allocate your preferred default database directory in the first place The db2_install command installs all components for the DB2 product you specify with the English interface support You can select additional languages to support with the L parameter Considering the higher number of manual configuration tasks this installation method may take longer It requires a higher level of skill and cannot create response files Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Response file installation A response file can be created using the DB2 Setup wizard or by editing a sample response file It allows you to install DB2 across multiple machines with consistent installation and configuration settings and can also be used to set up a DB2 cluster A response file installation is fast because it bypasses the graphical wizard and does the configuration for you Another advantage of using a response file is that it creates a Database Administration Server DAS on each machine while with db2_install the DAS must be created manually after installation For more advanced users we recommend th
462. p Options Configuration Options Enable e mail functions Setup Monitoring SMTP server name smtp itsosj sanjose ib Pre Installation Summary Port number 25 Installing C This server requires authentication Install Complete AET erro Account name verification gt Start Up Password Do not enable e mail functions at this time Cancel Previous Next Figure 5 11 Setup Notification 8 On the Select Start Up Options panel select Start services automatically then click Next 9 On the Configuration Options panel you can choose Allow or sending of logs or Do not allow the sending of logs click Next 10 On the next panel enter the password for sysadmin which will be created by automatically by installer then click Next 11 On the Pre Installation Summary panel click Next 12 On the Start Up Figure 5 12 on page 206 DSAC server has started successfully and a Web address is given You can access client console by pointing your Web browser to this address Click Done Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 205 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm IBM Data Studio Administration Console 1 1 2 Introduction Start Up server has started successfully License Agreement Choose Install Directory V Specify Server Details Setup Notification Select Start Up Options Configuration Options Setup Monitoring Pre iInstallation Summary
463. parate DVDs These DVDs are shipped with your client and server DVDs gt gt DB2 Information Center DVD The DB2 Information Center gives you access to all of the information you need to take full advantage of DB2 products It is installed separately from other DB2 products from its own DVD which means that you can install DB2 Information Center immediately after installing DB2 or at a later time You can install the DB2 Information Center on a machine that does not have DB2 installed such as your company s internal Web server This will save space on individual machines You can also access the DB2 Information Center from the IBM Web site at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21 uw v9r5 PDF documentation DVD Unlike the DB2 Information Center you do not need to install the PDF documentation This CD provides PDF files that you can read directly from the CD or copy onto your machine For the latest information about DB2 database product documentation refer to the Web site http www 1 ibm com support docview wss rs 7 1 amp uid swg27009474 Installing DB2 Information Center using the DB2 Setup wizard Following these steps 1 2 Log onto system as user with root authority Insert and mount the DB2 Information Center product DVD Chapter 2 Installation 85 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Change to the directory where the DB2 product DVD is mounted by entering the f
464. pfhome dpfusr1 sqllib db2nodes cfg 0 mensa 0 1 gemini 0 2 Stop the instance by running the db2stop force command 3 Login as root and run the db2imigr command to migrate your instance to Version 9 5 Use the following syntax DB2DIR instance db2imigr u lt fenced_user gt instance_name Where DB2DIR is set to the location you specified during DB2 9 5 installation fencedlD is the user name under which the fenced user defined functions and stored procedures will run and InstName is the login name of the instance owner The fenced user is only required if you are migrating from a client instance to a server instance Our input and output is shown in Example 4 8 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm Example 4 8 Migrating the instance mensa opt ibm db2 V9 5 instance db2imigr dpfusrl db2ckmig was successful Database s can be migrated DBI10701 Program db2imigr completed successfully 4 At this point in time you may want to check the DB2 level to ensure that your instance is now a Version 9 5 instance as shown inExample 4 9 Example 4 9 Check db2level dpfusr1l gemini gt db2level DB21085I Instance dpfusr1 uses 64 bits and DB2 code release SQLO9050 with level identifier 03010107 Informational tokens are DB2 v9 5 0 0 s071001 LINUXAMD6495 and Fix Pack 0 Product is installed at opt ibm db2 V9 5 5 Optional rename the db2diag log using
465. phores system wide 256000 SEMMNS max ops per semop call 32 SEMOPM semaphore max value 32767 Messages Limits max queues system wide 1024 MSGMNI max size of message bytes 65536 MSGMAX default max size of queue bytes 65536 MSGMNB We recommend that you set the SHMMAX value to be equal to the amount of physical memory on your system However the minimum required on x86 systems is 268435456 256 MB and for 64 bit systems it is 1073741824 1 GB In this example SHMALL is set to 8 GB 8388608 KB 8 GB If you have more physical memory than this for DB2 increase the value of this parameter to approximately 90 of your computer s physical memory The kernel parameter sem consists of 4 tokens SEMMSL SEMMNS SEMOPM and SEMMNI SEMMNS is the result of SEMMSL multiplied by SEMMNI The database manager requires that the number of arrays SEMMNI be increased as necessary Typically SEMMNI should be twice the maximum number of agents expected on the system multiplied by the number of logical partitions on the database server computer plus the number of local application connections on the database server computer 1 For root installations if kernel shmmax is set to a low value you may encounter the memory allocation error while staring the instance then you have to update kernel shmmax manually 30 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02
466. pine width of a book you divide the paper PPI into the number of pages in the book An example is a 250 page book using Plainfield opaque 50 smooth which has a PPI of 526 Divided 250 by 526 which equals a spine width of 4752 In this case you would use the 5 spine Now select the Spine width for the book and hide the others Special gt Conditional Text gt Show Hide gt SpineSize gt Hide gt Set Move the changed Conditional text settings to all files in your book by opening the book file with the spine fm still open and File gt Import gt Formats the Conditional Text Settings ONLY to the book files Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899spine fm 507 Up and Running with DB2 on Redbooks Linux 1 0 spine 0 875 lt gt 1 498 460 lt gt 788 pages Mow i a Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Experience the power of the integration of DB2 9 5 and Linux Make it easier to get DB2 for LUW up and running on Linux Leverage DB2 s powerful autonomic technology Linux is one of the fastest growing server operating platforms within the past few years DB2 has long been known for its technology leadership This IBM Redbooks publication is an informative guide that describes how to effectively integrate DB2 for Linux UNIX and Windows LUW with SUSE and Red Hat Linux operating systems This book provides both introductory and
467. plicable 4096 32 32 1 2 USERSPACE1 Database managed space All permanent data Large table 0x0080 8192 8160 0 8160 96 4096 32 32 1 2008 02 06 22 51 24 000000 Minimum recorvery time UCT is 2008 02 06 22 51 24 so continue the roll forward db2inst1 mensa gt db2 rollforward db itsodb stop tablespace userspacel online SQL1275N The stoptime passed to roll forward must be greater than or equal to 2008 02 06 22 51 24 000000 UTC because database ITSODB on node s 0 contains information later than the specified time db2instl mensa gt db2 rollforward db itsodb to 2008 02 06 22 51 24 tablespace userspacel online Rollforward Status Input database alias Number of nodes have returned status Node number Rollforward status Up and Running with DB2 on Linux itsodb 1 0 TBS working Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Next log file to be read S0000003 LOG Log files processed Last committed transaction 2008 02 06 22 52 06 000000 UTC DB20000I The ROLLFORWARD command completed successfully db2instl mensa gt db2 rollforward db itsodb stop tablespace userspacel online Rollforward Status Input database alias itsodb Number of nodes have returned status 1 Node number 0 Rollforward status not pending Next log file to be read Log files processed Last committed transaction 2008 02 06 22 52 06 000000 UTC DB200
468. plications MAXAPPLS AUTOMATIC Average number of active applications AVG_APPLS AUTOMATIC To turn off STMM for one particular area use the command UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION USING lt parameter gt MANUAL If you want to turn off STMM in general you can do that by executing this command UPDATE DATABASE CONFIGURATION USING SELF_TUNING_MEM OFF Buffer pools can be enabled or disabled for STMM individually by using the option SIZE AUTOMATIC as follows ALTER BUFFERPOOL ibmdefaultbp SIZE AUTOMATIC or CREATE BUFFERPOOL lt bpname gt SIZE AUTOMATIC STMM can run in two modes gt You can limit the available size for memory tuning on database level with the parameter DATABASE_MEMORY Then STMM will not increase the memory used by the database higher than this value If one area needs to be increased because it has more demand another area with less memory demand will be decreased accordingly gt You can leave the available memory size for tuning unlimited by setting the DATABASE_MEMORY parameter to AUTOMATIC In this case the available memory in the operating system limits the available memory for tuning STMM leaves a buffer for the operating system processes so that no paging occurs You can also limit the memory used by the instance by setting the value of the DBM parameter INSTANCE_MEMORY to a particular value If you do not want to limit it you can leave the value at AUTOMATIC Note Some Linux kernels do not allow s
469. pture a global aggregate snapshot enter a value of 2 To capture a snapshot from all database partitions as seen in Example 7 24 do not specify a value for this parameter Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 403 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Note For a detailed overview of snapshot administrative views and table functions refer to System Monitor Guide and Reference SC23 5865 00 7 5 4 db2ls With the ability to install multiple copies of DB2 products on your system and the flexibility to install DB2 products and features in the path of your choice you need a tool to help you keep track of what is installed and where it is installed The db2Is command lists the DB2 products and features installed on your Linux and UNIX systems including the DB2 Version 9 HTML documentation You cannot query DB2 products using the Linux native rpm command The db21s command can be used to list gt Where DB2 products are installed on your system and list the DB2 product level gt All or specific DB2 products and features in a particular installation path Example 7 25 shows you the output of the db21s command from our environment Example 7 25 Output of db2is command db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db21s Install Path Level Fix Pack Special Install Number Install Date Installer UID opt ibm db2 V9 5 0 0 Fri Jan 25 15 52 16 2008 PST 0 opt ibm db2 v9 1 3 3 Tue Jan 29 09 35 07 2008 PST
470. q 1ib db2nodes cfg as shown in Example 3 26 Example 3 26 New db2nodes cfg file 0 mensa 0 1 gemini 0 2 mensa 1 Log on to the host as instance owner where the new partition will reside and start the new partition with db2start dbpartitionnum 2 Alternatively if you start new database partition with the following command DB2 will update the db2nodes cfg automatically after the next stop of the instance db2start dbpartitionnum 2 add dbpartitionnum hostname mensa port 1 without tablespaces To create the directory structure used by DB2 we have to issue the add node command if it has not already been done by starting the database manager Issue the commands shown in Example 3 27 Example 3 27 Add dbpartition utility command db2inst1 mensa sqllib gt export DB2NODE 2 db2inst1 mensa sqllib gt db2 terminate db2inst1 mensa sqllib gt db2 add dbpartitionnum without tablespaces DB200001 The ADD NODE command completed successfully DB2 has now created the directory structure in database but with the keyword without tablespaces the existing table space in partitions O and 1 has not been created in the new partition The database partition node group for IBMTEMPGROUP is expanded to the new database partition 2 and we have to add a table space container for TEMPSPACE1 on the new partition See Example 3 28 on page 122 Example 3 28 Add table space container for temp space db2instl mensa gt db2 alter tablespace tempspacel ad
471. quash sync Note In the permissions section you can specify user ID mappings By default permissions are set to rw and root_squash The root_squash setting means that the root user on a client is not treated as root when accessing files on the NFS server Although this mode of operation is typically desirable in a production environment you need to turn it off in order to create users on each of the remaining machines in the cluster To do this specify no_root_squash in the permissions section Before deploying your environment on production you may consider to change permissions to default setting that is rw root_squash For instance change the etc exports file to export db2home mensa rw sync gemini rw sync Export the NFS directory by running usr sbin exportfs a This initializes a file named var lib nfs xtab and exports all directories to this file Note If you make an update to efc exports run exportfs r to re export all directories It synchronizes var lib nfs xtab with etc exports and removes entries in var lib nfs xtab that are deleted from etc exports On each of the machines in the cluster including NFS server first make a directory db2home using the mkdir command then add an entry to the etc fstab file to NFS mount the file system automatically at boot time We recommend that you configure the file system to be mounted at boot time is read write is mounted hard includes the background
472. r and Tivoli System Automation for Multiplatforms 8 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm DB2 Database Partitioning Feature DPF The Database Partitioning Feature is available as part of the DB2 warehouse products This feature allows DB2 Enterprise 9 5 customers to partition a database within a single system or across a cluster of systems The DPF capability provides the customer with multiple benefits including scalability to support very large databases or complex workloads and increased parallelism for administration tasks Products for accessing legacy and host data With the following DB2 products you can extend your enterprise system to access the legacy system DB2 Connect Personal Edition DB2 Connect Personal Edition provides the API drivers and connectivity infrastructure to enable direct connectivity from Windows and Linux desktop applications to System z and System i database servers This product is specifically designed and licensed for enabling two tier client server applications running on individual workstations and as such is not appropriate for use on servers DB2 Connect Enterprise Edition DB2 Connect Enterprise Edition is a combination of DB2 Connect server and Data Server Client software designed to address the needs of organizations that require robust connectivity from a variety of desktop systems to System z and System i database servers Data Server
473. r partition involved for this purpose you can use the rah command or the db2_all command The rah command allows you to issue commands you want to run on all machines where the instance is spread across If you want the commands to run at database partition level in the instance you run the db2_all command To run a command on all machines with rah the general command syntax is rah commands To run the commands on all database partitions that you specified use the db2_all command The general command syntax is db2_all commands If the command to be run doesn t follow rah or db2_all you will be prompted to enter one by rah and db2_all In general if you specify the commands as the parameter on the command line you must enclose it in double quotation marks if it contains any of the following special characters amp lt gt unsubstituted To obtain help information about db2_all or rah syntax type db2_all Or rah ngon There are some command prefix sequences here a prefix sequence is one or more special characters for db2_all and rah that can be used to control the command running mode for example running commands in sequence or parallel on all involved machines or partitions running in foreground or background whether or not to execute environment setting script before executing specified commands and so on Table A 1 shows some commonly used command prefix sequences Table A 1 Com
474. r value once the problem is resolved or the required information has been captured because keeping DIAGLEVEL on a level of 4 will impact the system performance to a certain extent and the file system can fill up quickly As shown in Example 7 15 the system information is always recorded at the beginning of the db2diag log file Similar information is recorded while starting a instance Example 7 15 The beginning of the db2diag log 2008 02 14 10 18 46 776339 480 11E1283 LEVEL Event PID 32098 TID 47944161495904PROC db2set INSTANCE db2instl NODE 000 FUNCTION DB2 UDB RAS PD component pdLogInternal probe 120 START New Diagnostic Log file DATA 1 Build Level 152 bytes Instance db2inst1 uses 64 bits and DB2 code release SQLO09050 with level identifier 03010107 Informational tokens are DB2 v9 5 0 0 s071001 LINUXAMD6495 Fix Pack 0 DATA 2 System Info 440 bytes System Linux mensa 6 2 x86_64 CPU total 2 online 2 Cores per socket 2 Threading degree per core 1 Physical Memory MB total 3753 free 263 Virtual Memory MB total 11951 free 8455 Swap Memory MB total 8198 free 8192 Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 391 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Kernel Params msgMaxMessageSize 65536 msgMsgMap 65536 msgMaxQueueIDs 1024 msgNumberOfHeaders 65536 msgMaxQueueSi ze 65536 msgMaxSegmentSize 16 shmMax 9223372036854775807 shmMin 1 shmIDs 4096 shmSegments 4
475. r your new database Figure 3 6 on page 106 Enter the following Database name ITSODB Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 105 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Database alias ITSODB Comment for the database Lab database for ITSO Check Let DB2 manage my storage automatic storage If you want to restrict user access to the system catalog tables check Restrict access to system catalogs and press Next mase aaau ITSODB Lab database for ITSO Figure 3 6 Specify the database name 3 The next panel allows to show additional storage paths Figure 3 7 on page 107 106 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm Figure 3 7 Specify the storage path 4 Press Next and you get to Figure 3 8 a f CI Oeog g Disecran Figure 3 8 Specify the locale Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 107 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 5 Press Next 6 Summary Figure 3 9 Here you can review your settings view or save the create database command Press Finish to finally create the database Figure 3 9 Database wizard summary page Once the database has been created it shows in the Control Center as shown in Figure 3 10 Expanding the database to view the database objects such as table spaces containers tables and so on 3 control Center Ey 5 All Systems A
476. rd Pooled n a n a n a 0 0 NotSet ITSODB We have shown db2pd with options memsets osinfo and agents In the following we provide some more examples of using the tool and what information can be retrieved gt All database and instance scope information db2pd inst alldbs gt Active transactions db2pd db itsodb transactions gt Locks Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 399 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2pd db itsodb locks A specific application 1072 is a application handle db2pd db itsodb applications 1072 Database logs db2pd db itsodb logs Fenced vendor process db2pd db itsodb fvp laml This applies to backup restore prune history load load copy roll forward and Log Manager where a vendor media device is being used Automatic storage paths defined for the database db2pd db itsodb storagepaths Table and data partition reorganization db2pd db itsodb reorgs Tables and indexes statistics db2pd db itsodb tcbstats 7 4 In the example the command returns the information for table ID 4 in table space ID 7 The total number of updates on the table the UPDATE INSERT DELETE UDI and real time statistics UDI counters RTSUDI are returned as well UDI is a counter to measure how much data has been changed since the last RUNSTATS The value is used by DB2 to determine if the statistics for a table should be updated List all EDUs in the insta
477. rdinator node checks a partitioning map which specifies the database partition where the row is to be stored The row is only sent to that database partition server with the result that only the interested database partition servers take part in the insert This keeps communications and coordination overhead between nodes as low as possible See Figure 1 9 Chapter 1 Introduction 21 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm INSERT 000120 Joe Manager Reg EMPNO DB2 hashing alogrithm 000120 gt 9 Partitioning Map i Index ate Sf o o p s Partitions 1 2 3 4 1l 2 3l alal i3 4 f t e Figure 1 9 Intelligent data distribution across DB2 partitions The data while physically split is used and managed as a logical whole Users can choose how to partition their data by declaring partitioning keys Tables can be located in one or more database partitions As a result you can spread the workload across a partitioned database for large tables while allowing smaller tables to be stored on one or more database partitions Each database partition has local indexes on the data it stores resulting in increased performance for local data access You are not restricted to having all tables divided across all database partitions in the database DB2 supports partial declustering which means that you can divide tables and their table spaces across a subset of database partitions in the
478. re 7 9 Health indicator configuration launchpad From the Health Indicator Configuration Launchpad Figure 7 9 you can view or change health indicator setting by clicking the appropriate button a Instance Settings apply to the instance b Global Settings apply to objects such as database table spaces and table space containers in the instance that do not have customized settings defined c Object Settings are customized settings that apply to individual objects such as databases table spaces and table space containers In our sample we set health indicator for a specific table space click Object Settings On Object Health Indicator Configuration panel Figure 7 10 on page 357 click button M on the Object field 356 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Object Health Indicator Configuration lt Select an object to view its health indicators gt EDEL TIS ETENI Figure 7 10 Object health indicator configuration On the pop up panel Figure 7 11 on page 358 expanding the object tree until the desired object is shown then select the object and click 0K Here we choose the DMS table space which is created beforehand in Step 1 of this example Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 357 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Select a database object D Instances ELS db2inst1 Databases 5 ITS0DB L Table
479. re decomposed automatically into sub requests and executed in parallel among the applicable database partitions As an illustration of the power of processing in a partitioned database system assume that you have 100 000 000 records that you want to scan in a single partition database This scan would require that a single database Chapter 1 Introduction 19 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm manager search 100 000 000 records Now suppose that these records are spread evenly over 20 database partitions each partition only has to scan 5 000 000 records If each database partition server scans in parallel with the same speed the time required to do the scan should be approximately 20 times faster than a single partition system handling the entire task The fact that databases are partitioned across several database partitions is transparent to users and applications User interaction occurs through one database partition known as the coordinator node for that user Any database partition can be used as a coordinator node The database partition that a client or application connects to becomes the coordinator node You should consider spreading out users across database partitions servers to distribute the coordinator function Load Unload Queries Figure 1 7 DB2 MPP environment Figure 1 8 on page 21 shows you the relationship of the database objects in a partitioned environment 20 Up a
480. ril 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm db2inst1 itsosj sanjose ibm com Figure 2 13 Root Installation Specify a contact for health monitor notification 18 Start copying files and create response files This window provides a summary of your installation and configuration settings as shown in Scroll through this window to verify that your settings are correct then click Finish DB2 Setup DB2 Enterprise Server Edition Version 9 5 GID 1002 Home directory db2home db2tencl DB2 Administration server Instance user information User name dasusri UID 997 Group name dasadm1 GID 1003 Home directory fhome dasusr1 SMTP server smtp itsosj sanjose i Contact specification New contacts Name db2inst1 Instance db2inst1 E mail address db2insti itsosj sanjo E mail address is for a pager No Response file name froot db2ese rsp Figure 2 14 Root installation Installation summary window Chapter 2 Installation 71 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 19 After installation read the status report tab and check for any errors If all is well click Finish Note Install logs are located in tmp db2setup log and tmp db2setup err Response file install For root installation you also can use a response file to install DB2 as discussed in Response file install on page 62 The response file can be generated by DB2 Setup Wizard or by editing the samples provided by DB2 Creatin
481. rom your application For instance you can start the database or you can create table spaces The API is described in the Information Center in Database administration gt Administrative interfaces Administrative APIs and in Administrative API Reference SC23 5842 00 UDF in C One of the supported programming languages for User Defined Functions UDFs is C UDFs are a good choice if you want to access the same business logic from different applications and if it is difficult to share a common API After the program code has been compiled the command CREATE FUNCTION is used to register a function into the database manager Example 8 13 shows a UDF written in C It converts a string to lowercase Example 8 13 UDF example written in C tolower c include lt stdio h gt include lt string h gt include lt sqludf h gt void SQL_API_FN to_lower SQLUDF_VARCHAR value SQLUDF_VARCHAR result SQLUDF_NULLIND value_ind SQLUDF_NULLIND result_ind SQLUDF_TRAIL_ARGS int i len if value_ind 1 result_ind 1 returns 438 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm len strlen value for i 0 i lt len i result i tolower value i result i 0 In Example 8 14 on page 439 we compile this UDF The first cc step compiles the program and the second cc step creates a dynamic object On 64 bit machines use the options m64 an
482. root installation Prior to Version 9 5 you could install products apply and roll back fix packs configure instances add features or uninstall products only if you had root authority Now you can install and service a non root DB2 on Linux platforms The DB2 installer automatically creates and configures a non root instance during a non root installation As a non root user you can customize the configuration of the non root instance during the installation You can also use and maintain the installed DB2 product without root authority Although non root installations have most of the functionality of root installations there are some differences and limitations Table 2 7 on page 36 shows some of them Table 2 7 Differences and limitations between root and non root installations Root installations Non root installations User can select installation directory a products are installed under the user s home directory Instance creation Can create instances A single instance is during installation This is automatically created and the recommended configured Further method instances cannot be created in non root installations Number of DB2 instances Multiple allowed 36 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Root installations Non root installations Files deployed during Program files only Program files and instance installation Instances are created after fi
483. rt 50002 Application 1 Application 2 EEEE Figure 8 2 Instance setup for application connections Chapter 8 Application development 419 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 8 2 DB2 application objects DB2 supports stored procedures SP user defined functions UDFs and triggers all of which are used to develop applications You can develop the applications from the command line or you can use the Data Studio 8 2 1 Triggers A trigger is a defined set of SQL statements stored as a DB2 object in a DB2 database This set of SQL statements execute when a certain event occurs against a DB2 table Types of events that might invoke triggers are Insert Update or Delete to a given DB2 table You can set up triggers to execute before after or instead of an insert update or delete event gt No cascade before The defined action will be executed before the triggering action is performed gt After All triggered actions will be applied when the triggering action is done gt Instead of The original action will be replaced by the action defined in the trigger Triggers are defined by using the create trigger DDL statement Note The CREATE TRIGGER statement is explained in more detail in the Information Center in Database fundamentals SQL Statements gt CREATE TRIGGER and in SQL Reference Volume 2 SC10 4250 Triggers are useful to imple
484. ry we have the home directories for the instance owning user and fenced user db2instl and db2fenc gt A local home directory for the DAS user on each machine dasusr1 which is stored in the home directory DAS user considerations for a partitioned database We could not place the DAS user home directory in the shared folder because we have the same DAS user ID on each machine in the cluster You should take note of the following DAS user considerations gt A DAS must be running on each physical machine in the partitioned database for the graphical administration tools for example Control Center to work gt You can only have one DAS on each machine If you have an existing DAS for old DB2 version we recommend that you drop it and create a new one in DB2 9 5 gt Just like an instance each DAS must be created under a user ID It does not matter whether a different user ID is used for each DAS in the environment or whether the same user ID is used and that the user ID s home directory is not shared gt If an existing user is used as the DAS user this user must also exist on all the participating computers before installation gt For response file installs f your response file specifies to create new DAS user on each machine in the cluster and that user already exists on any of the participating computers then that user must have the same primary group as the new DAS user 2 2 7 Enabling ssh for a partitioned dat
485. s 26 Copy customized code page conversion tables to the proper directories 27 Back up the migrated databases 28 Check and reorganize index or tables if required 29 Migrate the DB2 administration server Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 183 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 30 Migrate DB2 clients 4 4 32 bit to 64 bit conversion If you are running a DB2 Version 8 or Version 9 Enterprise edition under 32 bits Linux be aware that Version 9 5 is only supported on 64 bit architecture DB2 Workgroup Edition provides both 32 bit and 64 bit supports More details about recommended and validated environments for DB2 Version 9 5 on Linux refer to Web site http www ibm com software data db2 1inux validate Even though you are running with a validated environment and version of 32 bit DB2 9 5 such as Workgroup edition consider migrating to DB2 9 5 64 bit instead to avoid any 32 bit kernel limitations There are two considerations regarding 32 bit virtual memory address limits and the new multi threaded architecture gt Agent private memory for all agent threads is now allocated within a single process The process memory space might not be large enough to allocate the aggregate of all private memory for all agents You might need to reduce the number of agents configured gt Support for multiple databases is limited because all database shared memory segments for all databases are allocated in a
486. s Refer to 2 2 6 User and group setup on page 49 74 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Create a DB2 Administration Server DAS The DAS is required if you plan to use the DB2 graphical tools such as the Control Center and Task Center You need to have a DAS user created before creating the DAS Here is the procedure 1 Log in as root 2 Issue the following command to create the DAS DB2DIR instance dascrt u DASuser Where DB2DIR is the instance directory where the DB2 copy is installed For the u parameter enter the DAS user that you created for this machine For example opt ibm db2 V9 5 dascrt u dasusrl Create a DB2 instance Use the db2icrt command to create a new instance 1 Log in as root 2 Enter the following command DB2DIR instance db2icrt a AuthType u FencedID InstNme Where DB2DIR is the location where the current version of the DB2 database product is installed AuthType represents the authentication type SERVER CLIENT or SERVER_ENCRYPT for the instance If you do not specify this parameter the default authentication type SERVER is assigned FencedID represents the name of the DB2 fenced user InstNme represents the name of the instance you are creating The name of the instance must be the same as the name of the instance owning user This instance will be created in the home directory of the instance own
487. s a message entry 340 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm reate journal sontacte Create journal me The task amp Owner amp Name with status amp Completionstatus ran on the DB2 Administrative Server on amp Schedulersystem and completed with return code amp Returncode The task started on amp Runsystem at amp Start and completed at amp End The task lasted amp Duration seconds Figure 6 52 Notification setting for different task running result 7 Follow up actions for different task running result Figure 6 53 on page 342 In addition to the notification setting for the results of task running you can also specify follow up actions For example if the task is failed at last and for Task Failure condition you can specify running another alternative task to remedy the condition or to disable scheduling of another task to avoid unnecessary damage Chapter 6 Administering databases 341 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm aranga PREMGVE r of ETDAN Figure 6 53 Follow up actions setting for a task You can also specify access privileges to the task such as read run or execute for different users and groups under the Security tab Now you can submit the task to the Task Center by clicking OK If the task ran you can get the result information through the context menu of the task as shown in Figur
488. s are defined on a table one or more indexes may be flagged as needing REORG Specify the most important index for REORG sequencing Tables defined using the ORGANIZE BY clause and the corresponding dimension indexes have a suffix to their names The cardinality of a dimension index is equal to the Active blocks statistic of the table The parameters in the RUNSTATS command can be modified based on your situation Here we use ALLOW READ ACCESS to allow read only access to the table from other users while statistics are calculated We use REORGCHK CURRENT STATISTICS to show the statistics information for the table ITEM You can also use the REORGCHK_TB_STATS and REORGCHK_IX_STATS procedures which retrieve table and index statistics for reorganization evaluation directly from the system catalog views for example SYSSTAT TABLES and SYSSTAT INDEXES Attention The RUNSTATS utility is run against one database partition only due to performance considerations so some global statistics information may be inaccurate here For example the CARD should be 3 000 000 in reality but here it says 3 000 728 number of records on database partition O multiple by the number of database partitions Another command INSPECT CHECK can be used to generate accurate information about the pages occupied by the table and index objects 2 Delete rows from the table ITEM Example 6 36 Chapter 6 Administering databases 287 6899ch06 fm Draft Document
489. s for an employee The input is an employee number and rating and the result is to update the table EMPLOYEE The file basecase db2 is part of the DB2 samples and can be found in lt instance home gt sqllib samples sqlproc Note The CREATE PROCEDURE statement is explained in more detail in the Information Center in Database fundamentals gt SQL Statements gt CREATE PROCEDURE and in SQL Reference Volume 2 SC10 4250 Chapter 8 Application development 423 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 8 5 A simple example of an SQL procedure db2inst1 puget sqllib samples sqlproc gt db2 connect to sample Database Connection Information Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias DB2 LINUX 9 5 0 DB2INST1 SAMPLE db2inst1 puget sqllib samples sqlproc gt db2 td vf basecase db2 CREATE PROCEDURE update_salary IN employee_number CHAR 6 IN rating INT LANGUAGE SQL BEGIN DECLARE SQLSTATE CHAR 5 DECLARE not_found CONDITION FOR SQLSTATE 02000 DECLARE EXIT HANDLER FOR not_found SIGNAL SQLSTATE 02444 CASE rating WHEN 1 THEN UPDATE employee SET salary salary 1 10 bonus 1000 WHERE empno employee_number WHEN 2 THEN UPDATE employee SET salary salary 1 05 bonus 500 WHERE empno employee_number ELSE UPDATE employee SET salary salary 1 03 bonus 0 WHERE empno employee_number END CASE END DB20000I1 The SQL command completed su
490. s using system administration tool Package Manager For example to install pdksh on Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 5 do the following a Log on as root b Choose Applications gt Add Remove Software then choose the appropriate packages gt If your SUSE distribution has X Window System software you can install these packages using YaST For example to install pdksh on SUSE Linux Enterprise Server SLES 10 do the following a Log on as root b From the YaST2 Control Center select Software Install or Remove Software then choose the appropriate packages 34 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Notes gt The RPM name may be different depending on the Linux distribution and version you are using Check the latest Linux information for the RPM name that you require If required package does not exist in Linux distribution DVD CD you may need download it from related Linux support Web site 2 2 Installation considerations and planning Now that you have verified that your system meets DB2 s basic requirements it is time to prepare your system for DB2 installation In this section we discuss the following topics gt Considerations Multiple DB2 copies Non root installation Support Changes for 32 bit and 64 bit DB2 servers Installation methods DB2 Setup db2_install response file installation Storage planning File
491. sconnect from this database before the changes become effective For the partitioned database use the following command to set the NEWLOGPATH parameter in all database nodes db2_all db2 connect to itsodb db2 update db cfg for itsodb using NEWLOGPATH db210g1 itsodb 3 Disconnect all users from the database You can use the command db2 list applications to see all applications which are currently connected You can then use the command db2 force application lt id gt to force individual users off Note that you only need to force off users who are connected to the database where we want to change the log path 4 Connect to the database During the connection the log will be relocated Example 3 22 shows that the log path has been changed Example 3 22 Change the online log path db2instl puget gt db2 terminate DB20000I1 The TERMINATE command completed successfully db2instl puget gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUX 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2instl puget gt db2 get db config for itsodb grep NEWLOGPATH MIRRORLOGPATH Path to log files Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 117 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Changed path to log files NEWLOGPATH Path to log files db210g1 1TSODB NODE0000 Mirror log path MIRRORLOGPATH For the partitioned database use the following comma
492. se the GRANT statement Encryption If you need to protect sensitive data like credit card information you can use the built in functions ENCRYPT DECRYPT_BIN and DECRYPT_CHAR Encryption allows you to protect the sensitive data accessing even from the database administrator Defaults When a database is initially created the following permissions are granted to PUBLIC gt CREATETAB gt BINDADD Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 147 6899ch03 fm vvvvvvvvyvvvvv iy Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm CONNECT IMPLSCHEMA BIND on all packages created in the NULLID schema EXECUTE on all packages created in the NULLID schema CREATEIN on schema SQLJ CREATEIN on schema NULLID USE on table space USERSPACE1 SELECT access to the SYSIBM catalog tables SELECT access to the SYSCAT catalog views SELECT access to the SYSSTAT catalog views UPDATE access to the SYSSTAT catalog views EXECUTE with GRANT on all procedures in schema SQLJ EXECUTE with GRANT on all functions and procedures in schema SYSPROC If you do not want this you can specify the option RESTRICTIVE at the CREATE DATABASE command 3 8 Client configuration In this section we discuss how to install and configure DB2 clients using the graphical tool Configuration Assistant or the DB2 command line processor DB2 clients provide access to DB2 database server In DB2 Version 9 5 there are three types of DB2 data server clients available gt
493. serspacel online from db2backup taken at 20080206145105 DB20000I The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully From another login shell find Minimum recorvery time db2inst1 mensa gt db2 connect to itsodb db2instl mensa gt db2 list tablespaces show detail Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID 0 Name SYSCATSPACE Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Regular table space State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal Total pages 16384 Useable pages 16380 Used pages 12288 Free pages 4092 High water mark pages 12288 Page size bytes 4096 Extent size pages 4 Prefetch size pages 4 Number of containers 1 Tablespace ID 1 Name TEMPSPACE1 Type System managed space Contents System Temporary data State 0x0000 Chapter 6 Administering databases 253 6899ch06 fm 254 Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Detailed explanation Norma Total pages Useable pages Used pages Free pages High water mark pages Page size bytes Extent size pages Prefetch size pages Number of containers Tablespace ID Name Type Contents space State Detailed explanation Roll forward pending Total pages Useable pages Used pages Free pages High water mark pages Page size bytes Extent size pages Prefetch size pages Number of containers Minimum recovery time 1 1 1 Not applicable Not ap
494. server products the self tuning memory feature simplifies the task of memory configuration by automatically setting values for several memory configuration parameters When enabled the memory tuner dynamically distributes available memory resources among several memory consumers including sort the package cache the lock list and buffer pools 28 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm 2 1 5 Communication requirements TCP IP is required to access remote databases Your Linux distribution provides TCP IP connectivity if selected during install If your Linux machine is installed on an existing network and is required to use a static IP address information similar to Table 2 5 should be collected from the network administrators Table 2 5 Required network information Host IP address 192 168 1 3 The above information should be specified on the setup screen during OS installation or as a post installation step using your distribution s setup utility Also certain communication software packages are required These are discussed in 2 1 7 Additional software requirements on page 32 2 1 6 Kernel parameter values You may be required to update some of the default kernel parameter settings for DB2 to run successfully on Linux The default values for particular kernel parameters on Linux are not sufficient when running a DB2 database system Note You must have root a
495. sk Shared Storage Figure 1 5 Shared disk architecture Shared disk In a shared disk environment each database node has its own processors but shares the disks with other nodes Therefore all the processors can access all the disks in the cluster This introduces additional overhead for coordinating resources and locks between nodes For example if Node 1 wants to access data on a certain disk that has been locked for update by another node in the cluster Node 1 must wait for other nodes to complete their operations While this works well when there are few nodes in the cluster for example mainframe environments the overhead for distributed lock management and cache coherency issues can severely limit scalability and introduce performance degradation for four or more nodes making it impractical to exploit economies of large clusters on Linux Furthermore this approach involves specialized hardware and software for shared disk and cache management making it much more expensive than shared nothing Shared nothing As the name implies partitions nodes in a shared nothing environment do not share processors memory or disks with partitions on other machines Each partition acts on its own subset of data Because each partition has its own private resources this approach does not involve any resource contention with 18 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm ot
496. spaces this is discussed in more detail later in this section In addition you may want to create a separate file system for user table spaces in order to separate them from the database files This configuration is commonly used in many production environments Here is an example of one possible configuration Table 2 9 We will be using this system setup throughout this book Table 2 9 Database related file system partition setup sample db2home For storing the home directories for DB2 users database For storing the database Chapter 2 Installation 43 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2log1 Used to store primary copy of log files db2log2 Used to store DB2 mirroring log files db2logarc Used to store archived log files db2temp For storing DB2 temporary tablespaces software Used for storing software For example we downloaded the DB2 install image into this directory a export db2home in the partitioned database environment Log space By default DB2 sets the log path to the default database path during database creation For example our default database path is database and our log path is database db2inst1 NODE0000 SQL00001 SQLOGDIR We recommend that you store both the primary copy of the logs and the mirror logs each on a physically separate disk preferably one that is also on a different disk controller Mirror logs are created using the MIRRORLOGPATH configura
497. spaces on mensa db2instl mensa gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 111 6899ch03 fm 112 Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB db2instl mensa gt db2 list tablespaces Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID Name Type Contents Space State Detailed explanation Normal Tablespace ID Name Type Contents State Detailed explanation Normal Tablespace ID Name Type Contents State Detailed explanation Normal 0 SYSCATSPACE System managed space All permanent data Regular table 0x0000 1 TEMPSPACE1 System managed space System Temporary data 0x0000 2 USERSPACE1 Database managed space All permanent data Large table space 0x0000 DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table spaces on the current node are listed Example 3 17 lists the table space in node gemini The catalog table space exists only on mensa the catalog node Example 3 17 List table spaces on gemini db2instl gemini gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias Up and Running with DB2 on Linux DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm db2instl gemini gt
498. stem locally Set this file system to be mounted at each reboot Export the DB2 home file system using NFS Mount the exported file system on each of the remaining machines in the cluster Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Get NFS service running To verify that Network File System NFS is running on each computer that will participate in the partitioned database system enter the following command showmount e hostname If you enter showmount without specifying a hostname it will check the local system If NFS is not running you will receive a message similar to the following mount clntudp_create RPC Program not registered To start the NFS perform the following gt Make sure you have the nfs utils or nfs server package installed on each machine gt Start the server manually by running the following command as root etc init d nfs restart gt You may check the status of NFS by running the following command etc init d nfs status Once you have verified that NFS is running on each system check for the rpc statd process using the ps ef grep rpc statd command The rpc statd process is required by DB2 Create and configure the DB2 home file system to NFS You need to create a DB2 instance home directory that is shared across all machines that will participate in your partitioned database system In our example we allocate a file system export db2hom
499. system An alternative to consider when you want tables to be positioned on each database partition is to use materialized query tables and then replicate those tables You can create a materialized query table containing the information that you need and then replicate it to each node Partitioning on SMP clusters In the most simplistic scenario each physical machine in the cluster has a single database partition on it In this type of a configuration each partition is a physical database partition and has access to all of the resources in the machine One partition per machine is typical for systems having one or two processors When using SMP machines with several processors it is possible to create more than one partition on the same system These are called logical database partitions A logical database partition differs from a physical partition in that it is not given control of an entire machine Although the machine has shared resources database partitions do not share all resources Processors are shared but disks and memory are not See Figure 1 10 22 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch01 fm Communication Facility PO SMP SMP Machine Machine Communication Facility Memory Database Partition 4 Figure 1 10 A partitioned database across a cluster of SMP machines There are advantages to using logical partitions on high SMP systems in both clustere
500. systems versus raw devices File system configuration DB2 log space DB2 temporary table space User and group setup User and group requirements Creating users single partition Creating users multi partition DAS user considerations for a multiple partition environment Network configuration for partitioned database installation Enabling ssh Setting up NFS 2 2 1 Considerations DB2 9 5 now supports multiple DB2 copies on a single machine as well as non root installations There are also changes in 32 bit and 64 bit server support These changes should be understood and taken into account before installing DB2 9 5 Chapter 2 Installation 35 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Multiple DB2 copies Beginning with DB2 Version 9 DB2 products can be installed in multiple different locations as different DB2 copies on a single machine A DB2 copy refers to one or more installations of DB2 database products in a particular location on the same computer Each DB2 Version 9 copy can be at the same or different code levels Only one DB2 administration server DAS can be created on a machine regardless of the number of DB2 copies that are installed on the machine We recommend that you migrate your existing DAS to Version 9 5 or create a new DAS in DB2 Version 9 5 This multiple DB2 copies feature is supported by most DB2 products except DB2 Information Center Non
501. t Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 371 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 7 5 shows the content of the predefined script in our sample The action is triggered by alarm condition of the health indicator ts ts_util for table space thspdms_0 Example 7 5 Extend table space containers size ALTER TABLESPACE tbspdms_0 EXTEND FILE database db2inst1 NODE000 N ITSODB T0000008 C0000000 LRG 10M On the Configuring health indicator panel Figure 7 24 on page 369 click OK to finish the enabling actions As shown in Example 7 6 you can use the DB2 CLP command GET ALERT CFG to verify the current setting Example 7 6 Using GET ALERT CFG to check current health indicator setting db2inst1l mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 get alert cfg for tablespace tbspdms_0 on itsodb Alert Configuration Indicator Name ts ts_util Default No Type Threshold based Warning 80 Alarm 90 Unit Sensitivity 0 Formula ts ts_used_pages ts ts_usable_pages 100 Actions Enabled Threshold or State checking Enabled Script pathname db2home db2inst1 script alt_tbsp db2 Condition Alarm Script type DB2 System MENSA Working directory Termination character Userid db2home db2inst1 script db2instl If we set up the action plan from the beginning this script will be executed once we populated the data and the alarm for the table space is triggered the follo
502. t lt emp1oyee gt As a last example we demonstrate the usage of XSLT In Example 8 38 we create an auxiliary table for storing the XSLT document The record containing the XSLT document is used later for the transformation Example 8 38 Store the XSLT document create_xslt ddl CREATE TABLE xslt doc_id INTEGER NOT NULL xslt XML NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY doc_id INSERT INTO xslt VALUES 1 lt xsl stylesheet version 1 0 xmins xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform gt lt xsl template match products gt lt html gt lt body gt lt hl gt List of items lt h1 gt lt table border 1 gt Chapter 8 Application development 451 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm lt tr bgcolor cccccc gt lt th align left gt Product lt th gt lt tr gt lt xs l apply templates gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl template match name gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt xsl value of select gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl stylesheet gt Vs In Example 8 39 we use query for applying the transformation Example 8 39 Apply XSLT query_html sq VALUES SUBSTR XSLTRANS FORM XMLELEMENT NAME products XMLQUERY db2 fn xmlcolumn PRODUCT XDATA description name price lt 9 USING SELECT xslt FROM xslt WHERE doc_id 1 1 200 The function XMLQUERY retrieves the result set as XML documents The func
503. t all tables are still accessible Then we add the table space container for SNG_01 Example 3 31 on page 123 Example 3 31 Att table space container for SNG_01 db2instl mensa gt db2 alter tablespace SAMPLE_SNG add db db2inst1 NODE0002 ITSODB SAMPLE_SNG on dbpartitionnum 2 SQL1759W Redistribute database partition group is required to change database partitioning for objects in nodegroup SNG_01 to include some added database partitions or exclude some dropped database partitions SQLSTATE 01618 Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 123 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm The redistribute command affects all table spaces and tables in the given database partition group However the redistribute occurs online and all tables and indexes are still fully accessible To redistribute all data in database partition group SNG_01 log on to the host where the catalog partition resides connect to the database and issue the redistribute command Example 3 32 Redistribute command for MPL_01 db2instl mensa gt db2 redistribute database partition group sng_01 uniform DB200001 The REDISTRIBUTE NODEGROUP command completed successfully Note You can also use the option ADD DBPARTITIONNUM S at the REDISTRIBUTE command That combines the commands ALTER DATABASE PARTITION GROUP and REDISTRIBUTE DATABASE PARTITION GROUP For each table that has already been processed the redistribution utility writes a m
504. t both ELEAF and NDEL are greater than 0 Chapter 6 Administering databases 289 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Tip The meaning of ELEAF and NDEL gt ELEAF Number of pseudo empty index leaf pages NUM_EMPTY_LEAFS A pseudo empty index leaf page is a page on which all the RIDs are marked as deleted but have not been physically removed gt NDEL Number of pseudo deleted RIDs NUMRIDS_DELETED A pseudo deleted RID is a RID that is marked deleted This statistic reports pseudo deleted RIDs on leaf pages that are not pseudo empty It does not include RIDs marked as deleted on leaf pages where all the RIDs are marked deleted We can use the commands shown in Example 6 38 to physically remove the leaf pages occupied by pseudo delete Example 6 38 REORG INDEXES and REORGCHK to update statistics db2inst1 mensa gt db2 reorg indexes all for table item allow write access cleanup only all on all dbpartitionnums DB200001 The REORG command completed successfully db2inst1l mensa gt db2 reorgchk update statistics on table db2instl item Doing RUNSTATS Table statistics Index statistics SCHEMA NAME INDCARD LEAF ELEAF LVLS NDEL KEYS LEAF_RECSIZE NLEAF_RECSIZE Table DB2INST1 ITEM Index DB2INST1 PK_ITEM_ITEMID 1502010 3096 0 3 0 1502010 4 4 ELEAF and NDEL goes back to 0 as the pseudo deleted pages are physically removed Now we reorganize the table as recommended We demonstrate both
505. t click on it to open the pop up window and choose Configure Parameters Figure 3 20 on page 134 Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 133 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 3 control Center O All Systems ef vmsuse S amp C Instances ee Figure 3 20 Configure DBM parameter in Control Center gt Make your updates and mark Update when available if it is there for every parameter that you want to change At the bottom of the window is a brief description about the selected parameter Figure 3 21 on page 135 134 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm MAX_CONNRETRIES 5 MAX_TIME_DIFF 60 START_STOP_TIME 10 vy Monitor DFT _MON_BUFP DFT_MON_LOCK DFT_MON_SORT DFT_MON_STMT DFT_MON_TABLE DFT_MON_TIMES DFT_MON_UOW Figure 3 21 Change parameter gt Once all the desired changes have been made click OK and these changes will be applied Figure 3 22 he DBM configuration settings were updated successfully Figure 3 22 Changes of DBM parameters finished The default behavior of the UPDATE DBM CFG command is to apply the change immediately If you do not want the change to be applied immediately use the DEFERRED option on the UPDATE DBM CFG command Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 135 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Command line Commands to change the setting of the DBM con
506. t data for only one database partition for example data residing on current database partition you can do it as in Example 6 47 Example 6 47 Export data for current database partition from table ITEM db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 export to itempart0 del of del messages exppart0 msg select from item where dbpartitionnum itemid current dbpartitionnum Number of rows exported 1500364 298 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm We specified a messages file called exppart0 msg The export utility writes error warning and informational messages into this file For all interfaces except the CLP you must specify the name of the messages file in advance with the MESSAGES parameter If you want to export data in parallel across different database partitions you can use the db2_a11 tool Export table data using the Control Center You can also use the DB2 Control Center to invoke EXPORT on a Linux platform Expand the object tree in the Control Center until you find the Tables or Views folder Any existing tables or views are displayed in the contents pane on the right side of the panel Right click the table or view a menu listed all the activities for the table shows See Figure 6 29 Control Center 3 Control Center 4 O All Systems All Databases L F itsops ranes O Views 5 Aliases E Nicknames Cache Objects Triggers Schemas 5 Indexes
507. t the Health Center by selecting Health Center from the Tools menu within any DB2 GUI tools where the Tools menu is available or by executing the command db2hc from the Command Line Processor Activating the health monitor The health monitor is activated by default and if it is stopped for any reason you can reactivate it by using Health Center or using DB2 CLP commands When health monitor is stopped because the HEALTH_MON parameter in database manager configuration DBM CFG is OFF the Start Health Monitor menu item will appear in the pop up window when you right click on the instance name as shown in Figure 7 1 on page 350 Similarly the Stop Health Monitor menu item will appear if HEALTH_MON is set to ON and the health monitor is started Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 349 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Health Center Maj i jtara Figure 7 1 Start Health monitor for instance using Health Center You can also use DB2 CLP commands to activate the health monitor by updating the HEALTH_MON parameter for DBM and view the current setting of HEALTH_MON parameter as shown in Example 6 1 Example 7 1 Check if health monitor is enabled for instance db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 get dbm cfg grep i health Monitor health of instance and databases HEALTH MON OFF db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 update dbm cfg using HEALTH MON on DB20000I The UPDATE DATABASE
508. t the right permissions on all file systems or directories where you want to store the database files By default the database will be created and cataloged in the path that is determined by the database manager configuration DBM cfg parameter DF TDBPATH You can change this to your desired default path by entering following command db2 update dbm cfg using DFTDBPATH database The creation of the file systems and mount points is explained in 2 2 3 Storage planning on page 39 Create Database wizard If you have DB2 installed in a single partition node then the easiest way to create a database is to use the Create Database wizard The DB2 instance is already created during DB2 installation as described in 2 3 Installing DB2 on page 58 The steps to create a single partitioned database using Create Database wizard is as follows 1 Start the Create Database wizard from the Control Center Right click on All Databases then select Create Database gt Standard as shown in Figure 3 5 F Control Center KD Control Center Selected Edit View Tools Help DHBSAse BOS BESO L Object View 3 Control Center control Center O All Systems A z o Abeer mE E O SAMPLE Open New Control Center ystems Create Database Standard Add With Automatic Maintenance Register with XSR From Backup Refresh Figure 3 5 Start the create database wizard 2 Specify a name fo
509. t you have specified Select a recommendation from the list to view its details in the Details field To view the full set of recommendations click Show All Recommendations To accept the recommendation you have selectec and to review the actions associated with it click Next Recommendations 2 Rank Description Properties V Preferred recommendations 2 Add a new stripe set The recommendation w Bd d new table space containers The recommendation w Figure 7 22 Selecting a recommendation iv The Review the required actions panel shows Figure 7 23 In our sample we need to add containers in DB2 Control Center Click Launch button and follow the Usage instruction to add containers in Control Center After taking corresponding action Click Next Review the required actions The recommended tool can help to resolve the current health alert To learn more about this tool click Details To launch this tool click Launch For a tool that the advisor cannot launch directly follow the directions in the tool description Recommendation Add new table space containers Details p Recommended tool Control Center Alter Table Space Notebook Launch Usage instruction Click the Containers page Select Add to open the Define Container dialog Complete the required fields on the Define Container dialog and click OK to add the new container The Define Container dialog closes returnin
510. tabase is not in a restore pending state A database is not in rollforward pending state Table spaces are in a normal state A database does not contain user defined types UDTs with the name ARRAY BINARY DATALINK DECFLOAT VARBINARY or XML A database does not have orphan rows in system catalog tables that would cause database migration to fail A database enabled as an HADR primary database allows successful connections A database is not in HADR standby role If SYSCATSPACE is a DMS table space and AUTORESIZE is not enabled SYSCATSPACE has at least 50 free pages of total pages The command syntax is as follows db2ckmig e 1 logfile_name In Example 4 5 we scanned all cataloged databases and saved the results to a text file db2ckmig log Example 4 5 db2ckmig command dpfusr1 mensa opt ibm db2 V9 5 bin gt db2ckmig e 1 dpfhome dpfusr1 db2ckmig 1og db2ckmig was successful Database s can be migrated We checked db2ckmig log for any errors and to ensure that the version of DB2CKMIG being run was Version 9 5 and not a previous version Example 4 6 shows the db2ckmig log file If db2ckmig encounter any error when checking the database actions to fix the errors have to be done before the migration Example 4 6 db2ckmig output dpfusr1 mensa opt ibm db2 V9 5 bin gt more dpfhome dpfusr1 db2ckmig 1log Version of DB2CKMIG being run VERSION 9 5 Chapter 4 Migration and Fix Packs 173
511. table Once the table is created issue the LOAD or IMPORT command to add the data to the table The db2look command preserves all of the properties of a table and is a superior option for table re creation The authority and privileges required for running import with and without creating a new table option is different To use the import utility to create a new table you must have SYSADM authority DBADM authority or CREATETAB privilege for the database To replace data in an existing table or view you must have SYSADM authority DBADM authority or CONTROL privilege for the table or view To append data to an existing table or view you must have SELECT and INSERT privileges for the table or view The import utility performs the following steps to import the data 1 Locking tables Import acquires either an exclusive X lock or a nonexclusive IX lock on existing target tables depending on whether you allow concurrent access to the table 2 Locating and retrieving data Import uses the FROM clause to locate the input data 3 Inserting data Import either replaces existing data or adds new rows of data to the table 4 Checking constraints and firing triggers As the data is written import ensures that each inserted row complies with the constraints defined on the target table Information about rejected rows is written to the messages file Import also fires existing triggers 5 Committing the operation Import saves the changes
512. tainer definition Using the generated script we were able to redefine the table space container path and size very easy Example 6 27 Roll forward after redirected restore db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 rollforward db itsodb stop Rollforward Status Input database alias itsodb Number of nodes have returned status 2 Node number Roll forward Next log Log files processed Last committed transaction status to be read 0 not pending 0000002 LOG S0000002 L0G 2008 02 07 01 32 41 000000 UTC 1 not pending 2008 02 07 01 36 12 000000 UTC DB20000I The ROLLFORWARD command completed successfully db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2INST1 ITSODB Database server SQL authorization ID Local database alias db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 list tablespace container for 4 SQLO104N An unexpected token container was found following TABLESPACE Chapter 6 Administering databases 263 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Expected tokens may include CONTAINERS SQLSTATE 42601 db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt db2 list tablespace containers for 4 Tablespace Containers for Tablespace 4 Container ID 0 Name tablespaces 1ITS00000 TSDATA1 000 Type File Note If you want to perform a redirected restore from one machine to another one using db2adut1 and TSM you need to set logarchopt1 and vendoropt data
513. taken The database backup image file used was created during a backup operation Every unit of work after the time of the backup is lost Version recovery can be used with non recoverable databases databases without archived logs It also can be used with recoverable databases by using the WITHOUT ROLLING FORWARD option on the RESTORE DATABASE command Full database restore from an offline backup A full database restore example from an offline backup is db2 restore db itsodb from db2backup taken at 20080204081423 If the offline database backup was taken from a recoverable database you have to use the WITHOUT ROLLING FORWARD clause within the restore command to do the version recovery Note In a partitioned database environment you must restore all database partitions and the backup images that you use for the restore database operation must all have been taken at the same time db2_all db2 restore db itsodb from db2backup taken at 20080201170437 Full database restore from an online backup Version recovery of a database using backup taken online means that you restore the database to the point in time when the online backup was finished During the online backup transactions were still running against the database So the log files written during the backup time need to be applied Once the 250 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm restore command is run successfu
514. tandalone or a wse instance from single database partition environments creates a standalone or wse instance Migration to a client instance is unsupported 2 Save DBM and DB configuration settings You should compare these settings before and after migration to check for any migration errors Save the DB configuration for each database partition the DB configuration could be different 3 Save table space and package information using the db2 list tablespaces show detail and db2 list packages show detail commands You may also want to compare this information before and after migration 4 Back up DB2 server configuration and diagnostic information a Run the db2support command for all the databases that you are going to migrate in all of your instances See Example 4 2 Example 4 2 db2support dpfusrl gemini gt db2support dpfhome dpfusrl d dpfsamp cl 0 170 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm 5 8 b As external routine libraries are not backed up with other database objects when a database backup is performed back up all your external routines Example 4 3 shows how to backup all external routines created using the default path Example 4 3 external routines backup cp R dpfhome dpfusr1 sqllib function dpfhome dpfusr1 routine_backup If you use distributed transactions involving DB2 databases ensure that the databases to be migrated do not contain a
515. tatus reorg_completion dbpartitionnum from sysibmadm snaptab_reorg TAB_NAME REORG_TYPE REORG_STATUS REORG_COMPLETION DBPARTITIONNUM ITEM RECLUSTER ONLINE ALLOW WRITE STARTED SUCCESS ITEM RECLUSTER ONLINE ALLOW WRITE COMPLETED SUCCESS 1 2 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select substr tabname 1 10 as tab_name substr reorg_ type 1 30 as reorg_type reorg_status reorg_completion dbpartitionnum from sysibmadm snaptab_reorg TAB_NAME REORG_TYPE REORG_STATUS REORG_COMPLETION DBPARTITIONNUM ITEM RECLUSTER ONLINE ALLOW WRITE COMPLETED SUCCESS ITEM RECLUSTER ONLINE ALLOW WRITE COMPLETED SUCCESS 1 2 record s selected After both database partitions completed we stop our monitoring script Example 6 43 is the output collected by the monitor program which was started prior to REORG TABLE The output contains table reorganization information such as Reorg Type Start Time and Status Started Truncate Completed and so forth These informations can be useful to detect performance problems or to see if a REORG is still in progress on a specific database partition and how long it is running Example 6 43 The snapshot and db2pd information for table reorganization Table Snapshot First database connect timestamp 02 13 2008 09 32 59 904159 292 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Last reset timestamp Snapshot timestamp 02 13 2008 14 35 37 023048 Dat
516. ted to the package has been changed then in general rebinding is required for better performance An example of using the rebind command is shown in Example 6 45 Example 6 45 Re binding packages db2inst1 mensa gt db2 rebind MYTEST DB200001 The REBIND PACKAGE command completed successfully Attention Be cautious when using the db2rbind utility especially when the ALL parameter is used By default db2rbind will rebind invalid packages only But when ALL is specified all the packages inside the database both valid and invalid will be rebound If you know exactly what packages are related to the tables or indexes and the statistics information for those tables or indexes have just been changed then using the REBIND with a specific package name is recommended 6 3 Moving data using EXPORT IMPORT LOAD and db2move In this section we discuss data movement using DB2 EXPORT IMPORT and LOAD commands EXPORT allows you to export data from database tables into files with different file formats IMPORT writes data into database tables from a source data file LOAD provides the capability to fast move large volume of data Chapter 6 Administering databases 297 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm into the database tables We describe the basic usage of these utilities as well as the considerations when using the load utility under a multiple database partition environment If you are dealing with a lot of
517. th the Data Studio 460 Appendix A Issuing commands to multiple database partitions 481 db2all and afee sewiy wae eee heed EEEREN REEE E awe ad os 482 OD2 PS rarae ead aie See Pde Be he eats era ee ae E 485 db2_call_stack ska pennone ni eee eee e eens 485 Appendix B DB2 Tools Catalog creation 0 004 487 DB2 tools catalog creation 1 0 ce eee 488 Related publications 0 0 02 495 IBM Redbooks 0 esceekta eee b eve bie tee Teeth ee ee ba deb bare Led 495 Other publications 0 0 tenes 495 Online resourceS marire ninade eee eee 496 How to get IBM Redbooks 0 c eee eee 498 MOOK chee See ie a See Aree eee ae eee dee Be 499 Contents vii 6899TOC fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm viii Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899spec fm Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right m
518. th the database backup image If you need to ship the backup images to a disaster recovery site you do not have to send the log files separately or package them together with database backup copy manually Further you do not have to decide which log files are required to guarantee the consistency of an online backup Example 6 11 provides a sample of a full online backup Example 6 9 Full online backup to disk with included logs db2instl mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb online to db2backup include logs Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080204090001 gt Table space A table space backup allows you to back up only the specified table spaces In Example 6 10 we back up only table space TBSPDMS_0 Example 6 10 Table space backup online TBSPDMS_0 db2inst1 mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb tablespace TBSPDMS 0 online to db2backup Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080204090637 gt Full incremental An incremental backup saves backup time and resources Example 6 11 provides an incremental backup example Example 6 11 Incremental backup to disk db2inst1 mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb online incremental to db2backup Backup successful The timestamp for this backup image is 20080204091101 gt Delta backup Example 6 12 shows the delta database backup after taking a full database backup Example 6 12 Delta backup to TSM db2inst1 mensa gt db2 backup db itsodb onli
519. that they do not have any file system administration overhead They also offer a little bit better availability as they are not dependent on file system failures Since long data bypasses the buffer pools we do not recommended placing long table spaces in raw devices For the same reason it is not recommended to place the catalog table space on raw devices Now we demonstrate how to create a table space on a block device In Example 3 4 we use the fdisk command to create new disk partition on an empty disk with the name sdb We then create one new extended disk partition called sdb1 After that we create a logical disk partition called sdb5 within the extended disk partition sdb1 Note under Linux extended disk partitions are container which can contain several logical disk partitions Example 3 4 Use fdisk to create a block device puget fdisk dev sdb Command m for help p Disk dev sdb 214 MB 214748160 bytes 64 heads 32 sectors track 204 cylinders Units cylinders of 2048 512 1048576 bytes Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System Command m for help n Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 97 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Command action e extended p primary partition 1 4 e Partition number 1 4 1 First cylinder 1 204 default 1 Using default value 1 Last cylinder or size or sizeM or sizeK 1 204 default 204 Using default value 204 Command m for help p Disk
520. the Control Center expand the object tree until you find the Tables folder 2 Click the Tables folder Any existing tables are displayed in the pane on the right side of the panel the contents pane 3 Right click the table you want in the contents pane and select Import from the pop up menu The Import notebook opens See Figure 6 31 is a sample for using IMPORT from Control Center Import table ITEMIMP db2backup datamove item ixf WEIS SGT ese EIE Yass db2backup datamove itemimp2 msg Figure 6 31 Using IMPORT within DB2 Control Center Chapter 6 Administering databases 303 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Within the Control Center we set the COMMITCOUNT parameter to AUTOMATIC 1 as shown in Figure 6 32 Import table ITEMIMP Ye j o E Pog Figure 6 32 Import Options in the Control Center When AUTOMATIC is specified import internally determines when a commit needs to be performed The utility will commit for either one of two reasons gt To avoid running out of active log space gt To avoid lock escalation from row level to table level Figure 6 33 shows the command generated by the Control Center CONNECT TO ITSODB IMPORT FROM db2backup datamove item ixt OF IXF COMMITCOUNT AUTOMATIC MESSAGES db2backup datamove itemimp2 msg REPLACE INTO DB2INST 1 ITEMIMP CONNECT RESET Figure 6 33 Generated IMPORT command In a partitioned database envir
521. the DAS and create a new one If you do not have a DAS in any database partition server create a new one You can find more details about DAS creation in Chapter 2 Installation on page 25 178 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm DAS migration The following steps show how to migrate a DAS from Version 8 or 9 1 to DB2 9 5 1 2 3 Log in as root user Go to DB2DIR instance Enter the command dasmigr Example 4 13 shows a dasmigr execution Example 4 13 dasmigr mensa opt ibm db2 V9 5 instance dasmigr SQL4407W The DB2 Administration Server was stopped successfully SQL4406W The DB2 Administration Server was started successfully DBI10701 Program dasmigr completed successfully Tools catalog database migration If you want to use your existing scripts and schedules created in Version 8 or Version 9 you have to perform the following steps 1 Obtain the name of the instance and the tools catalog database through db2 get admin cfg command see Example 4 14 Example 4 14 Get tool catalog information dpfusr1l gemini gt db2 get admin cfg Admin Server Configuration Tools Catalog Database TOOLSCAT_DB TOOLSDB Tools Catalog Database Instance TOOLSCAT_INST dpfusr1 Tools Catalog Database Schema TOOLSCAT_SCHEMA CC Scheduler User ID Migrate the instance that owns the tools catalog database using the procedure described in 4 2 3
522. the database manger So they cannot access the files of the database instance directly It also prevents buffer overflows from taking excessive database resources The fenced user ID is defined during the creation of the instance Authorities DB2 instance level authorities SYSADM SYSCTRL SYSMAINT and SYSMON are granted through operating system group Each of them provides a certain level of access and permissions to the databases of the instance In the database manager configuration you can define what Linux groups are assigned to what authorities The authorized groups are specified in the database manager configuration as shown in Example 3 38 Example 3 38 Instance level authorities db2instl puget gt db2 get dbm config grep _GROUP SYSADM group name SYSADM GROUP DB2IADM1 SYSCTRL group name SYSCTRL_GROUP SYSMAINT group name SYSMAINT_GROUP SYSMON group name SYSMON_GROUP Security on network level If networking is enabled the database manager opens a TCP IP port which is used by DB2 clients to communicate to the server Firewalls must be opened for that port and you can use proxies For instance SOCKS Version 4 By default all communication between database server and client is not encrypted If you need to protect the data transfer you can enable SSL support or you can configure the server for SERVER_ENCRYPT or DATA_ENCRYPT authentication The authentication type is defined in the database manager configura
523. tion XMLELEMENT places the lt product gt attribute around the individual XML documents Then XSLTRANSFORN is used to transform the document into the HTML output by using the XSLT Example 8 40 shows the output which is an HTML and can be used directly by a browser Example 8 40 Result of the XML transformation as text db2instl puget gt db2 x tf select6 sql lt html gt lt body gt lt hl gt List of items lt h1 gt lt table border 1 gt lt tr bgcolor cccccc gt lt th align left gt Product lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Jean lt td gt 452 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Shirt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt Figure 8 4 on page 453 shows the HTML in a browser File Edit View History Bookmarks J COA _ Authentic IBMDB2V List of items Product Jean Shirt Figure 8 4 Result of the XSLT transformation in a Browser The source for learning the details about pureXML are pureXML Guide SC23 5871 00 Information Center in Database Fundamentals gt pureXML PureXML DB2 9 pureXML Overview and Fast Start SG24 7298 DB2 9 pureXML Guide SG24 7315 vvvy Note UDB 9 5 doesn t support pureXML in a partitioned database environment 8 5 Application development tools DB2 provides many robust tools for d
524. tion as shown in Example 3 39 Example 3 39 Authentication parameter in the database manger configuration db2instl puget gt db2 get dbm config l grep AUTHENTICATION Database manager authentication AUTHENTICATION SERVER Security on database level On database level you can control data access using authorities and privileges DB2 provided The data access can be controlled even in the row and column The security mechanism DB2 offered includes gt Authorities for the administrators 146 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm gt Views for restricting access to a subset of the data gt Privileges to restrict access on the DB2 objects gt Packages to restrict access to certain functions gt UDFs and stored procedures to restrict access to certain functions gt Roles offer a more detailed way to implement security roles than offered by the Linux groups gt Encryption to even protect data from accessing by the DBA gt LBAC to restrict access to data of users on column and row level gt Trusted context to address the typical problems introduced in a multiple tier architecture Privileges On database level privileges can be granted on the following object types Schemas table spaces Tables and views Packages Indexes Sequences Routines vvvvvvy Privileges can be granted to Linux users Linux groups DB2 roles PUBLIC vvvy To grant privileges u
525. tion parameter Log mirroring allows the database to write an identical second copy of log files to a different path Note Mirroring log files helps protect a database from accidental deletion of an active log and data corruption caused by disk error While this functionality increases the high availability of a system log mirroring may impact system performance as all log data will be written to both the log path and the mirror log path In Example 2 3 we change the primary log path from the default to db2l0g1 ITSODB and set the mirror log path to db2log2 ITSODB for the database ITSODB Example 2 3 db2 logs configuration db2 update db cfg for ITSODB using NEWLOGPATH db210g1 ITSODB db2 update db cfg for ITSODB using MIRRORLOGPATH db21log2 ITSODB The procedure of changing the log path is discussed in 3 4 1 Change online log path on page 116 44 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch02 fm Note These changes will only take place after you deactivate and activate your database Temp space DB2 uses system temporary table spaces for many SQL operations such as JOIN and SORT DB2 s temporary table space TEMPSPACE1 is one of the three default table spaces SYSCATSPACE TEMPSPACE1 and USERSPACE1 that are created during database creation By default TEMPSPACE1 is placed in the database path For larger systems we recommend that your temporary table spaces are located o
526. tions UDFs stored procedure code in operating system libraries and load copies DB2 distinguishes between two types of databases non recoverable and recoverable Non recoverable means that DB2 can only restore the entire database to the point in time where the backup was taken This is also called version recovery Data that is easily recreated can be stored ina non recoverable database Data that cannot be easily recreated should be stored in a recoverable database For a recoverable database DB2 can restore the entire database or a part of the database to the point in time where the interrupt occurred to end of log or to a specific point in time We call it rollforward recovery Database logging A key element of any high availability strategy is database logging DB2 is logging every transaction unless told not to or in case of using the Load utility The database log files are important if it is needed to recover the database Recovery log files and the recovery history file are created automatically when a database is created DB2 has two types of logging mechanisms gt Circular logging Circular logging is the default logging method for a newly created database If both the LOGARCHMETH1 and LOGARCHMETH2 database configuration parameters are set to OFF then the database is non recoverable and circular logging is used A set of log files is used in round robin fashion These log files are used by crash recovery if needed Crash rec
527. tition groups you want to redistribute and perform the redistribution On the Redistribute Strategy window select Real time system analysis to let DB2 gather information about how much log space is needed and how much is available Repeat this for all database partition groups that should be extended over the added partition The redistribution messages are stored as well in INSTHOME sq 11ib redist lt dbmame gt lt part group gt lt time gt 3 6 DB2 configuration DB2 has a large number of configuration parameters that specify the allocation of system resources and the overall configuration of the instance and database These parameters are stored in the database configuration in the database manager configuration and in the registry Since the default values are set for machines with relatively small memory and disk storage you may need to modify them to fit your environment A good starting point for tuning your configuration is the Configuration Advisor or the AUTOCONFIGURE command If you create a new database many of the parameters are already set to AUTOMATIC so that STMM takes care of their tuning 3 6 1 STMM Self tuning memory management In version 9 DB2 introduced a new feature the Se f Tuning Memory Management STMM that greatly simplifies the database memory configuration by 128 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch03 fm automatically setting values for sever
528. to handle an alert If you chose Show Details the following panel Figure 7 19 on page 365 appears 364 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Details Table Space Utilization Figure 7 19 Detailed information for an alert within Health Center 5 Take corresponding action to resolve current health alerts a Use Recommendation Advisor utility i If you choose Recommendation Advisor at previous panel to get the recommendation for this alert the Recommendation Advisor utility will be launched See Figure 7 20 on page 366 The first panel an introduction You can review health alert details here After reviewing health alert details click Next Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 365 6899ch07 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Recommendation Advisor Figure 7 20 Recommendation Advisor introduction ii On Specify your database requirements Figure 7 21 specify your database requirement In our sample we choose I would like an immediate solution to problem option Click Next Figure 7 21 Specifying your database requirements iii On Select a recommendation Figure 7 22 select a recommendation from the Preferred recommendations list We choose Add new table space containers Click Next 366 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Select a recommendation The following recommendations satisfy all of the requirements tha
529. tored 3 Copy User Dt CB WebSe m Delete v xL TA s Import Gwe A Export i boy Expo b XM b Coxm 2 Refresh xsi Validate p Apply Patch With r 4 compar Wt Share Project Restore from Local History _ 64 Database Exel PDE Tools gt 78 4 Design Properties a Y Derarert Figure 5 17 Share a project Data Studio asks a few information such as repository location about the source control application you use then synchronizes the resources from the workspace with the repository Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch05 fm Note To use the team functions a code repository like SVN or CVS is required You need to install and configure SVN or CVS separately as these repositories are not part of the Data Studio Linux provides packages for SVN and CVS Once a workspace is shared you can synchronize it with the repository at any time you can check in the code at certain checkpoints and perform all operations which are supported by your repository You have access to all previous check in versions of your files Checkout a shared project If you want to use a project which is checked in into a code repository you have to check it out to your local workspace In order to do that you can switch to the related perspective for that repository For instance if you want to check out a project from a CVS repository switch to
530. tory resources that can be shared by multiple packages A 2 The installation directory any resources that are unique to the package that you are installing Important You can only select the shared resources directory the first time you install a package with the IBM Installation Manager For best results select the drive with the most available space because it must have adequate space for the shared resources of future packages Shared Resources Directory fopt IBM SDP 70Shared once installed IBM Installation Manager will be used to install update modify manage and uninstall your packages y Installation Manager Directory opt IBM InstallationManager eclipse Disk Space Information Volume Available Space 916GB Figure 5 4 Location for shared resources and Installation Manager Next you can specify if you want to use an existing package group or create a new one We create a new package group using the default location See Figure 5 5 on page 200 Chapter 5 IBM Data Studio 199 6899ch05 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Ey IBM Installation Manager Install Packages A package group is a location that contains one or more packages Some packages can be installed into a common package group and will share a common user interface Select an existing package group or create a new one Install Licenses Location Features Summary Create a n
531. ture We use this architecture to discuss the code page conversion taken placed between database and application Database tier Application tier l Presentation tier Web browser of a i i chinese user Application UTF 8 hosted in an l application server UTF 8 Web browser of Batch application l l an US user running in a ISO8859 1 Pe peas single byte l Database UTF 8 o A codepage environment ISO8859 1 No conversion Interface file Figure 3 3 Code page conversion scenario Chapter 3 Post installation tasks 93 6899ch03 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm This is a typical application architecture with one database which is accessed by a J2EE application from an application server and a batch application which extracts data The J2EE application is accessed by the users using Web browsers The database is created in UTF 8 format The J2EE application also uses the data in UTF 8 format The batch application runs on a single byte environment and converts the data into SO8859 1 format Since this is a worldwide application the user community uses different code pages setup in their Web browsers DB2 automatically converts the code page between the client and the server For applications this conversion probably needs to be implemented into the code In Figure 3 3 on page 93
532. u can first load it into a single partition table and then perform a load operation using the CURSOR file type to move the data into a multiple database partition table Example 6 53 on page 309 If you try to load source file in IXF format to a database partitioned table directly it results in error SQL3004N It means the filetype parameter is not valid because IXF files cannot be used to load into a table spanning multiple database partitions 308 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Example 6 53 Load data from CURSOR into a database partitioned table db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load from item ixf of ixf replace into itemload SQL3004N The filetype parameter is not valid db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 declare mycursor cursor for select from item db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 load from mycursor of cursor replace into itemload copy yes to db2backup datamove copydata Agent Type Node SQL Code Result LOAD 000 00000000 Success LOAD 001 00000000 Success PARTITION 001 00000000 Success RESULTS 2 of 2 LOADs completed successfully Summary of Partitioning Agents Rows Read 3000000 Rows Rejected 0 Rows Partitioned 3000000 Summary of LOAD Agents Number of rows read 3000000 Number of rows skipped 0 Number of rows loaded 3000000 Number of rows rejected 0 Number of rows deleted 0 Number of rows committed
533. u set this value to YES so DB2 can split the work over many processes gt MAX_QUERYDEGREE Because parallelism in an OLTP system is not desirable set it to 1 For DSS set it to the number of CPUs of the database server to prevent users from setting an incorrect degree in their program which can slowdown DB2 activities Please note that in static package if the query degree is set at the bind time the max_querydegree is overridden by the query degree setting gt INSTANCE MEMORY Can be set to AUTOMATIC If this variable is set to AUTOMATIC it is calculated at the start of the instance Setting it to a value allows you to define the memory used by the instance gt JAVA_HEAP_SZ Defines the heap size which is used for Java UDFs and stored procedures gt SVCENAME Defines the TCP IP port number or name which us used by the instance If you use a port name you have to define it in etc services Note For a complete and detailed description of all the DBM parameters refer to the Information Center at http publib boulder ibm com infocenter db21 uw v9r5 index jsp topic com ib m db2 1luw admin config doc doc c0004555 htm Monitor and update DBM configuration Configuring settings of a DB2 Instance can be done either through the Control Center or on DB2 Command line Control Center Use the following steps to set DBM configuration gt Start the Control Center and expand the tree up to the desired Instance gt Righ
534. uch as media or storage failure or to rebuild the database on another system There are three types of recovery gt Crash recovery protects a database from being left in an inconsistent or unusable state when transactions also called units of work are interrupted unexpectedly gt Version recovery is the restoration of a previous version of the database using an image that was created during a backup operation Chapter 6 Administering databases 249 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm gt Rollforward recovery can be used to reapply changes that were made by transactions that were committed after a backup was made Crash recovery A crash recovery may be needed after a severe error or condition that causes the database or the database manager to end abnormally Unit of work UOW that have not been flushed to disk at the time of failure leave the database in an inconsistent state The database needs to be recovered By default DB2 starts crash recovery automatically to attempt to recover the database If you do not want the automatic restart behavior set the AUTORESTART database configuration parameter to OFF You will need to issue the db2 restart database command manually when a database failure occurs The administration notification log records information about crash recovery Version recovery Version recovery means to restore the database to the point in time when the database backup was
535. uery select count from empmdc where expltest TEST After pressing Next at the Recommendations panel the tool creates the suggestions for the provided workload Figure 8 9 on page 460 shows that creating an index is recommended Chapter 8 Application development 459 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm V EMPMDC V Index Index Figure 8 9 Recommendations in Visual Explain The page Unused Objects shows indexes which are not needed for the evaluated workload 8 5 3 Application development with the Data Studio Data Studio an Eclipse based tool offers the features provided by Eclipse For instance gt gt gt Context dependent help Context assist Software Configuration Management with all compatible systems CVS CMVC SVN and so on Debugger For general information about Eclipse use the following Web site http www eclipse org 460 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch08 fm The Data Studio is a replacement of the Development Center and offers functions and features beyond application development In regards to application development it offers the following additional features gt gt gt Integrated Query Editor for SQL and XQuery SQLJ Editor SQL Builder The Query Builder allows you to create your queries by using Drag amp Drop You can test the queries directly by running them and viewing the
536. uggest a full offline backup for each database 10 If you are still using raw devices for database logging or table space containers you have to change them to block devices 11 Install DB2 9 5 Server 12 Stop the instance 13 Make sure there is no outstanding processes on the instance to be migrated 14 Verify that the databases in the instance can be migrated using db2ckmig and if necessary take actions to fix the problems 15 Migrate instance to DB2 9 5 16 Preserve db2diag log by renaming the file 17 Preserve files indicated in DIAGPATH parameter including dump files trap files and alert log files 18 Start DB2 instance 19 Migrate databases in the instance 20 Compare database configuration settings after migration with the configuration settings before the migration and adjust them if required 2 _ Reset the following configuration parameters to the value before the migration DIAGLEVEL LOGFILSIZ LOGPRIMARY LOGSECOND 22 Start up your database and review the administration notification log or the db2diag log file to verify that all database services are running properly and all buffer pools are activated 23 Update the statistics for system catalog tables and user tables particularly those tables that are critical to the performance of your SQL queries 24 Rebind application packages to avoid implicit rebound overhead on the first time the packages are used 25 Migrate DB2 Explain table
537. uild is faster than an incremental rebuild If the index is very large it will be quicker to do an incremental rebuild In addition options for statistics collection are also provided in this panel If you do not want to make any modifications take the the defaults Chapter 6 Administering databases 325 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD pipec 2 aaintictleir Let ohety te a jop iela erajn lt default gt Figure 6 40 Specify performance and statistics collection options 8 Specify failure options and recovery strategy Options regarding failure handling and recovery strategy are covered in this panel For example if you want the whole load operation to halt when any error occurs during the load operation then you can check both boxes for error isolation load job fails and load rollback in the Crash recovery section as shown in Figure 6 41 on page 327 326 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm Load Wizard ITEMLOAD Facai edrisistaniey aina aiel janaria rove aoin agaaa ellirinie elect Higar OF POS Sansa aonane Jona lias Figure 6 41 Specify failure options and recovery strategy 9 Set advanced options Here you can specify additional options associated with the load operation which are not covered by the preceding panels and you can get hints by clicking on the option listed in the panel Figure 6 42 o
538. ultset Ar Figure 8 40 Debug stored procedure Chapter 8 Application development 479 6899ch08 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm The Data Studio is a very powerful tool to perform application development with DB2 It takes many error prone tasks away from you It supports you in developing application code makes entering table and column names easy and provides intelligent defaults for the various tasks You can concentrate on implementing and testing your business logic The time you need for development will be dramatically reduced 480 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ax01 fm A Issuing commands to multiple database partitions This appendix discusses some commonly used DB2 commands in a multiple partition environment MPE These commands are very useful when you need to collect information from multiple database partitions or machines or make specified commands running against multiple partitions or machines The commands that are discussed in this appendix include db2_ps db2_all rah db2_call_stack and so on Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 481 6899ax01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm db2_ all and rah In a multiple partitions environment you may want to issue commands to be run on more than one machine or partition in the instance and you don t want to repeat the same commands on every machine o
539. unctionality Table 4 3 on page 180 shows DB2 9 5 connectivity support Table 4 3 Supported connectivity Client Client connectivity support 32 bit or 64 bit 32 bit or 64 bit Any DB2 9 5 clients can establish 32 bit or DB2 9 5 clients DB2 9 5 server 64 bit connections and use full DB2 9 5 functionality 32 bit or 64 bit Only DB2 9 1 functionality is available DB2 9 1 server 32 bit or 64 bit DB2 Only DB2 UDB Version 8 functionality is UDB Version 8 available server 180 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux 6899ch04 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 32 bit or 64 bit 32 bit or 64 bit Only DB2 Version 9 1 functionality is DB2 9 1 clients DB2 9 5 server available 32 bit or 64 bit DB2 Version 8 clients 32 bit or 64 bit DB2 9 5 server Only DB2 UDB Version 8 functionality is available If you have a Version 8 client in the same machine as a DB2 9 5 server or a DB2 9 5 client in a Version 8 server connections to the server from the client using local node IPC are not supported We recommend you migrate this client to DB2 9 5 You can not choose the bit size of a client instance the size is determined by the operating system Migrating DB2 server for Linux supports DB2 clients on UNIX and Windows platforms In this section we provide the migration methods for migrating DB2 clients for Linux and Windows Table 4 4 summaries how you can migrate various DB2 clients from Version 8 or Version 9
540. uninterruptable sleep w The number of processes swapped out but otherwise runable Memory swpd The amount of virtual memory used kB free The amount of idle memory kB buff The amount of memory used as buffers kB Swap si Amount of memory swapped in from disk kB s so Amount of memory swapped to disk kB s IO bi Blocks sent to a block device blocks s bo Blocks received from a block device blocks s System in The number of interrupts per second including the clock cs The number of context switches per second CPU us User time Chapter 7 Monitoring and troubleshooting DB2 409 6899ch07 fm 7 6 3 iostat Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm sy System time id Idle time A sample report generated by vmstat is shown in Example 7 29 The vmstat 2 10 command reports virtual memory statistics 10 times and interval is 2 seconds Example 7 29 Using vmstat to observe virtual memory statistics pdb2inst1l mensa db2home db2inst1 gt vmstat 2 10 procs memory swap jo system cpu r b swpd free buff cache si so bi bo in cs us sy id wa st 0 0 6184 285668 274036 2883968 0 0 6 24 3 14 0099 1 0 0 0 6184 285668 274036 2883968 0 0 0 38 628 310 0 099 1 0 0 0 6184 285668 274036 2883968 0 0 0 12 612 291 0 0100 0 0 0 0 6184 285668 274036 2883968 0 0 0 36 616 301 0 0100 0 0 0 0 6184 28
541. up datamove gt db2move itsodb COPY sn DB2INST1 co target_db itsorep schema_map DB2INST1 DB2VS schema_map DB2INST1 DB2VS owner db2vs u db2inst1 p mypassword Application code page not determined using ANSI codepage 1208 kkkkk DB2MOVE kkkkk Action COPY Start time Mon Feb 11 10 15 44 2008 All schema names matching DB2INST1 Connecting to database ITSODB successful Server DB2 Common Server V9 5 0 Copy schema DB2INST1 to DB2VS on the target database ITSOREPL Create DMT SYSTOOLS DMT_47b090d571d8d Start Load Phase db2move finished successfully Files generated COPYSCHEMA 20080211101544 msg LOADTABLE 20080211101544 MSG Please delete these files when they are no longer needed Chapter 6 Administering databases 331 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm End time Mon Feb 11 10 18 35 2008 The files which were generated during the data move can be checked to see the details about the COPY and the LOAD In our case the following files were created COPYSCHEMA 20080211101544 msg LOADTABLE 20080211101544 MSG LOADTABLE 20080211101544 MSG 1oad 000 LOADTABLE 20080211101544 MSG 1load 001 LOADTABLE 20080211101544 MSG part 001 In Example 6 61 we confirm that the schema name was changed Example 6 61 Confirm the changed schema name during db2move db2inst1 mensa db2backup datamove gt db2 connect to itsodb Database Connection Information DB2 LINUXX8664 9 5 0 DB2I
542. uthority to modify kernel parameters With Version 8 and later DB2 checks values of the kernel sem kernel msgmni and kernel shmmax parameters automatically at DB2 start time and changes them for you if the current values are not optimal The db2start command does the following gt Changes SEMMNI kernel parameter to 1024 gt Changes MSGMNI kernel parameter to 1024 gt Changes SHMMAX kernel parameter to 268435456 32 bit or 1073741824 64 bit Manually updating the kernel shmmax kernel msgmni and kernel sem parameters prior to root installations is no longer required However for non root Chapter 2 Installation 29 6899ch02 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm installations you should check these kernel parameters before installation and update them if needed Manually updating kernel parameters If any of the default kernel parameter settings do not meet the requirements of your particular system you can update them manually To check your current shared memory segment semaphore array and message queue limits use the ipes 1 command Your output should look something like this Shared Memory Limits max number of segments 4096 SHMMNI max seg size kbytes 32768 SHMMAX max total shared memory kbytes 8388608 SHMALL min seg size bytes 1 Semaphore Limits max number of arrays 1024 SEMMNI max semaphores per array 250 SEMMSL max sema
543. ve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products This information contains examples of data and reports used in daily business operations To illustrate them as completely as possible the examples include the names of individuals companies brands and products All of these names are fictitious and any similarity to the names and addresses used by an actual business enterprise is entirely coincidental COPYRIGHT LICENSE This information contains sample application programs in source language which illustrate programming techniques on various operating platforms You may copy modify and distribute these sample programs in any form without payment to IBM for the purposes of developing using marketing or distributing application programs conforming to the application programming interfac
544. verview of the DB2 environment and its parallelism with Linux Along with an overview the following topics are covered gt DB2 for Linux features and offerings Covers features supported platforms and products and packages gt DB2 environment Covers deployment topologies and db2 database objects gt Parallelism with DB2 Covers SMP environments database clusters and partitioned databases Copyright IBM Corp 2008 All rights reserved 1 6899ch01 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 1 1 Overview It was not too long ago that Linux servers were being used primarily in the academic and scientific domain In just a few short years Linux has earned the designation of being one of the fastest growing server operating platforms and is becoming increasingly pervasive in the enterprise Its openness flexibility and ability to lower cost of ownership are just some of the factors that have contributed to this operating system s phenomenal success in the commercial arena of e business systems Once relegated to running infrastructure tasks like file and Web serving Linux has now found its way into the enterprise datacenter Many companies have moved beyond the initial phases of experimentation and testing and are now reaping the benefits of deploying mission critical applications and databases with Linux and DB2 IBM DB2 has long been known for its technology leadership Therefore it was not surprising when IBM took th
545. vf itsodb_node0000 clp UPDATE COMMAND OPTIONS USING S ON Z ON ITSODB_NODE0000 out V ON DB200001 The UPDATE COMMAND OPTIONS command completed successfully SET CLIENT ATTACH _DBPARTITIONNUM 0 DB200001 The SET CLIENT command completed successfully SET CLIENT CONNECT _DBPARTITIONNUM 0 DB200001 The SET CLIENT command completed successfully RESTORE DATABASE ITSODB FROM db2backup TAKEN AT 20080206173239 INTO ITSODB REDIRECT SQL2539W Warning Restoring to an existing database that is the same as the backup image database The database files will be deleted Do you want to continue y n y SQL1277W A redirected restore operation is being performed Table space configuration can now be viewed and table spaces that do not use automatic 262 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch06 fm storage can have their containers reconfigured DB200001 The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully SET TABLESPACE CONTAINERS FOR 4 USING FILE tablespaces ITSO0000 TSDATA1 000 4000 DB200001 The SET TABLESPACE CONTAINERS command completed successfully RESTORE DATABASE ITSODB CONTINUE DB20000I The RESTORE DATABASE command completed successfully We also run script itsodb_node0001 clp against database partition 1 Because the database is enabled for rollforward recovery we have to do the rollforward before connecting to the database Example 6 27 shows the steps and the new table space con
546. view April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Example 7 30 shows using iostat command to monitor CPU and device I O statistics The iostat 2 5 command displays the current CPU load average and disk I O information 5 times and interval is 2 seconds Example 7 30 Using iostat to get CPU and I O statistics db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 gt iostat 2 5 Linux 2 6 16 46 0 12 smp mensa 02 14 2008 avg cpu user nice system iowait steal idle 0 23 0 00 0 19 0 67 0 00 98 91 Device tps Blk_read s Blk_wrtn s Blk_read Blk_wrtn sda 2 83 23 70 87 41 19896080 73373644 sdb 0 72 0 05 15 74 37783 13215608 sdc 0 00 0 00 0 00 1816 0 sdd 0 00 0 00 0 00 1816 0 sde 0 00 0 00 0 00 1816 0 sdf 0 00 0 00 0 00 1816 0 avg cpu user nice system iowait steal idle 0 00 0 00 0 25 0 50 0 00 99 00 Device tps Blk_read s Blk_wrtn s Blk_read Blk_wrtn sda 1 49 0 00 43 78 0 88 sdb 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdc 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdd 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sde 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdf 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 avg cpu user nice system iowait steal idle 0 00 0 00 0 50 0 00 0 00 99 50 Device tps Blk_read s Blk_wrtn s Blk_read Blk_wrtn sda 17 50 0 00 240 00 0 480 sdb 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdc 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdd 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sde 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdf 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 avg cpu user nice system iowait steal idle 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 100 00 Device tps Blk_read s Blk_wrtn s Blk_read Blk_wrtn sda 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 sdb 0 00 0 00 0 00
547. w up corrective action is executed automatically without user intervention As shown in Example 7 7 the output of LIST TABLESPACE SHOW DETAIL command shows that the total pages of the table space 372 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm TBSPDMS_0O has been extended to 20MB 8KB 2560 on each partition after health monitor executing this predefined automatically Example 7 7 db2 list tablespaces show detail output db2inst1 mensa db2home db2inst1 script gt db2_all echo DB2NODE db2 list tablespaces show detail DB2NODE 0 Tablespaces for Current Database essees Tablespace ID 8 Name TBSPDMS_0 Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Large table Space State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Normal Total pages 2560 Useable pages 2528 Used pages 1184 Free pages 1344 High water mark pages 1184 Page size bytes 8192 Extent size pages 32 Prefetch size pages 32 Number of containers Minimum recovery time 2008 02 21 22 46 03 000000 DB210111 In a partitioned database server environment only the table Spaces on the current node are listed mensa db2 list tablespaces completed ok DB2NODE 1 Tablespaces for Current Database Tablespace ID 8 Name TBSPDMS_0 Type Database managed space Contents All permanent data Large table space State 0x0000 Detailed explanation Chapter 7 Monitor
548. we start inplace table reorganization by using the command shown in Example 6 41 Example 6 41 REORG TABLE with INPLACE and ALLOW WRITE ACCESS mode db2inst1 mensa gt db2 reorg table item index PK_ITEM_ITEMID jinplace allow write access on all dbpartitionnums DB20000I The REORG command completed successfully DB210241 This command is asynchronous and may not be effective immediately From the output you can find that the inplace table reorganization is asynchronous and may not be effective immediately You have a few options to determine if the inplace table reorganization is finished or what the current status is While the REORG and our monitor script were running we checked the current status of the REORG command using the SNAPTAB_REORG administrative view as seen in Example 6 42 on page 292 Chapter 6 Administering databases 291 6899ch06 fm Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm Example 6 42 SNAPTAB_REORG administrative view db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select substr tabname 1 10 as tab_name substr reorg_ type 1 30 as reorg_type reorg_status reorg_completion dbpartitionnum from sysibmadm snaptab_reorg TAB_NAME REORG_TYPE REORG_STATUS REORG_COMPLETION DBPARTITIONNUM ITEM RECLUSTER ONLINE ALLOW WRITE STARTED SUCCESS ITEM RECLUSTER ONLINE ALLOW WRITE STARTED SUCCESS 1 2 record s selected db2inst1 mensa gt db2 select substr tabname 1 10 as tab_name substr reorg_ type 1 30 as reorg_type reorg_s
549. wing the top five performers Automatic performance analysis is available for any functions supported in background mode It is best to use this option in replay and background mode b option Valid sub options for b are d database sessions t tablespaces bufferpools Tables Dynamic SQL Statements Locks Utilities Federation Memory pools vvvvvvvvvvy 3 me cHMOHS A typical usage of automatic performance analysis is as follows gt Running db2top in collection mode for a period of time Example 7 12 shows running db2top in collector mode for 5 minutes in the first terminal session db2top f collect file C m 5 Example 7 12 Running db2top in collection mode for a period db2inst1 mensa software db2top linux_amd_64 gt db2set DB2DBDFT ITSODB db2inst1 mensa software db2top linux_amd_64 gt db2top f collect filelect file C m 5 01 17 26 minute s 01 01 01 01 18 18 19 20 01 01 01 01 Exiting 21 12 54 38 27 219 22 22 22 18 28 28 Starting DB2 snapshot data collector collection every 2 second s max duration 5 max file growth hour 100 0M hit lt CTRL C gt to cancel 1 0M written time 45 865 82 7M hour 2 1M written time 88 219 89 7M hour 3 4M written time 132 572 93 0M hour 4 7M written time 180 961 95 1M hour 6 2M written time 233 386 96 2M hour 7 8M written time 291 876 97 4M hour Max duration
550. ws in Example 7 28 Example 7 28 Using top to monitor specified processes top 17 11 13 up 9 days 16 25 7 users load average 0 49 0 22 0 07 Tasks 3 total 0 running 3 sleeping 0 stopped 0 zombie Cpu s 0 0 us 0 5 sy 0 0 ni 50 0 id 49 5 wa O0 0 hi 0 0 si 0 0 st 408 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch07 fm Mem 3842648k total 3577476k used 265172k free 276224k buffers Swap 8393920k total 6184k used 8387736k free 2890004k cached PID USER PR NI VIRT RES SHR S CPU MEM TIME COMMAND 1785 db2instl 25 0 1252m 154m 122m S 1 4 1 0 21 29 db2sysc 2928 db2fencl 15 0 528m 58m 34m S 0 1 6 0 00 50 db2fmp 5092 db2instl 16 0 119m 12m 8308 S 0 0 3 0 00 03 db2samp1 7 6 2 vmstat vmstat command can be used to report virtual memory statistics as well as information about processes paging block IO and CPU activities It is contained in the procps package for the Linux platform The first report produced gives averages since the last reboot Additional reports give information on a sampling period of length delay The process and memory reports are instantaneous in either case The following are field descriptions for the output report generated by vmstat To acquire more information regarding this command refer to man help pages for vmstat or other Linux documentation gt Procs r The number of processes waiting for run time b The number of processes in
551. y need to increase the log space in the catalog database partition server For instance if you want to change the size of LOGFILSIZ from 1000 to 2000 connect to the database and enter the following command db2 update db cfg using logfilsiz 2000 Up and Running with DB2 on Linux Draft Document for Review April 17 2008 2 10 pm 6899ch04 fm gt Ensure that you have enough free pages in the corresponding index table space to account for one additional page per index on populated tables before Populating tables in new databases created in DB2 9 5 real time statistics are enabled by default in these newly created databases Enabling deferred cleanup roll out by setting DB2_MDC_ROLLOUT to DEFER or when DB2WORKLOAD is set to SAP Reorganizing or recreating indexes on populated tables 4 1 2 Planning considerations DB2 9 5 brings new features to enhance performance and manageability Some of the features and functionality are also discontinued The default values for several configurations parameters and registry variables have changed and should be checked Creating database to enable new features Migration time is a good opportunity to consider creating a new database to leverage the full advantages of DB2 9 5 features and functions or change the database settings which can only be done in a new database The considerations include gt Automatic storage This feature can only be enabled at the database creation

Up and Running DB2 on Linux

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents